Chapter 8: How Does a Company Gather Information about Its Inventory?

Video Clip

(click to see video)

In this video, Professor Joe Hoyle introduces the essential points covered in Chapter 8 “How Does a Company Gather Information about Its Inventory?”.

8.1 Determining and Reporting the Cost of Inventory

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Understand that inventory is recorded initially at historical cost.
  2. Provide the guiding rule for identifying expenditures that are capitalized in the acquisition of inventory.
  3. Explain the rationale for offering a discount for quick payments of cash as well as the accounting used to report such reductions.

The Reported Inventory Balance

Question: The asset section of the February 26, 2011, balance sheet produced by Best Buy Co. Inc. reports net accounts receivable of $2.348 billion. Based on coverage provided in the previous chapter, savvy decision makers should know that this figure reflects net realizable value—the estimation by officials of the cash amount that will be collected from the receivables owed to the company by its customers. Knowledge of financial accounting allows any individual to understand the information conveyed in a set of financial statements.

As is common, the next account that appears on Best Buy’s balance sheet is “merchandise inventories.” This asset includes all items held as of that date that were acquired for sales purposes—televisions, cameras, computers, and the like. The monetary figure disclosed by the company for this asset is $5.897 billion. Does this balance also indicate net realizable value—the cash expected to be generated from the company’s merchandise—or is different information reflected? On a balance sheet, what does the amount reported for inventory represent?

 

Answer: The challenge of analyzing the various assets reported by an organization would be reduced substantially if all account balances disclosed the same basic information, such as net realizable value. However, over the decades, virtually every asset has come to have its own individualized method of reporting, one created to address the special peculiarities of that account. Thus, the term “presented fairly” is often reflected in a totally different way for each asset. Reporting accounts receivables, for example, at net realizable value has no impact on the approach that is generally accepted for inventoryA current asset bought or manufactured for the purpose of selling in order to generate revenue..

Accounting for inventory is more complicated because reporting is not as standardized as with accounts receivable. For example, under certain circumstances, the balance sheet amount shown for inventory actually does reflect net realizable value. However, several other meanings for that balance are more likely. The range of accounting alternatives emphasizes the need for a careful reading of financial statement notes rather than fixating on a few reported numbers alone. Without study of the available disclosures, a decision maker simply cannot know what Best Buy means by the $5.897 billion figure reported for its inventory.

For all cases, though, the reporting of inventory begins with its cost. In contrast, cost is never an issue even considered in the reporting of accounts receivable.

Determining the Cost of Inventory

Question: Every item bought for sales purposes has a definite cost. The accounting process for inventory begins with a calculation of that cost. How does an accountant determine the cost of acquired inventory?

 

Answer: The financial reporting for inventory starts by identifying the cost paid to obtain the item. In acquiring inventory, officials make the considered decision to allocate a certain amount of their scarce resources. The amount of that sacrifice is interesting information. What did the company expend to obtain this merchandise? That is a reasonable question to ask since this information can be valuable to decision makers.

To illustrate, assume that a sporting goods company (Rider Inc.) acquires a new bicycle (Model XY-7) to sell. Rider’s accounting system should be designed to determine the cost of this piece of inventory, the price that the company willingly paid to obtain the asset. Assume that $250 was charged by the manufacturer (Builder Company) for the bicycle, and the purchase was made by Rider on credit. Rider spends $9 in cash to transport the item from the factory to one of its retail stores and another $6 to have the pieces assembled so that the bicycle can be displayed in the salesroom for customers to examine.

In accounting for the acquisition of inventory, cost is said to include all normal and necessary amounts incurred to get the item into condition and position to be sold. All such expenditures provide future value. Hence, as shown in Figure 8.1 “Monitoring the Cost of an Inventory Item—Subsidiary Ledger”, by the time this bicycle has reached Rider’s retail location and been readied for sale, the cost to the sporting goods company is $265.

Figure 8.1 Monitoring the Cost of an Inventory Item—Subsidiary Ledger

Charges for delivering this merchandise and assembling the parts were included in the asset account (the traditional term for adding a cost to an asset account, capitalizationThe process of recording a cost as an asset rather than an expense; for inventory, it includes all normal and necessary costs associated with getting the asset into position and condition to be sold., was introduced previously). Both of these expenditures were properly viewed as normal and necessary to get the bicycle into condition and position to be sold. Interestingly, any amount later expended by the company to transport inventory from the store to a buying customer is recorded as an expense because that cost is incurred after the sale takes place. At that point, no further future value exists since the merchandise has already been sold.

Occasionally, costs arise where the “normal and necessary” standard may be difficult to apply. To illustrate, assume that the president of a store that sells antiques buys a 120-year-old table for resell purposes. When the table arrives at the store, another $300 must be spent to fix a scratch cut across its surface. Should this added cost be capitalized (added to the reported balance for inventory) or expensed? The answer to this question is not readily apparent and depends on ascertaining the relevant facts. Here are two possibilities.

Scenario one: The table was acquired by the president with the knowledge that the scratch already existed and needed to be fixed prior to offering the merchandise for sale. In that case, repair is a normal and necessary activity to bring the table into the condition necessary to be sold. The $300 is capitalized, recorded as an addition to the reported cost of the inventory.

Scenario two: The table was bought without the scratch but was damaged when first moved into the store through an act of employee carelessness. The table must be repaired, but the scratch was neither normal nor necessary. The cost could have been avoided. This $300 is not capitalized but rather reported as a repair expense by the store.

As discussed in an earlier chapter, if the accountant cannot make a reasonable determination as to whether a particular cost qualifies as normal and necessary, the practice of conservatism requires the $300 to be reported as an expense. When in doubt, the alternative that makes reported figures look best is avoided so that decision makers are not encouraged to be overly optimistic about the company’s financial health and future prospects.

Test Yourself

Question:

Near the end of Year One, the Morganton Hardware Company buys five lawn mowers for sale by paying $300 each. The delivery cost to transport these items to the store was another $40 in total. In January of the following year, $60 more was spent to assemble all the parts and then clean the finished products so they could be placed in the company’s showroom. On February 3, Year Two, one of these lawn mowers was sold for $500 cash. The company paid a final $25 to have this item delivered to the buyer. If no other transactions take place, what net income does the company recognize for Year Two?

  1. $150
  2. $155
  3. $160
  4. $175

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: $155.

Explanation:

The cost of the mowers ($1,500 or $300 × 5) along with transportation cost ($40) and assembling and cleaning costs ($60) are normal and necessary to get the items into position and condition to be sold. Total capitalized cost is $1,600 or $320 per unit. Gross profit on the first sale is $180 ($500 less $320). The $25 delivery charge is expensed; it is not capitalized because it occurred after the sale and had no future value. Net income is $155 ($180 gross profit minus $25 delivery expense).

Offering Discounts for Quick Payment

Question: When inventory is sold, some sellers are willing to accept a reduced amount to encourage fast payment—an offer that is called a cash discount (or sales discount or purchases discount depending on whether the seller or the buyer is making the entry). Cash becomes available sooner so that the seller can quickly put it back into circulation to make more profits. In addition, the possibility that a receivable will become uncollectible is reduced if the balance due is not allowed to get too old. Tempting buyers to make quick payments to reduce their cost is viewed as a smart business practice by many sellers.

To illustrate, assume the invoice received by the sporting goods company (Rider) for the above bicycle indicates the proper $250 balance but also includes the notation: 2/10, n/45. What message is being conveyed by the seller? How do cash discounts impact the reporting of inventory?

 

Answer: Sellers—such as Builder Company in this example—can offer a wide variety of discount terms to encourage speedy payment. One such as 2/10, n/45 is generally read “two ten, net 45.” It informs the buyer that a 2 percent discount is available if the invoice is paid by the tenth day. The net amount that remains unpaid (after any merchandise returns or partial cash payments) is due on the forty-fifth day. Rider has the option to pay $245 for the bicycle within ten days of receiving the invoice by taking advantage of the $5 discount ($250 × 0.02). Or the sporting goods company can wait until the forty-fifth day but then is responsible for the entire $250. In practice, a variety of other discount terms are frequently encountered such as 1/10, n/30 or 2/10, n/30.

Many companies automatically take all cash discounts as a matter of policy because of the high rate of interest earned. If Rider does not submit the money after ten days, it must pay an extra $5 in order to hold onto $245 for an additional thirty-five days. This delay equates to a 2.04 percent interest rate over just that short period of time ($5/$245 = 2.04 percent [rounded]). There are over ten thirty-five-day periods in a year. Paying the extra $5 is the equivalent of an annual interest rate in excess of 21 percent.

365 days per year/35 days holding the money = 10.43 time periods per year 2.04% (for 35 days) × 10.43 time periods = 21.28% interest rate for a year

That substantial rate of interest expense is avoided by making early payment, a decision chosen by most companies unless they are experiencing serious cash flow difficulties.

Assuming that Rider avails itself of the discount offer, the capitalized cost of the inventory is reduced to $260.

Figure 8.2 Cost of Inventory Reduced by Cash Discount—Subsidiary Ledger

Test Yourself

Question:

On March 1, a hardware store buys inventory for resale purposes at a cost of $300. The invoice is mailed on March 2, and the manufacturer offers cash terms of 3/10, n/30. Store officials choose to settle 60 percent of the invoice on March 10 and the remainder on March 30. What was the total amount paid for the inventory?

  1. $291.00
  2. $294.60
  3. $296.40
  4. $300.00

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: $294.60.

Explanation:

Of the total amount charged, $180.00 (60 percent of $300.00) is settled in a timely fashion which allows the company to take a 3 percent discount or $5.40 ($180.00 × 3 percent). The company’s first payment was $174.60 ($180.00 minus $5.40). The remaining $120.00 is paid at the end of thirty days, after the discount period has passed. No additional discount is available. The cost of the inventory to the company is $294.60 ($174.60 plus $120.00).

Key Takeaway

Any discussion of the reporting of inventory begins with the calculation of cost, the amount spent to obtain the merchandise. For inventory, cost encompasses all payments that are considered normal and necessary to get the items into condition and possession to be sold. All other expenditures are expensed as incurred. Cash discounts (such as 2/10, n/30) are often offered to buyers to encourage quick payment. The seller wants to get its money as quickly as possible to plow back into operations. For the buyer, taking advantage of such discounts is usually a wise business decision because they effectively provide interest at a relatively high rate.

8.2 Perpetual and Periodic Inventory Systems

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Identify the attributes as well as the advantages and disadvantages of a perpetual inventory system.
  2. Identify the attributes as well as the advantages and disadvantages of a periodic inventory system.
  3. Provide journal entries for a variety of transactions involved in the purchase of inventory using both a perpetual and a periodic inventory system.

Maintaining Inventory Costs in a Perpetual System

Question: In an earlier chapter, differences between a perpetual inventory system and a periodic inventory system were discussed briefly. Because of the availability of modern technology, most companies—but not all—maintain some type of perpetual inventory records. A perpetual system—which frequently relies on bar coding and computer scanning—provides an ongoing record of all items present, both in total and individually. How is the recording of an inventory purchase carried out in a perpetual system?

 

Answer: When a perpetual inventory systemAccounting system that maintains an ongoing record of all inventory items both in total and individually; records increases and decreases in inventory accounts as they occur as well as the cost of goods sold to date. is in use, all additions and reductions are monitored in the inventory T-account. Thus, theoretically, the balance found in that general ledger account at any point in time is identical to the merchandise physically on hand. In actual practice, recording mistakes as well as losses such as theft and breakage create some (hopefully small) discrepancies. Consequently, even with a perpetual system, inventory records must be reconciled occasionally with the items actually present to reestablish accuracy.

In a perpetual inventory system, the maintenance of a separate subsidiary ledger showing data about the individual items on hand is essential. On February 26, 2011, Best Buy reported inventory totaling $5.897 billion. However, internally the company also needs specific information as to the quantity, type, and location of all televisions, cameras, computers, and the like that make up this sum. That is the significance of a perpetual system; it provides the ability to keep track of the various types of merchandise. The total cost is available in the inventory T-account but detailed data about the composition (the quantity and frequently the cost) of merchandise physically on hand is found in a subsidiary ledger where an individual file can be available for each item as is shown in Figure 8.2 “Cost of Inventory Reduced by Cash Discount—Subsidiary Ledger”.

Assume that Rider Inc. (the sporting goods company) uses a perpetual inventory system. In Figure 8.3 “Rider Inc.—Journal Entries—Perpetual Inventory System”, journal entries are shown for the purchase of a bicycle to sell (Model XY-7). The bicycle is recorded at the $250 invoice amount and then reduced by $5 at the time the discount is taken. This approach is known as the “gross method of reporting discounts.” As an alternative, companies can choose to anticipate taking the discount and simply make the initial entry for the $245 expected payment. This option is referred to as the “net method of reporting discounts.” Under that approach, if the discount is not actually taken, the additional $5 cost is recorded as a loss or an expense rather than as a capitalized cost of the inventory because it is not normal or necessary to pay the extra amount.

Figure 8.3 Rider Inc.—Journal Entries—Perpetual Inventory System

After posting these entries, the inventory T-account in the general ledger reports a net cost of $260 ($250 − $5 + $9 + $6) and the separate subsidiary ledger shown previously indicates that one Model XY-7 bicycle is on hand with a cost of $260.

Test Yourself

Question:

A grocery store carries cans of tuna fish, salmon, and sardines. The company uses a perpetual inventory system with the general ledger inventory account backed up by a subsidiary ledger. Which of the following statements is most likely to not be true?

  1. The number of cans of salmon on hand can be found in the subsidiary ledger.
  2. The cost of all cans of fish can be found in the general ledger.
  3. The number of cans of tuna fish on hand can be found in the general ledger.
  4. The cost of the cans of sardines on hand can be found in the subsidiary ledger.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: The number of cans of tuna fish on hand can be found in the general ledger.

Explanation:

In a perpetual system, the total cost of all inventory on hand is recorded in the general ledger inventory T-account. The quantity (and frequently the cost) of the individual items is monitored in a subsidiary ledger. Here, the subsidiary ledger maintains the quantity and likely the cost for each type of fish: tuna fish, salmon, and sardines. No information is gained by recording the number of cans of fish in the general ledger since that figure will be available in the subsidiary ledger.

Recording Inventory Purchases in a Periodic System

Question: In a periodic system, no attempt is made to keep an ongoing record of a company’s inventory. Instead, the quantity and cost of merchandise is only determined periodically as a preliminary step in preparing financial statements. How is the actual recording of an inventory purchase carried out in a periodic system?

 

Answer: If a company uses a periodic inventory systemAccounting system that does not maintain an ongoing record of all inventory items; instead, ending inventory is determined by a physical count so that a formula (beginning inventory plus purchases less ending inventory) can be used to calculate cost of goods sold., neither the cost nor the quantity of the items on hand is monitored. Inventory amounts are unknown both in total and individually. These figures are not viewed by company officials as worth the cost and effort necessary to gather them. However, purchases are still made, and a record must be maintained of the costs incurred. This information is eventually used for financial reporting but also—more immediately—for control purposes. Regardless of the recording system, companies want to avoid spending unnecessary amounts on inventory as well as tangential expenditures such as transportation and assembly. If the accounting system indicates that a particular cost is growing too rapidly, alternatives can be investigated and implemented before the problem becomes serious. Periodic systems are designed to provide such information through the use of separate general ledger T-accounts for each cost incurred.

Assume that Rider uses a periodic inventory system. Its journal entries for the acquisition of the Model XY-7 bicycle are as shown in Figure 8.4 “Rider Inc.—Journal Entries—Periodic Inventory System”. No separate subsidiary ledger is maintained. The overall cost of this inventory item is not readily available in the accounting records and the quantity (except by visual inspection) is unknown. At any point in time, company officials do have access to the amounts spent for each of the individual costs (such as transportation and assembly) for monitoring purposes.

Because these costs result from the acquisition of an asset that eventually becomes an expense when sold, they follow the same debit and credit rules as those accounts.

Figure 8.4 Rider Inc.—Journal Entries—Periodic Inventory System

In a periodic system, when a sale occurs, the revenue entry is made as always. However, no journal entry is made for cost of goods sold. Because of the lack of information, the dollar amount of the cost is not known at this time so inventory is not reduced and cost of goods sold is not recognized. Instead, when a periodic system is in use, cost of goods sold is only determined and recorded when financial statements are prepared through the use of the following formula:

Cost of goods sold = Beginning inventory + Purchase costs for period − Ending inventory

Note that the choice between using a perpetual and periodic system impacts the following:

  • Information available to company officials on a daily basis
  • Journal entries to be made
  • Cost necessary to operate the accounting system (the technology required by a perpetual system is more expensive)

Regardless of the system in use, Rider holds one piece of inventory with a cost of $260. The decision as to whether to utilize a perpetual or periodic system is based on the added cost of the perpetual system and the difference in the available information generated for use by company officials. The company’s inventory is not physically affected by the method selected.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company starts operations in Year One and buys ten units of inventory for $70 each. The transportation cost for the entire group of items was $110. A few days later, the president of the company checks out the balances in the general ledger. Which of the following is true?

  1. If a periodic inventory system is in use, no balances will be available in connection with this inventory.
  2. If a periodic inventory system is in use, an inventory account will be found with a balance of $810.
  3. If a perpetual inventory system is in use, a transportation-in account will be found with a balance of $110.
  4. If a perpetual inventory system is in use, an inventory account will be found with a balance of $810.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: If a perpetual inventory system is in use, an inventory account will be found with a balance of $810.

Explanation:

If a periodic system is used, a purchases account will report $700 (ten units at $70 each). Transportation-in will be $110. Until the end of the year, these balances are not adjusted to correspond with the inventory on hand or sold. In a perpetual system, the initial journal entries record $810 in the inventory account (invoice price of $700 plus transportation of $110) or $81 for each of the ten units. All costs are recorded within that one T-account and are not divided up by type.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company is started in Year One, and the president and the accountant confer and opt to install a perpetual system to record and monitor inventory. Which of the following is not likely to have been a reason for this decision?

  1. The president knows that the perpetual system will cost more than the periodic system but did not consider it to be prohibitively expensive.
  2. The president fears that transportation charges may escalate quickly and wants to monitor that cost.
  3. The president wants to be aware when any inventory item is reduced to only five units so that the quantity can be replenished.
  4. The president wants to know the total cost of inventory because she plans to set sales price based on that figure.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: The president fears that transportation charges may escalate quickly and wants to monitor that cost.

Explanation:

Perpetual systems maintain updated records as to the cost and quantity of the inventory on hand so that decisions such as pricing and purchasing can be made. However, this benefit can be outweighed if the perpetual system is viewed as too costly. Although the information available in a periodic system is more limited, the various costs (such as transportation) are tracked so that company officials can take action if problems arise.

Actual Use of Periodic Inventory Systems

Question: Given the availability of sophisticated computers at moderate prices, do any companies still use periodic inventory systems? With bar coding and the advanced state of technology, are periodic inventory procedures so antiquated that they are no longer found in actual practice?

 

Answer: Obviously, in this computer age, perpetual inventory systems have come to dominate because they provide valuable and immediate information to company officials. However, some businesses are unlikely to ever change from the simplicity of a periodic system.

A beauty salon or barber shop, for example, where services are rendered but a small amount of inventory is kept on hand for occasional sales, would certainly not need to absorb the cost of a perpetual system. Visual inspection can alert employees as to the quantity of inventory on hand.

Restaurants, sandwich shops, ice cream stores, and the like might well choose to use a periodic system because customer purchases take place at a small establishment where quantities are easy to observe and manage. In such operations, the information provided by a perpetual system does not necessarily provide additional benefit.

“Dollar stores,” which have become particularly prevalent in recent years, sell huge quantities of low-priced merchandise. Goods tend to be added to a store’s inventory as they become available rather than based on a formal managed inventory strategy. Again, officials must decide whether keeping up with the amount of inventory on hand will improve their decision making. If not, the cost of a perpetual system is unnecessary.

Perhaps, most importantly, some companies use a hybrid system where the units on hand and sold are monitored carefully with a perpetual system. However, to reduce accounting costs, the dollar amounts for inventory and cost of goods sold are determined using a periodic system when financial statements are to be prepared. In that way, the company gains valuable information (the number of units on hand) but still utilizes a cheaper system.

Key Takeaway

Perpetual inventory systems are designed to maintain updated figures (quantity and cost) for inventory as a whole as well as for individual items. The general ledger account reports the total cost of all inventory. At the same time, separate subsidiary ledger accounts provide the balance for each type of inventory so that company officials can know the size, cost, and composition of the merchandise on hand. A periodic system is cheaper to operate because no attempt is made to monitor inventory balances (in total or individually) until financial statements are to be prepared. A periodic system does allow a company to control its costs by keeping track of the individual inventory expenditures as they occur. Small organizations often use a periodic inventory system because the added cost of a perpetual system cannot be justified.

8.3 The Calculation of Cost of Goods Sold

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Explain the meaning of the FOB point in connection with an inventory purchase and its impact on the recording of this transaction.
  2. Identify the time at which cost of goods sold is computed in a perpetual inventory system as well as the recording made at the time of sale.
  3. Identify the time at which cost of goods sold is computed in a periodic inventory system as well as the recording made at the time of sale.
  4. Compute cost of goods sold in a periodic inventory system and prepare the adjustment to enter the appropriate balances into the accounting system.
  5. Understand the necessity of taking a physical inventory count.

Recording Purchases Based on the FOB Point

Question: Rider Inc. (the sporting goods company) buys a bicycle for sales purposes. The company can record the transaction using either a perpetual system (debit Inventory) or periodic system (debit Purchases of Inventory). When should an inventory purchase be recorded? Assume, for example, that Builder Company (the manufacturer of this bicycle) is located in Wisconsin, whereas the retail store operated by Rider is in Kentucky. Delivery takes several days at a minimum. The precise moment for recording the transaction is probably not critical except near the end of the year when the timing of journal entries will impact balances that are included on the financial statements.

To illustrate, assume this bicycle is ordered by Rider Inc. on December 27 of Year One. It is shipped by Builder Company from Wisconsin on December 29 of Year One and arrives at the retail store on January 4 of Year Two. When Rider produces financial statements for Year One, should the inventory cost and related payable be included even though the bicycle was not physically received until Year Two?

 

Answer: Documents prepared in connection with inventory shipments are normally marked with an “FOB” point. FOB stands for “Free On Board” (a traditional maritime term that has gained a wider use over the years) and indicates when legal title to property is transferred from seller to buyer. At that moment, ownership of the bicycle is conveyed. The FOB point signifies the appropriate date for recording.

If Builder Company specifies that the sale of this bicycle is made FOB shipping pointTerms of sale stipulating that legal title to shipped goods passes to the buyer at the time of shipment so that the buyer is responsible for transportation costs and any damages or losses in transit. and Rider Inc. agrees to this condition, conveyance occurs on December 29, Year One, when the bicycle leaves the seller. Consequently, both the asset and the liability appear on the December 31, Year One, balance sheet prepared by the buyer. For the same reason, Builder records sales revenue in Year One.

However, if the contract states that the transaction is made FOB destinationTerms of sale stipulating that legal title to shipped goods passes to the buyer when they arrive at the final destination so that the seller is responsible for transportation costs and any damages or losses in transit., the seller maintains ownership until the bicycle arrives at Rider’s store on January 4, Year Two. Neither party records the transaction until that date. The date of recognition is based on the FOB point.

The FOB point can be important for two additional reasons.

  • The party that holds legal title to merchandise during its delivery from seller to buyer normally incurs all transportation costs. If no other arrangements are negotiated, “FOB shipping point” means that Rider Inc. as the buyer is responsible for the delivery. “FOB destination” assigns this cost to Builder, as the seller.
  • Any losses or damages that occur in route affect the party holding legal title (again, unless other arrangements are agreed upon by the parties). If shipment from Wisconsin to Kentucky was noted as FOB shipping point and the bicycle breaks as the result of an accident in Illinois, it is the buyer’s inventory that was harmed. However, it is the seller’s problem if the shipment is marked as FOB destination. The legal owner bears the cost of any damages that occur during the physical conveyance of property.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company buys 144 inventory items at a total cost of $4,000. The shipment was made in Year One but did not arrive at the buyer’s location until early in Year Two. Both the buyer and the seller believed the goods had been sold FOB destination so they each recorded the sale in that manner. However, a review of the documents indicates that the sale was actually made FOB shipping point. Which of the following is correct about the Year One financial statements?

  1. The seller’s sales account for Year One is overstated.
  2. The seller’s cost of goods sold account for Year One is overstated.
  3. The buyer’s inventory account at the end of Year One is overstated.
  4. The buyer’s accounts payable account at the end of Year One is understated.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: The buyer’s accounts payable account at the end of Year One is understated.

Explanation:

Both companies believe the sale was FOB destination. The goods arrived at the buyer’s business in Year Two. Thus, nothing was reported in Year One for accounts receivable, sales, and cost of goods sold (by the seller) or for inventory and accounts payable (by the buyer). It was actually FOB selling point. All five accounts are understated. Use of a periodic or perpetual system is not important because the question only asks about financial statements and not the method of recording.

Recording Cost Of Goods Sold: Perpetual and Periodic

Question: When a sale of inventory is made, the seller recognizes an expense that has previously been identified as “cost of goods sold” or “cost of sales.” For example, Best Buy reported “cost of goods sold,” for the year ended February 26, 2011, as $37.611 billion. When should cost of goods sold be determined?

To illustrate, assume that Rider Inc. begins the current year holding three Model XY-7 bicycles costing $260 each—$780 in total. During the period, another five units of this same model are acquired, again for $260 apiece or $1,300 in total. At this introductory stage, utilizing a single cost of $260 for all items eliminates a significant theoretical problem, one that will be discussed in detail in the following chapter.

Eventually, a customer buys seven of these bicycles for her family and friends paying cash of $440 each or $3,080 in total. No further sales are made of this model during the current period so that only a single bicycle remains (3 + 5 − 7). One is still in stock while seven have been sold. What is the proper method of recording the company’s cost of goods sold?

 

Answer: The answer here depends on whether a perpetual or a periodic system is used by the company.

Perpetual inventory system. The acquisition and subsequent sale of inventory when a perpetual system is in use was demonstrated briefly in an earlier chapter. The accounting records maintain current balances so that officials are cognizant of (a) the amount of merchandise on hand and (b) the cost of goods sold for the year to date. These figures are readily available in general ledger T-accounts. In addition, separate subsidiary ledger balances are usually established for the individual items in stock, showing the quantity on hand and the cost. When each sale is made, the applicable cost is reclassified from the inventory account on the balance sheet to cost of goods sold on the income statement. Simultaneously, the corresponding balance in the subsidiary ledger is lowered.

In this example, bicycles were acquired by Rider Inc. Seven of them, costing $260 each (a total of $1,820), are then sold to a customer for $440 apiece or $3,080. When a perpetual system is in use, two journal entries are prepared at the time of each sale: one for the sale and a second to shift the cost of the inventory from asset to expense.

Figure 8.5 Journal Entries for Sale of Seven Model XY-7 Bicycles—Perpetual Inventory System

Removing $1,820 from inventory leaves a balance of $260 ($780 + $1,300 – $1,820) representing the cost of the one remaining unit. The $1,260 difference between revenue and cost of goods sold ($3,080 minus $1,820) is the markup (also known as gross profitDifference between sales and cost of goods sold; also called gross margin or markup. or “gross margin”) earned on the sale.

Periodic inventory system. In contrast, a periodic system monitors the various inventory expenditures but makes no attempt to maintain a record of the merchandise on hand or the cost of goods sold during the year. Although cheap to create and operate, the information available to company officials is extremely limited.

At the time the sale of these seven bicycles takes place, the first journal entry shown in Figure 8.5 “Journal Entries for Sale of Seven Model XY-7 Bicycles—Perpetual Inventory System” is still made to recognize the revenue. Cash is debited for $3,080 and Sales Revenue-Merchandise is credited for $3,080. However, if a periodic system is in use, the second entry is omitted. Cost of goods sold is neither calculated nor recorded when a sale occurs. The available information is not sufficient to determine the amount. The inventory balance remains unadjusted throughout the year. Eventually, whenever financial statements are prepared, the figure to be reported for the asset (inventory) on that date must be determined along with the expense (cost of goods sold) for the entire period.

Because totals are not updated, the only accounts found in the general ledger relating to inventory show balances of $780 (beginning balance) and $1,300 (purchases of inventory).

General Ledger Balances—Periodic Inventory System  
Inventory (beginning balance remains unadjusted during the period): 3 units at $260 each or $780
Purchases of Inventory (total inventory costs incurred during the period; for this example, the balance includes the invoice price, sales discount, transportation-in, and assembly, although they would have been kept separate in the actual recording): 5 units at $260 each or $1,300

Based on this information, total inventory available to be sold by Rider Inc. during this period is eight units costing $2,080 ($780 plus $1,300).

When using a periodic system, cost of goods sold is computed as a prerequisite step in preparing financial statements. Inventory on hand is counted (a process known as a physical inventoryA count of inventory on hand; necessary for reporting purposes when using a periodic system but also required for a perpetual system to ensure the accuracy of recorded information.), and all units that are no longer present are assumed to have been sold. The resulting figure is then reported as the company’s cost of goods sold for the period. Because complete inventory records are not available, any units that are lost, stolen, or broken cannot be separately derived. All missing inventory is grouped into one expense—cost of goods sold.

In this example, a physical inventory count will be taken by the employees of Rider Inc. on or near the last day of the year so that financial statements can be produced. Because eight bicycles (Model XY-7) were available during the year but seven have now been sold, one unit—costing $260—remains (if no accident or theft has occurred). This amount is the inventory figure that appears in the asset section of the balance sheet.

Cost of goods sold is then computed by the following formula.

Figure 8.6 Computation of Cost of Goods Sold in a Periodic SystemThe Purchases figure here could have also been shown by displaying the various cost components such as the invoice price, purchases discount, transportation-in, and assembly. That breakdown is important for internal decision making and control but probably of less interest to external parties.

In a periodic system, three costs are used to arrive at the amount reported as cost of goods sold. It is important to understand how each of these figures is derived.

  • Beginning inventory was derived by a count taken at the end of the previous year. After determining the number of units on hand (three bicycles), the accountant inserts the cost of these items based on the amount paid during the period ($260 each). The resulting monetary balance was recorded in the inventory T-account at the end of that year and has remained unchanged until the end of the current year. A periodic system only updates general ledger accounts when financial statements are prepared.
  • The purchases figure has been maintained throughout the year in the general ledger to provide a record of the amounts expended ($1,300) for all normal and necessary costs (invoice price, discounts, transportation-in, assembly costs, and the like) needed to get the inventory into position and condition to be sold.
  • Ending inventory is found by making a new physical count at the end of the current period. The number of units that are still held (one, in this case) is multiplied by the unit cost ($260) to arrive at the proper inventory total reported on the balance sheet.

Test Yourself

Question:

Lincoln Corporation buys and sells widgets and uses a periodic system for accounting purposes. According to counts that were taken, the company started the year with 4,000 units and ended the year with 5,000. However, during the period, an additional 17,000 widgets were acquired. All inventory items are bought by the company for $7 each, a figure that includes all normal and necessary costs. What was cost of goods sold for this period?

  1. $112,000
  2. $118,000
  3. $119,000
  4. $125,000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: $112,000.

Explanation:

Beginning inventory cost $28,000 (4,000 units at $7 each) while purchases for the period totaled $119,000 (17,000 × $7). Thus, the total cost of the goods available for sale during the year was $147,000 ($28,000 plus $119,000). Ending inventory is $35,000 (5,000 units at $7 each). Thus, inventory with a cost of $112,000 is missing at year’s end ($28,000 plus $119,000 less $35,000). In a periodic system, all missing inventory is assumed to make up the cost of the goods sold.

Periodic Inventory—Year-End Recording Process

Question: In a perpetual inventory system, cost of goods sold is determined at the time of each sale. Figures retained in a subsidiary ledger provide the cost of the specific item being surrendered so that an immediate reclassification from asset to expense is made.

With a periodic system, cost of goods sold is not calculated until financial statements are prepared. The beginning inventory balance (the ending amount from the previous year) is combined with the total acquisition costs for the current period. Merchandise still on hand is counted, and its cost is determined. All missing inventory is assumed to reflect the cost of goods sold. When a periodic inventory system is used, how are ending inventory and cost of goods sold for the year physically entered into the accounting records? These figures have not been recorded on an ongoing basis; the general ledger must now be updated to agree with the reported balances.

 

Answer: In the bicycle example, opening inventory for the period was three items costing $780. Another five were bought during the year for $1,300. The total cost of these eight units is $2,080. Because the financial impact of lost or broken units cannot be ascertained in a periodic system, the entire $2,080 is assigned to either ending inventory (one unit at a cost of $260) or cost of goods sold ($780 + $1,300 – $260 or $1,820). No other account exists in which to record inventory costs in a periodic system. The goods are assumed to be on hand or to have been sold.

For a periodic inventory system, a year-end adjusting entry is prepared so that these newly computed amounts are reflected as the final account balances. Transportation and assembly costs are included within the purchases figure in this entry for convenience.

Figure 8.7 Adjusting Entry—Recording Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold as Determined in Periodic Inventory SystemAs mentioned previously, if separate T-account balances are established for cost components such as transportation-in, assembly costs, and the like, they must be included in this entry rather than just a single Purchases figure.

In this entry, the cost of the beginning inventory and the purchases for the period are basically switched to cost of goods sold and ending inventory.

Note that the reported costs on the financial statements ($260 for ending inventory and $1,820 for cost of goods sold) are identical under both perpetual and periodic systems. As will be demonstrated in another chapter, this agreement does not always exist when inventory items are acquired during the year at differing costs.

Key Takeaway

The legal conveyance of inventory from seller to buyer establishes the timing for recording the transaction and is based on the FOB point specified. This designation also identifies the party responsible for transportation costs and any items damaged while in transit. In contrast, the method of recording cost of goods sold depends on the inventory system in use. For a perpetual system, the reclassification of an item from inventory to expense occurs at the time of each sale. A periodic system makes no attempt to monitor inventory totals. Thus, cost of goods sold is unknown until the preparation of financial statements. The expense is calculated by adding beginning inventory to the purchase costs for the period and then subtracting ending inventory. The ending inventory figure comes from a year-end count of the merchandise on hand. A year-end adjusting entry updates the various general ledger accounts.

8.4 Reporting Inventory at Lower of Cost or Market

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Explain the need for reporting inventory at lower of cost or market.
  2. Differentiate between a reporting problem caused by a drop in the purchase value of inventory and one resulting from the sales value of the merchandise.
  3. Understand the difference in applying the lower-of-cost-or-market rule under U.S. GAAP and IFRS.

Inventory—The Reporting of Cost or Market Value

Question: In the example of Rider Inc., Model XY-7 bicycles have been bought and sold, and one unit remains in stock at year’s end. The cost of this model has held steady at $260. However, its market value is likely to differ from that figure.

Assume that, because of the sales made during the period, company officials believe that a buyer will soon be found to pay $440 for this last bicycle. Is inventory always reported on a balance sheet at historical cost or is market (or fair) value ever taken into consideration? Should this bicycle be shown as an asset at $260, $440, or some other pertinent figure?

 

Answer: Under normal conditions, market value is rarely relevant in the reporting of inventory. For Rider Inc. this bicycle will likely appear as an asset at its cost of $260 until sold. Value is such a subjective figure that it is usually ignored in reporting inventory. The company has no reliable proof that the bicycle will bring in $440 until a sale actually occurs. The conservative nature of accounting resists the temptation to inflate reported inventory figures based purely on the anticipation of a profitable transaction at some future point in time.

An exception to this rule becomes relevant if the value of inventory falls below cost. Once again, the conservatism inherent in financial accounting is easily seen. If market value remains greater than cost, no change is made in the reported balance until a sale occurs. In contrast, if the value drops so that inventory is worth less than cost, a loss is recognized immediately. Accountants often say that losses are anticipated but gains are not.

As a note to the May 31, 2011, financial statements for Nike Inc. states, “inventories are stated at lower of cost or market.” Whenever inventory appears to have lost value for any reason, the accountant compares the cost of the item to its market value and the lower figure then appears on the balance sheet.

Arriving at a Figure for Market Value

Question: As mentioned, market value is a subjective figure. When applying the lower-of-cost-or-market approach to inventory, how does the owner of the merchandise ascertain market value?

 

Answer: The practical problem in applying the lower-of-cost-or-market approach arises from the difficulty in ascertaining an appropriate market value. There are several plausible ways to view the worth of any asset. For inventory, there is both a “purchase value” (replacement cost—the amount needed to acquire the same item again at the present time) and a “sales value” (net realizable value—the amount of cash expected from an eventual sale). When preparing financial statements, if either of these amounts is impaired, recognition of a loss is likely. Thus, the accountant must watch both values and be alert for potential problems.

Purchase Value. In some cases, often because of bad timing, a company finds that it has paid an excessive amount for inventory. Usually as the result of an increase in supply or a decrease in demand, replacement cost might drop after an item is acquired.

To illustrate, assume that Builder Company—the manufacturer of bicycle Model XY-7—has trouble selling the expected quantity of this particular style to retail stores because the design is not viewed as attractive. Near the end of the current year, Builder reduces the wholesale price offered for this model by $50 in hopes of stimulating sales. Rider Inc. bought a number of these bicycles earlier at a total cost of $260 each but now, before the last unit is sold, could obtain the same model for only $210. The bicycle held in Rider’s inventory is literally worth less than what the company paid for it. The purchase value, as demonstrated by replacement cost, has fallen to a figure lower than its historical cost.

When replacement cost for inventory drops below the amount paid, the lower (more conservative) figure is reported on the balance sheet, and the related loss is recognized on the income statement. In applying lower of cost or marketConservative approach to the reporting of inventory used when either the purchase value or the sales value has decreased; a reduction in the asset is recorded along with a loss to reflect the decline in market value if it falls below cost., the remaining bicycle is now reported by Rider Inc. at its purchase value. A loss of $50 is created by the reduction in the inventory account from $260 to $210.

Sales value. Inventory also has a sales value that is, frequently, independent of replacement cost. The sales value of an item can fall for any number of reasons. For example, technological innovation will almost automatically reduce the amount that can be charged for earlier models. This phenomenon is typically seen whenever a new computer, camera, or phone is introduced to the market. Older items still in stock must be discounted significantly to attract buyers.

Similarly, changes in fashions and fads will hurt the sales value of certain types of inventory. Swim suits usually are offered at reduced prices in August and September as the summer season draws to a close. Damage can also impact an owner’s ability to recoup the cost of inventory. Advertised sales tempt buyers by offering scratched and dented products, such as microwaves and refrigerators, at especially low prices.

For accounting purposes, the sales value of inventory is normally defined as estimated net realizable value. As discussed in the previous chapter, this figure is the amount of cash expected to be derived from an asset. For inventory, net realizable value is the anticipated sales price less any cost required to generate the sale. For example, the net realizable value of an older model digital camera might be the expected amount a customer will pay after money is spent to advertise the product. The net realizable value for a scratched refrigerator is likely to be the anticipated price of the item less the cost of any repairs that must be made prior to sale.

As with purchase value, if the sales value of an inventory item falls below its historical cost, the lower figure is reported along with a loss to mirror the impact of the asset reduction.

Applying Lower of Cost or Market

Question: Inventory records are maintained at the historical cost of each item. For reporting purposes, this figure is utilized unless market value is lower. A reduction in value can result because of a drop in replacement cost (a purchase value) or in net realizable value (a sales value). How is the comparison of cost and market value actually made when inventory is reported?

Assume that Rider Inc. is currently preparing financial statements and holds two bicycles in ending inventory. Model XY-7 cost the company $260 while Model AB-9 cost $380. As mentioned, Model XY-7 now has a replacement cost of only $210. Because of market conditions, the exact sales value is uncertain. The other unit, Model AB-9, has been damaged and can only be sold for $400 after $50 is spent for necessary repairs. This inventory has a cost of $640 ($260 + $380). What should Rider report for its asset inventory?

 

Answer: As a preliminary step in preparing financial statements, a comparison of the cost and market value of the inventory is made. Although other alternatives exist, assume that Rider compares the cost to the market value for each separate item.In applying the lower-of-cost-or-market approach to inventory, the comparison can be made on an item-by-item basis. For example, XY-7 can be valued based on the lower of cost and market for that one item and then, separately, a similar determination can be made for AB-9. A company can also group its inventory (all bicycles, for example, might comprise a group that is separate from all motorcycles) and report the lower amount determined for each group. A third possibility is to sum the cost of all inventory items and make a single comparison of that figure to the total of all market values. U.S. GAAP does not specify a mechanical approach to use in applying lower of cost or market. Market value used for the first item (XY-7) is its purchase value (replacement cost of $210) whereas the market value for the second item (AB-9) is the sales value of $350 (net realizable value of $400 minus $50). A problem with either value can lead to a reduction in the reported asset balance, which causes the recognition of a loss.

Figure 8.8 Recognition of a Loss on Impaired Inventory Value

Rider Inc. reports its inventory at the conservative $560 amount on its balance sheet with an $80 loss ($640 – $560) appearing in the income statement for this period. Such losses can be quite significant. Mitsui & Co. (U.S.A.) recognized a $25.3 million loss for the year ending March 31, 2011, that was attributed to applying the lower-of-cost-or-market approach to its inventory.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company has three items of inventory: one is red, one is green, and one is blue. They cost $300 each and are usually sold for a profit of $50. The red and green units have a replacement cost of $310 each. The blue item has a replacement cost of $280. The red item can be sold for $340, the green item can be sold for $330, and the blue item can be sold for $320. It will cost $30 to sell the red one, $40 to sell the green one, and $10 to sell the blue one. If lower of cost or market value is applied on an item-by-item basis, what balance should be company report for its inventory?

  1. $850
  2. $860
  3. $870
  4. $880

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: $870.

Explanation:

The red item has a replacement cost ($310) and a net realizable value (NRV) ($340 less $30 or $310) that are both above cost so the $300 figure continues to be reported. The green item has a replacement cost ($310) above cost ($300) but a NRV of only $290 ($330 less $40). That item is reported at this lower value. The blue item has a replacement cost ($280) that is below cost ($300) as well as NRV ($320 less $10 or $310) so the $280 is reported. The total is $870 ($300 + $290 + $280).

Talking with an Independent Auditor about International Financial Reporting Standards (Continued)

Following is a continuation of our interview with Robert A. Vallejo, partner with the accounting firm PricewaterhouseCoopers.

 

Question: When applying lower of cost or market to inventory, the determination of market value according to U.S. GAAP can be either net realizable value or replacement cost depending on whether a sales value or a purchase value is impaired. This process has been used in the United States for decades. How does International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) handle this issue? If a company begins to report its financial statements based on IFRS, how will the comparison of cost to market be made for inventory balances?

Rob Vallejo: International Accounting Standards 2, Inventories (IAS 2) states that inventories should be measured at the lower of cost and net realizable value. Net realizable value is defined as the anticipated sales price of the item (in the ordinary course of business) reduced by the estimated costs to complete the item and any estimated costs needed to make the sale. Replacement cost is not taken into consideration. In practice, because most U.S. companies determine net realizable value when considering whether or not to decrease the cost of their inventory, I do not expect any significant differences in this area of financial reporting (with the exception of some very industry specific circumstances) when a switch to IFRS is made. However, IFRS does allow reversals of previous write-downs if appropriate, whereas this is not allowed under U.S. GAAP.

Key Takeaway

Inventory is traditionally reported on a company’s balance sheet at historical cost. However, reductions can be made based on applying the conservative lower-of-cost-or-market approach. In some cases, purchase value is in question if an item’s replacement cost has dropped since the date of acquisition. For other inventory items, the problem is with the sales value if the net realizable value (expected sales price less any costs necessary to sale) falls below cost. Drops in sales value can occur because of changes in fads or technology or possibly as a result of damage. If either of these market values is below cost, the reported inventory figure should be reduced and a loss recognized.

8.5 Determining Inventory on Hand

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Understand the necessity of taking a physical inventory count even in a perpetual inventory system.
  2. Estimate the amount of inventory on hand using historic gross profit percentages and identify situations when this computation might be necessary.

Counting Inventory in a Perpetual System

Question: In a periodic inventory system, a physical count is always taken at or near the end of the fiscal year. This procedure is essential in determining the final inventory figure and, hence, cost of goods sold for the period. When a company uses a perpetual system, is a count of the goods on hand still needed since both the inventory balance and cost of goods sold are maintained and available in the accounting records?

 

Answer: A physical inventory is necessary even if a company has invested the effort and cost to install a perpetual system. Merchandise can be lost, broken, or stolen. Errors can occur in the record keeping. Thus, a count is taken on a regular basis simply to ensure that subsidiary and general ledger balances are kept in alignment with the actual items held. Unless differences become material, this physical inventory can take place at a convenient time rather than at the end of the year. For example, assume that a company sells snow ski apparel. If an efficient perpetual system is in use, the merchandise could be inspected and counted by employees in May when quantities are low and damaged goods easier to spot.

An adjustment is necessary when the count does not agree with perpetual inventory figures. To illustrate, assume that company records indicate that 65 ski jackets are currently in stock costing $70 apiece. The physical inventory finds that only 63 items are actually on hand. The inventory account is reduced (credited) by $140 to mirror the shortfall (two missing units at $70 each).

The other half of the adjusting entry depends on the perceived cause of the shortage. For example, officials might have reason to believe that errors took place in the accounting process during the period. When merchandise is bought and sold, recording miscues do occur. Possibly two ski jackets were sold on a busy afternoon. The clerk got distracted and the cost of this merchandise was never reclassified to expense. This type of mistake means that the cost of goods sold figure is too low. The balance reported for these two jackets is moved to the expense account to rectify the mistake.

Figure 8.9 Adjusting Entry—To Bring Perpetual Inventory Records in Line with Physical Count, a Recording Error Is Assumed

Conversely, if differences between actual and recorded inventory amounts occur because of damage, loss, or theft, the reported balance for cost of goods sold should not bear the cost of these items. The two jackets were not sold. Instead, a loss occurred.

If the assumption is made that the missing jackets were lost or stolen, rather than sold, the following alternative adjustment is appropriate.

Figure 8.10 Adjusting Entry—To Bring Perpetual Inventory Records in Line with Physical Count, Theft or Loss Is Assumed

In practice, when an inventory count is made and the results differ from the amount of recorded merchandise, the exact cause is often impossible to identify. Whether a loss is reported or a change is made in reporting cost of goods sold, the impact on net income is the same. In such cases, construction of the adjustment is at the discretion of company officials. Normally, consistent application from year to year is the major objective.

Estimating the Amount of Inventory on Hand

Question: A periodic system is cheap and easy to operate. However, the lack of available information does present some practical problems. Assume that a company experiences a fire, flood, or other disaster and is attempting to gather evidence—for insurance or tax purposes—as to the amount of merchandise that was destroyed. If a periodic system has been used, how can the company support its claim? Or assume a company wants to produce interim financial statements for a single month or quarter (rather than a full year) without going to the cost and trouble of taking a complete physical inventory count. If the information is needed, how can a reasonable approximation of inventory on hand be derived when a periodic system is in use?

 

Answer: One entire branch of accounting—known as forensic accountingA branch of accounting specializing in investigating and reporting on situations where important information is limited or unavailable.—specializes in investigations where information is limited or not available (or has even been purposely altered to be misleading). For example, assume that a hurricane floods a retail clothing store in Charleston, South Carolina. Only a portion of the merchandise costing $80,000 is salvaged.For a full description of forensic accounting, see Frank J. Grippo and J. W. (Ted) Ibex, “Introduction to Forensic Accounting,” The National Public Accountant, June 2003. In trying to determine the resulting loss, the amount of inventory in the building prior to the storm needs to be calculated. A forensic accountant might be hired, by either the owner of the store or the insurance company, to produce a reasonable estimate of the merchandise on hand at the time of the flood. Obviously, if the company had used a perpetual rather than a periodic system, the need to hire the services of an accounting expert would be less likely unless fraud was suspected.

In some cases, arriving at a probable inventory balance is not extremely complicated even if periodic inventory procedures are utilized. When historical trends can be determined with assurance, a valid estimation of the goods on hand is possible at any point in time without the benefit of perpetual records. To illustrate, assume that the general ledger for the Charleston store is located after the disaster. A periodic system was in use and the T-account balances provide the following information.

Figure 8.11 Estimating Inventory—General Ledger Balances

If no sales had taken place prior to the flood, the inventory on hand would have cost $571,000 as shown by these ledger accounts. However, sales had occurred, and a significant amount of merchandise was removed by customers as a result of those transactions. The $480,000 balance shown in the sales T-account does not reflect the cost of inventory items that were surrendered. It is a retail amount, the summation of the price charged for all sales during the year to date.

To determine the cost of inventory held at the time of the catastrophe, cost of goods sold for the current year has to be approximated and then removed from the $571,000 total. Many companies use a fairly standard markup percentage to set retail prices. By looking at previously reported balances, the forensic accountant is often able to make a reasonable determination of that markup. For example, assume that in the preceding year, this company reported sales revenue of $500,000 along with cost of goods sold of $300,000 and, hence, gross profit of $200,000. In this earlier period, cost of goods sold was 60 percent of sales revenue ($300,000/$500,000) while gross profit was 40 percent ($200,000/$500,000).

If available evidence does not indicate any significant changes this year in the method used to set retail prices, the accountant can assume that cost of goods sold during the period prior to the storm was about $288,000 ($480,000 sales revenue × 60 percent). Because the cost of all inventory was $571,000, approximately $283,000 of those goods were still in stock at the store when the hurricane hit Charleston ($571,000 total cost less $288,000 estimated cost of goods sold). This residual figure then serves as the basis for the insurance or tax claim. Only goods costing $80,000 were saved. Thus, the estimated loss was $203,000 ($283,000 inventory in stock less $80,000 inventory saved).

An identical set of procedures could also be used if the company was preparing financial statements for a period of time of less than a year (for example, a month or a quarter). For such interim reporting, companies often determine inventory and cost of goods sold based on estimations to avoid the cost of frequent physical counts.

The biggest obstacle in this type calculation is the validity of the cost and markup percentages. Many companies offer an eclectic variety of products, each with its own typical gross margin. Other companies change their markups frequently based on market conditions. In these cases, determining a reliable percentage can be difficult and the accuracy of the resulting estimation is much more questionable.

Test Yourself

Question:

On January 1, Year One, the Wysocki Company holds inventory costing $230,000. During the first three months of the year, the company buys additional inventory for $290,000 and makes sales totaling $270,000. The company relies on a periodic inventory system for its record keeping. Typically, if the company buys a unit of inventory for $9, it will sell it for $15 although costs tend to vary a bit from product to product. The president of Wysocki wants to produce a balance sheet for the three months ending March 31, Year One, but prefers not to expend the time and money to take a physical inventory. What balance should be estimated and reported for the company’s inventory on this balance sheet?

  1. $250,000
  2. $298,000
  3. $340,000
  4. $358,000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: $358,000.

Explanation:

If no goods are sold, the company holds inventory costing $520,000 ($230,000 plus $290,000). However, sales of $270,000 were made during these three months. Cost of goods sold has typically been 60 percent of the sales price ($9/$15). Therefore, the cost of the goods that were sold so far in this period can be estimated as $162,000 (60 percent × $270,000). After removing that amount, the inventory that remains has an estimated cost of $358,000 ($520,000 less $162,000).

Key Takeaway

Although perpetual inventory systems are designed to maintain current account balances, a physical count is still required periodically to update the records for errors, theft, and the like. In addition, knowledge of the amount of inventory on hand is sometimes needed in a periodic system even if complete records are not available. If a loss has occurred due to some type of disaster or if interim financial statements are to be prepared, the inventory balance can be estimated. This computation is based on determining the company’s gross profit percentage using historical data. That allows cost of goods sold for the period to be estimated and then removed from the total inventory available for sale.

Talking with a Real Investing Pro (Continued)

Following is a continuation of our interview with Kevin G. Burns.

 

Question: Gross profit is the sales revenue generated by a company less cost of goods sold. In other words, it is the markup that a company is able to earn from the sale of its inventory. Goods are bought for a price and then sold at a higher value. In analyzing companies, gross profit is often stated as a percentage. A company’s gross profit, for example, might be 37 percent of its sales. When you study a company, how much attention do you pay to changes in gross profit from year to year or differences that exist between one company and another?

Kevin Burns: Actually year to year differences only interest me if there is a significant change. If a company’s gross profit margin increases significantly from one year to the next, my radar is activated. I want to know exactly why that happened. Is it temporary or something significant? If gross profit is especially volatile, it could easily go the other direction in the future. I prefer steady as she goes. Predictability and transparency are very important to me. As for gross profit margins between one company and another, the only way that is significant to me is if they are in the same industry and then only if there are big differences. Most companies in mature industries have similar margins, and large differences, again, tend to make me very suspicious.

Video Clip

(click to see video)

Professor Joe Hoyle talks about the five most important points in Chapter 8 “How Does a Company Gather Information about Its Inventory?”.

8.6 End-of-Chapter Exercises

Questions

  1. A company reports that it holds inventory with a cost of $397,000. What is meant here by the term “cost?”
  2. At the end of the current year, the Waxhall Corporation paid $12,400 in connection with the acquisition of several pieces of inventory. This cost was capitalized when it should have been expensed. What is the impact of this misstatement on the company’s financial statement totals?
  3. What is a cash discount? Why does a company offer a cash discount?
  4. What is meant by the term “3/10, n/30?”
  5. When offered a cash discount, why is a buyer likely to take advantage of this opportunity?
  6. How do cash discounts impact the reported value of inventory?
  7. What is a perpetual inventory system? What is an advantage of using a perpetual system?
  8. What is a periodic inventory system? What is an advantage of using a periodic system?
  9. What is meant by the term “FOB point?”
  10. The Allen Company sold $4,000 in inventory to the Gracie Company. Unfortunately, the goods were destroyed in a wreck while being delivered. Which company suffered this loss?
  11. When does ownership transfer if transfer documents specify “FOB shipping point?”
  12. When does ownership transfer if transfer documents specify “FOB destination?”
  13. One company records its inventory using a perpetual system. Another company records its inventory using a periodic system. Other than the journal entries that are made, what differences are found between the two systems?
  14. The Birgini Company buys one unit of inventory for $77 in cash. This item is later sold for $109 on credit. What journal entry or entries are made at the time of sale if a perpetual inventory system is used? What journal entry or entries are made at the time of sale if a periodic inventory system is used?
  15. The Westmoreland Corporation uses a periodic system for its inventory. The company starts the current year with inventory costing $177,000. During the year, an additional $387,000 is paid for inventory purchases and $17,000 for transportation costs to get those items. A physical count at the end of the year finds $145,000 of ending inventory. How was each of these numbers derived? What is the company’s cost of goods sold?
  16. In question 15, what year-end adjusting entry is needed?
  17. The Alberta Corporation maintains a perpetual inventory system but only keeps track of the number of units of inventory. The company actually makes its journal entries as is done in a periodic system. What is the reason for adopting this approach?
  18. In accounting for inventory, what is meant by purchase value? How can a drop in the purchase value of inventory force the company to change the reported figure?
  19. In accounting for inventory, what is meant by sales value? How can a drop in the sales value of inventory force the company to change the reported figure?
  20. What types of companies would be most likely to have reductions to report in connection with the application of lower of cost or market?
  21. Why would a company that uses a perpetual inventory system still perform a physical inventory count?
  22. The Sharon Company recently estimated its inventory holdings. What are possible reasons for making this type of estimation?

True or False

  1. ____ A company should include the amount spent to transport an inventory item to its store when determining the reported cost of that item.
  2. ____ In a periodic inventory system, an increase is made in the Inventory T-account if money is paid for the transportation to receive the items.
  3. ____ In a perpetual inventory system, transportation costs to receive inventory is handled in the same manner by a company as delivery costs paid to get the item to a customer.
  4. ____ Inventory is bought for $600 on terms of 2/10, n/60. Thus, if payment is made in 10 days, the buyer only has to pay $540.
  5. ____ Buyers frequently choose not to take advantage of purchase (cash) discounts because the amount that is saved is so small.
  6. ____ In a perpetual system, cost of goods sold is determined and recorded at the time of sale.
  7. ____ Periodic inventory systems are, in general, less expensive to operate than perpetual systems.
  8. ____ Periodic inventory systems are more common today because of the prevalence of computer systems.
  9. ____ The Purchases of Inventory account is not used in a perpetual inventory system.
  10. ____ If inventory is shipped FOB shipping point, the buyer takes title as soon as the inventory leaves the seller’s warehouse.
  11. ____ In a periodic system, cost of goods sold is the difference between what a company has available for sale (beginning inventory and purchases) and what they did not sell (ending inventory).
  12. ____ In a periodic system, the Inventory T-account retains the beginning balance throughout the year.
  13. ____ Ace Company reports Year One cost of goods sold as $324,000 using a periodic system. One inventory item was not recorded or counted. Ace had bought the item from Zebra for $6,000. Zebra shipped it on December 28, Year One, and Ace received it on January 5, Year Two. It was shipped FOB shipping point. Ace should have reported cost of goods sold as $330,000.
  14. ____ Lower of cost or market is only used by companies that maintain a periodic inventory system.
  15. ____ Lower of cost or market is only used by companies that maintain a perpetual inventory system.
  16. ____ If the market value of a company’s inventory increases after its acquisition, the company should record a gain.
  17. ____ A company that uses a perpetual inventory system should still perform a physical inventory count.
  18. ____ An estimation of inventory is most common in connection with companies that have a periodic inventory system.
  19. ____ The Waynesboro Company always has gross profit equal to 30 percent of sales. This year, the company started with inventory costing $50,000 and made purchases of $100,000 and sales of $120,000. A fire destroyed all of the inventory on hand except for merchandise costing $6,000. The loss is estimated as $60,000.
  20. ____ A forensic accountant attempts to generate financial information in situations where insufficient physical data might be available.

Multiple Choice

  1. Arne Company buys inventory for $400. The seller sends this merchandise to the company FOB destination. The transportation charge was $13. Arne received a discount of $9 for paying quickly. The inventory is sold to a customer for $670. Arne paid another $17 to have the item delivered to the customer’s home. What did Arne report as cost of goods sold?

    1. $391
    2. $395
    3. $400
    4. $408
  2. On February 13, NC Sofa Company purchases three sofas from a manufacturer for $300 each. The terms of the sale are 2/10, n/45. NC Sofa pays the invoice on February 21. How much did the company pay?

    1. $855
    2. $882
    3. $890
    4. $900
  3. Crayson Inc. started the year with $490,000 in inventory. During the year, Crayson purchased an additional $1,060,000 in inventory and paid transportation costs of $30,000 to get this merchandise. At the end of the year, Crayson employees performed a physical count and determined that ending inventory amounted to $450,000. What was Crayson’s cost of goods sold for the year?

    1. $1,050,000
    2. $1,060,000
    3. $1,100,000
    4. $1,130,000
  4. The following account balances were found in the general ledger of the Applewhite Corporation: Purchases = $232,000, Sales = $458,000, Transportation-in = $15,000, Cash Discounts on Purchases = $23,000, Advertising Expense = $30,000. On January 1, a count of inventory showed $90,000, whereas on December 31, a count of inventory showed $123,000. What was cost of goods sold for the period?

    1. $176,000
    2. $191,000
    3. $214,000
    4. $221,000
  5. Raceway Corporation manufactures miniature cars and racetracks for collectors and enthusiasts. Raceway placed an order for new auto supplies and other parts from Delta Inc. on December 1. The sales staff at Delta informed Raceway that the supplies would not be available to ship out until December 22. Raceway accepted this arrangement. The supplies actually shipped, FOB shipping point, on December 26 and arrived at Raceway’s receiving dock on January 2. On which date should Raceway include the supplies in its inventory?

    1. December 1
    2. December 22
    3. December 26
    4. January 2
  6. The Morning Company buys inventory and pays an additional $700 to have those goods shipped to its warehouse. How is the journal entry for this $700 cost recorded?

    1. In both a perpetual and a periodic system, inventory is debited for $700.
    2. In both a perpetual and a periodic system, purchases of inventory is debited for $700.
    3. In a perpetual system, inventory is debited for $700; in a periodic system, purchases of inventory is debited for $700.
    4. In a perpetual system, purchases of inventory is debited for $700; in a periodic system, inventory is debited for $700.
  7. A company makes all of its purchases and sales using FOB shipping point. At the end of the year, the company had the following two transactions that were correctly recorded:

    • Purchases. Inventory costing $40,000 is shipped by the seller on December 28 and received by the company on January 4.
    • Sales. Inventory costing $30,000 is sold to a customer for $48,000. It is shipped on December 28 to the customer and arrives on January 4.

    If this company had chosen to make these transactions FOB destination rather than FOB shipping point, how would that decision have impacted the reported amount of inventory on the year-end balance sheet?

    1. Reported inventory would have been $10,000 higher.
    2. Reported inventory would have been $10,000 lower.
    3. Reported inventory would have been $40,000 higher.
    4. Reported inventory would have been $40,000 lower.
  8. The Charlotte Company made a $9,000 purchase near the end of the current year. The company also made a sale for $11,000 of inventory costing $6,000. Charlotte did not include either the inventory purchased or the inventory sold in its year-end inventory. Ending inventory was reported as $100,000. The purchase was FOB destination and shipped on December 29, Year One, and received by Charlotte on January 3, Year Two. The sale was FOB destination. It was shipped on December 30, Year One, and received by the customer on January 4, Year Two. What was the correct amount of inventory that Charlotte should have reported at the end of Year One?

    1. $94,000
    2. $97,000
    3. $106,000
    4. $109,000
  9. At year-end, the Commonwealth Corporation holds 500 pieces of XY inventory costing $9 each and 700 pieces of AB inventory costing $11 each. XY inventory has flooded the market, and Commonwealth can now buy these same units for $6 each. AB inventory has not proven to be as popular as anticipated, and a unit can only be sold for $12 even after spending $2 extra on painting it a different color. In applying lower of cost or market, what should be reported for inventory by Commonwealth?

    1. $10,000
    2. $10,700
    3. $11,400
    4. $12,100
  10. Which of the following concerning the “lower of cost or market” rule is not true?

    1. If the replacement cost of an inventory item falls below its historical cost, the value of the item should be written down.
    2. If the market value of an item exceeds its historical cost, it should be written up and a gain recorded.
    3. It is possible for an item’s net realizable value to fall below its historical cost.
    4. Application of lower of cost or market is an example of the practice of conservatism in accounting.
  11. Romulus Company sells maps. At the end of the current year, Romulus’s inventory records indicated that it had 2,900 maps of Italy on hand that had originally cost $30 each but were being sold for $52 each. An inventory count showed that only 2,875 were actually present in ending inventory. What journal entry should Romulus make if management believes the discrepancy is due to errors in the accounting process?

    1. Figure 8.12

    2. Figure 8.13

    3. Figure 8.14

    4. Figure 8.15

  12. Real South Products holds $400,000 worth of inventory on January 1. Between January and March 13, Real South purchased an additional $190,000 in inventory. During that period, sales of $530,000 were made. On March 13, Real South’s warehouse flooded and all but $15,000 worth of inventory was ruined. Historical records show that Real South has an average gross profit percentage of 25 percent. What was the approximate value of the inventory destroyed in the flood?

    1. $177,500
    2. $207,500
    3. $240,000
    4. $275,000

Video Problems

Professor Joe Hoyle discusses the answers to these two problems at the links that are indicated. After formulating your answers, watch each video to see how Professor Hoyle answers these questions.

  1. Your roommate is an English major. The roommate’s parents own a chain of ice cream shops throughout Florida. One day, while driving over to the car wash, your roommate poses this question: “My parents are having a problem with their insurance company. As you know, we recently had a hurricane come through the Florida area. It knocked out the electricity at one of their stores for several hours. It was very hot that day, and all the ice cream at that store melted. Luckily, each store is insured. However, they are having a dispute with the insurance company as to the amount of ice cream that was destroyed. It all melted and ran down the drain so there is no proof. The insurance company argues that only half as much ice cream was destroyed as my parents claim. For a big store, that is a lot of money. How will they ever be able to sort out this mess? My parents only want a fair amount.” How would you respond?

  2. Your uncle and two friends started a small office supply store several years ago. The company has expanded and now has several large locations. Your uncle knows that you are taking a financial accounting class and asks you the following question: “When we first started, we did not spend much money on monitoring inventory. The stores were small, and a good manager could walk through and see where we needed to buy more goods. Now, however, every year we seem to have to spend more money in order to upgrade our inventory systems. Is this cost really worth what we continue to spend?” How would you respond?

Problems

  1. Here are several T-account balances that the Absalom Company has in its ledger at the end of the current year before a physical inventory count is to be taken.

    Figure 8.16

    1. What was the amount of goods available for sale for this company?
    2. If the company counts its ending inventory and finds merchandise costing $84,000, what should be reported as cost of goods sold for the year?
    3. What adjusting entry should Absalom make at the end of the current year to record cost of goods sold and ending inventory?
  2. The Darth Corporation starts Year Two with 8,000 units of inventory. All inventory costs $1.00 per unit with an additional cost of $0.12 each for transportations costs. These costs continue to be consistent throughout Year Two. Inventory on January 1, Year Two, was reported as 8,000 units times $1.12 or $8,960.

    After these 8,000 units were sold, Darth Corporation buys an additional 20,000 units in Year Two. During that year, Darth sells 22,000 units for $2.00 each. No inventory was lost or stolen. During Year Two, the company accountant accidentally expensed all transportation costs incurred that period.

    1. What amount did the Darth Corporation report as its gross profit for Year Two?
    2. What amount should the Darth Corporation have reported as its gross profit for Year Two?
  3. Overland Inc. starts buying and selling widgets this year. A box of 100 widgets can be bought for $600 on credit. Transportation to receive each box of widgets costs an additional $50 in cash. Overland uses a perpetual inventory system. Make journal entries for the following transactions.

    • January 15 – bought 4 boxes of widgets
    • February 19 – sold 3 boxes of widgets for cash of $1,100 each
    • April 3 – bought 5 boxes of widgets
    • June 15 – sold 3 boxes of widgets for cash of $1,200 each
    • September 4 – bought 6 boxes of widgets
    • October 5 – sold 4 boxes of widgets for cash of $1,250 each
  4. Do problem 3 again but assume that Overland Inc. uses a periodic inventory system. Also assume that no widgets are lost, broken, or stolen. Include the needed year-end adjusting entry.
  5. ConnecTech bought 400 computers in Year Two for $300 each on account. It paid $260 to have them delivered to its store. During January of Year Three, ConnecTech sold 220 of the computers for cash of $550 each. ConnecTech uses a perpetual inventory system.

    1. Prepare the journal entry or entries to record ConnecTech’s purchase of the computers.
    2. Prepare the journal entry or entries to record the sale of the computers.
    3. Determine the balance in ConnecTech’s ending inventory on January 31, Year Three.
  6. Montez Muffins and More (MM&M) is a bakery located in New York City. MM&M purchases a great deal of flour in bulk from a wholesaler. The wholesaler offers purchase discounts for fast payment. MM&M purchased 600 pounds of flour for $0.20 per pound on May 1, under terms 2/10, n/30. Determine the amount MM&M should pay under the following scenarios.

    1. MM&M pays the full balance on May 25.
    2. MM&M pays the full balance on May 7.
    3. MM&M pays half the balance on May 7 and half on May 18.
  7. Racer’s ATVs sells many makes and models of all-terrain vehicles at its store in Indianapolis, Indiana. Racer’s uses a periodic inventory system because its entire inventory is located in one large room and all employees know what is on hand and what new inventory is needed. On January 1, Racer’s had beginning inventory costing $48,600. On January 14, Racer’s received a new shipment of vehicles with a purchase price of $34,700 and additional transportation costs of $1,200. On May 19, Racers received a second shipment of vehicles with a purchase price of $36,900 and transportation costs of $950. On November 1, Racers received its pre-Christmas shipment of vehicles with a purchase price of $67,800 and transportation costs of $1,750. The company buys vehicles on account but pays cash for transportation.

    1. Make the necessary journal entries for January 14, May 19, and November 1 to show the purchase of this inventory.
    2. Assume that a physical inventory count on December 31 showed an ending inventory costing $35,800. Determine the cost of goods sold to be reported for the year.
    3. If sales for the year were reported as $296,700, what gross profit did Racer’s make?
    4. Racer’s is considering replacing its periodic inventory system with a perpetual one. Write a memo to Racer’s management giving the pros and cons of this switch.
  8. Ace Company counts inventory at the end of the current year and arrives at a cost of $300,000. Assume that each of the following four situations is independent of the others. In each case, assume that the inventory in question was not included in the count that was taken at the end of the year.

    1. Inventory costing $10,000 was sold by Ace for $16,000 on credit and shipped to the customer on December 29 and arrived on January 3. The shipment was marked FOB destination. If Ace reported $300,000 in inventory on its balance sheet, what amount should have been reported?
    2. Inventory costing $11,000 was shipped from the seller on December 29 and received by Ace on January 3. The shipment was marked FOB destination. If Ace reported $300,000 in inventory on its balance sheet, what amount should have been reported?
    3. Inventory costing $12,000 was sold by Ace for $17,000 on credit and shipped to the customer on December 30 and arrived on January 4. The shipment was marked FOB shipping point. If Ace reported $300,000 in inventory on its balance sheet, what amount should have been reported?
    4. Inventory costing $13,000 was shipped from the seller on December 30 and received by Ace on January 4. The shipment was marked FOB shipping point. If Ace reported $300,000 in inventory on its balance sheet, what amount should have been reported?
  9. Magic Carpets Inc. sells a full line of area rugs, from top quality to bargain basement. Economic conditions have hit the textile industry, and the accountant for Magic Carpets is concerned that the rug inventory might not be worth the amount Magic paid. The following is information about three lines of rugs.

    Figure 8.17

    1. Determine lower of cost or market for each type of rug.
    2. Assume that Magic Carpets applies lower of cost or market to the individual types of rugs rather than to the entire stock of inventory as a whole. Determine if Magic Carpets has suffered a loss of value on its inventory, and if so, the amount of that loss.
  10. Costello Corporation uses a perpetual inventory system. At the end of the year, the inventory balance reported by its system is $45,270. Costello performs an inventory count and determines that the actual ending inventory is $39,780.

    1. Discuss why a company that uses a perpetual inventory system would still go to the trouble to perform a physical inventory count.
    2. Why might the ending balance differ between the perpetual inventory system and physical inventory count?
    3. Assume that Costello determines that the difference between the perpetual records and the physical count is due to an accident that occurred during the year. What journal entry should Costello make?
    4. Assume that Costello believes the difference between the perpetual records and the physical count is due to errors made by the company’s accounting staff. On occasion, the staff fail to transfer inventory to cost of goods sold when a sale were made. What journal entry should Costello make in this case?
  11. Fabulous Fay’s is a boutique clothing store in San Diego, California. Fay’s uses a perpetual inventory system. In March, Fay’s purchased a type of swimwear designed to be slimming to the wearer. The company purchased twenty suits of varying sizes for $40 each and priced them at $120 each. They sold out almost immediately, so Fay purchased forty more suits in April for $40 each and sold thirty-eight of them for $130 each. Again in July, Fay made one more purchase of twenty suits at $40 each and sold fifteen of them for $130 each. Fay decided not to put the rest of this inventory on sale at the end of the summer, but to hold onto the items until cruise season started the following winter. She believed she could sell the remainder of this merchandise without having to mark the items down.

    1. Make the journal entries for the purchases Fay made.
    2. Make the journal entries for the sales Fay made.
    3. Determine the balance in ending inventory on December 31.
    4. Fay performed a physical count on December 31 and determined that three of the swimsuits had been severely damaged due to a leaky pipe. They had to be thrown away. Make the journal entry to show the loss of this inventory.
  12. Nakatobi Company has an inventory warehouse in Fargo, North Dakota. The company utilizes a periodic inventory system. At the beginning of the year, the warehouse contained $369,000 worth of inventory. During the first quarter of the year, Nakatobi purchased another $218,000 worth of inventory and made sales of $450,000. On April 1, a flood hit Fargo and destroyed 70 percent of the inventory housed in the warehouse. Nakatobi must estimate the cost of the destroyed inventory for insurance purposes. According to records kept for the past several years, Nakatobi has typically reported its cost of goods sold at 55 percent of sales.

    1. Determine the value of the inventory on March 31, before the flood hit.
    2. Determine Nakatobi’s loss on April 1.

Comprehensive Problem

This problem will carry through over several chapters to enable students to build their accounting skills using knowledge gained in previous chapters.

In Chapter 7 “In Financial Reporting, What Information Is Conveyed about Receivables?”, financial statements were prepared for Webworks for July 31 and the month then ended. Those financial statements are included here as a starting point for the financial reporting for August.

Here are Webworks financial statements as of July 31.

Figure 8.18

Figure 8.19

Figure 8.20

The following events occur during August:

  1. Webworks decides to begin selling a limited selection of inventory items related to its business. During August, Webworks purchases several specialty keyboards for $4,900 and flash drives for $3,200 both on account with the hopes of selling them to Web site customers or others who might be interested. Due to the limited quantity of inventory, Webworks will use a periodic system.
  2. Webworks purchases supplies for $100 on account.
  3. Webworks starts and completes six more Web sites and bills those clients a total of $2,700.
  4. In July, Webworks received $500 in advance to design two Web sites. Webworks also completes both of these sites during August.
  5. Webworks collects $2,400 in accounts receivable.
  6. Webworks pays Nancy Po (the company employee hired in June) $600 for her work during the first three weeks of August.
  7. In June, Webworks designed a Web site for Pauline Smith and billed her. Unfortunately, before she paid this bill completely, Ms. Smith’s business folded. Webworks is not likely to collect any of the remaining money and writes off the $100 balance as uncollectible.
  8. Webworks sells several keyboards for $4,500 and flash drives for $3,000. All of these transactions were for cash.
  9. Webworks pays the salaries payable from July.
  10. Webworks pays $6,000 of its accounts payable.
  11. Webworks receives $100 in advance to work on a Web site for a local dentist. Work will not begin on the Web site until September.
  12. Webworks pays Leon Jackson (owner of the company) a salary of $2,000 for his work.
  13. Webworks pays taxes of $475 in cash.

    Required:

    1. Prepare journal entries for the previous events.
    2. Post the journal entries to T-accounts.
    3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Webworks at the end of August.
    4. Prepare adjusting entries for the following and post them to the appropriate T-accounts.
  14. Webworks owes Nancy Po $250 for her work during the last week of August.
  15. Leon’s parents let him know that Webworks owes $250 toward the electricity bill. Webworks will pay them in September.
  16. Webworks determines that it still has $60 worth of supplies remaining at the end of August.
  17. Prepaid rent should be adjusted for August’s portion.
  18. Webworks assumes that 10 percent of its accounts receivable at the end of the month will prove to be uncollectible.
  19. Webworks performs a count of ending inventory and determines that $1,900 in keyboards and $1,100 in flash drives remain. Cost of goods sold for the month should be recorded.

    1. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
    2. Prepare financial statements for August 31 and the month then ended.

Research Assignment

Assume that you take a job as a summer employee for an investment advisory service. One of the partners for that firm is currently looking at the possibility of investing in Sears Holdings Corporations. The partner is a bit concerned about the impact of the recession on this company. The partner is especially interested in what has happened to the company’s ability to sell the merchandise inventory that it elects to buy. The partner asks you to look at the 2010 financial statements for Sears by following this path:

  • Go to http://www.sears.com.
  • At the bottom of this screen, click on “About Sears” and then on “Investor Relations.”
  • On the right side of the next screen, click on “Financial Information.”
  • On the left side of the next screen, click on “2010 Annual Report” to download.
  • Go to page 49 and find the 2008, 2009, and 2010 income statements.
  • Go to page 50 and find the balance sheets for the years ended January 30, 2010 and January 29, 2011.
  1. Using the figures found on these three income statements, subtract the cost of sales, buying, and occupancy from merchandise sales and services to get an approximation of gross profit earned by Sears for each year. Divide that number by the merchandise sales and services figure to derive a gross profit percentage for each year. How has that percentage changed over these three years? What might that signal?
  2. Using the figures found on the balance sheets, locate the amount reported for merchandise inventories for each year. Divide that figure by the amount reported each year by Sears as its total assets. How did the percentage change from the first year to the second? What might that signal?

Chapter 7: In Financial Reporting, What Information Is Conveyed about Receivables?

Video Clip

(click to see video)

In this video, Professor Joe Hoyle introduces the essential points covered in Chapter 7 “In Financial Reporting, What Information Is Conveyed about Receivables?”.

7.1 Accounts Receivable and Net Realizable Value

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Understand that accounts receivable are reported at net realizable value.
  2. Know that net realizable value is an estimation of the amount of cash to be collected from a particular asset.
  3. Appreciate the challenge that uncertainty poses in the reporting of accounts receivable.
  4. List the factors to be considered by officials when estimating the net realizable value of of a company’s accounts receivable.

Reporting Accounts Receivable

Question: The goal of financial accounting is to paint a fairly presented portrait that enables decision makers to make a reasonable assessment of an organization’s financial health and future prospects. This likeness should be communicated based on a set of generally accepted accounting principles (either U.S. GAAP or IFRS) with no material misstatements included. The success of the conveyance is dependent on the ability of the accountants to prepare financial statements that meet this rigorous standard.

Equally as important, every party analyzing the resulting statements must possess the knowledge necessary to understand the multitude of reported figures and explanations. If appropriate decisions are to result based on this information, both the preparer and the reader need an in-depth knowledge of the reporting standards.

For example, the asset section of the balance sheet produced by Dell Inc. as of January 28, 2011, indicates that the company held “accounts receivable, net” amounting to $6.493 billion. What does this figure reflect? What information is communicated to decision makers about a company and its accounts receivable when a single number such as $6.493 billion is reported?

 

Answer: One of the most satisfying results of mastering the terminology, rules, and principles of financial accounting is the ability to understand the meaning of amounts and disclosures reported about an organization. Such information is presented and analyzed daily in magazines, newspapers, radio, television, and the Internet. As with any language, failure to comprehend elements of the discussion leaves the listener lost and feeling vulnerable. However, with a reasonable amount of study, the informational content begins to make sense and quickly becomes useful in arriving at logical decisions.

In previous chapters, the asset accounts receivableAn asset that reports the amounts generated by credit sales that are still owed to an organization by its customers. was introduced to report monetary amounts owed to a reporting entity by its customers. Individual balances are generated by sales made on credit. Businesses sell on credit, rather than demanding cash, as a way to increase the number of customers and the related revenue. According to U.S. GAAP, the figure presented on a balance sheet for accounts receivable is its net realizable valueThe amount of cash that is expected to be generated by an asset after costs necessary to obtain the cash are removed; as related to accounts receivable, it is the amount an organization estimates will ultimately be collected from customers.—the amount of cash the company estimates will be collected over time from these accounts.

Consequently, officials for Dell Inc. analyzed its accounts receivable as of January 28, 2011, and determined that $6.493 billion was the best guess as to the cash that would be collected. The actual total of receivables was higher than that figure but an estimated amount of doubtful accounts had been subtracted in recognition that a portion of these debts could never be collected. For this reason, the asset is identified on the balance sheet as “accounts receivable, net” or, sometimes, “accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful accounts” to explain that future losses have already been anticipated and removed.

Test Yourself

Question:

Hawthorne Corporation operates a local hardware store in Townsville, Louisiana. The company’s accountant recently prepared a set of financial statements to help justify a loan that is being sought from a bank. The balance sheet reports net accounts receivable of $27,342. What does that figure reflect?

  1. Sales made to customers on account.
  2. An estimation of the amount that will be collected from the debts now owed by customers.
  3. The historical cost of the goods that were sold to customers who have not yet made payment.
  4. The total amount owed by customers as of the balance sheet date.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: An estimation of the amount that will be collected from the debts now owed by customers.

Explanation:

According to U.S. GAAP, accounts receivable should be reported at net realizable value, the amount expected to be collected. This approach requires an estimation to be made of the amount of the present balances that will prove to be uncollectible so that the net receivable balance can be established for reporting purposes.

Lack of Exactness in Reporting Receivables

Question: As discussed in previous chapters, many of the figures reported in financial accounting cannot be absolutely correct. Although $6.493 billion is the asset balance shown by Dell, the cash eventually collected will likely be somewhat higher or lower. Should the lack of exactness in reporting receivables cause concern for decision makers?

 

Answer: No one will ever be able to predict the precise amount of cash to be received from nearly $6.5 billion in accounts receivable. In fact, Note One to Dell’s financial statements specifically states, “The preparation of financial statements in accordance with GAAP requires the use of management’s estimates. These estimates are subjective in nature and involve judgments that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at fiscal year-end, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the fiscal year. Actual results could differ from those estimates.”

Knowledgeable decision makers understand that a degree of uncertainty exists in reporting all such balances. However, a very specific figure does appear on Dell’s balance sheet for accounts receivable. By communicating this one amount, company officials are asserting that they believe sufficient evidence is available to provide reasonable assurance that the amount collected will not be a materially different figure.The independent auditors will also analyze the same available evidence and must agree that it is sufficient to serve as the basis for rendering reasonable assurance that the financial statements are presented fairly before an unqualified opinion can be released.

This is the meaning of any accounts receivable balance presented according to U.S. GAAP. All parties involved should understand what the figure represents. Actual receipts are expected to be so close to $6.493 billion that an interested party can rely on this number in arriving at decisions about the reporting company’s financial health and future prospects. Officials believe that the discrepancy between this balance and the cash collected will be so small that the same decisions would have been made even if the exact outcome had been known. In other words, any difference between reported and actual figures will be inconsequential. Once again, though, absolute assurance is not given for the reported amount but merely reasonable assurance.

Clearly, the reporting of receivables moves the coverage of financial accounting into more complicated territory. In the transactions and events analyzed previously, uncertainty was rarely encountered. The financial impact of signing a bank loan or the payment of a salary can be described to the penny except in unusual situations. Here, the normal reporting of accounts receivable introduces the challenge of preparing statements where the ultimate outcome is literally unknown. The very nature of such uncertainty forces the accounting process to address such problems in some logical fashion.

Determining Net Realizable Value

Question: Inherent uncertainty is associated with the reporting of receivables. No one can know exactly how much cash will be collected. How do company officials obtain sufficient evidence to provide reasonable assurance that the balance is not materially misstated? How does any business ever anticipate the amount of cash that will be collected from what can be a massive number of accounts receivable?

 

Answer: In accounting, reported balances never represent random guesses. Considerable investigation and analysis goes into arriving at financial statement figures. To determine the net realizable value appropriate for accounts receivable, company officials consider the following relevant factors:

  • Historical experience of the company in collecting its receivables
  • Efficiency of the company’s credit verification policy
  • Current economic conditions
  • Industry averages and trends
  • Percentage of overdue accounts at present
  • Efficiency of company’s collection procedures

Dell Inc. explains this process within the notes to its financial statements by indicating that this estimation “is based on an analysis of historical bad debt experience, current receivables aging, and expected future write-offs, as well as an assessment of specific identifiable customer accounts considered at risk or uncollectible.”

Additional information disclosed by Dell indicates that the company actually held $6.589 billion in accounts receivable, but—at the date of the balance sheet—$96 million of these accounts were anticipated to be uncollectible. Thus, the amount of cash estimated from the receivables is the reported $6.493 billion net balance ($6.589 billion total less $96 million expected to be uncollectible). Quite obviously, decision makers studying the company will be interested in comparing such data to figures disclosed by Dell in previous years as well as the information disseminated by competing organizations such as Hewlett-Packard and Apple. Just determining whether $96 million in uncollectible accounts is a relatively high or low figure is quite significant in evaluating the efficiency of Dell’s current operations.

Test Yourself

Question:

Gerwitz Corporation manufactures and sells shoes. At the end of the current year, the company holds $954,850 in accounts receivable and is presently assessing the amount of uncollectible accounts in that total. Which of the following is least likely to be relevant information in making this estimation?

  1. A current recession is taking place in the country.
  2. The company monitors its inventory levels very carefully.
  3. The company only sells to customers who have undergone an extensive credit check.
  4. Of the receivables held on the previous balance sheet date, 3 percent were never collected.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: The company monitors its inventory levels very carefully.

Explanation:

Companies study as much relevant information as possible in estimating uncollectible accounts. Economic conditions are considered (such as a recession, which might reduce payments) and previous collection trends. In addition, the methods by which the company extends credit and pushes for payment can impact the amount to be received. Although monitoring inventory levels is important because it can reduce theft and breakage, no information is provided as to the collectability of receivables.

Key Takeaway

Because of various uncertainties, many of the figures reported in a set of financial statements represent estimations. Therefore, as discussed previously, such figures cannot be exactly accurate. No one can predict the future with such precision. The accountant only holds that reported balances contain no material misstatements. Accounts receivable is shown at its net realizable value, the amount of cash expected to be collected. Losses from bad accounts are anticipated and removed based on historical trends and other relevant information. Thus, the figure reported in the asset section of the balance sheet is lower than the total amount of receivables held by the company on that date.

7.2 Accounting for Uncollectible Accounts

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Understand the reason for reporting a separate allowance account on the balance sheet in connection with accounts receivable.
  2. Know that bad debt expenses must be anticipated and recorded in the same time period as the related sales revenue to conform to the matching principle.
  3. Prepare the adjusting entry to reduce accounts receivable to net realizable value and recognize the resulting bad debt expense.

The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

Question: Based on the information provided by Dell Inc., companies seem to maintain two separate ledger accounts in order to report accounts receivables at net realizable value. One is the sum of all accounts outstanding and the other is an estimation of the amount within the total that will never be collected. Interestingly, the first is a fact and the second is an opinion. The two are then combined to arrive at the net realizable value figure shown on the balance sheet. Is the amount reported for accounts receivable actually the net of the total due from customers less the anticipated doubtful accounts?

 

Answer: Yes, companies do maintain two separate T-accounts for accounts receivables, but that is solely because of the uncertainty involved. If the balance to be collected was known, one account would suffice for reporting purposes. However, that level of certainty is rarely possible.

  • An accounts receivable T-account monitors the total due from all of a company’s customers.
  • A second account (often called the allowance for doubtful accountsA contra asset account reflecting the amount of accounts receivable that the reporting company estimates will eventually fail to be collected, also referred to as the allowance for uncollectible accounts. or the allowance for uncollectible accounts) reflects the estimated amount that will eventually have to be written off as uncollectible.

Whenever a balance sheet is produced, these two accounts are netted to arrive at net realizable value, the figure to be reported for this particular asset.

The allowance for doubtful accounts is an example of a contra accountAn offset to a reported account that decreases the total balance to a net amount; in this chapter, the allowance for doubtful accounts reduces reported accounts receivable to the amount expected to be collected., one that always appears with another account but as a direct reduction to lower the reported value. Here, the allowance decreases the receivable balance to its estimated net realizable value. As a contra asset account, debit and credit rules are applied that are opposite of the normal asset rules. Thus, the allowance increases with a credit (creating a decrease in the net receivable balance) and decreases with a debit. The more accounts receivable a company expects to be bad, the larger the allowance. This increase, in turn, reduces the net realizable value shown on the balance sheet.

By establishing two T-accounts, Dell can manage a total of $6.589 billion in accounts receivables while setting up a separate allowance balance of $96 million. As a result, the reported figure—as required by U.S. GAAP—is the estimated net realizable value of $6.493 billion.

Anticipating Bad Debt Expense

Question: Accounts receivable and the offsetting allowance for doubtful accounts are netted with the resulting figure reported as an asset on the balance sheet.Some companies include both accounts on the balance sheet to indicate the origin of the reported balance. Others show only the single net figure with explanatory information provided in the notes to the financial statements. How does the existence of doubtful accounts affect the income statement? Sales are made on account, but a portion of the resulting receivables must be reduced because collection is rarely expected to be 100 percent. Does the presence of bad accounts create an expense for the reporting company?

 

Answer: Previously, an expense was defined as a measure of decreases in or outflows of net assets (assets minus liabilities) incurred in connection with the generation of revenues. If receivables are recorded that will eventually have to be decreased because they cannot be collected, an expense must be recognized. In financial reporting, terms such as bad debt expenseEstimated expense from making sales on account to customers who will never pay; because of the matching principle, the expense is recorded in the same period as the sales revenue., “doubtful accounts expense,” or “the provision for uncollectible accounts” are often encountered for that purpose.

The inherent uncertainty as to the amount of cash that will be received affects the physical recording process. How is a reduction reported if the amount will not be known until sometime in the future?

To illustrate, assume that a company makes sales on account to one hundred different customers late in Year One for $1,000 each. The earning process is substantially complete at the time of sale and the amount of cash to be received can be reasonably estimated. According to the revenue realization principle within accrual accounting, the company should immediately recognize the $100,000 revenue generated by these transactions.Because the focus of the discussion here is on accounts receivable and their collectability, the recognition of cost of goods sold as well as the possible return of any merchandise will be omitted at this time.

Figure 7.1 Journal Entry—Year One—Sales Made on Credit

Assume further that the company’s past history and other relevant information lead officials to estimate that approximately 7 percent of all credit sales will prove to be uncollectible. An expense of $7,000 (7 percent of $100,000) is anticipated because only $93,000 in cash is expected from these receivables rather than the full $100,000 that was recorded.

The specific identity and the actual amount of these bad accounts will probably not be known for many months. No physical evidence exists at the time of sale to indicate which will become worthless (buyers rarely make a purchase and then immediately declare bankruptcy or leave town). For convenience, accountants wait until financial statements are to be produced before making this estimation of net realizable value. The necessary reduction is then recorded by means of an adjusting entry.

In the adjustment, an expense is recognized. This method of presentation has a long history in financial accounting. However, recently FASB has been discussing whether a direct reduction in revenue might not be a more appropriate approach to portray bad debts. Financial accounting rules are under constant scrutiny, which leads to continual evolution.

Bad Debts and the Matching Principle

Question: This company holds $100,000 in accounts receivable but only expects to collect $93,000 based on available evidence. The $7,000 reduction in the asset is an expense. When should the expense be recognized? These sales were made in Year One but the specific identity of the customers who fail to pay and the actual uncollectible amounts will not be determined until Year Two. Should bad debt expense be recognized in the same year as the sales by relying on an estimate or delayed until the actual results are eventually finalized? How is the uncertainty addressed?

 

Answer: This situation illustrates how accrual accounting plays such a key role within financial reporting. As discussed previously, the timing of expense recognition according to accrual accounting is based on the matching principle. Where possible, expenses are recorded in the same period as the revenues they helped generate. The guidance is clear. Thus, every company should handle uncollectible accounts in the same manner. The expected expense is the result of making sales to customers who ultimately will never pay. Because the revenue was reported at the time of sale in Year One, the related expense is also recognized in that year. This handling is appropriate according to accrual accounting even though the $7,000 is only an estimated figure.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 7.2 “Adjusting Entry—End of Year One—Recognition of Bad Debt Expense for the Period”, when the company produces financial statements at the end of Year One, an adjusting entry is made to (1) reduce the receivables balance to its net realizable value and (2) recognize the expense in the same period as the related revenue.

Figure 7.2 Adjusting Entry—End of Year One—Recognition of Bad Debt Expense for the Period

After this entry is made and posted to the ledger, the Year One financial statements contain the information shown in Figure 7.3 “Year One—Financial Statements” based on the adjusted T-account balances (assuming for convenience that no other sales were made during the year):

Figure 7.3 Year One—Financial Statements

From this information, anyone studying these financial statements should understand that an expense estimated at $7,000 was incurred this year because the company made sales of that amount that will never be collected. In addition, year-end accounts receivable total $100,000 but have an anticipated net realizable value of only $93,000. Neither the $7,000 nor the $93,000 figure is expected to be exact but the eventual amounts should not be materially different. With an understanding of financial accounting, the reported information is clear.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company’s general ledger includes a balance for bad debt expense and another for the allowance for doubtful accounts. Which of the following statements is true?

  1. Both bad debt expense and the allowance for doubtful accounts are reported on the income statement.
  2. Both bad debt expense and the allowance for doubtful accounts are reported on the balance sheet.
  3. Bad debt expense is reported on the income statement; the allowance for doubtful accounts is reported on the balance sheet.
  4. Bad debt expense is reported on the balance sheet; the allowance for doubtful accounts is reported on the income statement.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: Bad debt expense is reported on the income statement; the allowance for doubtful accounts is reported on the balance sheet.

Explanation:

Bad debt expense is reported on the income statement to show the amount of sales recognized this year that the company estimates will not be collected. The allowance for doubtful accounts is a contra asset account reported on the balance sheet to reduce accounts receivable to their estimated net realizable value.

The Need for a Separate Allowance Account

Question: When financial statements are prepared, an expense must be recognized and the receivable balance reduced to net realizable value. However, in the previous adjusting entry, why was the accounts receivable account not directly decreased by $7,000 to the anticipated balance of $93,000? This approach is simpler as well as easier to understand. Why was the $7,000 added to this contra asset account? In reporting receivables, why does the accountant go to the trouble of creating a separate allowance for reduction purposes?

 

Answer: When the company prepares the adjustment in Figure 7.2 “Adjusting Entry—End of Year One—Recognition of Bad Debt Expense for the Period” at the end of Year One, the actual accounts that will not be collected are unknown. Officials are only guessing that $7,000 will prove worthless. Plus, on the balance sheet date, the company does hold $100,000 in accounts receivable. That figure cannot be reduced directly until the specific identity of the accounts to be written off has been established. Utilizing a separate allowance allows the company to communicate the expected amount of cash while still maintaining a record of all balances in the accounts receivable T-account.

Key Takeaway

A sale on account and the eventual decision that the cash will never be collected can happen months, if not years, apart. During the interim, bad debts are estimated and recorded on the income statement as an expense and on the balance sheet by means of an allowance account, a contra asset. Through this process, the receivable balance is shown at net realizable value while expenses are recognized in the same period as the sale to correspond with the matching principle. When financial statements are prepared, an estimation of the uncollectible amounts is made and an adjusting entry recorded. Thus, the expense, the allowance account, and the accounts receivable are all presented according to financial accounting standards.

7.3 The Problem with Estimations

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Record the impact of discovering that a specific receivable is uncollectible.
  2. Understand the reason an expense is not recognized when a receivable is deemed to be uncollectible.
  3. Record the collection of a receivable that has previously been written off as uncollectible.
  4. Recognize that estimated figures often prove to be erroneous, but changes in previous year figures are not made if the reported balance was a reasonable estimate.

The Write-Off of an Uncollectible Account

Question: The company in the above illustration expects to collect cash from its receivables that will not materially differ from $93,000. The $7,000 bad debt expense is recorded in the same period as the revenue through a Year One adjusting entry.

What happens when an actual account is determined to be uncollectible? For example, assume that on March 13, Year Two, a $1,000 balance is judged to be worthless. The customer dies, declares bankruptcy, disappears, or just refuses to make payment. This $1,000 is not a new expense. A total of $7,000 was already anticipated and recognized in Year One. It is merely the first discovery. How does the subsequent write-off of an uncollectible receivable affect the various T-account balances?

 

Answer: When an account proves to be uncollectible, the receivable T-account is decreased. The $1,000 balance is simply removed. It is not viewed as an asset because it has no future economic benefit. Furthermore, the amount of bad accounts within the receivables is no longer anticipated as $7,000. Because this first worthless receivable has been identified and eliminated, only $6,000 remains in the allowance for doubtful accounts.

In Figure 7.4 “Journal Entry during Year Two—Write-Off of Specific Account as Uncollectible”, the journal entry is shown to write off this account. Throughout the year, this entry is repeated whenever a balance is found to be worthless. No additional expense is recognized. The expense was estimated and recorded in the previous period to comply with accrual accounting and the matching principle.

Figure 7.4 Journal Entry during Year Two—Write-Off of Specific Account as Uncollectible

Two basic steps in the recording of doubtful accounts are shown here.

  1. Reporting of uncollectible accounts in the year of sale based on estimation. The amount of bad accounts is estimated whenever financial statements are to be produced. An adjusting entry then recognizes the expense in the same period as the sales revenue. It also increases the allowance for doubtful accounts (to reduce the reported receivable balance to its anticipated net realizable value).
  2. Write-off of an account judged to be uncollectible. Subsequently, whenever a specific account is deemed to be worthless, the balance is removed from both the accounts receivable and the allowance-for-doubtful-accounts T-accounts. The related expense has been recognized previously and is not affected by the removal of a specific uncollectible account.

These two steps are followed consistently throughout the reporting of sales made on account and the subsequent collection (or write-off) of the balances.

Test Yourself

Question:

Near the end of Year One, a company is beginning to prepare financial statements. Accounts receivable total $320,000, but the net realizable value is only expected to be $290,000. On the last day of the year, the company realizes that a $3,000 receivable has become worthless and must be written off. The debtor had declared bankruptcy and will never be able to pay. What is the impact of this decision?

  1. The net amount reported for receivables goes down.
  2. The net amount reported for receivables stays the same.
  3. The net amount reported for receivables goes up.
  4. A company cannot write off an account at the end of the year in this manner.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: The net amount reported for receivables stays the same.

Explanation:

The allowance for doubtful accounts is $30,000 ($320,000 total less a net realizable value of $290,000). Writing off a $3,000 account reduces the receivable total from $320,000 to $317,000. In addition, the allowance drops from $30,000 to $27,000. The net balance to be reported remains $290,000 ($317,000 less $27,000). The company still expects to collect $290,000 from its receivables and reports that balance. Writing an account off as uncollectible does not impact the anticipated figure.

Collecting Accounts Previously Written Off

Question: An account receivable is judged as a bad debt and an adjusting entry is prepared to remove it from the ledger accounts. What happens then? After a receivable has been written off as uncollectible, does the company cease in its attempts to collect the amount due from the customer?

 

Answer: Organizations always make every possible effort to recover money they are owed. Writing off an account simply means that the chances of collection are deemed to be slim. Efforts to force payment will continue, often with increasingly aggressive techniques. If money is ever received from a written off account, the company first reinstates the account by reversing the earlier entry (Figure 7.5 “Journal Entry—Reinstate Account Previously Thought to Be Worthless”). Then, the cash received is recorded in the normal fashion (Figure 7.6 “Journal Entry—Collection of Reinstated Account”). The two entries shown here are appropriate if the above account is eventually collected from this customer. Some companies combine these entries by simply debiting cash and crediting the allowance. That single entry has the same overall impact as Figure 7.5 “Journal Entry—Reinstate Account Previously Thought to Be Worthless” and Figure 7.6 “Journal Entry—Collection of Reinstated Account”.

Figure 7.5 Journal Entry—Reinstate Account Previously Thought to Be Worthless

Figure 7.6 Journal Entry—Collection of Reinstated AccountMany companies combine these two entries for convenience. The debit to accounts receivable in the first entry exactly offsets the credit in the second. Thus, the same recording impact is achieved by simply debiting cash and crediting the allowance for doubtful accounts. However, the rationale for that single entry is not always as evident to a beginning student.

Reporting an Incorrect Estimation

Question: In this illustration, at the end of Year One, the company estimated that $7,000 of its accounts receivable will ultimately prove to be uncollectible. However, in Year Two, that figure is likely to be proven wrong. It is merely a calculated guess. The actual amount might be $6,000 or $8,000 or many other numbers. When the precise figure is known, does a company return to its Year One financial statements and adjust them to the correct balance? Should a company continue reporting an estimated figure for a previous year even after it has been shown to be incorrect?

 

Answer: According to U.S. GAAP, if a number in an earlier year is reported based on a reasonable estimation, any subsequent differences with actual amounts are not handled retroactively (by changing the previously released figures). For example, if uncollectible accounts here prove to be $8,000, the company does not adjust the balance reported as the Year One bad debt expense from $7,000 to $8,000. It continues to report $7,000 on the income statement for that period even though that number is now known to be wrong.

There are several practical reasons for the accountant’s unwillingness to adjust previously reported estimations unless they were clearly unreasonable or fraudulent:

  1. Most decision makers are well aware that many reported figures represent estimates. Discrepancies are expected and should be taken into consideration when making decisions based on numbers presented in a set of financial statements. In analyzing this company and its financial health, educated investors and creditors anticipate that the total of bad accounts will ultimately turn out to be an amount that is not materially different from $7,000 rather than exactly $7,000.
  2. Because an extended period of time often exists between issuing statements and determining actual balances, most parties will have already used the original information to make their decisions. Knowing the exact number now does not allow them to undo those prior actions. There is no discernable benefit from having updated figures as long as the original estimate was reasonable.
  3. Financial statements contain numerous estimations and nearly all will prove to be inaccurate to some degree. If exactness were required, correcting each of these previously reported figures would become virtually a never-ending task for a company and its accountants. Scores of updated statements might have to be issued before a “final” set of financial figures became available after several years. For example, the exact life of a building might not be known for 50 years or more. Decision makers want information that is usable as soon as possible. Speed in reporting is far more important than absolute precision.
  4. At least theoretically, half of the differences between actual and anticipated results should make the reporting company look better and half make it look worse. If so, the corrections needed to rectify all previous estimation errors will tend to offset and have little overall impact on a company’s reported income and financial condition.

Thus, no change is made in financial figures that have already been released whenever a reasonable estimation proves to be wrong. However, differences that arise should be taken into consideration in creating current and subsequent statements. For example, if the Year One bad debts were expected to be 7 percent, but 8 percent actually proved to be uncollectible, the accountant might well choose to use a higher percentage at the end of Year Two to reflect this new knowledge.

Recording Receivable Transactions in Subsequent Years

Question: To carry the previous illustration one step further, assume that $400,000 in new credit sales are made during Year Two while cash of $330,000 is collected. Uncollectible receivables totaling $10,000 are written off in that year. What balances appear in the various T-accounts at the end of a subsequent year to reflect sales, collections, and the write-off of uncollectible receivables?

 

Answer: Sales and bad debt expense were reported previously for Year One. However, as income statement accounts, both were closed out in order to begin Year Two with zero balances. They are temporary accounts. In contrast, accounts receivable and the allowance for doubtful accounts appear on the balance sheet and retain their ending figures going into each subsequent period. They are permanent accounts. Thus, these two T-accounts still show $100,000 and $7,000 respectively at the beginning of Year Two.

Assuming that no adjusting entries have yet been recorded, these four accounts hold the balances shown in Figure 7.7 “End of Year Two—Sales, Receivables, and Bad Debt Balances” at the end of Year Two. Notice that the bad debt expense account remains at zero until the end-of-year estimation is made and recorded.

Figure 7.7 End of Year Two—Sales, Receivables, and Bad Debt Balances

Residual Balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

Question: In the T-accounts in Figure 7.7 “End of Year Two—Sales, Receivables, and Bad Debt Balances”, the balances represent account totals for Year Two prior to year-end adjusting entries. Why does a debit balance of $3,000 appear in the allowance for doubtful accounts before recording the necessary adjustment for the current year? When a debit balance is found in the allowance for doubtful accounts, what does this figure signify?

 

Answer: When Year One financial statements were produced, $7,000 was estimated as the amount of receivables that would eventually be identified as uncollectible. In Year Two, the actual total written off turned out to be $10,000. The original figure was too low by $3,000. This difference is now reflected by the debit remaining in the allowance account. Until the estimation for the current year is determined and recorded, the balance residing in the allowance account indicates a previous underestimation (an ending debit balance) or overestimation (a credit) of the amount of worthless accounts.The $3,000 debit figure is assumed here for convenience to be solely the result of underestimating uncollectible accounts in Year One. Several other factors may also be present. For example, the balance in the allowance for doubtful accounts will be impacted by credit sales made in the current year that are discovered to be worthless before the end of the period. Such accounts actually reduce the allowance T-account prior to the recognition of an expense. The residual allowance balance is also affected by the collection of accounts that were written off as worthless in an earlier year. As described earlier, the allowance is actually increased by that event. However, the financial reporting is not altered by the actual cause of the final allowance figure.

Key Takeaway

Bad debt expense is estimated and recorded in the period of sale to correspond with the matching principle. Subsequent write-offs of specific accounts do not affect the expense further. Rather, both the asset and the allowance for doubtful accounts are decreased at that time. If a written off account is subsequently collected, the allowance account is increased to reverse the previous impact. Estimation errors are anticipated in financial accounting; perfect predictions are rarely possible. When the amount of uncollectible accounts differs from the original figure recognized, no retroactive adjustment is made to restate earlier figures as long as a reasonable estimate was made. Decisions have already been made by investors and creditors based on the original data and cannot be reversed. These decision makers should have understood that the information they were using could not possibly reflect exact amounts.

7.4 The Actual Estimation of Uncollectible Accounts

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Estimate and record bad debts when the percentage of sales method is applied.
  2. Estimate and record bad debts when the percentage of receivables method is applied.
  3. Explain the reason that bad debt expense and the allowance for doubtful accounts normally report different figures.
  4. Understand the reason for maintaining a subsidiary ledger.

Two Methods for Estimating Uncollectible Accounts

Question: The final step in reporting receivables for Year Two is the estimation of the bad accounts incurred during this period. This calculation enables the preparation of the year-end adjusting entry. According to the ledger balances in Figure 7.7 “End of Year Two—Sales, Receivables, and Bad Debt Balances”, sales on credit for the year were $400,000, remaining accounts receivable amount to $160,000, and a $3,000 debit sits in the allowance for doubtful accounts. No recording has yet been made for the Year Two bad debt expense. How does the accountant arrive at the estimation of uncollectible accounts each year?

 

Answer: Much of financial accounting is quite standardized. However, estimations can be made by any method that is considered logical. After all, it is an estimate. Over the decades, two different approaches have come to predominate when predicting the amount of uncollectible receivables. As long as company officials obtain sufficient evidence to support the reported numbers, either way can be applied.

Percentage of sales methodAn income statement approach for estimating uncollectible accounts that computes bad debt expense by multiplying sales (or just credit sales) by the percentage that are not expected to be collected.. This approach computes the current period expense by anticipating the percentage of sales (or credit sales) that will eventually fail to be collected. The percentage of sales method is sometimes referred to as an income statement approach because the only number being estimated (bad debt expense) appears on the income statement.

Percentage of receivables methodA balance sheet approach for estimating uncollectible accounts that computes the allowance for doubtful accounts by multiplying ending accounts receivable by the percentage that are not expected to be collected.. Here, the proper balance for the allowance for doubtful accounts is determined based on the percentage of ending accounts receivable that are presumed to be uncollectible. This method is identified as a balance sheet approach because the only figure being estimated (the allowance for doubtful accounts) is found on the balance sheet. A common variation applied by many companies is the aging methodA variation of the percentage of receivables method where all receivables are first classified by age; the total of each category is then multiplied by an appropriate percentage and summed to determine the allowance balance to be reported., which first classifies all receivable balances by age and then multiplies each of those individual totals by a different percentage. Normally, a higher rate is used for accounts that are older because they are considered more likely to become uncollectible.

Applying the Percentage of Sales Method

Question: Assume that this company chooses to use the percentage of sales method. All available evidence is studied by officials who come to believe that 8 percent of the credit sales made during Year Two will prove to be worthless. In applying the percentage of sales method, what adjusting entry is made at the end of the year so that financial statements can be prepared and fairly presented?

 

Answer: According to the ledger account in Figure 7.7 “End of Year Two—Sales, Receivables, and Bad Debt Balances”, sales of $400,000 were made during Year Two. If uncollectible accounts are expected to be 8 percent of that amount, the expense for the period is $32,000 ($400,000 × 8 percent). Bad debt expense (the figure being estimated) must be raised from its present zero balance to $32,000. Bad debt expense must be reported as $32,000 when the process is completed.

Figure 7.8 Adjusting Entry for Year Two—Uncollectible Accounts Estimated as a Percentage of Sales

The adjustment in Figure 7.8 “Adjusting Entry for Year Two—Uncollectible Accounts Estimated as a Percentage of Sales” does increase the expense to the $32,000 figure, the proper percentage of the sales figure. However, prior to adjustment, the allowance account held a residual $3,000 debit balance ($7,000 Year One estimation less $10,000 accounts written off). As can be seen in Figure 7.9 “Resulting T-Accounts, Based on Percentage of Sales Method”, the $32,000 recorded expense for Year Two results in only a $29,000 balance for the allowance for doubtful accounts.

Figure 7.9 Resulting T-Accounts, Based on Percentage of Sales Method

After this adjustment, the figures appearing in the financial statements for Year Two are shown in Figure 7.10 “Uncollectible Accounts Estimated Based on 8 Percent of Sales”.

Figure 7.10 Uncollectible Accounts Estimated Based on 8 Percent of Sales

Test Yourself

Question:

The Travers Corporation starts operations in Year One and makes credit sales of $300,000 per year while collecting cash of only $200,000 per year. During each year, $15,000 in accounts are judged to be uncollectible. The company estimates that 8 percent of its credit sales will eventually prove to be worthless. What is reported as the allowance for doubtful accounts on the company’s balance sheet at the end of Year Two?

  1. $15,000
  2. $18,000
  3. $24,000
  4. $30,000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: $18,000.

Explanation:

At the end of Year One, the allowance account will show a $15,000 debit for the accounts written off and a 24,000 credit for the estimated bad debt expense ($300,000 × 8 percent) for a reported total of $9,000. During Year Two, another $15,000 debit is recorded because of the accounts written off and a second $24,000 credit is recorded to recognize the current year’s expense. The allowance balance is now $18,000 ($9,000 − $15,000 + $24,000).

The Difference Between Bad Debt Expense and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

Question: Figure 7.10 “Uncollectible Accounts Estimated Based on 8 Percent of Sales” presents the financial statement figures for this company for Year Two. How can bad debt expense be reported on the income statement as $32,000, whereas the allowance for doubtful accounts on the balance sheet shows only $29,000? Should those two numbers not be identical in every set of financial statements?

 

Answer: The difference in these two accounts is caused by the failure of previous estimations to be accurate. In Year One, bad debt expense for this company was reported as $7,000 but accounts with balances totaling $10,000 actually proved to be uncollectible in Year Two. That caused an additional $3,000 reduction in the allowance as can be seen in Figure 7.7 “End of Year Two—Sales, Receivables, and Bad Debt Balances”. This amount carries through and causes the allowance for doubtful account to be $3,000 lower at the end of Year Two. The reported expense is the estimated amount ($32,000), but the allowance ($29,000) is $3,000 less because of the difference in the actual and expected amounts for Year One.

Students are often concerned because these two reported numbers differ. However, both are merely estimates. The actual amount of worthless accounts is quite likely to be a number entirely different from either $29,000 or $32,000. Therefore, the lingering impact of the $3,000 Year One underestimation should not be an issue as long as company officials believe that neither of the two reported balances is materially misstated.

Applying the Percentage of Receivables Method

Question: The percentage of receivables method handles the calculation of bad debts a bit differently. Assume that the Year Two adjusting entry has not yet been made so that bad debt expense remains at zero and the allowance for doubtful accounts still holds a $3,000 debit balance as shown in Figure 7.7 “End of Year Two—Sales, Receivables, and Bad Debt Balances”. Also assume that the company has now chosen to use the percentage of receivables method rather than the percentage of sales method. Officials have looked at all available evidence and come to the conclusion that 15 percent of ending accounts receivable ($160,000 × 15 percent or $24,000) are likely to prove uncollectible. How does application of the percentage of receivables method affect the recording of doubtful accounts?

 

Answer: The percentage of receivables method (or the aging method if that variation is used) views the estimated figure of $24,000 as the proper total for the allowance for doubtful accounts. Thus, the accountant must turn the $3,000 debit balance residing in that contra asset account into the proper $24,000 credit. That change can only be accomplished by recognizing an expense of $27,000 as shown in Figure 7.11 “Adjusting Entry for Year Two—Uncollectible Accounts Estimated as a Percentage of Receivables”. Under the percentage of receivables method, after the adjustment has been recorded, the allowance balance will equal the estimate ($24,000). The bad debt expense is not computed directly; it is the amount needed to arrive at this allowance figure.

Figure 7.11 Adjusting Entry for Year Two—Uncollectible Accounts Estimated as a Percentage of Receivables

As shown in Figure 7.12 “Resulting T-Accounts, Based on Percentage of Receivables Method”, this entry successfully changes the allowance from a $3,000 debit balance to the desired $24,000 credit. Because bad debt expense had a zero balance prior to this entry, it now reports the $27,000 amount needed to establish the proper allowance.

Figure 7.12 Resulting T-Accounts, Based on Percentage of Receivables Method

After this adjusting entry has been posted, the balances appearing in Figure 7.13 “Uncollectible Accounts Estimated Based on 15 Percent of Receivables” appear in the financial statements for Year Two.

Figure 7.13 Uncollectible Accounts Estimated Based on 15 Percent of Receivables

Once again, the reported expense ($27,000) is $3,000 higher than the allowance ($24,000). As before, the difference is the result of the estimation being too low in the prior year. The additional write-offs led to this lower balance in the allowance T-account.

Either approach can be used as long as adequate support is gathered for the numbers reported. They are just two alternatives to arrive at an estimate. However, financial accounting does stress the importance of consistency to help make numbers comparable from year to year. Once a method is selected, it normally must continue to be applied in all subsequent periods.

  • Under the percentage of sales method, the expense account is aligned with the volume of sales.
  • In applying the percentage of receivables method, the uncollectible portion of ending receivables is determined and reported as the allowance for doubtful accounts.

Regardless of the approach, both bad debt expense and the allowance for doubtful accounts are simply the result of estimating the final outcome of an uncertain event—the collection of accounts receivable.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Yarrow Corporation starts operations in Year One and makes credit sales of $400,000 per year while collecting cash of only $300,000 per year. During each year, $12,000 in accounts are judged to be uncollectible. The company estimates that 10 percent of its ending accounts receivable each year will eventually prove to be worthless. What is reported as bad debt expense on the company’s income statement for Year Two?

  1. $17,600
  2. $20,800
  3. $28,800
  4. $32,000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: $20,800.

Explanation:

In Year One, accounts receivable total $88,000 ($400,000 sales less $300,000 collections and $12,000 accounts written off). The allowance is $8,800 or 10 percent of the total. In Year Two, receivables rise to $176,000 ($88,000 plus $400,000 less $300,000 and $12,000). The allowance holds a debit of $3,200 ($8,800 beginning balance less $12,000 in write-offs). The allowance needs to be $17,600 (10 percent). To turn the $3,200 debit into a $17,600 credit, an expense of $20,800 is recognized.

The Purpose of a Subsidiary Ledger

Question: A company such as Dell Inc. must have thousands or even hundreds of thousands of separate receivables. The accounts receivable T-account in the ledger maintains the total of all amounts owed to a company but does not indicate the balance due from each individual customer. How does an accounting system monitor all the specific receivable amounts? Those balances must be essential information for any organization for billing and collection purposes.

 

Answer: As indicated, a ledger account only reflects a single total at the present time. In many cases, as with accounts receivable, the composition of that balance is also essential information. For those T-accounts, the accounting system can be expanded to include a subsidiary ledgerA group of individual accounts whose sum agrees with (and, therefore, explains) a general ledger account balance. to maintain data about the various individual components making up the account total.

In the previous illustration, the company reports $160,000 as the total of its accounts receivable at the end of Year Two. A separate subsidiary ledger should also be in place to monitor the amounts owed by each customer (Mr. A, Ms. B, and so on). The general ledger figure is used whenever financial statements are to be produced. The subsidiary ledger allows the company to access individual balances so that appropriate action can be taken when collection is received or if specific receivables grow too large or become overdue.

When a subsidiary ledger is maintained, the accounting system can be programmed so that each entry into the general ledger T-account requires an immediate parallel increase or decrease to the appropriate individual account. Thus, a $75 sale on credit to Mr. A raises the accounts receivable T-account total by that amount while also increasing the balance listed specifically for Mr. A in the subsidiary ledger.

Subsidiary ledgers can be established in connection with any general ledger account where the availability of component information is helpful. Other than accounts receivable, subsidiary ledgers are commonly set up for inventory, equipment, and accounts payable. As might be imagined, large enterprises maintain additional records for virtually every T-account, whereas small companies are likely to limit use to accounts receivable and—possibly—a few other significant balances.

Before computer systems became common, manually keeping the total of thousands of individual accounts in a subsidiary ledger in agreement with the corresponding general ledger T-account balance was an arduous task. Mechanical errors (mathematical problems as well as debit and credit mistakes) tended to abound. However, current electronic systems are typically designed so that the totals reconcile automatically.

Key Takeaway

Each year, an estimation of uncollectible accounts must be made as a preliminary step in the preparation of financial statements. Some companies use the percentage of sales method, which calculates the reported expense, an amount that is also added to the allowance for doubtful accounts. Other companies use the percentage of receivable method (or a variation known as the aging method). It determines the ending balance for the allowance. Bad debt expense is the amount required to adjust the allowance balance to this ending total. Both methods provide no more than an approximation of net realizable value based on the validity of the numerical percentages that are applied. Because actual and expected uncollectible amounts will differ, the expense and the allowance almost always report different balances. Regardless of the method employed, virtually all companies maintain a subsidiary ledger to provide the individual balances that comprise the total found in the general ledger T-account.

7.5 Reporting Foreign Currency Balances

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Recognize that transactions denominated in a foreign currency have become extremely common.
  2. Understand the necessity of remeasuring the value of foreign currency balances into a company’s functional currency prior to the preparation of financial statements.
  3. Appreciate the problem that fluctuations in exchange rates cause when foreign currency balances are reported in a set of financial statements.
  4. Know which foreign currency balances are reported using a historical exchange rate and which balances are reported using the currency exchange rate in effect on the date of the balance sheet.
  5. Understand that gains and losses are reported on a company’s income statement when foreign currency balances are remeasured using current exchange rates.

Reporting Balances Denominated in a Foreign Currency

Question: In today’s global economy, many U.S. companies make a sizable portion of their sales internationally. The Coca-Cola Company, for example, generated 69.7 percent of its revenues in 2010 outside of the United States. For McDonald’s Corporation, foreign revenues were 66.4 percent of the reported total.

In such cases, U.S. dollars might still be the currency received. However, U.S. companies frequently make sales that will be settled in a foreign currency such as the Mexican peso or the Japanese yen. For example, a sale made today might call for the transfer of 20,000 pesos in two months. What reporting problems are created when a credit sale is denominated in a foreign currency?

 

Answer: This situation is a perfect example of why authoritative standards, such as U.S. GAAP, are so important in financial accounting. Foreign currency balances are common in today’s world. Although a company will have a functional currency in which it normally operates (probably the U.S. dollar for a U.S. company), transactions often involve a number of currencies. For many companies, sales, purchases, expenses, and the like can be denominated in dozens of different currencies. A company’s financial statements may report U.S. dollars because that is its functional currency, but underlying amounts to be paid or received might be set in another currency such as the euro or the pound. Mechanically, many methods of reporting such foreign balances have been developed, each with a significantly different type of impact.

Without standardization, a decision maker would likely face a daunting task trying to analyze similar companies if they employed different approaches for reporting foreign currency figures. Assessing the comparative financial health and future prospects of organizations that do not use the same accounting always poses a difficult challenge for investors and creditors. That problem would be especially serious if optional approaches were allowed in connection with foreign currencies. Therefore, U.S. GAAP has long had an authoritative standard for this reporting.

The basic problem with reporting foreign currency balances is that exchange rates are constantly in flux. The price of one euro in terms of U.S. dollars changes many times each day. If these rates remained constant, a single conversion value could be determined at the time of the initial transaction and then used consistently for reporting purposes. However, currency exchange rates are rarely fixed; they often change moment by moment. For example, if a sale is made on account by a U.S. company with the money to be received in a foreign currency in 60 days, the relative worth of that balance in terms of U.S. dollars will probably move up and down countless times before collection. Because such values float, the reporting of these foreign currency amounts poses a challenge with no easy resolution.

Accounting for Changes in Currency Exchange Rates

Question: Exchange rates that vary over time create a reporting problem for companies operating in international markets. To illustrate, assume a U.S. company makes a sale of a service to a Mexican company on December 9, Year One, for 100,000 Mexican pesos that will be paid at a later date. Assume also that the exchange rate on the day when the sale was made was 1 peso equal to $0.08. However, by the end of Year One when financial statements are produced, the exchange rate is different: 1 peso is now worth $0.09. What reporting does a U.S. company make of transactions that are denominated in a foreign currency if the exchange rate changes as time passes?As has been stated previously, this is an introductory textbook. Thus, a more in-depth examination of many important topics, such as foreign currency balances, can be found in upper-level accounting texts. The coverage here of foreign currency balances is only designed to introduce students to basic reporting problems and their resolutions.

 

Answer: At the time of the sale, reporting is easy. The 100,000 pesos has an equivalent value of $8,000 (100,000 pesos × $0.08); thus, the journal entry in Figure 7.14 “Journal Entry—December 9, Year One—Sale of Services Made for 100,000 Pesos” is appropriate. Even though 100,000 pesos will be received, $8,000 is reported so that all balances on the seller’s financial statements are stated in terms of U.S. dollars.

Figure 7.14 Journal Entry—December 9, Year One—Sale of Services Made for 100,000 Pesos

By the end of the year, the exchange rate has changed so that 1 peso is equal to $0.09. The Mexican peso is worth a penny more in terms of the U.S. dollar. Thus, 100,000 pesos are more valuable and can now be exchanged for $9,000 (100,000 × $0.09). There are numerous reasons why the relative value of these two currencies might have changed, but the cause is not important from an accounting perspective.

When adjusting entries are prepared in connection with the production of financial statements at the end of Year One, one or both of the account balances (accounts receivable and sales of services) could remain at $8,000 or be updated to $9,000. The sale took place when the exchange rate was $0.08 but, now, before the money is collected, the peso has risen in value to $0.09. Accounting needs a standard rule as to whether the historical rate ($0.08) or the current rate ($0.09) is appropriate for reporting such foreign currency balances. Communication is difficult without that type of structure. Plus, the standard needs to be logical. It needs to make sense.

For over 25 years, U.S. GAAP has required that monetary assets and liabilitiesAmounts that are held by an organization as either cash or balances that will provide receipts or payments of a specified amount of cash in the future. denominated in a foreign currency be reported at the current exchange rate as of the balance sheet date. All other balances continue to be shown at the historical exchange rate in effect on the date of the original transaction. That is the approach that all organizations adhering to U.S. GAAP follow. Both the individuals who produce financial statements as well as the decision makers who use this information should understand the rule that is applied to resolve this reporting issue.

Monetary assets and liabilities are amounts currently held as cash or that will require a future transfer of a specified amount of cash. In the coverage here, for convenience, such monetary accounts will be limited to cash, receivables, and payables. Because these balances reflect current or future cash amounts, the current exchange rate is viewed as most relevant. In this illustration, the value of the receivable (a monetary asset) has changed in terms of U.S. dollars. The 100,000 pesos that will be collected have an equivalent value now of $0.09 each rather than $0.08. The reported receivable is updated to a value of $9,000 (100,000 pesos × $0.09).

Cash, receivables, and payables denominated in a foreign currency must be adjusted for reporting purposes whenever exchange rates fluctuate. All other account balances (equipment, sales, rent expense, dividends, and the like) reflect historical events and not future cash flows. Thus, they retain the rate in effect at the time of the original transaction and no further changes are ever needed. Because the sales figure is not a monetary asset or liability, the $8,000 balance continues to be reported regardless of the relative value of the peso.

The Income Effect of a Change in Currency Exchange Rates

Question: Changes in exchange rates affect the reporting of monetary assets and liabilities. Those amounts are literally worth more or less U.S. dollars as the relative value of the currency fluctuates over time. For the two balances above, the account receivable has to be remeasured on the date of the balance sheet because it is a monetary asset whereas the sales balance remains reported as $8,000 permanently. How is this change in the receivable accomplished? When monetary assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency are remeasured for reporting purposes, how is the increase or decrease in value reflected?

 

Answer: In this example, the value of the 100,000-peso receivable is raised from $8,000 to $9,000. When the amount reported for monetary assets and liabilities increases or decreases because of changes in currency exchange rates, a gain or loss is recognized on the income statement. Here, the reported receivable is now $1,000 higher. The company’s financial condition has improved and a gain is recognized. If the opposite occurs and the reported value of monetary assets declines (or the value of monetary liabilities increases), a loss is recognized. The adjusting entry shown in Figure 7.15 “Adjusting Entry at December 31, Year One—Remeasurement of 100,000 Pesos Receivable” is appropriate to reflect this change.

Figure 7.15 Adjusting Entry at December 31, Year One—Remeasurement of 100,000 Pesos Receivable

On its balance sheet, this company now reports a receivable as of December 31, Year One, of $9,000 while its income statement for that year shows sales revenue of $8,000 as well as the above gain of $1,000. Although the transaction was actually for 100,000 Mexican pesos, the company records these events in terms of its functional currency (the U.S. dollar) according to the provisions of U.S. GAAP.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Hamerstein Company is considering opening a retail store in Kyoto, Japan. In April of Year One, the company buys an acre of land in Kyoto by signing a note for ninety million Japanese yen to be paid in ten years. On that date, one yen can be exchanged for $0.012. By the end of Year One, one yen can be exchanged for $0.01. In connection with the company’s Year One financial statements, which of the following statements is not true?

  1. The company should report a loss because it held land during a time when the exchange rates changed.
  2. The company should report the note payable as $900,000 on its year-end balance sheet.
  3. The company should report the land as $1.08 million on its year-end balance sheet.
  4. The company should report a $180,000 gain because it held the note payable during this time.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: The company should report a $180,000 gain because it held the note payable during this time.

Explanation:

Because land is not a monetary account, it is initially recorded at $1.08 million (90 million yen × $0.012). That figure is never changed by future currency exchange rate fluctuations. Thus, no gain or loss is created by the land account. As a monetary account, the note payable is initially recorded at the same $1.08 million but is adjusted to $900,000 at the end of the year (90 million yen × $0.01). That $180,000 drop in the reported liability creates a reported gain of that amount.

Key Takeaway

Foreign currency balances are prevalent because many companies buy and sell products and services internationally. Although these transactions are frequently denominated in foreign currencies, they are reported in U.S. dollars when financial statements are produced for distribution in this country. Because exchange rates often change rapidly, many equivalent values could be calculated for these balances. According to U.S. GAAP, monetary assets and liabilities (cash as well as receivables and payables to be settled in cash) are updated for reporting purposes using the exchange rate at the current date. Changes in these balances create gains or losses to be recognized on the income statement. All other foreign currency balances (land, buildings, sales, expenses, and the like) continue to be shown at the historical exchange rate in effect at the time of the original transaction.

7.6 A Company’s Vital Signs—Accounts Receivable

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Compute the current ratio, the amount of working capital, and other figures pertinent to the reporting of accounts receivable.
  2. Describe the implications of a company’s current ratio.
  3. Describe the implications of a company’s working capital balance.
  4. Calculate the amount of time that passes before the average accounts receivable is collected and explain the importance of this information.
  5. List techniques that a business can implement to speed up collection of its accounts receivable.

Current Ratio and Working Capital

Question: Individuals analyze financial statements to make logical and appropriate decisions about a company’s financial health and well being. This process is somewhat similar to a medical doctor performing a physical examination on a patient. The doctor often begins by checking various vital signs, such as heart rate, blood pressure, weight, cholesterol level, and body temperature, looking for any signs of a serious change or problem. For example, if a person’s heart rate is higher than expected or if blood pressure has increased significantly since the last visit, the doctor will investigate with special care. In analyzing the financial statements of a business or other organization, are there vital signs that should be measured and studied by a decision maker?

 

Answer: Financial statements are extremely complex and most analysts have certain preferred figures or ratios that they believe are especially significant when investigating a company. For example, in a previous chapter, both the current ratioFormula measuring an organization’s liquidity (the ability to pay debts as they come due); calculated by dividing current assets by current liabilities. and the amount of working capitalFormula measuring an organization’s liquidity (the ability to pay debts as they come due); calculated by subtracting current liabilities from current assets. were computed using the balances reported for current assets (those that will be used or consumed within one year) and current liabilities (those that will be paid within one year):

current ratio = current assets/current liabilities working capital = current assets – current liabilities

These figures reflect a company’s liquidity, or its ability to pay its debts as they come due and still have enough monetary resources available to generate profits in the near future. Both investors and creditors frequently calculate, study, and analyze these two amounts. They are vital signs that help indicate the financial health of a business and its future prospects.

For example, on December 31, 2010, Avon Products reported a current ratio of 1.42 to 1.00 (current assets of $4.184 billion divided by current liabilities of $2.956 billion), which was down from 1.84 to 1.00 at the end of 2009. On the same date at the end of 2010, Caterpillar disclosed working capital of $9.790 billion (current assets of $31.810 billion less current liabilities of $22.020 billion). Caterpillar’s working capital increased by over $1.5 billion from the previous year when it was reported as $8.242 billion.

Whether these numbers are impressive or worrisome almost always depends on a careful comparison with other similar companies and results from prior years.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Winsolie Corporation reports the following asset balances: cash—$4,000, accounts receivable, net—$17,000, inventory—$13,000, and land—$22,000. The company also has the following liabilities: salaries payable—$6,000, accounts payable—$4,000, note payable, due in seven months—$5,000, and note payable, due in five years—$14,000. What is the company’s current ratio?

  1. 1.400 to 1.000
  2. 1.931 to 1.000
  3. 2.267 to 1.000
  4. 3.733 to 1.000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: 2.267 to 1.000.

Explanation:

Current assets are usually those that will be used or consumed within one year. For this company, that is cash, accounts receivable, and inventory that total to $34,000. Current liabilities are debts that will be paid within one year: salaries payable of $6,000, accounts payable of $4,000, and note payable due in seven months of $5,000. The current liability total for this company is $15,000. Thus, the current ratio is $34,000 divided by $15,000 or 2.267 to 1.000.

Computing the Age of Accounts Receivable

Question: This chapter deals with the financial reporting of accounts receivable. What other vital signs might be studied in connection with a company’s receivable balance?

 

Answer: One indication of a company’s financial health is its ability to collect receivables in a timely fashion. Money cannot be put to productive use until it is received. For that reason, companies work to encourage customers to make payments as quickly as possible. Furthermore, as stated previously in this chapter, the older a receivable becomes, the more likely it is to prove worthless.

Thus, interested parties (both inside a company as well as external) frequently monitor the time taken to collect receivables. Quick collection is normally viewed as desirable, whereas a slower rate can be a warning sign of possible problems. However, as with most generalizations, exceptions do exist so further investigation is always advised.

The age of a company’s receivables is determined by dividing the receivable balance by the average sales made per day. Credit sales are used in this computation if known, but the total sales figure often has to serve as a substitute because of availability. The sales balance is first divided by 365 to derive the amount of sales per day. This daily balance is then divided into the reported receivable to arrive at the average number of days that the company waits to collect its money. A significant change in the age of receivables will be quickly noted by almost any interested party.

age of receivables = receivables/sales per day

For example, if a company reports sales for the current year of $7,665,000 and currently holds $609,000 in receivables, it requires 29 days on the average to collect a receivable.

sales per day = $7,665,000/365 or $21,000 age of receivables = $609,000/$21,000 or 29 days

As a practical illustration, for the year ended January 28, 2011, Dell Inc. reported net revenue of $61.494 billion. The January 28, 2011, net accounts receivable balance for the company was $6.493 billion, which was up from $5.837 billion the year before. The daily sales figure is $168.5 million ($61.494 billion/365 days). Thus, the average age of Dell’s ending receivable balance at this time was 38.5 days ($6.493 billion/$168.5 million). By itself, this figure is neither good nor bad. An assessment depends on the terms given to customers, the time of collection in other recent years, and comparable figures for companies in the same industry as Dell.

A similar figure is referred to as the receivables turnoverFormula measuring speed of an organization’s collection of its accounts receivable; calculated by dividing sales by the average accounts receivable balance for the period. and is computed by the following formula:

receivables turnover = sales/average receivables.

For Dell Inc., the average receivable balance for this year was $6.165 billion ([$6.493 billion + $5.837]/2). The receivables turnover for Dell for this period of time was 9.97 times:

receivables turnover = $61.494 billion/$6.165 billion = 9.97.

The higher the receivable turnover, the faster collections are being received.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Yang Corporation recently extended the time that customers are given to pay their accounts receivable. Investors are interested in the impact of that decision. In Year One, the company had $730,000 in sales with $58,000 in accounts receivable on hand at the end of the year. In Year Two, sales grew to $1,095,000 but accounts receivable also rose to $114,000. Which of the following statements is true?

  1. The receivables turnover for Year Two was 9.61 times.
  2. The age of the receivables at the end of Year Two was thirty-three days.
  3. The receivables turnover for Year Two was 10.18 times.
  4. The age of the receivables at the end of Year Two was thirty-eight days.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: The age of the receivables at the end of Year Two was thirty-eight days.

Explanation:

The receivables turnover for Year Two is the sales for the year ($1,095,000) divided by the average receivable balance of $86,000 ([$58,000 + $114,000] divided by 2). The receivables turnover is 12.73 ($1,095,000/$86,000). Computing the age of receivables begins by calculating the average sales per day as $3,000 ($1,095,000/365 days). That figure is divided into the ending receivable of $114,000 to arrive at thirty-eight days. On average, that is the time between a sale being made and cash collected.

Reducing the Time It Takes to Collect Receivables

Question: If members of management notice that the average age of accounts receivable Formula measuring the average length of time it takes to collect cash from sales; calculated by dividing either accounts receivable at a point in time or the average accounts receivable for the period by the average sales made per day. for their company is getting older, what type of remedial actions can be taken? How does a company reduce the average number of days that are required to collect receivables so that cash is available more quickly?

 

Answer: A number of strategies can be used by astute officials to shorten the time between a sale being made and cash collected. The following are just a few common examples. Unfortunately, all such actions have a cost and can cause a negative impact on the volume of sales or create expenses that might outweigh the benefits of quicker cash inflows. Management should make such decisions with extreme care.

  • Require a tighter review of credit worthiness before selling to a customer on credit. If sales on account are only made to individuals and companies with significant financial strength, the quantity of delayed payments should decline.
  • Work to make the company’s own accounting system more efficient so that bills (sales invoices) are sent to customers in a timely manner. Payments are rarely made—even by the best customers—before initial notification is received. If the billing system is not well designed and effectively operated, that process can be unnecessarily slow.
  • Offer a discount if a customer pays quickly. This action has an obvious cost, but such reductions provide a strong incentive to the customer for fast action.
  • Send out second bills more quickly. Customers often need reminding that a debt is due. An invoice marked “late” or “overdue” will often push the recipient into making payment. A company might decide to send out this notice after 30 days—as an example—rather than wait for 45 days.
  • Instigate a more aggressive collection policy for accounts that are not paid on time. Companies use numerous strategies to “encourage” payment and begin applying these steps at an earlier point in time.

Most companies monitor the age of receivables very carefully and use some combination of these strategies whenever any sign of problem is noted.

Key Takeaway

Decision makers analyzing a particular company often look beyond reported balances in search of clues as to financial strengths or weaknesses. Both the current ratio and the amount of working capital provide an indication of short-term liquidity (ability to pay debts as they come due) and profitability. The age of receivables and the receivables turnover are measures of the speed of cash collections. Any change in the time needed to obtain payments from customers should be carefully considered when studying a company. Management can work to shorten the number of days it takes to receive cash by altering credit, billing, and collection policies or possibly by offering discounts or other incentives for quick payment.

Talking with a Real Investing Pro (Continued)

Following is a continuation of our interview with Kevin G. Burns.

 

Question: Let’s say that you are analyzing a particular company and are presently looking at its current assets. When you are studying a company’s accounts receivable, what types of information tend to catch your attention?

Kevin Burns: I look at three areas specifically. First, how long does it take for the company to collect its accounts receivable especially compared to previous periods? I really don’t like to see radical changes in the age of receivables without some logical explanation. Second, how lenient is the company in offering credit? Are they owed money by weak customers or a small concentration of customers? Third, does the company depend on interest income and late charges on their accounts receivable for a significant part of their revenue? Some companies claim to be in business to sell products but they are really finance companies because they make their actual profits from finance charges that are added to the accounts receivable. It is always important to know how a company earns money.

Video Clip

(click to see video)

Professor Joe Hoyle talks about the five most important points in Chapter 7 “In Financial Reporting, What Information Is Conveyed about Receivables?”.

7.7 End-of-Chapter Exercises

Questions

  1. A company reports a balance of $3.6 million for its “accounts receivable.” What is meant by accounts receivable? How are accounts receivable reported in a set of financial statements?
  2. How is the net realizable value of a company’s accounts receivable determined?
  3. The Sylvester Corporation has accounts receivable that total $4.5 million. However, the company does not expect to collect that much cash. Identify several factors that a company might consider when trying to determine the amount of these accounts receivable that will ultimately be collected.
  4. What does the account “allowance for doubtful accounts” represent?
  5. In financial reporting, what is the purpose of a “contra account?”
  6. According to the matching principle, when should bad debt expense be reported?
  7. Why do companies set up an allowance for doubtful accounts instead of just decreasing accounts receivable for the expected amount of uncollectible balances?
  8. The Abrahim Corporation discovered that one of its customers went into bankruptcy and will not be able to pay the $8,700 balance that it owes. What entry does a company like Abrahim make to write off a specific account receivable that has proven to be uncollectible?
  9. A company writes off a $12,000 receivable as uncollectible. How does that entry change the amount reported by the company as its net receivable balance?
  10. A company writes off a $2,200 receivable as uncollectible. How does that entry impact the reported net income of this company at that time?
  11. In Year One, Jordan Company writes off nine accounts with a total balance of $11,675 as uncollectible. During Year Two, one of these accounts is paid because the debtor company has received financing and grown in strength. What entry does Jordan make when this cash is received?
  12. In Year One, the Castagna Company reported bad debt expense of $37,000. However, in Year Two, the economy was weak and the company actually wrote off $43,000 in accounts as uncollectible. The $37,000 figure continued to be reported in the Year One financial statements. Why did Castagna not change the balance reported for Year One now that the actual number is known?
  13. The Nagano Corporation is preparing financial statements for the latest year. The company sells on credit and, thus, must anticipate the amount of its bad accounts. What are the most common methods for making this estimation?
  14. At the end of Year Two, before making adjusting entries and preparing financial statements, a company’s allowance-for-doubtful-accounts T-account usually has a balance in it. What does that balance reflect?
  15. In its Year Two financial statements, the Heather Company reported bad debt expense of $35,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $34,000. Why are these figures not identical?
  16. What is the purpose of a company maintaining an accounts receivable subsidiary ledger?
  17. Why does the reporting of balances denominated in a foreign currency create challenges for the accountant when producing financial statements?
  18. What are monetary assets and monetary liabilities?
  19. The Lenoir Corporation has 47 T-accounts in its general ledger. Most of these balances are denominated in U.S. dollars, its functional currency. Some of the balances are dominated in a foreign currency. Which of these foreign currency balances are remeasured at historical exchange rates and which are remeasured at the current exchange rate for reporting purposes?
  20. How is the current ratio calculated? How is the amount of working capital determined? What do these two computed amounts indicate about a company’s financial health?
  21. How do decision makers determine the average age of a reporting entity’s accounts receivable?
  22. How do decision makers determine the receivables turnover based on the information reported by a company?
  23. The Pierce Company sells its merchandise on credit. At the end of Year One, company customers took an average of 23.3 days to pay for their goods. However, recently, that period has jumped to 27.5 days which concerns company officials. What actions could they take to reduce the number of days back to 23.3?

True or False

  1. ____ Companies use two separate T-accounts in order to monitor and report accounts receivable at its net realizable value.
  2. ____ Bad debt expense is reported on the balance sheet as a contra account to reduce accounts receivable.
  3. ____ Bad debt expense should be reported in the same period as related revenue regardless of when the receivable is determined to be uncollectible.
  4. ____ A company has been in business for several years. In the current year, prior to preparing adjusting entries so that financial statements can be prepared, the bad expense T-account should report a zero balance.
  5. ____ A company has been in business for several years. At the end of the current year, prior to any adjusting entries being prepared, the allowance for doubtful accounts holds a credit balance of $5,000. The previous year estimation of uncollectible accounts was too low.
  6. ____ According to U.S. GAAP, all companies are required to perform their estimation of uncollectible accounts in the same manner.
  7. ____ On a set of financial statements, the amount of bad debt expense and the ending balance in the allowance for doubtful accounts will frequently differ.
  8. ____ A company ends the current year with sales of $600,000, accounts receivable of $100,000, and an allowance for doubtful accounts with a $1,000 debit balance. Bad debts are estimated to be 3 percent of sales. On financial statements, the allowance for doubtful accounts will be reported as having an $18,000 credit balance.
  9. ____ A company ends the current year with sales of $600,000, accounts receivable of $100,000, and an allowance for doubtful accounts with a $1,000 credit balance. Bad debts are estimated to be 3 percent of sales. On financial statements, bad debt expense will be reported as having an $18,000 debit balance.
  10. ____ A company ends the current year with sales of $600,000, accounts receivable of $100,000, and an allowance for doubtful accounts with a $1,000 debit balance. Uncollectible accounts at the end of the year are estimated to be 6 percent of receivables. Bad debt expense will be reported on the income statement as $7,000.
  11. ____ A company ends the current year with sales of $600,000, accounts receivable of $100,000, and an allowance for doubtful accounts with a $1,000 credit balance. Uncollectible accounts at the end of the year are estimated to be 6 percent of receivables. Bad debt expense will be reported on the income statement as $5,000.
  12. ____ A company ends Year Two with bad debt expense of $29,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $27,000. On April 8, Year Three, a $1,900 receivable is written off as uncollectible. Net income is reduced by $1,900 on that date.
  13. ____ A company ends Year Two with bad debt expense of $35,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $34,000. On April 12, Year Three, a $2,300 receivable is written off as uncollectible. The net amount reported for accounts receivable is reduced by $2,300 on that date.
  14. ____ A U.S. company with the U.S. dollar as its functional currency makes a sale in a foreign country and agrees to receive 20,000 vilsecks, the local currency. A vilseck is worth $0.42 on that date but is worth only $0.39 later on the balance sheet date. The company should report a loss on its income statement of $600 as a result of the change in the exchange rate.
  15. ____ A U.S. company with the U.S. dollar as its functional currency makes a sale in a foreign country and agrees to receive 20,000 vilsecks, the local currency. A vilseck is worth $0.42 on that date but is worth only $0.39 later on the balance sheet date. On its income statement, the company should report a sale of $7,800.
  16. ____ A company makes sales of $730,000 in Year Three. At the end of Year Three, the receivable balance is $48,000. The average customer at that time is taking 27 days to make payment to the company.
  17. ____ A company has a current ratio of 3.0:1.0. An account receivable of $3,800 is collected. That transaction will cause an increase in the current ratio.
  18. ____ A company has receivables of $300,000 on the first day of the year. During the year the company makes sales of $800,000 but only collects cash of $600,000. No bad debts were expected or uncovered during the year. The receivables turnover for the period was 2.

Multiple Choice

  1. Which of the following would not be used to help a company determine the net realizable value of its accounts receivable?

    1. Industry averages and trends
    2. The company’s ability to pay its own debts
    3. Current economic conditions
    4. Efficiency of the company’s collection procedures
  2. Which accounting principle guides the timing of the reporting of bad debt expense?

    1. Matching principle
    2. Going concern principle
    3. Cost/benefit analysis
    4. Measurement principle
  3. SunFun Company manufactures lawn furniture that is sold to retail stores. During October, Year One, SunFun sold furniture to Home Place on account in the amount of $40,000. At the end of Year One, the balance was still outstanding. In March, Year Two, SunFun decided to write off this particular account as it did not appear that the balance would ever be collected. Choose the correct journal entry for this write off.

    1. Figure 7.16

    2. Figure 7.17

    3. Figure 7.18

    4. Figure 7.19

  4. A company is preparing to produce a set of financial statements. The balance sheet being created shows a total for assets of $800,000 and a total for liabilities of $600,000. Just prior to the end of the year, one account receivable is determined to be uncollectible and is written off. Another receivable for $5,000 is collected. No other event or adjustment is made. What should the company now report as the total of its assets after recording these final two events?

    1. $784,000
    2. $789,000
    3. $800,000
    4. $805,000
  5. Gladson Corporation reports bad debt expense using the percentage of sales method. At the end of the year, Gladson has $450,000 in accounts receivable and a $4,000 credit in its allowance for doubtful accounts before any entry is made for bad debts. Sales for the year were $1.9 million. The percentage that Gladson has historically used to calculate bad debts is 1 percent of sales. Which of the following is true?

    1. Gladson’s bad debt expense for the year is $15,000.
    2. Gladson’s bad debt expense for the year is $23,000.
    3. Gladson would report an allowance for doubtful accounts of $23,000.
    4. Gladson would report an allowance for doubtful accounts of $19,000.
  6. On the first day of Year Two, the Raleigh Corporation holds accounts receivable of $500,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $25,000 for a net realizable value of $475,000. During the year, credit sales were $520,000, and cash collections amounted to $440,000. In addition, $28,000 in receivables were written off as uncollectible. If 8 percent of sales is estimated as uncollectible each year, what is the net accounts receivable balance reported at the end of Year Two on Raleigh’s balance sheet?

    1. $510,400
    2. $513,400
    3. $516,400
    4. $519,400
  7. On the first day of Year Two, the Richmond Corporation holds accounts receivable of $400,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $23,000 for a net realizable value of $377,000. During the year, credit sales were $450,000 and cash collections amounted to $380,000. In addition, $25,000 in receivables were written off as uncollectible. If 6 percent of ending accounts receivable is estimated as uncollectible, what bad debt expense is reported for Year Two on Richmond’s income statement?

    1. $24,700
    2. $25,000
    3. $28,700
    4. $30,200
  8. In Year One, the Simon Company wrote off a $14,000 receivable as uncollectible. However, on May 17, Year Two, the customer returned and paid Simon the entire amount. Which of the following is correct as a result of this payment?

    1. Accounts receivable goes down, but the allowance-for-doubtful-accounts account is not changed.
    2. Accounts receivable goes down, and the allowance-for-doubtful-accounts account also goes down.
    3. Accounts receivable stays the same, but the allowance for doubtful accounts goes up.
    4. Accounts receivable stays the same, and the allowance for doubtful accounts also stays the same.
  9. A company ends Year Three with accounts receivable of $300,000, an allowance for doubtful accounts of $15,000, sales of $900,000, and bad debt expense of $27,000. In Year Four, sales of $1 million more are made. Cash collections are $800,000, and an additional $13,000 in receivables are written off as uncollectible. The company always estimates that 5 percent of its ending accounts receivable will prove to be bad. On December 31, Year Four, company officials find another $6,000 in receivables that might well be uncollectible. However, after further review, these receivables were not written off at this time. By how much did that decision not to write off these accounts change reported net income for Year Four?

    1. Reported net income was not affected.
    2. The decision made reported net income $300 higher.
    3. The decision made reported net income $5,700 higher.
    4. The decision made reported net income $6,000 higher.
  10. A company ends Year Three with accounts receivable of $300,000, an allowance for doubtful accounts of $15,000, sales of $900,000, and bad debt expense of $27,000. In Year Four, sales of $1 million more are made. Cash collections are $800,000 and an additional $13,000 in receivables are written off as uncollectible. The company always estimates that 3 percent of its sales each year will eventually prove to be bad. On December 31, Year Four, company officials find another $6,000 in receivables that might well be uncollectible. However, after further review, these receivables were not written off at this time. By how much did that decision not to write off these accounts change reported net income for Year Four?

    1. Reported net income was not affected.
    2. The decision made reported net income $300 higher.
    3. The decision made reported net income $5,700 higher.
    4. The decision made reported net income $6,000 higher.
  11. A U.S. company (with the U.S. dollar as its functional currency) buys inventory and immediately sells it to a customer in France on November 28, Year One, for 10,000 euros. The inventory had cost 6,000 euros several days before, an amount which had been paid on the day of purchase. This merchandise is sold on account with the money to be paid by the customer on January 19, Year Two. On November 28, Year One, 1 euro was worth $2.00 whereas on December 31, Year One, 1 euro is worth $1.90. What is the impact on net income of the change in the exchange rate?

    1. $600 gain
    2. $600 loss
    3. $1,000 gain
    4. $1,000 loss
  12. On December 1, Year One, a company sells a service for 10,000 scoobies (the currency of the country where the sale was made) to be collected in six months. On that same day, the company pays 10,000 scoobies in cash for some inventory. This inventory was still held at year-end. On December 1, Year One, one scoobie is worth $0.61. By December 31, Year One, one scoobie is worth $0.73. The company is located in Ohio and is preparing to produce financial statements for Year One in terms of U.S. dollars. Which of the following will be reported on its balance sheet?

    1. Accounts receivable will be reported at $6,100, and inventory will also be reported as $6,100.
    2. Accounts receivable will be reported at $7,300, but inventory will be reported as $6,100.
    3. Accounts receivable will be reported at $6,100, but inventory will be reported as $7,300.
    4. Accounts receivable will be reported at $7,300, and inventory will also be reported as $7,300.
  13. The New Orleans Company has more current assets than current liabilities. Near the end of the current year, the company pays off its rent payable for $5,000. What is the impact of this payment on the company current ratio?

    1. No change occurs in the current ratio
    2. Current ratio goes up
    3. Current ratio goes down
    4. The impact on the current ratio cannot be determined based on the information provided.
  14. Darlene Corporation has $300,000 in assets, 30 percent of which are current, and $100,000 in liabilities, 40 percent of which are current. Which of the following is true?

    1. Darlene’s current ratio is 3 to 1.
    2. Darlene’s working capital is $200,000.
    3. Darlene’s working capital is $50,000.
    4. The current ratio and working capital are measures of a company’s profitability.
  15. Fifer Inc. began the current year with $450,000 in accounts receivable and ended the year with $590,000 in accounts receivable and $4 million in sales. Last year Fifer’s age of ending receivables was forty-six days and its receivables turnover was six times. Which of the following is not true?

    1. Fifer’s age of ending receivables is 54 days.
    2. Fifer’s receivables turnover is 7.69 times.
    3. Fifer’s age of ending receivables is less than it was last year.
    4. External decision makers monitor the time it takes a company to collect its receivables.
  16. Company A made sales this year of $400,000 and has ending accounts receivable of $120,000. Company Z made sales this year of $900,000 and has ending accounts receivable of $280,000. Which of the following is true?

    1. It takes Company Z approximately 4 days longer to collect its accounts receivable than it takes Company A.
    2. It takes Company A approximately 4 days longer to collect its accounts receivable than it takes Company Z.
    3. It takes Company Z approximately 13 days longer to collect its accounts receivable than it takes Company A.
    4. It takes Company A approximately 13 days longer to collect its accounts receivable than it takes Company Z.

Video Problems

Professor Joe Hoyle discusses the answers to these two problems at the links that are indicated. After formulating your answers, watch each video to see how Professor Hoyle answers these questions.

  1. Your roommate is an English major. The roommate’s parents own a chain of ice cream shops throughout Florida. One day, while sitting in a restaurant waiting for a pizza, your roommate poses this question: “This year, my parents began to furnish ice cream for a number of local restaurants. It was an easy way for them to expand their business. But, for the first time, they were making sales on credit. This seems to have caused some confusion when they started to produce financial statements. In the past, all sales were made for cash. However, this year they made $300,000 in sales to these restaurants on credit and they are still owed $90,000. I know they are worried about some of those accounts proving to be bad because of the economic times. In fact, one restaurant that owed them $2,000 filed for bankruptcy last fall and they didn’t get a penny of what they were owed. How in the world do they report money that they have not received yet and might never receive?” How would you respond?

  2. Your uncle and two friends started a small office supply store several years ago. The company has expanded and now has several large locations. All sales to other companies are made on credit. Your uncle knows that you are taking a financial accounting class and asks you the following question: “When we sell on credit, we give customers 30 days to pay. We monitor our customers very carefully and, consequently, we have very few bad debts. Our accountant came to us last week and said that our average customer used to pay us in 22 days but recently that has changed to 27 days. How did he figure that out? And, so what? As long as we get paid, why should I care? All I want is to make sure we get our money. But, if we do need to get paid faster, what am I supposed to do? The customers are still paying within the 30 days that we allow them so why should this make any difference?” How would you respond?

Problems

  1. Nuance Company had net credit sales for the year of $500,000. Nuance estimates that 2 percent of its net credit sales will never be collected.

    1. Prepare the entry to record Nuance’s bad debt expense for the year.
    2. Nuance had accounts receivable of $100,000 at the end of the year. Show how the net accounts receivable balance would be reported on the balance sheet. Assume that the allowance for doubtful accounts had an unadjusted credit balance at the end of the year of $1,000.
    3. Why is the accounts receivable balance shown at net rather than just showing the full amount?
  2. Assume that Nuance in number 1 used the percentage of receivables method to estimate uncollectible accounts instead of the percentage of sales method. Nuance assumes that 5 percent of accounts receivable will never be collected.

    1. Prepare the entry to record Nuance’s bad debt expense for the year.
    2. Show how the net accounts receivable balance would be reported on the balance sheet.
    3. Why are companies allowed to choose between the percentage of sales and the percentage of receivables method?
  3. The Alfonso Corporation begins operations in Year One. The company makes credit sales of $800,000 each year while collecting cash of $430,000. Every year, receivables of $31,000 are written off as being doubtful. Company officials estimate that 5 percent of all credit sales will eventually prove to be uncollectible. What figures will be reported in the company’s Year Two financial statements in connection with these credit sales?
  4. The Fallston Corporation begins operations in Year One. The company makes credit sales of $1.2 million each year while collecting cash of $800,000. Every year, receivables of $30,000 are written off as being doubtful. Company officials estimate that 5 percent of ending accounts receivable will eventually prove to be uncollectible. What figures will be reported in the company’s Year Two financial statements in connection with these credit sales?
  5. Ray’s GamePlace sells all the hottest gear and video games. On January 1, Year Three, Ray’s had the following account balances:

    Figure 7.20

    1. During Year Three, Ray’s wrote off $6,000 in uncollectible accounts. Make this journal entry.
    2. One account in the amount of $500 that had been written off in (a) above was later collected during the year. Make the journal entries to reinstate the account and show its collection.
    3. During Year Three, Ray’s made credit sales of $145,000 and collected $115,000 of accounts receivable. Record these journal entries.
    4. At the end of the year, Ray’s determines that approximately 7 percent of its ending accounts receivable balance will not be collected. Make the necessary journal entry.
  6. The Lawndale Company starts the current year with the following T-account balances:

    • Accounts receivable = $300,000 debit
    • Allowance for doubtful accounts = $15,000 credit

      During the year, the following events take place:

    • $18,000 in receivables are written off as uncollectible.
    • Credit sales of $800,000 are made
    • Cash of $680,000 is collected from the receivables
    • A $2,000 receivable written off above is collected (amount is not included in the $680,000 figure).

      Company officials believe that 5 percent of the ending accounts receivable will eventually prove to be uncollectible.

      1. On its balance sheet, what is reported as the net accounts receivable balance?
      2. On its income statement, what is reported for bad debt expense?
  7. Company A begins Year Two with accounts receivable of $200,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $10,000 (credit balance). Company Z had the exact same balances. During Year Two, Company A made credit sales of $700,000 and cash collections on those accounts of $500,000. Uncollectible accounts of $19,000 were written off during the year. However, one of these accounts ($5,000) was actually collected later in the year (for convenience, that $5,000 collection was not included in the $500,000 figure above). Company Z has exactly the same transactions. In fact, the operations of these two companies are exactly the same. Officials for Company A anticipate that 2 percent of credit sales will prove uncollectible. As a result of this information (and other transactions), Company A reported net income of $100,000. Officials for Company Z believe that 5 percent of ending accounts receivable will prove to be uncollectible. What net income will Company Z report?
  8. The Springs Corporation started Year Four with $200,000 in its accounts receivable T-account and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $10,000 (credit balance). During that year, the company made additional sales of $500,000 while collecting cash of $400,000. In addition, $7,000 in accounts were written off as uncollectible. Company officials for Springs estimated that 3 percent of sales would eventually prove to be uncollectible based on past history and current economic conditions. The adjusting entry was prepared and preliminary financial statements were created. These statements showed net income of $80,000 and a total for all reported assets of $460,000. At the last moment, on December 31, Year Four, company officials discovered another receivable of $1,000 that needed to be written off because the debtor went bankrupt and was liquidated. What should the company report as its net income for the year and as its total for all reported assets as of the end of that year?
  9. The Wallace Corporation started Year Four with $500,000 in its accounts receivable T-account and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $20,000 (credit balance). During that year, the company made additional sales of $1.6 million while collecting cash of $1.3 million. In addition, $24,000 in accounts were written off as uncollectible. Company officials for Wallace estimated that 4 percent of ending receivables would eventually prove to be uncollectible based on past history and current economic conditions. The adjusting entry was prepared and preliminary financial statements were created. These statements showed net income of $220,000 and a total for all reported assets of $1.1 million. At the last moment, on December 31, Year Four, company officials discovered another receivable of $1,000 that needed to be written off because the debtor went bankrupt and was liquidated. What should the company report as its net income for the year and as its total for all reported assets as of the end of that year?
  10. On November 1, Year One, a U.S. company acquires 1,000 widgets from a company in France for 8,000 euros on credit. The company still holds all of this inventory on December 31. The debt has not yet been paid. The company is getting ready to prepare its Year One financial statements in its functional currency, the U.S. dollar. On November 1, 1 euro was worth $1.72, but on December 31, 1 euro is worth only $1.61. What is reported on the company’s Year One income statement? What is reported on the company’s balance sheet as of December 31, Year One?
  11. Medwear Corporation is a multinational dealer of uniforms for medical personnel. Medwear is headquartered in the United States and uses U.S. dollars as its functional currency. On March 17, Medwear sells a large quantity of uniforms to a hospital in Brussels, Belgium for exactly 267,000 euros to be paid in 45 days. On the date of the sale, the exchange rate was $1.32 for every euro.

    1. Record this transaction for Medwear on March 17 assuming that the uniforms are purchased on account.
    2. On March 31, Medwear prepares financial statements. On this date, the exchange rate is $1.27 per euro. Record the necessary adjusting entry for Medwear on this date.
  12. The Boezi Corporation is beginning to report its financial statements at the end of Year Six. Preliminary information indicates that the company holds $90,000 in current assets and $210,000 in noncurrent assets. The company also plans to report current liabilities of $40,000 and noncurrent liabilities of $160,000. However, at the very end of the year, two final transactions take place. First, a $12,000 payment is made on an account payable. Second, a $21,000 collection is received from an account receivable.

    1. After recording these two transactions, what should the company report as the amount of its working capital?
    2. After recording these two transactions, what should the company report as its current ratio?
  13. On January 1, Year Two, a company reports accounts receivable of $83,000. During Year Two, the company makes new credit sales of $511,000 while collecting cash of $437,000. No uncollectible accounts are expected or discovered. At the end of Year Two, how long does the average customer take to pay an account receivable balance?
  14. On January 1, Year Two, a company reports accounts receivable of $83,000. During Year Two, the company makes new credit sales of $511,000 while collecting cash of $437,000. No uncollectible accounts are expected or discovered. What is the receivable turnover for Year Two?
  15. In Chapter 4 “How Does an Organization Accumulate and Organize the Information Necessary to Create Financial Statements?”, Heather Miller started her own business, Sew Cool. The financial statements for December are shown next.

    Figure 7.21

    Figure 7.22

    Figure 7.23

    Based on the financial statements determine the following:

    1. Current ratio
    2. Working capital
    3. Age of receivables
    4. Receivables turnover—assuming that accounts receivable on January 1, 20X8 were $460.

Comprehensive Problem

This problem will carry through over several chapters to enable students to build their accounting skills using knowledge gained in previous chapters.

In Chapter 5 “Why Is Financial Information Adjusted Prior to the Production of Financial Statements?”, Leon Jackson started Webworks, a Web site design and maintenance firm. At that time, an adjusted trial balance was prepared for June.

Here are Webworks financial statements as of June 30.

Figure 7.24

Figure 7.25

Figure 7.26

The following events occur during July:

  1. Webworks purchases additional equipment for $4,000 cash.
  2. Webworks purchases supplies worth $90 on account.
  3. Webworks pays off accounts payable and salaries payable from June.
  4. Webworks starts and completes four more sites and bills clients for $1,800.
  5. In June, Webworks received $500 in advance to design a restaurant Web site. Webworks completes this site during July.
  6. Webworks collects $1,200 in accounts receivable.
  7. Webworks pays Nancy Po (the company employee hired in June) $500 for her work during the first three weeks of July.
  8. Webworks receives $200 in advance to work on a Web site for a local dry cleaner and $300 in advance to work on a Web site for a local animal hospital. Work will not begin on these Web sites until August.
  9. Leon’s parents decide to charge rent after seeing how successful the business is and how much space it is taking up in their house. They all agree that rent will be $200 per month. Webworks pays $600 for July, August, and September.
  10. Webworks pays taxes of $300 in cash.

    Required:

    1. Prepare journal entries for the previous events.
    2. Post the journal entries to T-accounts.
    3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Webworks for July.
    4. Prepare adjusting entries for the following and post them to T-accounts.
  11. Webworks owes Nancy Po $200 for her work during the last week of July.
  12. Leon’s parents let him know that Webworks owes $150 toward the electricity bill. Webworks will pay them in August.
  13. Webworks determines that it has $50 worth of supplies remaining at the end of July.
  14. Prepaid rent should be adjusted for July’s rent.
  15. Leon now believes that the company may not be able to collect all of its accounts receivable. A local CPA helps Leon determine that similar businesses report an allowance for bad debt at an average of 10 percent of their accounts receivable. Webworks will use this same approach.

    1. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
    2. Prepare financial statements for July.

Research Assignment

Assume that you take a job as a summer employee for an investment advisory service. One of the partners for that firm is currently looking at the possibility of investing in eBay Inc. The partner is a bit concerned about the impact of the recession on this company, especially its accounts receivable. The partner asks you to look at the 2010 financial statements for eBay Inc. by following this path:

  • Go to http://www.ebay.com.
  • At the bottom of this screen, click on “Company Info.”
  • On the left side of the next screen, click on “Investors.”
  • On the left side of the next screen, click on “Annual Reports & Proxy.”
  • In the center of the next screen, click on “2010 Annual Report” to download.
  • Go to page 86 and find the December 31, 2009, and December 31, 2010, balance sheets.
  • Go to page 87 and find the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010.
  • Go to page 94 and read the note about the composition of the allowance for doubtful accounts.
  1. Using the figures found on the balance sheet and the income statement, determine the number of days eBay takes to collect its receivables at the end of 2010.
  2. Using the figures found on the balance sheet and the income statement, determine the receivables turnover for eBay during 2010.
  3. Using the figures found in the balance sheet and the information in the notes, determine the percentage of receivables as of December 31, 2010 that are expected to be uncollectible.

Chapter 6: Why Should Decision Makers Trust Financial Statements?

Video Clip

(click to see video)

In this video, Professor Joe Hoyle introduces the essential points covered in Chapter 6 “Why Should Decision Makers Trust Financial Statements?”.

6.1 The Need for the Securities and Exchange Commission

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Understand the reasons that reported financial statements might not be presented fairly.
  2. Describe the mission of the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC).
  3. Explain the purpose of the EDGAR (Electronic Data Gathering and Retrieval) system.
  4. Discuss the times when state laws apply to corporate securities rather than the rules and regulations of the SEC.
  5. Explain the relationship of the SEC and the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB).

Financial Reporting and the Need for Trust

Question: The importance of financial statements to any person who is analyzing a business or other organization appears rather obvious. The wide range of information provides a portrait of the reporting entity that reflects both its financial health and potential for future success. However, a degree of skepticism seems only natural when studying such statements because they are prepared by the company’s own management, hardly an impartial group.

Decision makers are not naïve. They must harbor some concern about the validity of figures and other data that are self-reported. Company officials operate under pressure to present positive financial results consistently, period after period. What prevents less scrupulous members of management from producing fictitious numbers just to appear especially profitable and financially strong? Why should any investor or creditor be willing to risk money based on financial statements that the reporting organization itself has prepared?

 

Answer: The possible presence of material misstatements (created either accidentally or on purpose) is a fundamental concern that should occur to every individual who studies a set of financial statements. Throughout history, too many instances have arisen where information prepared by management ultimately proved to be fraudulent causing decision makers to lose fortunes. In fact, the colorful term “cooking the books” reflects the very real possibility of that practice. EnronWorldCom, and Madoff Investment Securities are just a few examples of such scandals.

 

Although often viewed as a relatively recent linguistic creation, variations of the term “cooking the books” had already been in use for over one hundred years when Tobias Smollett included the following phrase in his book The Adventures of Peregrine Pickle, first published in 1751: “Some falsified printed accounts, artfully cooked up, on purpose to mislead and deceive.” Even over 260 years later, those words aptly describe accounting fraud.

The potential for creating misleading financial statements that eventually cause damage to both investors and creditors is not limited to a particular time or place. Greed and human weakness have always rendered the likelihood of a perfect reporting environment virtually impossible. In addition, fraud is never the only cause for concern. Often a company’s management is simply overly (or occasionally irrationally) optimistic about future possibilities. That is human nature. Therefore, financial information should never be accepted blindly, especially if monetary risk is involved.

Over the decades, numerous laws have been passed in hopes of creating a system to ensure that all distributed financial statements fairly present the underlying organization they profess to report. Because of the need for economic stability, this is an objective that governments take seriously. Under capitalism, the financial health of the entire economy depends on the ability of worthy businesses to gain external financing for both operations and expansion. Without trust in the reporting process, people simply will not invest so that the raising of large monetary amounts becomes difficult, if not impossible. As has been seen in recent times, hesitancy on the part of investors and creditors restricts the growth of businesses and undermines the strength of the entire economy.

In the United States, ultimate responsibility for the availability of complete and reliable information about every organization that issues publicly traded securitiesFor this introductory textbook, a security will include ownership shares of a company as well as debt instruments such as bonds that can be sold from one party to another. A debt instrument is a promise to pay a stated amount plus a specified rate of interest at a particular point in time. lies with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)Federal government agency holding legal responsibility over the reporting made by companies that issue publicly traded securities in the United States; works to ensure that this entire reporting process functions as intended by the government; has opted to leave development of authoritative accounting principles to FASB, although a change to IFRS produced by the IASB may be required in the future.. The SEC is an independent agency within the federal government established by the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Its mission, as stated at its Web site (http://www.sec.gov), “is to protect investors, maintain fair, orderly, and efficient markets, and facilitate capital formation.”

Virtually all U.S. companies of any significant size—as well as many foreign companies—fall under the jurisdiction of the SEC because their securities (either ownership shares or debt instruments such as bonds) are traded publicly within the United States. Financial statements and numerous other formal filings have to be submitted regularly to the SEC by these companies. A Form 10-K, which includes financial statements as well as a substantial amount of additional data, must be submitted each year. A Form 10-Q serves the same purpose each quarter. This information is then made available to the public through a system known as EDGAR (Electronic Data Gathering and Retrieval)SEC reporting system requiring companies to file their financial statements and other information electronically to allow current and potential investors access quickly and easily over the Internet..Considerable information on accessing the financial data filed with the SEC can be found at http://www.sec.gov/edgar.shtml. Any student considering a career in financial analysis or the like should visit this site to become familiar with its contents, especially the tutorial, so that the EDGAR system can be used to gain information provided by publicly traded companies. All such statements and other released data must conform precisely to the extensive rules and regulations of the SEC.

Companies that do not issue even a minimum amount of securities to the public normally are required to comply with state laws rather than with the SEC and federal laws. Financial statements for such companies, although not as likely to be public information, are often required by financial institutions and other interested parties. For example, a bank might insist that a local convenience store include financial statements as part of a loan application. The form and distribution of that financial information must conform to state laws (often referred to as “blue sky laws”).

The Relationship of the SEC to Official Accounting Standards

Question: Companies such as General Electric or Starbucks that issue securities to the public are required to satisfy all applicable federal laws and regulations. The SEC has authority over the amount and nature of the information that must be provided and the actions that can be taken by both the buyer and the seller of the securities. Does the SEC develop the specific accounting principles to be followed in the production of financial statements that are issued by public companies?

 

Answer: Legally, the SEC has the ability to establish accounting rules for all companies under its jurisdiction simply by specifying that certain information must be presented in a particular manner in the public filings that it requires. However, for decades the SEC has opted to leave the development of authoritative accounting principles to the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB). As discussed in an earlier chapter, for nearly 40 years FASB has had the primary authority for producing U.S. GAAP. Because FASB is a private (rather than government) organization, this decision has, at times, been controversial. Some view it as an abdication of an important responsibility by the federal government so that the public is at risk. The assumption by the SEC is that the members of FASB can be trusted to study each reporting issue meticulously before arriving at a reasoned resolution.

The SEC does allow certain companies to follow International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) so that, in those cases, the same reliance is being placed on the work of the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) in London. As indicated previously, movement to a single set of global standards over the next few years is constantly under debate. One of the arguments about the possible move by the SEC from U.S. GAAP to IFRS is whether the IASB as it is currently structured can be trusted as much in the future as FASB has been in the past.

At present, FASB produces accounting rules to be applied by all for-profit and not-for-profit organizations in the United States, while state and local governments follow accounting standards produced by a sister organization, the Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB)Nonprofit organization that holds the authority for establishing accounting standards for state and local government units in the United States; sister organization to FASB.. In July, 2009, FASB Accounting Standards Codification was released to serve as the single source of authoritative nongovernmental U.S. GAAP. As a result, all the previous individual rules that had been created over several decades were reclassified into a logical framework. According to a FASB news release, “The Codification reorganizes the thousands of U.S. GAAP pronouncements into roughly 90 accounting topics and displays all topics using a consistent structure. It also includes relevant Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) guidance that follows the same topical structure in separate sections in the Codification.”News release by FASB, July 1, 2009.

Groups other than FASB also contribute to accounting standards but in a much less significant fashion. The most important of these is the Emerging Issues Task Force (EITF)A group formed to assist FASB by examining new accounting issues as they arise in hopes of arriving at quick agreement as to the appropriate method of reporting based on existing U.S. GAAP., which was created in 1984 to assist FASB.In Chapter 2 “What Should Decision Makers Know in Order to Make Good Decisions about an Organization?”http://www.fasb.org was mentioned as an excellent source of information about FASB. One of the tabs available at this Web site discusses the role of the EITF. The EITF examines new problems when they initially arise in hopes of coming to quick agreement as to an appropriate method of reporting based on existing U.S. GAAP. Thus, the EITF is not forming U.S. GAAP as much as helping to apply it to newly emerging situations. If consensus is achieved (that is, no more than three members object), the conclusions rendered by the EITF are considered to be authoritative until such time—if ever—as FASB provides its own formal guidance. In this way, FASB does not have to issue hasty pronouncements to resolve every unique reporting concern when it first appears.

The SEC itself is not totally absent from the formation of U.S. GAAP. It occasionally issues guidelines to ensure that adequate information is being disclosed to the public through its own rules and interpretive releases. That is especially true in situations where reporting concerns have emerged and adequate official guidance does not exist. The SEC tends to restrict its own power over financial reporting to those areas where U.S. GAAP—for whatever reason—has not yet been well constructed. Assume, for example, that a new type of transaction arises and the EITF is unable to arrive at a consensus resolution. The SEC might specify relevant data to be included in the notes to financial statements to better describe these events or could prohibit certain methods of reporting until FASB has the opportunity to provide a studied ruling.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Barone Company is currently dealing with a unique set of transactions that took place recently. The company accountant has studied the appropriate accounting rules in preparing the information to be included in Barone’s financial statements. These statements are being issued because the company’s stock is publicly traded on a stock exchange. What is the most likely source of the accounting rules followed by the accountant?

  1. The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)
  2. The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB)
  3. The Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB)
  4. The Emerging Issues Task Force (EITF)

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB).

Explanation:

U.S. GAAP is produced primarily by FASB. The SEC has ultimate legal authority over the financial reporting of companies that issue securities to the public. However, the actual setting of accounting standards for businesses and other nongovernmental organizations has been left to FASB. The EITF only seeks to apply existing rules to new situations. GASB produces authoritative accounting standards, but only for the financial reporting of states, cities, and other nonfederal governmental units.

Key Takeaway

The U.S. economy depends on the willingness of investors and creditors to risk conveying their hard-earned financial resources to businesses and other organizations for operating and growth purposes. Financial statements play an essential role in this process by providing information that allows such decisions to be made based on proper analysis. However, accounting scandals periodically remind all parties that fraud can occur in the financial reporting process. In the United States, the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) is responsible for the fair distribution of information by those companies that issue publicly traded securities such as capital stock and debt instruments (such as bonds). The EDGAR system makes this information readily available to all interested parties. State laws apply to all other organizations. In hopes of creating a well-developed system of considered accounting principles, the SEC has chosen to allow FASB to set U.S. GAAP, although a movement to IFRS in the future is certainly possible. The SEC typically restricts its direct involvement in accounting to the creation of rules that specify required disclosure of information, but only in situations where current standards are found to be unclear or incomplete.

6.2 The Role of the Independent Auditor in Financial Reporting

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Understand the purpose of an independent audit.
  2. List the two primary components of an independent audit.
  3. Explain the function of an independent audit firm.
  4. Describe the steps required to become a Certified Public Accountant (CPA).
  5. List the various types of services provided by many public accounting firms.
  6. Discuss the necessity for the creation of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) and describe its function.

The Need for an Independent Audit of Financial Statements

Question: The SEC allows FASB to set U.S. GAAP. Does the SEC physically visit each company that issues securities to the public to ensure that periodic financial statements properly follow the rules and guidelines of U.S. GAAP?

 

Answer: A detailed examination of the financial statements produced by thousands of publicly traded companies around the world would require a massive work force with an enormous cost. Therefore, this essential role in the financial reporting process has been left by the SEC to auditing (also known as public accounting) firms that operate both inside and outside the United States. Before submitting statements to the SEC and then to the public, reporting companies such as IBM and Wells Fargo must hire an independent auditing firm to do the following:

  • Perform an auditAn examination carried out by an independent CPA of the evidence underlying the information presented in a set of financial statements followed by the issuance of a report as to whether the statements contain material misstatements in accordance with U.S. GAAP; this opinion is intended to provide reasonable assuranace that the statements are fairly presented, which adds credibility to the information provided. (examination) of the company’s financial statements
  • Provide a report stating whether sufficient supporting evidence was obtained to enable the auditor to provide reasonable assurance that the statements are presented fairly because they contain no material misstatements according to U.S. GAAP

The independent auditor’s written report is then attached to the financial statements for all to read. This expert opinion is essential to the integrity of the reporting process because it tells decision makers whether they should feel safe relying on the financial information. Even many companies that are not affected by the rules of the SEC have their statements audited by an independent firm to enhance credibility. For example, a convenience store seeking a bank loan could pay for an audit in hopes of increasing the chances that the application will be approved (or because bank officials have required the audit for the bank’s own protection).

Not surprisingly, companies that have independent audits performed on their financial statements are able to get loans at lower interest rates than comparable organizations that do not have such examinations.David W. Blackwell, Thomas R. Noland, and Drew B. Winters, “The Value of Auditor Assurance: Evidence from Loan Pricing,” Journal of Accounting Research, Spring 1998, 57–70. The audit and the related audit report serve to reduce the lender’s risk of loss. Thus, banks and other institutions require a lower rate of interest to compensate for their risk of default.

In the United States, independent auditing firmsOrganizations operated by individuals recognized by a state government as Certified Public Accountants (CPAs) to provide independent auditing and other accounting services to the public; also known as CPA firms or public accounting firms. can only be operated by individuals who have been formally recognized by a state government as Certified Public Accountants (CPAs)Individuals who have met state requirements of education, practical experience, and passing the Uniform CPA Examination; the CPA designation is a license that allows a person to provide auditing and other accounting services to the public and serves as a symbol of technical expertise..The rules for becoming a CPA vary by state but usually include a specific amount and level of education as well as a passing grade of at least 75 or above on the four parts of the uniform CPA Exam. Some states also require a defined length of practical experience such as one or two years. Considerable information about the auditing profession and the possibility of becoming a CPA can be found at http://www.thiswaytocpa.com. Such firms range in size from massive (KPMG employs 137,000 individuals working in 144 countries and generated revenues of approximately $20.6 billion for the year ended September 30, 2010See http://www.kpmg.com as of August 12, 2011.) to organizations comprised of only one or two people.

Obviously, for the financial statements of the biggest organizations (the ExxonMobils and Walmarts of the world), only a public accounting firm of truly significant size could effectively perform an audit engagement. Consequently, four firms (known collectively as the Big FourTerm used to encompass the four largest CPA firms operating internationally: Deloitte Touche TohmatsuErnst & YoungKPMG, and PricewaterhouseCoopers; these four firms perform independent audits on most of the world’s largest companies.) have become huge global organizations:

  • Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu
  • Ernst & Young
  • KPMG
  • PricewaterhouseCoopers

However, thousands of smaller independent CPA firms exist providing numerous services, such as audit, tax planning and preparationOne of the professional services performed by many CPA firms, including the preparation of tax returns and the creation of tax strategies to help minimize tax payments., and advisory workOne of the professional services performed by many CPA firms to assist businesses in operating more effectively and efficiently, and, therefore, more profitably. for a wide range of clients. Ernst & Young indicates on its Web site (http://www.ey.com) that the following services are provided to its clients with each explained in detail: advisory, assurance, tax, transactions, strategic growth markets, and specialty services.

Test Yourself

Question:

Financial statements have been produced by the management of the Southern Central Corporation. Unfortunately, a significant expense was accidentally recorded as an asset, so the company’s net income was overstated by a large amount. Who is most likely to discover this mistake?

  1. The board of directors for the company
  2. Employees of the Securities and Exchange Commission
  3. The company’s independent CPA audit firm
  4. Major investors in the company’s stock

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: The company’s independent CPA audit firm.

Explanation:

The purpose of a financial statement audit performed by an independent CPA firm is to provide reasonable assurance that information is presented fairly according to U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles because no material misstatements are present. While accumulating evidence to support this assertion, the independent auditor should discover that the expense has been improperly capitalized as an asset. Various testing techniques are designed to bring problems such as this to light.

Standards for a Proper Audit

Question: FASB creates U.S. GAAP, the official standards for the preparation of financial statements. What group sets the examination and reporting rules to be followed by independent auditors?

The work performed by auditors is not in accordance with accounting principles. Instead, these experts are seeking to determine whether U.S. GAAP was applied properly when financial statements were created. Auditing firms provide a vital service by adding credibility to that reported information. How do independent auditors know what actions should be taken in assessing the data disclosed by a company such as Xerox or Bank of America?

 

Answer: When an audit is performed on the financial statements of any organization that issues securities to the U.S. public, the examination and subsequent reporting is regulated by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB)Private sector, nonprofit corporation brought into existence by the U.S. Congress through the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 to oversee the audits of public companies in hopes of protecting and better serving investors.. The PCAOB was brought into existence by the U.S. Congress through the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002Federal securities law passed by the U.S. Congress in response to the EnronWorldCom, and other major accounting scandals; it brought about many changes in the audit process and in the relationship between reporting companies and their independent auditors., legislation passed in response to a number of massive accounting scandals, including Enron and WorldCom. Members of Congress apparently felt that the auditing profession had failed to provide adequate protection for decision makers who were relying on published financial information. Consequently, the federal government became more involved.

The PCAOB was established under the oversight and enforcement authority of the SEC. It holds wide-ranging powers that include the creation of official guidelines for the performance of a proper audit. Its vision is stated as follows: “Using innovative and cost-effective tools, the PCAOB aims to improve audit quality, reduce the risks of auditing failures in the U.S. public securities market, and promote public trust in both the financial reporting process and auditing profession.”See http://www.pcaob.org.

If an audit is performed on financial statements that are produced by an organization that does not issue securities to the public, the PCAOB holds no authority. For such smaller engagements, the Auditing Standards Board (ASB)Technical body within the AICPA that holds the authority to set the rules for appropriate audits of organizations that do not issue securities to the public (often referred to as privately held organizations). officially sets the rules for an appropriate audit. The ASB is a technical committee within the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA)A national professional organization of CPAs that sets ethical requirements, conducts research, and helps set a high standard for the profession., a national professional organization of CPAs.

A local convenience store, a medical practice, or a law firm (for example) might choose to have an audit on its financial statements. These audits fall under the guidelines provided by the ASB rather than the PCAOB because the organizations do not issue securities that are publicly traded. Thus, the rules for performing an audit on a large company can differ somewhat from those applied to a smaller private one.

The Role of the SEC

Question: FASB sets U.S. GAAP. The PCAOB (and the ASB) establishes rules for performing an audit. What function does the SEC actually serve?

 

Answer: The goal of the work done by the SEC is summed up in the following statement from its Web site: “The laws and rules that govern the securities industry in the United States derive from a simple and straightforward concept: all investors, whether large institutions or private individuals, should have access to certain basic facts about an investment prior to buying it, and so long as they hold it.”See http://www.sec.gov.

Thus, the SEC strives to make certain that the organizations that fall under its jurisdiction are in total compliance with all laws so that decision makers have ready access to information that is viewed as relevant. It reviews the required filings submitted by each organization to ensure that the rules and regulations are followed. The SEC also has the power to enforce securities laws and punish companies and individuals who break them. For example, if a company fails to disclose a significant transaction or other event that the SEC believes is necessary, all trading of that company’s securities can be halted until the matter is resolved. Such regulatory actions can cause a huge financial loss for a business. Thus, compliance is viewed as vital.

In addition, if corporate officials provide false or misleading data, fines and jail time are also possible: “L. Dennis Kozlowski, the former CEO of Tyco International, acquired hundreds of companies between 1996 and 2002 and created a conglomerate that made everything from fire suppression systems to health-care products, with worldwide sales of $40 billion. Now, while serving up to 25 years in jail for misleading investors and stealing money from Tyco, he’s watching the breakup of all he built.”John Kostrzewa, “After the Scandal, a New Tyco,” The Providence Journal, July 15, 2007, F-1.

Test Yourself

Question:

Fairchild Corporation is a large retail organization that sells its stock on the New York Stock Exchange. Littleton Corporation is a small retail organization that is privately owned by three investors and raises money through bank loans. Both companies produce financial statements that are audited by independent CPAs. Unfortunately, each set of financial statements contains a material misstatement because, in both cases, a relatively large liability was never recorded. Which of the following statements is true?

  1. The rules of the SEC apply to both of these companies.
  2. The rules of the PCAOB apply to both auditing firms in connection with these independent audits.
  3. The rules of FASB apply to both of these companies.
  4. The misstatement is more of a concern in connection with the audit of the publicly owned company.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: The rules of FASB apply to both of these companies.

Explanation:

Rules established by the SEC and the PCAOB are directed toward organizations (and their auditors) with publicly traded securities. State laws and the rules of the ASB are applicable to other entities. Misstatements are always a problem in financial statements because individuals rely on those statements in making decisions. However, in almost all cases, accounting rules developed by FASB apply to privately owned companies as well as those that are publicly held.

Key Takeaway

Independent auditing firms provide credibility to financial statements by examining the evidence that underlies the information provided and then reporting on those findings. Official oversight of the rules for this process is in the hands of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) if the audited company issues securities to the public and the Auditing Standards Board (ASB) if not. The role of the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) is to ensure that this reporting process is working as intended by the government. The SEC examines the filings of the various companies and can take disciplinarian action if either the company or its officials fail to act appropriately.

6.3 Performing an Audit

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Describe the goal of an auditor in examining an account balance.
  2. List the tests that might be performed in auditing a reported balance such as account receivable.
  3. Understand the reason that an independent auditor only provides reasonable assurance and not absolute or perfect assurance.

Auditing a Reported Balance

Question: A company creates a set of financial statements for the most recent year. It hires an independent firm of CPAs to audit those statements and prepare a report that will be attached to them. Perhaps this action is required of the company by the SEC or maybe by a local bank or other lender. What work does an independent auditor perform in examining a set of financial statements? The audit firm hopes to be able to provide reasonable assurance to decision makers that these statements are presented fairly and, thus, contain no material misstatements according to U.S. GAAP. How is the auditor able to gain sufficient evidence to make that assertion?

 

Answer: An independent audit is a complicated activity that often requires scores of experienced CPAs many months to complete. Serious knowledge of the audit process is best achieved by taking upper-level college courses as well as through years of practical experience. However, a general understanding of the process is important because of its relevance to almost all businesses as well as investors and creditors. For that reason, coverage here will include a limited overview of a financial audit.

The numbers found on a set of financial statements do not appear by magic. For example, if receivables are disclosed on a balance sheet as $12.7 million, a legitimate reason has to exist for reporting that particular figure. In preparing statements, company accountants should document the steps taken to arrive at each balance and the work performed to determine the appropriate method of reporting according to U.S. GAAP. The statements are the representation of the company; thus, the burden of proof is on that organization and its officials. The independent auditors then examine the available evidence to ascertain whether reliance on the reported information should be advised.

As an illustration, assume that a business presents a list of 1,000 customers and claims that the total amount due from them is $12.7 million. This figure is reported as “accounts receivable” under the asset section of the year-end balance sheet. The independent audit firm seeks to accumulate sufficient, competent evidence to substantiate that this reported balance is not materially misstated in accordance with U.S. GAAP.

For these receivables, the auditor carries out a number of possible testing procedures to gain the assurance needed. Such techniques might include the following:

  • Add the individual account balances to ensure that the total really is $12.7 million.
  • Examine sales documents for a sample of individual customers to determine that the amounts sold to them are equal to the figures listed within the receivable. For example, if the sales document indicates that Mr. A bought goods at a price of $1,544, is that same amount found in the company’s receivable balance?
  • Examine cash receipts documents for a sample of individual customers to ensure that no unrecorded payments were collected prior to the end of the year. If Mr. A paid cash of $1,544 on December 30, was the corresponding receivable balance reduced by that amount prior to the end of the year?
  • Contact a sample of the customers directly to confirm that the balance shown is, indeed, appropriate. “Mr. A: Company records show that you owe $1,544 as of December 31. Is that amount correct?”

Through these and other testing procedures, the auditor hopes to ascertain that $12.7 million is a fairly presented amount for this asset. All other reported balances are also examined in a similar manner during the independent audit. The actual quantity and type of testing varies considerably based on the nature of the account. Auditing $12.7 million in receivables requires different steps than investigating a building bought for that same amount. Not surprisingly, large monetary balances often require especially extensive testing. In addition, certain accounts (such as cash or inventory) where the risk of misstatement is particularly high will draw particular attention from the independent auditors.

If the auditor eventually concludes that sufficient evidence has been obtained to reduce the risk of a material misstatement in the financial statements to an acceptably low level, an audit report can be issued with that opinion. Assuming no problems were encountered, reasonable assurance is provided by the independent auditor that the statements are presented fairly and, thus, contain no material misstatements according to U.S. GAAP.

As mentioned, the independent auditor’s report is then attached to the financial statements. Upon reading this opinion, investors and creditors should feel confident relying on the information provided by those statements to make their financial decisions about the reporting organization.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Aberton Corporation has recently produced financial statements for Year One. The CPA firm of Nash and Hill has been hired by the company to perform an independent audit. The firm is concerned because the accounts receivable balance seems unreasonably high and might contain a material misstatement. Members of the audit team are least likely to watch for which of the following?

  1. The accounts receivable contain fake account balances.
  2. The company has failed to record cash amounts collected on its accounts receivable near the end of the year.
  3. Credit sales made in Year Two were erroneously recorded in Year One.
  4. A large collection received on January 2, Year Two, was recorded on December 30, Year One.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: A large collection received on January 2, Year Two, was recorded on December 30, Year One.

Explanation:

The auditor suspects that the accounts receivable balance is inflated. Fake accounts cause that problem and might be fraudulently created to increase reported assets and revenues. Failure to record cash collections also inflates the receivable total because reductions were omitted. Adding Year Two sales into Year One causes the figures for the first period to be overstated. However, recording a cash collection in advance reduces the receivable balance prematurely so that it is understated.

Reasonable Assurance and not Perfect Assurance

Question: One aspect of the audit process seems particularly puzzling. The independent auditor merely provides reasonable assurance. The risk that a material misstatement is included in the accompanying financial statements is only reduced to a low level and not to zero. Why do decision makers who may be risking significant amounts of money not insist on absolute and complete assurance? Because of the potential for financial loss, investors and creditors surely want every possibility of incorrect reporting to be eliminated by the work of the independent auditor. Is reasonable assurance that no material misstatements are present truly adequate for decision makers who must rely on a set of financial statements for information?

 

Answer: As has been stated, independent auditors provide reasonable assurance but not absolute assurance that financial statements are presented fairly because they contain no material misstatements according to U.S. GAAP. A number of practical reasons exist as to why the level of assurance is limited in this manner.

First, many of the figures found on any set of financial statements are no more than estimations. Auditors do not possess reliable crystal balls that allow them to predict the future. The uncertainty inherent in these estimations immediately eliminates the possibility for absolute assurance. For example, reporting the amount of cash that will be collected from a large group of accounts receivable is simply a carefully considered guess. It is presented according to the rules of U.S. GAAP, but it is still an estimate. No one can provide absolute assurance about any estimation.

Second, organizations often take part in so many transactions during a period (millions for many large companies) that uncovering every potential problem or issue during an audit is impossible. Usually, in analyzing most account balances, the independent auditor only has time to test a sample of the entries and adjustments. Without examining every individual event, absolute assurance is not possible. Even with extreme vigilance, material misstatements can always be missed if less than 100 percent of the transactions are tested.

Third, an independent auditor visits a company for a few weeks or months each year to carry out testing procedures. Company officials who want to hide financial problems are sometimes successful at concealment. Auditors can never be completely certain that they have not been victimized by an elaborate camouflage scheme perpetrated by management. Thus, they are not comfortable providing absolute assurance.

Fourth, informed decision makers should understand that independent auditors can only provide reasonable assurance. Through appropriate testing procedures, risk of a material misstatement is reduced to an acceptably low level but not eliminated entirely for the reasons that have been named. Investors and creditors need to take that limitation into consideration when assessing the financial health and future well being of an organization as presented through a set of financial statements. Although the risk is small, their decisions should factor in the level of uncertainty that is always present.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Osgood Company released its Year One financial statements after an audit by the independent audit firm of Hatley, Joyner, and Bostick. Subsequently, a material misstatement was found in these financial statements. If a proper audit was conducted, which of the following is least likely?

  1. A large transaction took place early in Year Two but was reported by the company in Year One.
  2. A large estimation was made in Year One that eventually proved to be materially incorrect.
  3. A large liability was hidden by the management of the company.
  4. The company eventually lost a large lawsuit that it had expected to win.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: A large transaction took place early in Year Two but was reported by the company in Year One.

Explanation:

Answers b and d relate to estimates. Auditors seek evidence that each estimate is reasonable, but absolute accuracy is impossible. In a proper audit, estimates can prove materially wrong. Answer c relates to the possibility that management can conceal events from the auditors. Auditors work to make sure they are not fooled, but again, absolute assurance is not possible. Answer a is correct; auditors should examine large transactions to determine proper reporting so that the timing error is found.

Key Takeaway

Financial statements are the product of company management. Independent auditors then seek to obtain sufficient evidence that these statements are presented fairly because no material misstatements are present according to U.S. GAAP. The auditing firm performs extensive testing of the balances and disclosures that are reported. When the risk of a material misstatement has been reduced to an acceptably low level, reasonable assurance can be provided. Thus, decision makers should feel safe using the information. Absolute assurance is not humanly possible because all statements contain numerous estimations and the auditors do not have time (or the need) to examine each individual transaction. Management can, in some cases, also conceal problems from the auditors. Thus, when examining a set of financial statements, decision makers need to understand that only reasonable assurance of no material misstatements is possible and take that into consideration.

6.4 The Need for Internal Control

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Define internal control.
  2. Explain a company’s need for internal control policies and procedures.
  3. Describe the effect that a company’s internal control has on the work of the independent auditor.

Internal Controls Within an Organization

Question: In the previous discussions, the role of the independent auditor was described as the addition of credibility to financial statements. All reported figures, though, are still the responsibility of management. How can a company and its officials make certain that the information displayed in a set of financial statements is fairly presented?

Businesses like Barnes & Noble and RadioShack participate in millions of transactions each year in geographically distant store locations as well as through their Web sites. Working with that enormous amount of data, gathered from around the world, must be a daunting technological challenge. Some organizations are able to accumulate and organize such massive quantities of information with few—if any—problems; others seem to be overwhelmed by the task. How do companies ensure that their own information is free of material misstatements?

 

Answer: The human body is made up of numerous systems that perform specific tasks, such as breathing air, circulating blood, and digesting food. Each system serves its own particular purpose that contributes to the good of the body as a whole. Organizations operate in much the same manner. Numerous systems are designed and set in place by management to carry out essential functions, such as paying employees, collecting cash from customers, managing inventory levels, and monitoring receivable balances. Within each system, individuals are charged with performing specific tasks, often in a preordained sequence. For example, a cash payment received in the mail from a customer should be handled in a set way every time that it occurs to ensure that the money is properly recorded and protected from theft.

To be efficient and effective, these systems must be carefully designed and maintained. They need to keep company assets secure and do so at a minimum cost. In addition, appropriate record keeping is a required aspect of virtually every system. For example, if the payroll system is designed properly, employees are paid when their salaries come due, and adequate documentation is maintained of the amounts distributed. The entire function is performed according to guidelines carefully established by company officials.

Well-designed systems generate information with fewer errors, which reduces the threat of material misstatements. However, simply having systems in place—even if they are properly designed and constructed—is not sufficient to guarantee both the effectiveness of the required actions and the reliability of the collected data.

Thus, extra procedures should be built into each system by management to help ensure that every operation is performed as intended and the resulting financial information is reliable. All the redundancies added to a system to make certain that it functions properly are known collectively as internal controlA group of policies and procedures within the accounting and other systems of a company to provide reasonable assurance that they are operating efficiently and effectively as intended by management.. For example, a rule requiring two designated employees to sign any check for over $5,000 (or some other predetermined amount) is part of a company’s internal control. There is no inherent necessity for having a second signature; it is an added safeguard included solely to minimize the chance of theft or error. All actions like this comprise a company’s internal control.

Internal control policies and procedures can be found throughout the various systems of every company.

  • One employee counts cash and a second verifies the figure.
  • One employee requests the purchase of an asset and a second authorizes the request.

Internal control is made up of all the added procedures that are performed so that each system operates as intended. Systems cannot be considered well designed without the inclusion of adequate internal control. Management is responsible for the development of effective systems but also for all internal control rules and requirements created to ensure that these systems accomplish their stated objectives.

Internal Control and the Independent Auditor

Question: If a company creates and maintains good operating systems with appropriate internal control, the financial information that is produced is less likely to contain material misstatements. In performing an audit, is the work of the independent CPA affected by the company’s internal control? Does the quality of internal control policies and procedures impact the amount and type of audit testing that is performed?

 

Answer: As one of the preliminary steps in an audit examination, the CPA gains an understanding of the internal control procedures included within each of these systems that relates to reported financial accounts and balances.Some internal controls have nothing to do with a company’s financial statement accounts and are not of importance to the work of the independent auditor. For example, a company might establish a review procedure to ensure that only deserving employees receive promotions. This guideline is an important internal control for the operating effectiveness of the company. However, it does not relate to a reported account balance and is not evaluated by the independent auditor. The auditor then makes an evaluation of the effectiveness of those policies and procedures. In cases where internal control is both well designed and appears to be functioning as intended, a reduction is possible in the amount of audit testing that is needed. There is less risk involved; the likelihood of a material misstatement is reduced by the company’s own internal control.

To illustrate, assume that a company claims to hold accounts receivable totaling $12.7 million. The auditor plans to confirm 100 of the individual balances directly with the customers to substantiate the separate amounts listed in the accounting records. A letter will be written and mailed to each of these individuals asking whether the specified balance is correct. A stamped return envelope is included for the response.

This confirmation process is quite common in auditing financial statements. However, although effective, it is slow and expensive. During the year, assume that the reporting company consistently applied several internal control procedures within those systems that maintain the receivables balances. These controls are evaluated by the independent CPA and judged to be excellent. As a result of this assessment, the auditor might opt to confirm only 30 or 40 individual accounts rather than the 100 that had originally been planned. Because of the quality of internal control in the receivable area, the risk of a material misstatement is already low. Less audit testing is necessary. Both time and money are saved.

Thus, at the beginning of an independent audit, the design of the reporting company’s internal control and the effectiveness of its procedures are assessed. Only then does the auditor determine the amount of evidence needed to substantiate that each account balance is presented fairly because no material misstatements are included according to U.S. GAAP.

Test Yourself

Question:

Tomlinson and Partners is a local CPA firm that is in the process of auditing the financial statements of Agnew Corporation. Agnew reports both inventory and accounts receivable, and these accounts have approximately the same monetary balances. However, in doing the audit, the independent CPAs spent over twice as much time in testing inventory. Which of the following is the most likely reason for this allocation of effort?

  1. Internal policies for handling accounts receivable are poorly designed.
  2. The individuals within the company who monitor accounts receivable do not appear to follow appropriate guidelines.
  3. Procedures have been established by management for monitoring the company’s inventory, but they appear to be flawed.
  4. Employees who maintain the inventory being held by the company are well trained.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: Procedures have been established by management for monitoring the company’s inventory, but they appear to be flawed.

Explanation:

Here the auditors do more testing of inventory than accounts receivable. Several possible reasons exist. Internal control for inventory might be weaker than that for receivables. Thus, material misstatements are more likely present in inventory. To compensate, added audit testing is needed. In a and b, internal control is poor for the receivables rather than inventory. Answer d indicates that internal control over inventory is actually good. Only c has internal control for inventory as relatively weak.

Key Takeaway

All companies operate by means of numerous systems that carry out designated tasks, such as the collection of cash and the payment of purchases. These systems need to be well designed and function as intended to protect company assets and reduce the chance of material misstatements in the financial records. Additional policies and procedures are included at important junctures in these systems to ensure that they operate appropriately. All such safeguards make up the company’s internal control system. The independent auditor evaluates the quality of the internal control that is found in the various systems. If the risk of material misstatement has been reduced as a result of the internal control in a particular system, less audit testing is required.

6.5 The Purpose and Content of an Independent Auditor’s Report

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Describe the purpose of the independent auditor’s report.
  2. Identify the intended beneficiaries of an independent auditor’s report.
  3. Discuss the contents of the introductory, scope, and opinion paragraphs in an independent auditor’s report.
  4. List problems that might require a change in the contents of an independent auditor’s report.

The Structure of an Independent Auditor’s Report

Question: At the conclusion of an audit, a report is issued by the CPA that will be attached to the financial statements for all to read. Much of this report is boilerplate: the words are virtually identical from one company to the next. What information is conveyed by an independent auditor, and what should a decision maker look for when studying an audit report?

 

Answer: The audit report accompanying the 2009 and 2010 financial statements for The Procter & Gamble Company is shown next.

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of The Procter & Gamble Company

We have audited the accompanying Consolidated Balance Sheets of The Procter & Gamble Company and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of June 30, 2010 and 2009, and the related Consolidated Statements of Earnings, Shareholders’ Equity, and Cash Flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2010. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in the accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatements. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, such Consolidated Financial Statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company at June 30, 2010 and 2009, and the results of its operations and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended June 30, 2010, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2010, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated August 13, 2010 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Deloitte & Touche LLP

Cincinnati, Ohio

August 13, 2010

To understand the role of the independent audit within the financial reporting process, a considerable amount of information should be noted in the audit reportFormal written opinion issued by an independent auditor to communicate findings at the conclusion of an audit as to indicate whether a specific set of financial statements contains any material misstatements according to U.S. GAAP; if not, the statements are viewed as fairly presented. attached to the financial statements issued by Procter & Gamble.

  1. The report is addressed to the board of directors (elected by the shareholders) and the shareholders. An audit is not performed for the direct benefit of the reporting company or its management but rather for any person or group studying the financial statements for decision-making purposes. The salutation stresses that external users (rather than the company itself) are the primary beneficiaries of the work carried out by the independent auditor.

    Interestingly, independent auditors are paid by the reporting company. The concern is raised periodically as to whether an auditor can remain properly independent of the organization that is providing payment for the services rendered. However, audit examinations can be quite expensive and no better method of remuneration has yet been devised.

  2. To avoid any potential misunderstanding, the first (introductory) paragraph identifies the specific financial statements to which the report relates. In addition, both the responsibility of the management for those financial statements and the responsibility of the independent auditor for providing an opinion on those statements are clearly delineated. The statements are not created by the auditor; that is the job of management. The auditor examines the financial statements so that an expert opinion can be rendered.
  3. The second (scope) paragraph provides information to explain the audit work. One key sentence in this paragraph is the second. It spells out the purpose of the audit by referring to the standards created by the PCAOB: “Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatements.” This sentence clearly sets out the goal of an audit engagement and the level of assurance given by the auditor. No reader should expect absolute assurance.

    The remainder of the second paragraph describes in general terms the steps taken by the auditor, such as:

    • Examine evidence on a test basis to support reported amounts and disclosures.
    • Assess the accounting principles that were applied.
    • Assess significant estimations used in creating the statements.
    • Evaluate overall presentation.
  4. The third (opinion) paragraph provides the auditor’s opinion of the financial statements. In this illustration, an unqualified opinionAn audit opinion informing the reader that attached financial statements are presented fairly, in all material respects, in accordance with U.S. GAAP; thus, the auditor is providing reasonable assurance that the statements contain no material misstatements according to U.S. GAAP and can be relied on by the reader in making financial decisions. is issued meaning that no problems worthy of note were discovered. The auditor provides the reader with reasonable assurance: “In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects…in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.” Through this sentence, the independent auditor is adding credibility to the financial statements. The auditor believes readers can rely on these statements in making their financial decisions.
  5. The fourth (explanatory) paragraph provides an additional opinion by the auditor, this time in connection with the company’s internal control. Such an assessment is required when an audit is performed on a company that is subject to the rules of the PCAOB. Not only is the auditor asserting that the financial statements are presented fairly in conformity with U.S. GAAP (paragraph 3) but also gives an unqualified opinion on the company’s internal control over its financial reporting (paragraph 4). This additional assurance provides the reader with another reason to place reliance on the accompanying financial statements.

Qualified Audit Opinions

Question: The audit report presented for Procter & Gamble is an unqualified opinion. The independent auditor is providing reasonable assurance to decision makers that the company’s financial statements are presented fairly, in all material respects, in conformity with U.S. GAAP. What can cause an independent auditor to issue an audit report that is less than an unqualified opinion and how is that report physically different?

 

Answer: An independent auditor renders an opinion that is not unqualified in two general situations:

  • Lack of evidence. The auditor was not able to obtain sufficient evidence during the audit to justify an unqualified opinion. Perhaps the amount reported for a building or a liability could simply not be substantiated to the auditor’s satisfaction. The balance might well be fairly presented according to U.S. GAAP but evidence was not available to allow the auditor to make that assertion with reasonable assurance.
  • Presence of a material misstatement. The auditor discovered the existence of a material misstatement in the financial statements, a balance or disclosure that does not conform to U.S. GAAP. Because of the potential damage to the credibility of the financial statements, reporting companies usually make any adjustments necessary to eliminate such misstatements. If not, though, the auditor must clearly warn readers of the reporting problems.

The physical changes made in the report depend on the type of problem that is involved and its magnitude. The key method of warning is that a new paragraph is added between the scope and the opinion paragraphs to describe the auditor’s concern. Decision makers often scan the audit report solely to see if such a paragraph is contained. If present, a careful reading of its contents (as well as related changes found in the wording of the opinion paragraph) should be made to determine the possible ramifications. Whether evidence was lacking or a material misstatement was uncovered, the auditor is responsible for letting the reader know. The presence of an added paragraph—prior to the opinion paragraph—always draws attention.

Key Takeaway

Upon completion of an audit, the independent auditor’s report is attached to the financial statements. It is provided for the benefit of external decision makers. The financial statements are identified and the second (scope) paragraph provides an explanation of the audit process. If no problems are encountered, the report is said to be unqualified, and the opinion paragraph provides reasonable assurance to readers that the financial statements are presented fairly because no material misstatements are present according to U.S. GAAP. A qualification arises if the auditor is not able to obtain a satisfactory amount of evidence or if a material misstatement is found. Information about any such problem is then inserted into the audit report between the second (scope) paragraph and the third (opinion) paragraph.

Talking with a Real Investing Pro (Continued)

Following is a continuation of our interview with Kevin G. Burns.

 

Question: An independent audit is extremely expensive for any reporting company. As an investor, is the benefit gained from seeing the independent auditor’s report attached to a set of financial statements actually worth the cost that must be incurred by the company?

Kevin Burns: I think the answer to this question is fairly obvious given the recent scandals, especially in the hedge fund world. An independent audit is absolutely critical for a corporation no matter what the expense. It is an exciting time to be in the accounting profession as investors are demanding additional transparency and independent oversight. Market confidence will be even more critical than usual for any business that wants to obtain money by issuing its equity shares and debt instruments. An internal audit would be perceived as self serving and untrustworthy and perception is 90 percent of reality, especially in today’s cynical environment. Given the recent meltdown of financial institutions and stock prices, investors have a right to feel cynical and demand even more assurance before risking their money.

Video Clip

(click to see video)

Professor Joe Hoyle talks about the five most important points in Chapter 6 “Why Should Decision Makers Trust Financial Statements?”.

6.6 End-of-Chapter Exercises

Questions

  1. Why do people and organizations need to have trust in the financial reporting process?
  2. What is the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)?
  3. What types of companies fall under the jurisdiction of the SEC?
  4. According to the SEC, who has the responsibility for setting generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (U.S. GAAP)?
  5. What is the purpose of the Accounting Standards Codification?
  6. What is a Form 10-K and a Form 10-Q?
  7. Within the SEC, what is the purpose of EDGAR?
  8. What role in the setting of financial accounting standards is played by the Emerging Issues Task Force (EITF)?
  9. Why does the SEC not examine all the submitted financial statements to ensure their fair presentation?
  10. Why must public companies hire an independent auditing firm before they submit their financial statements to the SEC?
  11. Why do nonpublic companies often have their financial statements audited?
  12. What is a CPA? How does a person become a CPA?
  13. What organization regulates and sets the standards for the firms that audit public companies?
  14. What legislation established the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB)?
  15. What organization sets the standards for the firms that do not audit public companies?
  16. An independent auditor examines the financial statements prepared by the management of Simon Corporation. Who is the primary beneficiary of the audit work?
  17. An independent auditor examines the financial statements prepared by the management of Garfunkel Corporation. The auditor believes the financial information is fairly presented according to U. S. GAAP. What type of assurance does the auditor provide?
  18. Why do auditors not provide absolute assurance that examined financial statements are presented fairly according to U.S. GAAP?
  19. What are internal controls?
  20. How is an auditor’s work affected by the presence and quality of a company’s internal controls?
  21. What is an unqualified audit opinion?
  22. Why might an auditor include an explanatory paragraph in an audit report between the scope paragraph and the opinion paragraph?
  23. Under what conditions does an auditor not render an unqualified opinion?

True or False

  1. ____ The Howard Company has exceptionally good internal control. The quality of that internal control has no effect on the work of the company’s independent auditor.
  2. ____ An accountant becomes a CPA based on federal rules and regulations.
  3. ____ A person who works as an accountant for a significant number of years becomes known as a CPA.
  4. ____ The SEC is the current accounting standard-setting body in the United States.
  5. ____ The inclusion of an added paragraph in an audit report after the scope (second) paragraph indicates that the financial statement contains a material misstatement.
  6. ____ The PCAOB oversees the work of CPAs who audit companies that issue publicly traded securities.
  7. ____ Nonpublic companies rarely have an audit performed on their financial statements because they do not issue publicly traded securities.
  8. ____ The Auditing Standards Board works under FASB to resolve relatively simple issues.
  9. ____ The Red Company creates a new type of transaction and is not sure how to apply current U.S. GAAP for its reporting. The EITF might be called on to provide guidance.
  10. ____ Janice Hough serves as an investment analyst for a number of wealthy clients. She is likely to make use of EDGAR.
  11. ____ The Accounting Standards Codification is one portion of U.S. GAAP.
  12. ____ Audits are paid for by the creditors and investors of a company that receive the actual benefit of the CPA’s work.
  13. ____ A CPA firm rarely has more than 100 auditors in its employment.
  14. ____ The term “presents fairly” means that the financial information contained in a set of financial statements is correct.
  15. ____ FASB is a governmental agency that works under the jurisdiction of the SEC.

Multiple Choice

  1. Whittington and Company is a CPA firm that audits publicly traded companies in the state of Oregon. Which of the following is true concerning Whittington and Company?

    1. Whittington and Company is regulated by FASB.
    2. Whittington and Company is hired by the companies that the firm audits.
    3. Whittington and Company should follow the auditing standards set forth by the Auditing Standards Board (ASB).
    4. Whittington and Company prepares the financial statements for the companies that the firm audits.
  2. Which of the following is not true about an audit report?

    1. An extra paragraph inserted after the scope paragraph indicates that the auditor has given something other than an unqualified opinion.
    2. If a material misstatement is discovered in the financial statements, the auditor should not issue an unqualified opinion.
    3. The report is addressed to the company’s board of directors and shareholders.
    4. To ensure that the opinion is properly noted, it is provided in the very first sentence of the first paragraph.
  3. Which of the following is true about the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB)?

    1. FASB sets standards that apply to companies throughout the world.
    2. FASB was created by the EITF to handle smaller issues in a timely manner.
    3. FASB produces accounting standards that apply to virtually all companies in the United States.
    4. FASB was created by the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
  4. Which organization is a governmental entity?

    1. SEC
    2. FASB
    3. EITF
    4. ASB
  5. Which of the following is true about the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)?

    1. The SEC sets accounting standards in the United States.
    2. The SEC was not given any enforcement powers by the U.S. Congress.
    3. The SEC was charged with ensuring that adequate and fair information is made available about publicly traded companies.
    4. The SEC is an international agency that monitors financial reporting around the world.
  6. Which of the following is true about the PCAOB?

    1. It regulates firms that audit companies that issue publicly traded securities.
    2. It sets accounting standards for smaller U.S. companies.
    3. It was created in 1934 during the Great Depression.
    4. Its standards apply to all companies within the United States.
  7. An independent auditor provides an unqualified opinion on the financial statements of the O’Neil Corporation. Which of the following statements is true?

    1. The auditor must have followed the standards produced by the Auditing Standards Board (ASB).
    2. The first paragraph of the audit report indicates the auditor’s responsibility and the company’s responsibility.
    3. The SEC oversees the financial reporting by O’Neil.
    4. An added paragraph before the scope paragraph indicates that the auditor has not provided an unqualified audit opinion.
  8. Which of the following is not a reason why an auditor only provides reasonable assurance in an audit report?

    1. Financial statements contain numerous estimations.
    2. The sheer volume of transactions means that the auditor cannot examine every transaction or other event.
    3. U.S. GAAP have only been produced since 2002 and do not cover all possible transactions.
    4. Fraud can be hidden from the independent auditor by the management of the reporting company.
  9. Which of the following is not necessary to become a Certified Public Accountant (CPA)?

    1. A specified amount of education
    2. Two years of work with one of the Big Four firms
    3. A passing grade on every part of the CPA Exam
    4. Practical experience

Video Problems

Professor Joe Hoyle discusses the answers to these two problems at the indicated links. After formulating your answers, watch each video to see how Professor Hoyle answers these questions.

  1. Your roommate is an English major. The roommate’s parents own a chain of ice cream shops throughout Florida. One day, on the way to a psychology class, your roommate poses this question: “Each year, my parents produce a set of financial statements for their business. The statements look great. Then, after all the work is finished, they go out and hire a CPA who charges them a hefty fee. That seems like such a waste of money. The financial statements have already been prepared before the CPA ever shows up. What are they getting for their money?” How would you respond?

  2. Your uncle and two friends started a small office supply store several years ago. The company has expanded and now has several large locations. Your uncle knows that you are taking a financial accounting class and asks you the following question: “Our growth has been moving forward very nicely. We have an excellent business that is poised to continue getting bigger. Recently, our accountant came to us and indicated that we would need to start following the rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission. I realize that this can be time consuming and costly. Why do we need to worry about the SEC now when we have not had to do so in the past?” How would you respond?

Problems

  1. Match the following organizations to their descriptions.

    • ____ FASB
    • ____ PCAOB
    • ____ SEC
    • ____ EITF
    • ____ ASB
    1. Sets auditing standards for auditors of publicly traded companies
    2. Sets U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
    3. Helps apply U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles to new situations
    4. Sets auditing standards for auditors of private companies
    5. Created by the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 to protect investors
  2. In an unqualified audit report, the first three paragraphs are the introductory paragraph, scope paragraph, and opinion paragraph. Describe the purpose of each and list several items included in each.
  3. Explain the difference between the work of the PCAOB and the ASB.
  4. Explain the difference between the work of the EITF and FASB.
  5. Provide a short description of the role that each of the following plays in the financial reporting process.

    • FASB
    • Big Four
    • Unqualified audit opinion
    • EDGAR
    • Internal control

Research Assignments

  1. The role of the CPA in the world of business is often misunderstood. Go to the Web site http://www.thisway2cpa.com. On the left side of the homepage, there are several links including “The Profession,” “Education,” “Career Tools,” and “Exam & Licensure.” Click on the link that seems most interesting. Make a list of four things that you learned by exploring the information provided through the chosen link.
  2. Assume that you take a job as a summer employee for an investment advisory service. Your boss tells you that you need to learn to use the SEC Web site and EDGAR to locate information about various companies. For example, the boss wants to know whether the inventory held by PepsiCo increased or decreased between 2009 and 2010. That information will be found in the Form 10-K, which is the annual report filed by the company with the SEC. To get started, the boss jots down the following steps to find that desired piece of information. Follow the steps and determine the change. The boss also gives one more suggestion: “As you search through the Form 10-K for this company, start to notice all of the other types of information that are readily available to help us understand this company, its financial health and future prospects.”

    1. Go to http://www.sec.gov.
    2. Scroll down to “Filings & Forms.”
    3. Click on “Search for Company Filings.”
    4. Click on “Company or fund name, ticker symbol, CIK (Central Index Key), file number, state, country, or SIC (Standard Industrial Classification).”
    5. Type in “PepsiCo” in the “Company Name” box and click on “Find Companies.”
    6. On the “Filter Results” line, type “10-K” into the “Filing Type” box and type “20110701” into the “Prior to” box and click on “Search.”
    7. The top line for the list of filings should be the 10-K that was filed by the company on 2011-02-18. Click on the “Documents” link for that 10-K.
    8. On the top line is listed the original 10-K filed on that date. Click on the link “d10k.htm.”
    9. The original Form 10-K filed by PepsiCo for the fiscal year ended December 25, 2010, should appear.
    10. Scroll to page 75 and find the consolidated balance sheet for 2010 and 2009. Determine the amount of inventory reported by PepsiCo as of the end of both of these years and the increase or decrease that took place.

Chapter 5: Why Is Financial Information Adjusted Prior to the Production of Financial Statements?

Video Clip

(click to see video)

In this video, Professor Joe Hoyle introduces the essential points covered in Chapter 5 “Why Is Financial Information Adjusted Prior to the Production of Financial Statements?”.

5.1 The Need for Adjusting Entries

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Explain the purpose and necessity of adjusting entries.
  2. List examples of several typical accounts that require adjusting entries.
  3. Provide examples of adjusting entries for various accrued expenses.

Accounting for the Passage of Time

Question: The first two steps of the accounting process were identified in Chapter 4 “How Does an Organization Accumulate and Organize the Information Necessary to Create Financial Statements?” as “analyze” and “record.” A transaction occurs and the resulting financial effects are ascertained through careful analysis. Once determined, the monetary impact on specific accounts is recorded in the form of a journal entry. Each of the debits and credits is then posted to the corresponding T-accounts located in the ledger. As needed, current balances can be determined for any of these accounts by netting the debits and credits. It is a system as old as the painting of the Mona Lisa.

The third step in this process was listed as “adjust.” Why do ledger account balances require adjustment? Why are the T-account totals found in the trial balance at the end of Chapter 4 “How Does an Organization Accumulate and Organize the Information Necessary to Create Financial Statements?” (Figure 4.21 “Lawndale Company Trial Balance (after all journal entries have been posted)—December 31, Year Four”) not simply used by the accountant to produce Year Four financial statements for that business (Lawndale Company)?

 

Answer: Financial events take place throughout the year. As indicated, journal entries record the individual debit and credit effects that are then entered into the proper T-accounts. However, not all changes in these balances occur as the result of physical events. Some accounts increase or decrease because of the passage of time. The impact can be so gradual that producing individual journal entries is not reasonable.

For example, salary is earned by employees every day (actually every minute), but payment is not made until the end of the week or month. Many other expenses, such as utilities, rent, and interest, are incurred over time in much the same way. Accounting for supplies such as pens and envelopes is only slightly different. This asset is slowly depleted because of usage rather than time, but the impact on accounts is basically the same. As indicated in Chapter 4 “How Does an Organization Accumulate and Organize the Information Necessary to Create Financial Statements?”, unless an accounting system is programmed to record tiny incremental changes, none of these financial effects is captured as they occur.

Following each day of work, few companies take the trouble to record the equivalent amount of salary, rent, or other expense along with the related liability. When a pad of paper is consumed within an organization, debiting supplies expense for a dollar and crediting supplies for the same amount hardly seems worth the effort.

Therefore, prior to producing financial statements, the accountant must search for any such changes that have not yet been recognized. These incremental increases or decreases must also be recorded in a debit and credit format (called adjusting entriesChanges in account balances recorded prior to preparing financial statements to update T-accounts because some amounts have increased or decreased over time but have not been recorded through a journal entry. rather than journal entries) with the impact then posted to the appropriate ledger accounts. The updating process continues until all balances are presented fairly. These adjustments are a prerequisite step in the preparation of financial statements. They are physically identical to the journal entries recorded for transactions, but they occur at a different time and for a different reason.

Test Yourself

Question:

On Monday morning, a company hires a person and promises to pay $300 per day for working Monday through Friday. The first payment of $1,500 is made at the end of the workday on Friday. The person quits on Saturday. Which of the following statements is true?

  1. An adjusting entry is needed when the person is hired if financial statements are prepared at that time.
  2. An adjusting entry is needed at the end of work on Monday if financial statements are prepared at that time.
  3. An adjusting entry is needed at the end of work on Friday when payment is made if financial statements are prepared at that time.
  4. An adjusting entry is needed on Saturday when the person quits if financial statements are prepared at that time.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: An adjusting entry is needed at the end of work on Monday if financial statements are prepared at that time.

Explanation:

When financial statements are prepared, adjusting entries recognize changes created by the passage of time. Hiring an employee creates no change; money has not been earned. Payment is an actual transaction recorded by a journal entry. The person quitting requires no entry because further work was not done after Friday’s payment. When an employee works on Monday, salary is owed for that day. The amount is probably not recorded by the accounting system, so an adjusting entry is needed.

Examples of Adjusting Entries

Question: Adjusting entries update ledger accounts for any financial changes that occur gradually over time so that they are not recorded through a journal entry. Large companies will make hundreds, if not thousands, of adjustments at the end of each fiscal period. What kinds of adjustments are normally needed before a set of financial statements is prepared?

 

Answer: A variety of adjusting entries will be examined throughout the remainder of this textbook. One of the accountant’s primary responsibilities is the careful study of all financial information to ensure that it is presented fairly before being released. Such investigation can lead to the preparation of numerous adjusting entries. Here, in Chapter 5 “Why Is Financial Information Adjusted Prior to the Production of Financial Statements?”, only the following four general types of adjustments are introduced to demonstrate the process and also reflect the importance of the revenue recognition principle and the matching principle. In later chapters, additional examples will be described and analyzed.

  • Accrued expenses (also referred to as accrued liabilities)
  • Prepaid expenses (including supplies)
  • Accrued revenue
  • Unearned revenue (also referred to as deferred revenue)

Usually, at the start of the adjustment process, the accountant prepares an updated trial balance to provide a visual, organized representation of all ledger account balances. This listing aids the accountant in spotting figures that might need adjusting in order to be fairly presented. Therefore, Figure 4.21 “Lawndale Company Trial Balance (after all journal entries have been posted)—December 31, Year Four” is replicated here in Figure 5.1 “Updated Trial Balance for the Lawndale Company” because this trial balance holds the December 31, Year Four, account balances for the Lawndale Company determined at the end of Chapter 4 “How Does an Organization Accumulate and Organize the Information Necessary to Create Financial Statements?”. All transactions have been recorded and posted, but no adjustments have yet been made.

Figure 5.1 Updated Trial Balance for the Lawndale Company

Adjusting Entry to Recognize an Accrued Expense

Question: The first type of adjustment listed is an accrued expenseExpenses (and related liabilities) that grow gradually over time; if not recognized automatically by the accounting system, the monetary impact is recorded prior to preparing the company’s financial statements by means of an adjusting entry.. Previously, the word “accrue” was defined as “to grow.” Thus, an accrued expense is one that increases gradually over time. As has been indicated, some companies program their accounting systems to record such expenses as incurred. This accrual process eliminates the need for subsequent adjusting entries. Other companies make few, if any, accruals and update all balances through numerous adjustments when financial statements are to be prepared.

The mechanical recording process for such expenses should be designed to meet the informational needs of company officials. Some prefer to have updated balances readily available in the ledger at all times while others are inclined to wait for periodic financial reports to be issued. What are some typical accrued expenses, and what is the appropriate adjusting entry if they are not recorded as incurred by the accounting system?

 

Answer: If a reporting company’s accounting system recognizes an expense as it grows, no adjustment is necessary. The balances are recorded properly. They are ready to be included in financial statements. Thus, when statements are prepared, the accountant only needs to search for accrued expenses that have not yet been recognized.

Numerous expenses get slightly larger each day until paid, including salary, rent, insurance, utilities, interest, advertising, income taxes, and the like. For example, on its December 31, 2010, balance sheet, The Hershey Company reported accrued liabilities of approximately $593 million. In the notes to the financial statements, this amount was explained as debts owed by the company on that day for payroll, compensation and benefits ($219 million), advertising and promotion ($211 million), and other accrued expenses ($163 million).

Assume, for illustration purposes, that the accountant reviews the trial balance presented in Figure 5.1 “Updated Trial Balance for the Lawndale Company” and realizes that utility expenses (such as electricity and water) have not been recorded since the most recent payment early in December of Year Four. Assume that Lawndale Company currently owes $900 for those utilities. The following adjustment is needed before financial statements can be created. It is an adjusting entry because no physical event took place. This liability simply grew over time and has not yet been paid.

Figure 5.2 Adjusting Entry 1: Amount Owed for Utilities

Test Yourself

Question:

A company owes its employees $7,300 at the end of Year One, which it pays on January 8, Year Two. This balance was not accrued by the company’s accounting system in Year One, nor was it recorded as an adjusting entry on December 31, Year One. Which of the following is not true for the Year One financial statements?

  1. Reported expenses are too low by $7,300.
  2. Reported net income is too high by $7,300.
  3. Reported total assets are too high by $7,300.
  4. Reported total liabilities are too low by $7,300.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: Reported total assets are too high by $7,300.

Explanation:

Neither the expense nor the payable was recorded in Year One, and those reported balances are too low. Because the expense was too low, reported net income will be overstated by $7,300. This accrual does not impact an asset until paid in Year Two. Therefore, the Year One asset balance is properly stated.

Key Takeaway

Adjusting entries are often necessary to update account balances before financial statements can be prepared. These adjustments are not the result of physical events or transactions but are caused by the passage of time or small changes in account balances. The accountant examines all current account balances as listed in the trial balance to identify amounts that need to be changed prior to the preparation of financial statements. Although numerous adjustments are studied in this textbook, four general types are especially common: accrued expenses, prepaid expenses, accrued revenues, and unearned revenues. Any expense (such as salary, interest, or rent) that grows gradually over time but has not yet been paid is known as an accrued expense (or accrued liability). If not automatically recorded by the accounting system as incurred, the amount due must be entered into the records by adjustment prior to producing financial statements.

5.2 Preparing Various Adjusting Entries

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Explain the need for an adjusting entry in the reporting of prepaid expenses and be able to prepare that adjustment.
  2. Explain the need for an adjusting entry in the reporting of accrued revenue and be able to prepare that adjustment.
  3. Describe the challenge of determining when the earning process for revenue is substantially complete and discuss possible resolutions.
  4. Explain the need for an adjusting entry in the reporting of unearned revenue and be able to prepare that adjustment.

Recording and Adjusting Prepaid Expenses

Question: The second adjustment to be considered here involves the handling of prepaid expensesA future economic benefit created when an expense is paid in advance; reported as an asset initially and then gradually reassigned to expense over time through adjusting entries.. For example, as of May 29, 2011, General Mills Inc. reported “prepaid expenses and other current assets” of $483.5 million. A decision maker studying this business needs to understand what information is conveyed by such balances.

In the transactions that were recorded in the previous chapter, Journal Entry 10 reported a $4,000 payment made by the Lawndale Company for four months of rent to use a building. An asset—prepaid rent—was recorded at that time through the normal accounting process. The resulting account is listed on the trial balance in Figure 5.1 “Updated Trial Balance for the Lawndale Company”. Such costs are common and often include payments for insurance and supplies.

Assume, at the end of Year Four, the company’s accountant examines the invoice that was paid and determines that this $4,000 in rent covered the period from December 1, Year Four, until March 31, Year Five. As a result, an adjusting entry is now necessary so that all balances are presented fairly. Why is a year-end adjusting entry often needed in connection with a prepaid expense?

 

Answer: During these four months, the Lawndale Company will use the rented facility to help generate revenue. Over that time, the future economic benefit established by the payment gradually becomes a past benefit. The asset literally changes into an expense day by day. In this example, one month of the rent from this payment has now been consumed. The benefit provided by using this building during December to gain revenue no longer exists. That portion of the rent ($1,000 or $4,000/four months) reflects a past benefit and should be reported as an expense in Year Four in accordance with the matching principle. Expenses are recognized in the same period as the revenue they help to generate.

As a preliminary step in preparing financial statements, an adjusting entry is needed to reclassify $1,000 from the asset (prepaid rent) into an expense (rent expense). This adjustment leaves $3,000 in the asset (for the remaining three months of rent on the building) while $1,000 is now reported as an expense (for the previous one month of rent).

Figure 5.3 Adjusting Entry 2 (Version 1): Use Is Made of a Rented Facility (Original Entry to Prepaid Rent)

Adjusting entries are created to take whatever amounts reside in the ledger and align them with the requirements of U.S. GAAP (or IFRS, if those standards are being applied). For this illustration, the original $4,000 payment was classified as a prepaid rent and the adjustment was created in response to that initial entry. After $1,000 is moved from asset to expense, the balances are presented fairly: an asset of $3,000 for the future benefit and an expense of $1,000 for the past.

In recording transactions, some accounting systems mechanically handle events in a different manner than others. Thus, construction of each adjusting entry depends on the recording that previously took place. To illustrate, assume that when this $4,000 payment was made, the company entered the debit to rent expense rather than prepaid rent. Perhaps an error was made or, more likely, a computerized accounting system was programmed to record all money spent for rent as an expense. For convenience, many companies prefer to automate the recording process wherever possible knowing that adjusting entries can then be made to arrive at proper balances. The initial accounting has no impact on the figures to be reported but does alter the adjustment process.

If a $4,000 expense was recorded here initially rather than a prepayment, an adjusting entry is still needed. The expense appearing on the income statement should be $1,000 (for the past one month) while the appropriate asset on the balance sheet should be $3,000 (for the subsequent three months). If the entire cost of $4,000 is located in rent expense, the following alternative is necessary to arrive at proper balances. This adjustment shifts $3,000 out of the expense and into the asset.

Figure 5.4 Adjusting Entry 2A (Version 2): Use Is Made of a Rented Facility (Original Entry to Rent Expense)

This adjusting entry leaves the appropriate $1,000 in expense and puts $3,000 into the asset account. Those are the proper balances as of the end of the year. Regardless of the account, the accountant first determines the balance that is present in the ledger and then creates the specific adjustment needed to arrive at fairly presented figures.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company pays $4,000 to rent a building on October 1, Year One, for four months. The amount was recorded as prepaid rent, and no further change was made in the balance. When preparing to produce Year One financial statements, the accountant erroneously believed that the entire $4,000 was originally recorded as a rent expense and made an adjustment based on that assumption. Which of the following is a result of the accountant’s action?

  1. The prepaid rent is overstated on the balance sheet by $4,000.
  2. The rent expense is overstated on the income statement by $4,000.
  3. The prepaid rent is overstated on the balance sheet by $1,000.
  4. The rent expense is overstated on the income statement by $1,000.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: The prepaid rent is overstated on the balance sheet by $4,000.

Explanation:

Rent was $1,000 per month. Three months have passed. The rent expense should be reported as $3,000 with the prepaid rent as $1,000. All $4,000 was recorded as prepaid rent. The accountant thought the rent expense was recorded as $4,000, so $1,000 was moved from expense to prepaid rent. That entry raised the prepaid rent to $5,000 ($4,000 plus $1,000) and dropped the expense to a negative $1,000. The prepaid rent is overstated by $4,000 ($5,000 rather than $1,000); the rent expense is understated by $4,000.

Recognizing Accrued Revenue

Question: The third general type of adjustment to be covered here is accrued revenue. As the title implies, this revenue is one that grows gradually over time. If not recorded by a company’s accounting system as earned, an adjusting entry to update the balances is necessary before financial statements are prepared. This process mirrors that of accrued expenses. What adjustment is used by a reporting organization to recognize any accrued revenue that has not previously been recorded?

 

Answer: Various types of revenue are earned as time passes rather than through a physical event such as the sale of inventory. To illustrate, assume that a customer visited the Lawndale Company five days before the end of Year Four to ask for assistance. The customer must be away from his ranch for thirty days and wanted company employees to feed, water, and care for his horses during the period of absence. Everything needed for the job is available in the customer’s barn. The Lawndale Company just provides the service. The parties agreed that the company will receive $100 per day for this work with payment to be made upon the person’s return.

No asset changes hands at the start of this task. Thus, the company’s accounting system is not likely to make any entry until payment is eventually received. However, after the first five days of this work, the Lawndale Company is ready to prepare Year Four financial statements. For that reason, the company needs to recognize all revenue earned to date. Service to this customer has been carried out for five days at a rate of $100 per day. The company has performed the work to earn $500 although the money will not be received until later. Consequently, a receivable and revenue for this amount should be recognized through an adjusting entry. The earning process for the $500 occurred in Year Four and should be recorded in this year.

Figure 5.5 Adjusting Entry 3: Revenue Earned for Work Done

The $500 receivable will be removed in the subsequent period when the customer eventually pays Lawndale for the services rendered. No recognition is needed in this adjusting entry for cost of goods sold because a service, rather than inventory, is being sold.

The Earning Process

Question: As discussed in a previous chapter, the revenue realization principle (within accrual accounting) provides formal guidance for the timing of revenue reporting. It states in part that the earning process must be substantially complete before revenue is recognized. That seems reasonable. In the previous example, the work has been performed for only five days out of a total of thirty. That does not appear to qualify as substantially complete. Is accrued revenue recognized if the earning process is not substantially complete?

 

Answer: This example draws attention to one of the most challenging questions that accountants face in creating a fair portrait of a business. When should revenue be recognized? The revenue realization principle is established by U.S. GAAP, but practical issues remain. For example, when does an earning process become substantially complete? Here, the simplest way to resolve this accounting issue is to consider the nature of the task to be performed by the Lawndale Company.

Is the job of caring for the horses a single task to be carried out by the company over thirty days or is it thirty distinct tasks to be performed each day over this period of time?

If the work is viewed as one large task like painting a house, then the earning process here is only one-sixth of the way finished and not substantially complete. No revenue should be recognized until the remainder of the work has been performed. In that case, the adjusting entry is not warranted.

Conversely, if this assignment is actually thirty separate tasks, then five of them are substantially complete at the end of the year, and revenue of $500 is properly recorded by the previous adjustment. Unfortunately, the distinction is not always clear. Because accounting is conservative, revenue should never be recognized unless evidence predominates that the individual tasks are clearly separate events.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Acme Company paints houses in and around San Antonio, Texas. In December of Year One, the company was hired to paint the outside of a five-story apartment building for $100,000. All money was to be paid when the work was finished. By December 31, Year One, the company had painted the first three floors of the building and recognized accrued revenue of $60,000 ($100,000 × 3/5). Which of the following is not true?

  1. The reported net income is overstated in Year One.
  2. The reported assets are overstated at the end of Year One.
  3. The reported liabilities are overstated at the end of Year One.
  4. The reported revenue is overstated in Year One.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: The reported liabilities are overstated at the end of Year One.

Explanation:

Through the entry that was made, Acme recognized a receivable and revenue. The revenue increases net income. However, painting this building is a single job that is only 3/5 complete. That is not the same as “substantially complete.” Individual floors do not represent separate jobs. Based on accrual accounting, no justification exists for recognizing revenue. The receivable, revenue, and net income are all too high. This job does not impact liabilities, which continue to be reported properly.

The Revenue Recognition Principle

Question: In practice, how does an accountant determine whether a specific job is substantially complete? Because of the direct impact on net income, this judgment must be critical in financial reporting.

 

Answer: Accountants spend a lot of time searching for credible evidence as to the true nature of the events they encounter and report. Their goal is to ensure that all information included in financial statements is presented fairly according to U.S. GAAP (or IFRS). The timing of revenue recognition can be a special challenge that requires analysis and expertise.

Is a job substantially complete so that revenue should be recognized or not?

That question can often be difficult to answer. Here is one technique that might be applied in analyzing this particular example. Assume that after five days, Lawndale had to quit feeding the customer’s horses for some legitimate reason. Should the company be able to demand and collect $500 for the work done to that point? If so, then those five days are distinct tasks that have been completed. However, if no money would be due based on working just five days, substantial completion has not been achieved by the services performed to date. Thus, revenue recognition would be inappropriate.

In Adjusting Entry 3 (Figure 5.5 “Adjusting Entry 3: Revenue Earned for Work Done”), the assumption is made that the daily tasks are separate and that the company could collect for the work accomplished to date. However, this type of judgment can be extremely difficult in the real world. It is often the product of much thought and discussion. The impact on the financial statements can be material, which increases pressure on the accountant. Even with standard rules, painting a fairly presented portrait is not always easy.

Students frequently enroll in a financial accounting course believing that little is required other than learning set rules and then following them mechanically. As will be demonstrated many times in this textbook, nothing ever replaces the need for experienced judgment on the part of the accountant.

Unearned Revenue

Question: The last adjusting entry to be covered at this time is unearned (or deferred) revenue. Some companies operate in industries where money is received first and then earned gradually over time. Newspaper and magazine businesses, for example, are paid in advance by their subscribers and advertisers. The earning process becomes substantially complete by the subsequent issuance of their products.

For example, the January 2, 2011, balance sheet of The Washington Post Company reported deferred revenues as a liability of over $379 million. The notes to the company’s financial statement provided clear information about the accounting process: “Amounts received from customers in advance are deferred as liabilities” or “Revenues from newspaper subscriptions and retail sales are recognized upon the later delivery or publication date.”

In Journal Entry 13 in Chapter 4 “How Does an Organization Accumulate and Organize the Information Necessary to Create Financial Statements?”, the Lawndale Company reported receiving $3,000 in cash for services to be rendered at a later date. An unearned revenue account was recorded as a liability for that amount and appears in the trial balance in Figure 5.1 “Updated Trial Balance for the Lawndale Company”When is an adjusting entry needed in connection with the recognition of previously unearned revenue?

 

Answer: As indicated by The Washington Post Company, unearned revenue represents a liability recognized when money is received before work is done. After the required service is carried out so that the earning process is substantially complete, an appropriate amount is reclassified from unearned revenue on the balance sheet to revenue on the income statement. For example, in connection with the $3,000 payment collected by Lawndale, assume that all the work necessary to recognize the first $600 was performed by the end of Year Four. Prior to preparing financial statements, an adjusting entry reduces the liability and recognizes the earned revenue.

Figure 5.6 Adjusting Entry 4: Money Previously Received Has Now Been Earned

Test Yourself

Question:

The Midlothian Trash Company of Richmond, Virginia, charges customers $100 per month to pick up trash for one month. Money is due on the first day of each month. By the beginning of the current month, the company has received $49,000. If financial statements are made immediately, what reporting is appropriate for the company?

  1. Assets increase and liabilities increase
  2. Assets increase and revenues increase
  3. Expenses increase and revenues increase
  4. Expenses increase and liabilities increase

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: Assets increase and liabilities increase.

Explanation:

The company receives cash, so reported assets are higher. However, the earning process at the first day of the month is not substantially complete, so no revenue can be recognized yet. Instead, an unearned revenue is recorded that increases the company’s liabilities. The company owes the service to its customers, or it owes them their money back.

Key Takeaway

To align reported balances with the rules of accrual accounting, adjusting entries are created as a step just prior to the preparation of financial statements. Prepaid expenses are normally recorded first as assets when paid and then reclassified to expense as time passes to satisfy the matching principle. The mechanics of this process can vary somewhat based on the initial recording of the payment, but the reported figures should be the same regardless of the company’s accounting system. Accrued revenue and the corresponding receivable are recognized when the earning process is deemed to be substantially complete even though cash is not yet received. The time at which this benchmark is achieved can depend on whether a single job or a collection of independent tasks is under way. As with many areas of financial reporting, this decision by the accountant often relies heavily on professional judgment rather than absolute rules. Companies occasionally receive money for services or goods before they are provided. In such cases, unearned revenue is recorded as a liability to indicate the obligation to the customer. Over time, as the earning process becomes substantially complete, the unearned revenue is reclassified as revenue.

5.3 Preparation of Financial Statements

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Prepare an income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet based on the balances in an adjusted trial balance.
  2. Explain the purpose and construction of closing entries.

Preparing Financial Statements

Question: The accounting process is clearly a series of defined steps that take a multitude of monetary transactions and eventually turn them into fairly presented financial statements. After all adjusting entries have been recorded in the journal and posted to the appropriate T-accounts in the ledger, what happens next in the accounting process?

 

Answer: After the adjusting entries are posted, the accountant should believe that all material misstatements have been removed from the accounts. Thus, they are presented fairly according to U.S. GAAP (or IFRS) and can be used by decision makers. As one final check, an adjusted trial balance is produced for a last, careful review. Assuming that no additional concerns are uncovered, the accountant prepares an income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet.

The basic financial statements are then completed by the production of a statement of cash flows. In contrast to the previous three, this statement does not report ending ledger account balances but rather discloses and organizes all of the changes that took place during the period in the composition of the cash account. As indicated in Chapter 3 “How Is Financial Information Delivered to Decision Makers Such as Investors and Creditors?”, cash flows are classified as resulting from operating activities, investing activities, or financing activities.

The reporting process is then finalized by the preparation of explanatory notes that accompany a set of financial statements.

The final trial balance for the Lawndale Company (including the four adjusting entries produced earlier) is presented in Figure 5.7 “Updated Trial Balance for Lawndale Company—December 31, Year Four (after posting four adjusting entries to “. The original trial balance in Figure 5.1 “Updated Trial Balance for the Lawndale Company” has been updated by the four adjusting entries that were discussed in this chapter.

 

Adjusting Entry 1

  • Utilities expense increases by $900
  • Utilities payable increases by $900

 

Adjusting Entry 2 (Version 1)

  • Rent expense increases by $1,000
  • Prepaid rent decreases by $1,000

 

Adjusting Entry 3

  • Accounts receivable increases by $500
  • Sales of services increases by $500

 

Adjusting Entry 4

  • Unearned revenue decreases by $600
  • Sales of services increases by $600

 

These changes are entered into Figure 5.1 “Updated Trial Balance for the Lawndale Company” to bring about the totals presented in Figure 5.7 “Updated Trial Balance for Lawndale Company—December 31, Year Four (after posting four adjusting entries to “.

Figure 5.7 Updated Trial Balance for Lawndale Company—December 31, Year Four (after posting four adjusting entries to Figure 5.1 “Updated Trial Balance for the Lawndale Company”)

After that, each of the final figures is appropriately placed within the first three financial statements. Revenues and expenses appear in the income statement, assets and liabilities in the balance sheet, and so on. The resulting statements for the Lawndale Company are exhibited in Figure 5.8 “Year Four Financial Statements for Lawndale Company”.

Figure 5.8 Year Four Financial Statements for Lawndale Company

To keep this initial illustration reasonably simple, no attempt has been made to record all possible accounts or adjusting entries. For example, no accrued expenses have been recognized for either income taxes or interest expense owed in connection with the notes payable. One example of an accrued expense is sufficient in this early coverage because both income taxes and interest expense will be described in depth in a later chapter. Likewise, depreciation expense of noncurrent assets with finite lives (such as the truck shown on the company’s trial balance) will be discussed subsequently. However, the creation of financial statements for the Lawndale Company should demonstrate the functioning of the accounting process as well as the basic structure of the income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet.

Several aspects of this process should be noted:

  • The statements are properly identified by name of company, name of statement, and date. The balance sheet is for a particular day (December 31, Year Four) and the other statements cover a period of time (Year ending December 31, Year Four).
  • Each account in the trial balance in Figure 5.7 “Updated Trial Balance for Lawndale Company—December 31, Year Four (after posting four adjusting entries to “ appears within only one statement. Accounts receivable is an asset on the balance sheet. Cost of goods sold is an expense on the income statement. Dividends paid is a reduction shown on the statement of retained earnings. Each account serves one purpose and appears on only one financial statement.
  • There is no T-account for net income. Net income is a composition of all revenues, gains, expenses, and losses for the year. The net income figure computed in the income statements is then used in the statement of retained earnings. In the same manner, there is no T-account for the ending retained earnings balance. Ending retained earnings is a composition of the beginning retained earnings balance, net income, and dividends paid. The ending retained earnings balance computed in the statement of retained earnings is then used in the balance sheet.
  • The balance sheet does balance. The total of the assets is equal to the total of all liabilities and stockholders’ equity (capital stock and retained earnings). Assets must always have a source.

The statement of cash flows for the Lawndale Company cannot be created based solely on the limited information available in this chapter concerning the changes in the cash account. Thus, it has been omitted. Complete coverage of the preparation of a statement of cash flows will be presented in Chapter 17 “In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed by the Statement of Cash Flows?”.

The Purpose of Closing Entries

Question: Analyze, record, adjust, and report—the four basic steps in the accounting process. Is the work year complete for the accountant after financial statements are prepared?

 

Answer: One last mechanical process needs to be mentioned. Whether a business is as big as Microsoft or as small as the local convenience store, the final action performed each year by the accountant is the preparation of closing entriesEntries made to reduce all temporary ledger accounts (revenues, expenses, gains, losses, and dividends paid) to zero at the end of an accounting period so that a new measurement for the subsequent period can begin; the net effect of this process is transferred into the retained earnings account to update the beginning balance to the year-end figure.. Five types of accounts—revenues, expenses, gains, losses, and dividends paid—reflect the various increases and decreases that occur in a company’s net assets in the current period. These accounts are often deemed “temporary” because they only include changes for one year at a time. Consequently, the figure reported by Microsoft as its revenue for the year ended June 30, 2011, measures only sales during that year. T-accounts for rent expense, insurance expense, and the like reflect just the current decreases in net assets.

In order for the accounting system to start measuring the effects for each new year, these specific T-accounts must all be returned to a zero balance after annual financial statements are produced. Consequently, all of the revenue T-accounts maintained by Microsoft show a total at the end of its fiscal year (June 30, 2011) of $69.9 billion but contain a zero balance at the start of the very next day.

  • Final credit totals existing in every revenue and gain account are closed out by recording equal and off-setting debits.
  • Likewise, ending debit balances for expenses, losses, and dividends paid require a credit entry of the same amount to return each of these T-accounts to zero.

After these accounts are closed at year’s end, the resulting single figure is the equivalent of net income reported for the year (revenues and gains less expenses and losses) reduced by any dividends paid. This net effect is recorded in the retained earnings T-account. The closing process effectively moves the balance for every revenue, expense, gain, loss, and dividend paid into retained earnings. In the same manner as journal entries and adjusting entries, closing entries are recorded initially in the journal and then posted to the ledger. As a result, the beginning retained earnings balance for the year is updated to arrive at the ending total reported on the balance sheet.

Assets, liabilities, capital stock, and retained earnings all start out each year with a balance that is the same as the ending figure reported on the previous balance sheet. Those accounts are permanent; they are not designed to report an impact occurring during the current year. In contrast, revenues, expenses, gains, losses, and dividends paid all begin the first day of each year with a zero balance—ready to record the events of this new period.

Key Takeaway

After all adjustments are prepared and recorded, an adjusted trial balance is created, and those figures are used to produce financial statements. The income statement is prepared first, followed by the statement of retained earnings and then the balance sheet. The statement of cash flows is constructed separately because its figures do not come from ending T-account balances. Net income is determined on the income statement and also reported on the statement of retained earnings. Ending retained earnings is computed there and carried over to provide a year-end figure for the balance sheet. Finally, closing entries are prepared for revenues, expenses, gains, losses, and dividends paid. Through this process, all of these T-accounts are returned to zero balances so that recording for the new year can begin. The various amounts in these temporary accounts are moved to retained earnings. In this way, the beginning retained earnings balance for the year is increased to equal the ending total reported on the company’s balance sheet.

Talking with a Real Investing Pro (Continued)

Following is a continuation of our interview with Kevin G. Burns.

 

Question: Large business organizations such as PepsiCo and IBM have millions of transactions to analyze, classify, and record so that they can produce financial statements. That has to be a relatively expensive process that produces no revenue for the company. From your experience in analyzing financial statements and investment opportunities, do you think companies should spend more money on their accounting systems or would they be wise to spend less and save their resources?

Kevin Burns: Given the situations of the last decade ranging from the accounting scandals of Enron and WorldCom to recent troubles in the major investment banks, the credibility of financial statements and financial officers has eroded significantly. My view is that—particularly today—transparency is absolutely paramount and the more detail the better. Along those lines, I think any amounts spent by corporate officials to increase transparency in their financial reporting, and therefore improve investor confidence, is money well spent.

Video Clip

(click to see video)

Professor Joe Hoyle talks about the five most important points in Chapter 5 “Why Is Financial Information Adjusted Prior to the Production of Financial Statements?”.

5.4 End-of-Chapter Exercises

Questions

  1. What is the purpose of adjusting entries?
  2. Name the four general types of adjustments.
  3. Give three examples of accrued expenses.
  4. If a company’s employees earn $2,000 each day, seven days per week, and they are last paid on December 25, what adjusting entry is required at the end of the period?
  5. Briefly explain why accountants can find it difficult to determine whether revenue has been earned or not.
  6. A company buys $9,000 in supplies on December 11, Year One. On the last day of that year, only $1,000 of these supplies remains with the company. The company’s year-end trial balance shows a Supplies account of $9,000. What adjusting entry is needed?
  7. A company buys $9,000 in supplies on December 11, Year One. On the last day of that year, only $1,000 of these supplies remains with the company. The company’s year-end trial balance shows a Supplies Expense account of $9,000. What adjusting entry is needed?
  8. A company owns a building that it rents for $3,000 per month. No payment was received for November or December although company officials do expect payment to be collected. If nothing has yet been recorded, what adjusting entry is needed at the end of the year?
  9. Give an example of a business or industry where customers usually pay for the product or service in advance.
  10. What type of account is unearned revenue? Why is that classification appropriate?
  11. When should a company reclassify unearned revenue to revenue?
  12. How often does a company produce a trial balance?
  13. In preparing financial statements, what accounts are reported on the income statement, and what accounts are reported on the balance sheet?
  14. Why do accountants prepare closing entries?
  15. Into which account are revenues and expenses closed?

True or False

  1. ____ Determining when to recognize revenue can be difficult for accountants.
  2. ____ Only permanent accounts are closed at the end of the financial accounting process each year.
  3. ____ According to U.S. GAAP, revenue cannot be recorded until cash is collected.
  4. ____ Some changes to account balances occur because of the passage of time.
  5. ____ Accounting is a profession where judgment is rarely needed because so many rules exist that must be followed.
  6. ____ Assets, liabilities and stockholders’ equity accounts will all start each new accounting period with the same balance they had at the end of the previous period.
  7. ____ An accrued revenue is one that is earned gradually over time.
  8. ____ Companies have some discretion in how and when they record accruals such as rent expense or interest expense.
  9. ____ The purpose of adjusting entries is to reduce the balance in temporary accounts to zero at the end of the reporting cycle.
  10. ____ Only one trial balance is prepared during each separate accounting period.
  11. ____ Employees for the Saginaw Corporation earn a salary of $8,000 per day, an amount that the accounting system recognizes automatically at the end of each day. If no salary is paid for the last nine days of the year, an adjusting entry is required before financial statements can be prepared.
  12. ____ In producing financial statements for the Night Corporation, rent expense is accidentally reported as an asset rather than an expense. As a result, reported net income will be overstated for that period.
  13. ____ In producing financial statements for the Day Corporation, rent expense is accidentally reported as an asset rather than an expense. As a result, the balance sheet will not balance.
  14. ____ A company owes $9,000 in interest on a note payable at the end of the current year. The accountant accidentally overlooks that information and no adjusting entry is made. As a result, the balance sheet will not balance.
  15. ____ A company owes $9,000 in interest on a note payable at the end of the current year. The accountant accidentally overlooks that information and no adjusting entry is made. As a result, reported net income will be overstated for that period.

Multiple Choice

  1. Which of the following accounts is closed at the end of the year after financial statements are produced?

    1. Accounts receivable
    2. Accounts payable
    3. Cost of goods sold
    4. Unearned revenue
  2. Jenkins Company received $600 from a client in December for work to be performed by Jenkins over the following months. That cash collection was properly recorded at that time. The accountant for Jenkins believes that this work is really three separate jobs. What adjusting entry is recorded by this accountant on December 31 if one of these jobs is substantially completed by that time?

    1. Figure 5.9

    2. Figure 5.10

    3. Figure 5.11

    4. Figure 5.12

  3. Which of the following accounts increases retained earnings when closing entries are prepared?

    1. Dividends
    2. Sales revenue
    3. Loss of sale of land
    4. Rent expense
  4. Which of the following is the sequence of the accounting process?

    1. Analyze, Record, Adjust, Report
    2. Record, Report, Adjust, Analyze
    3. Adjust, Report, Record, Analyze
    4. Report, Analyze, Record, Adjust
  5. On September 1, Year Three, the LaToya Corporation paid $42,000 for insurance for the next six months. The appropriate journal entry was made at that time. On December 31, LaToya’s accountant forgot to make the adjusting entry that was needed. Which of the following is true about the Year Three financial statements?

    1. Assets are understated by $42,000.
    2. Net income is understated by $14,000.
    3. Expenses are overstated by $42,000.
    4. Net income is overstated by $28,000.
  6. Starting on December 21, Year One, the Shakespeare Corporation begins to incur an expense of $1,000 per day. On January 21, Year Two, the company makes a payment of $31,000 for the previous thirty-one days. Assume the company failed to make an adjusting entry at December 31, Year One. Which of the following is true for the Year One financial statements?

    1. Net income is understated, and the total of the liabilities is understated.
    2. Net income is overstated, and the total of the liabilities is understated.
    3. Net income is understated, and the total of the liabilities is overstated.
    4. Net income is overstated, and the total of the liabilities is overstated.
  7. Starting on December 21, Year One, the Shakespeare Corporation begins to incur an expense of $1,000 per day. On January 21, Year Two, the company makes a payment of $31,000. The company made the proper adjusting entry at December 31. When the payment was eventually made, what account or accounts were debited?

    1. Expense was debited for $31,000.
    2. A liability was debited for $31,000.
    3. Expense was debited for $11,000, and a liability was debited for $20,000.
    4. Expense was debited for $20,000, and a liability was debited for $11,000.
  8. Starting on December 21, Year One, the Shakespeare Corporation begins to incur an expense of $1,000 per day. On January 21, Year Two, the company makes a payment of $31,000 for the previous thirty-one days. Assume the company failed to make the proper year-end adjusting entry. However, when payment was made, the journal entry was prepared as if the adjusting entry had been made (the accountant did not realize the adjusting entry was not made). After recording the erroneous journal entry, which of the following is true?

    1. Recorded expense in Year Two is too low.
    2. Recorded expense in Year Two is too high.
    3. Recorded liability balance is now too low.
    4. Recorded liability balance is now too high.
  9. The Cone Company has prepared a trial balance that includes the following: accounts receivable—$19,000, inventory—$30,000, cost of goods sold—$72,000, sales revenue—$191,000, prepaid rent—$8,000, salary payable—$12,000, rent expense—$23,000, salary expense—$34,000, and dividends paid—$7,000. What should be reported as net income for the period?

    1. $50,000
    2. $55,000
    3. $62,000
    4. $70,000
  10. A company pays $40,000 to rent a building for forty days. After nineteen days, financial statements are to be prepared. If the company originally recorded the $40,000 payment in rent expense, which of the following adjusting entries should be made prior to producing financial statements.

    1. Debit rent expense $19,000, and credit prepaid rent $19,000.
    2. Debit prepaid rent $21,000, and credit rent expense $21,000.
    3. Debit prepaid rent $19,000, and credit rent expense $19,000.
    4. Debit rent expense $21,000, and credit prepaid rent $21,000.

Video Problems

Professor Joe Hoyle discusses the answers to these two problems at the links that are indicated. After formulating your answers, watch each video to see how Professor Hoyle answers these questions.

  1. Your roommate is an English major. The roommate’s parents own an ice cream shop in a resort community in Florida. One day, on the way to the local shopping center, your roommate blurts out this question: “My parents write down every penny they get and spend in their business. They are meticulous in their record keeping. However, at the end of each year, they pay money to hire an accountant. If they keep such perfect records every day, why could they possibly need an accountant after they have done all the work?” How would you respond?

  2. Your uncle and two friends started a small office supply store at the beginning of the current year. Your uncle knows that you are taking a financial accounting class and asks you the following question: “We keep very careful records of all our transactions. At the end of the year, we will prepare financial statements to help us file our income taxes. We will also show the statements to the officers at the bank that gave us the loan that got us started. I know that we will need to make some changes in our records before we produce those financial statements, but I do not know what kinds of changes I should be making. Can you give me some suggestions on what kinds of changes I should think about making?” How would you respond?

Problems

  1. Determine if the following adjusting entries involve the following:

    • Accrued expense (AE)
    • Prepaid expense (PE)
    • Accrued revenue (AR)
    • Unearned revenue (UR)
    1. _____ Atlas Magazine had previously collected $400,000 from its subscribers but has now delivered half of the magazines that were ordered.
    2. _____ Several weeks ago, the Hornsby Company agreed to provide 1,000 units of its product to Michaels Inc. and has now substantially completed that agreement with payment to be received in thirty days.
    3. _____ Nancy and Sons owes its employees $30,000 for work done over the past two weeks with payment to be made within the next ten days.
    4. _____ Replay Inc. advertised on television Channel 44 during the past month but has not yet made an entry to record the event because no payment has been made.
    5. _____ Four months ago, the Centurion Company paid Reliable Insurance Company $54,000 for insurance for the subsequent twelve months.
    6. _____ Four months ago, Reliable Insurance Company received a payment of $54,000 for insurance for the subsequent twelve months from Centurion Company.
  2. For each of the following adjusting entries, describe what has probably taken place that necessitated these entries.

    1. Figure 5.13

    2. Figure 5.14

    3. Figure 5.15

    4. Figure 5.16

    5. Figure 5.17

    6. Figure 5.18

  3. For each of the following transactions of the Marlin Corporation determine if an adjusting entry is now needed. If an adjustment is required, provide that entry. Assume each journal entry was made properly.

    1. At the beginning of the month, Marlin agreed to perform services for the subsequent three months for Catsui Corporation for $30,000 per month. Catsui paid Marlin all $90,000 in advance. One month has now passed. Each month is viewed as an independent job.
    2. Marlin pays its employees every two weeks. At the end of the month, Marlin owes its employees $480,000, but will not pay them until the following week.
    3. Marlin paid $300,000 for rent at the beginning of the month by debiting prepaid rent and crediting cash. The $300,000 covered six months of occupancy, but only one month has passed.
    4. At the beginning of the month, Marlin agreed to perform services for Ryland Company for $16,000 per month for the next six months. Ryland has not yet paid any cash to Marlin, and no part of the work is yet viewed as being substantially complete.
  4. Keating Inc. rents its headquarters from Starling Enterprises for $10,000 per month. On September 1, 20XX, Keating pays Starling $60,000 for six months worth of rent.

    1. Record the entry that Keating Inc. would make on September 1 when the payment is made to Starling.
    2. Record the entry that Starling Enterprises would make on September 1 when they receive the rent payment from Keating.
    3. Record the adjusting entry that Keating should make on December 31, when the company begins to prepare its annual financial statements.
    4. Record the adjusting entry that Starling should make on December 31, when the company begins to prepare its annual financial statements.
  5. The accountant for the Osgood Company is preparing to produce financial statements for December 31, Year One, and the year then ended. The accountant has uncovered several interesting figures within the company’s trial balance at the end of the year:

    Figure 5.19 Financial Figures Reported by the Osgood Company

    Other information:

    1. The company collected $32,000 from a customer during the early part of November. The amount was recorded as revenue at that time although very little of the work has yet to be accomplished.
    2. The company paid $36,000 for nine months of rent on a building on January 1, Year One, and then paid $20,000 on October 1, Year One, for five additional months.
    3. A count of all supplies at the end of the year showed $2,000 on hand.
    4. An interest payment was made at the end of December. Although no previous recognition had been made of this amount, the accountant debited interest payable.
    5. On January 1, Year One, the company paid $24,000 for insurance coverage for the following six months. On July 1, Year One, the company paid another $27,000 for an additional nine months of coverage.
    6. The company did work for a customer throughout December and finished on December 30. Because it was so late in the year, no journal entry was recorded, and no part of the $17,000 payment has been received.

      Required:

      1. Prepare any necessary entries as of December 31, Year One.
      2. Provide the appropriate account balances for each account impacted by these adjusting entries.
  6. The Warsaw Corporation began business operations on December 1, Year One. The company had the following transactions during the time when it was starting:

    1. An employee was hired on December 1 for $4,000 per month with the first payment to be made on January 1.
    2. The company made an $18,000 payment on December 1 to rent a building for the following six months.
    3. Supplies were bought on account for $10,000 on December 1. Supplies are counted at the end of the year and $3,600 is still on hand.
    4. The company receives $9,000 for a service that it had expected to provide immediately. However, a problem arises because of a series of delays and the parties agree that the service will be performed on January 9.
    5. A job was completed near the end of the year, and the customer will pay Warsaw all $8,000 early in the following year. Because of the late date, no entry was made at that time.

      Required:

      1. Prepare the proper journal entries for each of these transactions as well as the year-end adjustment (if needed) for each.
  7. The Rohrbach Company has the following trial balance at the end of Year Four before adjusting entries are prepared. During the year, all cash transactions were recorded, but no other journal entries were made.

    Figure 5.20 Rohrbach Company Unadjusted Trial Balance, December 31, Year Four

    Other Information:

    1. Utilities were not paid for or recorded for the months of November and December at a total of $2,000.
    2. On January 1, Year Four, insurance for six months was obtained for $2,000 in cash. On July 1, Year Four, insurance for another eighteen months was obtained for $5,400 in cash.
    3. On January 1, Year Four, the company paid $2,000 to rent a building for four months. On May 1, Year Four, the company paid another $8,000 to rent the same building for an additional sixteen months.
    4. Employees are paid $8,000 for each month with payments seven days after the end of the month.

      Required:

      1. Prepare the needed adjusting entries.
      2. Prepare an updated trial balance.
  8. The following trial balance (at the end of Year Three) was produced by an accountant working for the Washburn Company. No adjusting entries have yet been made. During the year, all cash transactions were recorded, but no other journal entries were prepared.

    Figure 5.21 Washburn Company Unadjusted Trial Balance, December 31, Year Three

    Other Information:

    1. Income taxes of $9,000 will have to be paid for Year Three early in Year Four.
    2. Supplies were bought for $8,000 early in the year, but $3,000 of that amount is still on hand at the end of the year.
    3. On January 1, Year Three, insurance for eight months was obtained for $4,000 in cash. On September 1, Year Three, insurance for another fifteen months was obtained for $6,000 in cash.
    4. During November, a payment of $5,000 was made for advertising during that month. By accident, the debit was made to utilities expense.
    5. On January 1, Year Three, the company paid $2,000 to rent a building for four months. On May 1, Year Three, the company paid another $8,000 to rent the same building for an addition sixteen months.
    6. Employees are paid $10,000 for each month with payments two weeks after the end of the month.

      Required:

      1. Prepare the needed adjusting entries.
      2. Prepare an income statement, statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet for the Washburn Company.
  9. Leon Jackson is an entrepreneur who plans to start a Web site design and maintenance business called Webworks. The First National Bank just approved a loan so he is now ready to purchase needed equipment, hire administrative help, and begin designing sites. During June, his first month of business, the following events occur.

    1. Webworks signs a note at the bank and is given $10,000 cash.
    2. Jackson deposits $2,000 of his own money into the company checking account as his capital contribution.
    3. Webworks purchases a new computer and other additional equipment for $3,000 in cash.
    4. Webworks purchases supplies worth $200 on account that should last Webworks two months.
    5. Webworks hires Nancy Po to assist with administrative tasks. She will charge $100 per Web site for her assistance.
    6. Webworks begins working on its first two Web sites, one for Juan Sanchez (a friend of Jackson’s dad) and the other for Pauline Smith, a local businessperson.
    7. Webworks completes the site for Mr. Sanchez and sends him a bill for $600.
    8. Webworks completes the site for Ms. Smith and sends her a bill for $450.
    9. Webworks collects $600 in cash from Mr. Sanchez.
    10. Webworks pays Nancy Po $100 for her work on Sanchez’s Web site.
    11. Webworks receives $500 in advance to work on a Web site for a local restaurant. Work on the site will not begin until July.
    12. Webworks pays taxes of $200 in cash.

      Required:

      1. Prepare journal entries for the previous events if needed.
      2. Post the journal entries to T-accounts.
      3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Webworks for June.
      4. Prepare adjusting entries for the following events and post them to the proper T-accounts, adding any additional T-accounts as necessary.
    13. Webworks owes Nancy Po another $100 for her work on Smith’s Web site.
    14. The business is being operated in the house owned by Jackson’s parents. They let him know that Webworks owes $80 toward the electricity bill for June. Webworks will pay them in July.
    15. Webworks only used half of the supplies purchased in (d) above.

      1. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for Webworks for June.
  10. Jan Haley owns and operates Haley’s Dry Cleaners. The ledger for this company is presented in the next figure with balances as of December 1, Year Two. The following occurred during that month.

    1. On December 1, Haley prepaid rent on her store for December and January for $2,000 in cash.
    2. On December 1, Haley purchased insurance with cash in the amount of $2,400. The coverage will last for six months.
    3. Haley paid $900 of her accounts payable balance.
    4. Haley paid off all of her salaries payable balance.
    5. Haley purchased supplies on account in the amount of $2,400.
    6. Haley paid a salary to her assistant of $1,000 in cash for work done in the first two weeks of December.
    7. Haley dry-cleaned clothes for customers on account in the amount of $8,000.
    8. Haley collected $6,300 of her accounts receivable balance.
    9. Haley paid tax of $750 in cash.

      Required:

      1. Prepare the journal entry for each of these transactions.
      2. Prepare all necessary T-accounts with opening balances for the month of December.

        Figure 5.22 Opening T-Account Balances for Haley’s Dry Cleaners

      3. Prepare a trial balance dated December 31, Year Two.
      4. Make the following adjusting entries for the month of December and post them to the T-accounts:
    10. Rent expense:
    11. Insurance expense:
    12. Haley owes her assistant $1,000 for work done during the last two weeks of December.
    13. An inventory of supplies shows $400 in supplies remaining on December 31.

      1. Prepare an adjusted trial balance dated December 31, Year Two.
      2. Prepare an income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet.
  11. On January 1, Kevin Reynolds, a student at State U, decides to start a business. Kevin has noticed that various student organizations around campus are having more and more need for mass produced copies of programs on CDs. While a lot of students have a CD drive on their computers that can write to CDs, it is a slow process when a high volume of CDs is needed.

    Kevin believes that with a beginning investment in specialty equipment, he can provide a valuable product to the college community and earn some profit. On January 1, Year One, Kevin officially begins “Kevin’s CD Kopies.”

    Part 1

    The following occur during January:

    1. Kevin deposits $500 of his own money into the company’s checking account as his capital contribution.
    2. As president of the company, Kevin signs a note payable in the amount of $1,000 from Neighborhood Bank. The note is due from the company in one year.
    3. KCDK (Kevin’s CD Kopies) purchases a CD duplicator (a piece of equipment), which can copy seven CDs at one time. The cost is $1,300, and he pays cash.
    4. KCDK purchases 500 blank CDs for $150 on account.
    5. KCDK pays $20 cash for flyers that are used as advertising.
    6. KCDK quickly catches on with the student groups on campus. KCDK sells 400 CDs to various groups for $0.80 per CD. KCDK receives cash payment for 300 of the CDs, and the student groups owe for the other 100 CDs.
    7. KCDK pays $100 on its accounts payable.
    8. KCDK receives $40 in advance to copy 50 CDs for a student group. He will not begin work on the project until February.
    9. KCDK incurs $40 in tax expense. The taxes will be paid in February.

      Required:

      1. Prepare journal entries for the previous events as needed.
      2. Post the journal entries to T-accounts.
      3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for KCDK for January.
      4. Prepare adjusting entries for the following and post them to the company’s T-accounts.
    10. Kevin’s roommate, Mark, helps with copying and delivering the CDs. KCDK pays Mark a salary of $50 per month. Mark will get his first check on February 1.
    11. KCDK incurs $10 in interest expense. The interest will be paid with the note at the end of the year.

      1. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for KCDK for January.
      2. Prepare financial statements for KCDK for January.
      3. Prepare closing entries for the month of January.

    Part 2

    The following occur in February:

    1. Kevin decides to expand outside the college community. On the first day of the month, KCDK pays $20 in advance for advertising in the local newspaper. The advertisements will run during February and March.
    2. The student groups paid for the 100 CDs not paid for in January.
    3. KCDK paid off its remaining accounts payable, salaries payable, taxes payable and interest payable.
    4. KCDK purchases 450 CDs for $135 on account.
    5. KCDK sells 500 CDs during the month for $0.80 each. KCDK receives cash for 450 of them and is owed for the other 50.
    6. KCDK completes and delivers the advanced order of 50 CDs described in number 11.8.
    7. KCDK incurs $80 in tax expense. The taxes will be paid in March.

      Required:

      1. Prepare journal entries for the previous events if needed.
      2. Post the journal entries to the T-accounts.
      3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for KCDK for February.
      4. Prepare adjusting entries at the end of February for the following and post them to your T-accounts.
    8. Mark continues to earn his salary of $50, and the next payment will be made on March 1.
    9. An adjustment is made for advertising in number 11.12.
    10. KCDK incurs $10 in interest expense. The interest will be paid with the note.

      1. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for KCDK for February.
      2. Prepare the financial statements for February.

Research Assignment

A company places an ad in a newspaper late in Year Five. Is this an expense or an asset? When unsure, companies often investigate how other companies handle such costs.

Go to http://www.jnj.com/. At the Johnson & Johnson Web site, click on “Our Company” at the top right side. Scroll down and under “Company Publications,” click on “2010 Annual Report On-Line.” Click on “Financial Results” at the top of the next page.

Next, click on “Consolidated Balance Sheets.” Under assets, what amount is reported by the company as “prepaid expenses and other receivables?”

Assume the question has been raised whether any amount of advertising is included in the prepaid expense figure reported by Johnson & Johnson. Close down the balance sheet page to get back to the “Financial Results” page. Click on “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.” Scroll to page 47 and find the section for “Advertising.” What does the first sentence tell decision makers about the handling of these costs?

Chapter 4: How Does an Organization Accumulate and Organize the Information Necessary to Create Financial Statements?

4.1 The Essential Role of Transaction Analysis

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Define “transaction” and provide several common examples.
  2. Define “transaction analysis” and explain its importance to the accounting process.
  3. Identify the account changes created by the purchase of inventory, the payment of a salary, and the borrowing of money.
  4. Understand that corporate accounting systems can be programmed to record expenses such as salary automatically as they accrue.

The Nature of a Transaction

Question: Information provided by a set of financial statements is essential to any individual analyzing a business or other organization. The availability of a fair representation of a company’s financial position, operations, and cash flows is invaluable for a wide array of decision makers. However, the sheer volume of data that a business such as General MillsMcDonald’s, or PepsiCo must gather in order to prepare these statements has to be astronomical. Even a small enterprise—a local convenience store, for example—generates a significant quantity of information virtually every day. How does an accountant begin the process of accumulating all the necessary data so that financial statements can be produced and distributed to decision makers?

 

Answer: The accounting process starts by analyzing the effect of transactionsEvents that have a financial impact on an organization; information on the resulting changes must be gathered, sorted, classified, and turned into financial statements by means of an accounting system.—any event that has an immediate financial impact on a company. Large organizations participate in literally millions of transactions each year. The resulting information must be gathered, sorted, classified, and turned into a set of financial statements that cover a mere four or five pages. Over the decades, accountants have had to become very efficient to fulfill this seemingly impossible assignment. Despite the volume of transactions, the goal remains the same: to prepare financial statements that are presented fairly because they contain no material misstatements according to U.S. GAAP or IFRS.

For example, all the occurrences listed in Figure 4.1 “Transactions Frequently Encountered by a Business” are typical transactions that any business might encounter. Each causes some measurable effect on the company’s assets, liabilities, revenues, expenses, gains, losses, capital stock, or dividends paid. The accounting process begins with an analysis of each transaction to determine the specific financial changes that took place. Was revenue earned? Did a liability increase? Has an asset been acquired? What changed as a result of this event?

Figure 4.1 Transactions Frequently Encountered by a Business

In any language, successful communication is only possible if the information to be conveyed is properly understood. Likewise, in accounting, transactions must be analyzed so that their impact is understood. A vast majority of transactions are relatively straightforward so that, with experience, the accountant can ascertain the financial impact almost automatically. Within this process, each individual asset, liability, revenue, expense, and the like is referred to as an account. For example, rent expense and salary expense are both expense accounts. The monetary amount attributed to an account is known as an account balance.

For transactions with greater complexity, the necessary analysis becomes more challenging. However, the importance of this initial step in the production of financial statements cannot be overstressed. The well-known computer aphorism captures the essence quite succinctly: “garbage in, garbage out.” There is little hope that financial statements can be fairly presented unless the entering information is based on an appropriate identification of the changes in account balances created by each transaction.

Test Yourself

Question:

Each of the following events took place this week in connection with the operations of the Hammond Corporation. Which does not qualify as a transaction?

  1. An employee is hired who will be paid $1,000 per month.
  2. Inventory is bought on account for $2,000 with payment to be made next month.
  3. An owner invests $3,000 cash in the business to receive capital stock.
  4. A truck is bought for $39,000 by signing a note payable.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: An employee is hired who will be paid $1,000 per month.

Explanation:

A transaction is any event that has a financial impact on an organization. The purchase of inventory increases that asset and the company liabilities. The investment increases the company’s cash. The acquisition of the truck raises the assets as well as the note payable. However, hiring an employee is not, by itself, a transaction because there is no financial impact at that time. There will be an impact only after the person has done work and earned a salary.

Analyzing the Impact of a Transaction

Question: Transaction 1—A company buys inventory on credit for $2,000. How does transaction analysis work here? What accounts are affected by the purchase of merchandise?

 

Answer: Inventory, which is an asset, increases by $2,000 because of the purchase. The organization has more inventory than it did previously. Because no money was paid for these goods when bought, a liability for the same amount has been created. The term accounts payableShort-term liabilities to pay for goods and services that have been acquired on credit. is often used in financial accounting to represent debts resulting from the acquisition of inventory and supplies.

Transaction 1: Inventory Purchased on Credit Inventory (asset) increases by $2,000 Accounts Payable (liability) increases by $2,000

Note that the accounting equation described in the previous chapter remains in balance here. Assets have gone up by $2,000 while the liability side of the equation has also increased by the same amount to reflect the source of this increase.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company incurred a transaction where its assets as well as its liabilities increased. Which of the following transactions does not result in this impact?

  1. Money is borrowed from a bank.
  2. A sale is made to a customer for cash.
  3. Supplies are bought and will be paid for next week.
  4. A truck is bought by signing a note payable.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: A sale is made to a customer for cash.

Explanation:

In all four of these cases, assets increase. Cash goes up in the first two, while supplies and a truck increase assets in the last two, respectively. The company owes the bank in A and the supplier in C. In D, the company has a liability to the party that provided the money for the truck. In B, there is no debt or other obligation to any party.

The Financial Impact of Paying an Employee

Question: Transaction 2—A company pays a salary of $300 to one of its employees for work performed during the past week. No amount had previously been recorded by the accounting system for this amount. What accounts are affected by payment of a salary?

 

Answer: Cash (an asset) is decreased here by $300. Whenever cash is involved in a transaction, identifying that change is a good place to start the analysis. Increases and decreases in cash are often obvious.

The cash balance declined because salary was paid to an employee. Assets were reduced as a result of the payment. That is a cost to the company. Recognizing an expense as a result is appropriate rather than an asset because the employee’s work reflects a past benefit. The person’s effort has already been carried out, generating revenues for the company in the previous week rather than in the future. Thus, a salary expense of $300 is reported.

Transaction 2: Salary Paid to Employee Salary Expense (expense) increases by $300 Cash (asset) decreased by $300

The continued equilibrium of the accounting equation does exist here although it is less apparent. Assets are decreased. At the same time, an expense is recognized. This expense reduces reported net income. On the statement of retained earnings, current net income becomes a component of retained earnings. The reduction in income serves to decrease retained earnings. An expense ultimately reduces reported retained earnings. Because both assets and retained earnings go down by the same amount as a result of this transaction, the accounting equation continues to balance.

Recording Accrued Expenses

Question: In Transaction 2, the company paid a salary of $300 that it owed to a worker. Why does a payment to an employee not always reduce a salary payable balance?

 

Answer: Costs such as salary, rent, or interest increase gradually over time and are often referred to as accrued expenses because the term “accrue” means “to grow.” How should the very slow growth of an expense be recognized? An accounting system can be mechanically structured to record such costs in either of two ways. On the financial statements, reported results are the same but the steps in the process differ.

  • Some companies simply ignore accrued expenses until paid. At that time, the expense is recognized and cash is reduced. No liability is entered into the accounting system or removed. Because the information provided specifies that nothing has been recorded to date, this approach was apparently used here. When financial statements are produced, any amount that is still owed must be recognized for a fair presentation.
  • Other companies choose to program their computer systems so that both the expense and the related liability are recognized automatically as the amount grows. For salary, as an example, this increase could literally be recorded each day or week based on the amount earned by employees. At the time payment is finally conveyed, the expense has already been recorded. Thus, the liability is removed because that debt is being settled. Later, in Transaction 5, this second possible approach to recording accrued expenses is illustrated.

A company can recognize an accrued expense (such as a salary) as it is incurred or wait until payment is made. This decision depends on the preference of company officials. The end result (an expense is reported and cash decreased) is the same, but the recording procedures differ. As mentioned, if no entry has been made prior to the production of financial statements (the first alternative), both the expense and the payable have to be recognized at that time so that all balances are properly included for reporting purposes.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Abraham Company rents a building for $4,000 per month with payment being made on the tenth day following that month. The accounting system is organized so that the expense and liability are recorded throughout the month. In that way, the accounting records are kept up to date. However, when the appropriate payment was made for November on December 10 of the current year, the accountant increased the rent expense and decreased cash. Which of the following statements is true in connection with this recording?

  1. Reported expenses are understated by $4,000.
  2. Net income is understated by $4,000.
  3. Liabilities are understated by $4,000.
  4. All account balances are stated properly.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: Net income is understated by $4,000.

Explanation:

Because the expense and the liability have already been recorded as incurred in November, the accountant should have decreased the liability rather than increased the expense when payment was made. The liability balance was not properly reduced; it is overstated. The expense was erroneously increased, so it is overstated. Simply stated, the expense was recorded twice and is overstated by $4,000. That causes reported net income to be understated by that amount.

Borrowing Money from the Bank

Question: Transaction 3—A company borrows $9,000 from a bank on a long-term note. What is the financial impact of signing a loan agreement with a bank or other lending institution?

 

Answer: In this transaction, cash is increased by the amount of money received from the lender. The company is obligated to repay this balance and, thus, has incurred a new liability. As with many common transactions, the financial impact is reasonably easy to ascertain.

Transaction 3: Money Borrowed on Loan Cash (asset) increases by $9,000 Note Payable (liability) increases by $9,000

Key Takeaway

Most organizations must gather an enormous quantity of information as a prerequisite for the periodic preparation of financial statements. This process begins with an analysis of the impact of each transaction (financial event). After the effect on all account balances is ascertained, the recording of a transaction is relatively straightforward. The changes caused by most transactions—the purchase of inventory or the signing of a note, for example—can often be determined quickly. For accrued expenses, such as salary or rent that grow over time, the accounting system can record the amounts gradually as incurred or only at the point of payment. However, the figures to be reported on the financial statements are not impacted by the specific mechanical steps that are taken.

4.2 Understanding the Effects Caused by Common Transactions

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Explain the reason that a minimum of two accounts are impacted by every transaction.
  2. Identify the individual account changes that are created by the payment of insurance and rent, the sale of merchandise, the acquisition of a long-lived asset, a capital contribution, the collection of a receivable, and the payment of a liability.
  3. Separate the two events that occur when inventory is sold and determine the financial effect of each.

Recording the Sale of Inventory

Question: Transaction 4—Assume that the inventory items bought in Transaction 1 for $2,000 are now sold to a customer for $5,000 on credit. What account balances are impacted by the sale of merchandise in this manner?

 

Answer: Two connected events actually take place in the sale of inventory. First, revenue of $5,000 is generated by the sale. This account is frequently labeled as “Sales” or “Sales revenue.”

In this example, because the money will not be collected until a later date, accounts receivable (an asset) is initially increased. The reporting of a receivable balance indicates that this amount of money is due from a customer and should be collected at some subsequent point in time.

Transaction 4, Part 1: Sale Occurs on Credit Accounts Receivable (asset) increases by $5,000 Sales (revenue) increases by $5,000

Second, the inventory is removed. Companies have an option in the method by which inventory balances are monitored. Here, a perpetual inventory systemAccounting system that maintains an ongoing record of all inventory items both in total and individually; records increases and decreases in inventory accounts as they occur as well as the cost of goods sold to date. is utilized. That approach is extremely common due to the prevalence of computer systems in the business world. It maintains an ongoing record of the inventory held and the amount that has been sold to date. All changes in inventory are recorded immediately. However, in a later chapter, an alternative approach—still used by some smaller businesses—known as a periodic inventory systemAccounting system that does not maintain an ongoing record of all inventory items; instead, ending inventory is determined by a physical count so that a formula (beginning inventory plus purchases less ending inventory) can be used to calculate cost of goods sold. will also be demonstrated.

Because a perpetual system is used here, the reduction in inventory is recorded simultaneously with the sale. Inventory costing $2,000 is taken away by the customer. The company’s net assets are reduced by this amount. Therefore, a $2,000 expense is recognized. That inventory no longer provides a future benefit for the company but rather is a past benefit. Cost of goods sold is reported to reflect this decrease in the amount of merchandise on hand.

Transaction 4, Part 2: Inventory Acquired by Customer Cost of Goods Sold (expense) increases by $2,000 Inventory (asset) decreases by $2,000

As discussed in the previous chapter, the $3,000 difference between the sales revenue of $5,000 and the related cost of goods sold of $2,000 is known as the gross profit (or gross margin or mark up) on the sale.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Hashan Company buys inventory for $7,000 that it eventually sells to a customer for $8,000 in cash. The company’s accountant increases cash by $8,000, reduces inventory by $7,000, and records a “gain on sale of inventory” for $1,000. Which of the following statements is true?

  1. The company’s reported net income is stated properly.
  2. The company’s reported revenues are too high.
  3. The company’s reported expenses are too high.
  4. All reported figures are properly stated.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: The company’s reported net income is stated properly.

Explanation:

The company should have recognized revenues of $8,000 and a cost of goods sold of $7,000 so that a gross profit of $1,000 would be reported on the company’s income statement. Both the revenue and the expense were omitted and are too low. Instead, a gain of $1,000 was recorded. That gain has the same impact as the $1,000 gross profit, so net income was not affected by the mistake.

The Dual Effect of Transactions

Question: In each of the events studied so far, two accounts have been affected. Are two accounts impacted by every possible transaction?

 

Answer: In every transaction, a cause-and-effect relationship is always present. For example, the accounts receivable balance increases because of a sale. Cash decreases as a result of paying salary expense. Cost of goods sold increases because inventory is removed. No account balance can possibly change without some identifiable cause. Thus, every transaction must touch a minimum of two accounts. Many transactions actually affect more than two accounts but at least two are impacted by each of these financial events.

Paying a Previously Recorded Expense

Question: Transaction 5—In this transaction, the reporting company pays $700 for insurance coverage relating to the past few months. The information provided indicates that the cost was previously recorded in the company’s accounting system as incurred. Apparently, the computers were programmed to accrue this expense periodically. What is the financial impact of paying an expense if the balance has already been recognized over time as the liability grew larger?

 

Answer: Several pieces of information should be noted in analyzing this example.

  • Cash declined by $700 as a result of the payment.
  • This cost relates to a past benefit. Thus, an expense must be recorded. No future economic benefit is created by the insurance payment. Cash was paid for coverage over the previous months.
  • The company’s accounting system has already recorded this amount. Thus, $700 in insurance expense and the related liability were recognized as incurred. This is clearly a different mechanical procedure than that demonstrated in Transaction 2 for the salary payment.

The expense cannot be recorded again or it will be double counted. Instead, cash is reduced along with the liability that was established through the accrual process. The expense was recorded already so no additional change in that balance is needed. Instead, the liability is removed and cash decreased.

Transaction 5: Payment of Amount Owed for Insurance Insurance Payable (liability) decreases by $700 Cash (asset) decreases by $700

Note that accounting recognition is dependent on the recording that has already taken place. The final results to be reported should be the same (here an expense is recognized and cash decreased), but the steps in the process can vary.

Test Yourself

Question:

Sara Frances is the accountant for National Lumber Company of Cleveland. She receives an invoice for three months’ rent for one of the warehouses that the company uses. This bill is for $3,000 per month, or $9,000 in total. The check is written, and Ms. Frances is getting ready to record the payment but is not sure whether the expense has been previously accrued. Which one of the following statements is not true?

  1. If the expense has been accrued, a rent payable balance of $9,000 should be present in the accounting records.
  2. If the expense has not been accrued, no rent payable balance should currently be present in the accounting records.
  3. If the expense has been accrued, the net income figure should already be properly stated before the payment is recorded.
  4. If the expense has not been accrued, a liability will need to be established when the payment is recorded.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: If the expense has not been accrued, a liability will need to be established when the payment is recorded.

Explanation:

If the accounting system recognized the rent as it accrued, the expense balance and the related liability have already been recorded. The expense recognition means that net income can be determined appropriately based on the reported balances. If no accrual has been recorded to date, there is neither an expense nor a liability. At the time of payment, cash is decreased and the expense is recorded. Because the liability was never entered into the records, no change is made in that balance.

Acquisition of an Asset

Question: Transaction 6—According to the original information, a truck is acquired for $40,000, but only $10,000 in cash is paid by the company. The other $30,000 is covered by signing a note payable. This transaction seems a bit more complicated because more than two accounts are involved. What is the financial impact of buying an asset when only a portion of the cost is paid on that date?

 

Answer: In this transaction, for the first time, three accounts are impacted. A truck is bought for $40,000 so the balance recorded for this asset is increased by that cost. Cash decreases $10,000 while the notes payable balance rises by $30,000. These events each happened. To achieve a fair presentation, the accounting process seeks to reflect the actual occurrences that took place. As long as the analysis is performed properly, recording a transaction is no more complicated when more than two accounts are affected.

Transaction 6: Acquisition of Truck for Cash and a Note Truck (asset) increases by $40,000 Cash (asset) decreases by $10,000 Notes Payable (liability) increases by $30,000

Recording a Capital Contribution by an Owner

Question: Transaction 7—Assume that several individuals approach the company and offer to contribute $19,000 in cash to the business in exchange for capital stock so that they can join the ownership. The offer is accepted. What accounts are impacted by the issuance of capital stock to the owners of a business?

 

Answer: When cash is contributed to a company for a portion of the ownership, cash obviously goes up by the amount received. This money was not generated by revenues or by liabilities but rather represents assets given freely so that new ownership shares could be obtained. This inflow is reflected in financial accounting as increases in both the cash and capital stock accounts. Outside decision makers can see that this amount of the company’s net assets came from investments made by owners.

 

 

Transaction 7: Cash Contributed in Exchange for Capital Stock Cash (asset) increases by $19,000 Capital Stock (stockholders’ equity) increases by $19,000

Test Yourself

Question:

The Hamilton Company issues capital stock to new owners in exchange for a cash contribution of $34,000. The company’s accountant thought the money came from a sale and recorded an increase in cash and an increase in revenue. Which of the following statements is not true as a result of this recording?

  1. The company’s assets are overstated on the balance sheet.
  2. The company’s net income is overstated on the income statement.
  3. The company’s capital stock account is understated on the balance sheet.
  4. The company’s expenses are correctly stated on the income statement.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: The company’s assets are overstated on the balance sheet.

Explanation:

The company should have increased cash, and it did, so that balance (as well as the other assets) is properly stated. The revenue balance was overstated, so that reported net income is also overstated. The capital stock account should have been increased but was not, so it is understated. Expenses were not affected by either the transaction or the recording, so that total is correct.

The Collection of an Account Receivable

Question: Transaction 8—A sale of merchandise was made previously in Transaction 4 for $5,000. No cash was received at that time, but the entire amount is collected now. What accounts are affected by the receipt of money from an earlier sale?

 

Answer: The revenue from this transaction was properly recorded in Transaction 4 when the sale originally took place and the account receivable balance was established. Revenue should not be recorded again or it will be double counted, causing reported net income to be overstated. In simple terms, revenue is recorded when earned, and that has already taken place. Instead, for recording purposes, the accountant indicates that this increase in cash is caused by the decrease in the accounts receivable balance established in Transaction 4.

Transaction 8: Collection of Account Receivable Cash (asset) increases by $5,000 Accounts Receivable (asset) decreases by $5,000

Payment Made on an Earlier Purchase

Question: Transaction 9—Inventory was bought in Transaction 1 for $2,000 and later sold in Transaction 4. Now, however, the company is ready to make payment of the amount owed for this merchandise. When cash is delivered to settle a previous purchase of inventory, what is the financial effect of the transaction?

 

Answer: As a result of the payment, cash is decreased by $2,000. The inventory was recorded previously when acquired. Therefore, this subsequent transaction does not replicate that effect. Instead, the liability established in number 1 is now removed from the books. The company is not buying the inventory again but simply paying off the debt established for these goods when they were purchased.

Transaction 9: Payment of a Liability for a Purchase Accounts Payable (liability) decreases by $2,000 Cash (asset) decreases by $2,000

Test Yourself

Question:

A company buys inventory for $10 on Monday on account. The company sells the inventory for credit on Tuesday for $12. The company pays for the inventory on Wednesday. The company collects the money from the sale on Thursday. On which day or days does this company increase its net assets (assets minus liabilities)?

  1. All four days
  2. Tuesday only
  3. Tuesday and Wednesday
  4. Wednesday and Thursday

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: Tuesday only.

Explanation:

No change in net assets occurs on Monday, Wednesday, or Thursday. Buying inventory (Monday) increases inventory but also accounts payable, so the net asset total is unchanged. Paying for inventory (Wednesday) decreases cash but also accounts payable. Collecting for the sale (Thursday) increases cash but also decreases accounts receivable. No change in net assets takes place except for the sale on Tuesday. The sale causes an increase in net assets that is the equivalent of the gross profit.

Payment of Rent in Advance

Question: Transaction 10—The company wants to rent a building to use for the next four months and pays the property’s owner $4,000 to cover this cost. When payment is made for rent (or a similar cost) with a future economic benefit, what recording is appropriate in financial accounting?

 

Answer: In acquiring the use of this property, the company’s cash decreases by $4,000. The money was paid to utilize the building for four months in the future. The anticipated economic benefit is an asset, and that information should be reported to decision makers by establishing a prepaid rent balance. Money has been paid to use the property at a designated time in the future to help generate revenues.

Transaction 10: Payment of Rent in Advance Prepaid Rent (asset) increases $4,000 Cash (asset) decreases by $4,000

Key Takeaway

Accountants cannot record transactions without understanding the financial impact that has occurred. Whether inventory is sold, an account receivable is collected, or some other event takes place, at least two accounts are always affected because all such events have both a cause and an effect. Individual account balances rise or fall depending on the nature of each transaction. The payment of insurance, the collection of a receivable, an owner’s contribution, and the like all cause very specific changes in account balances. One of the most common is the sale of inventory where both an increase in revenue and the removal of the merchandise takes place. Increases and decreases in inventory are often monitored by a perpetual system that reflects all such changes immediately. In a perpetual system, cost of goods sold—the expense that measures the cost of inventory acquired by a company’s customers—is recorded at the time of sale.

4.3 Double-Entry Bookkeeping

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Explain the history of double-entry bookkeeping.
  2. List the four steps followed in the accounting process.
  3. Indicate the purpose of a T-account.
  4. List the basic rules for making use of debits and credits.
  5. Describe the reason that debits and credits are always equal for every transaction.

Double-Entry Bookkeeping

Question: Transaction analysis determines the changes that occur in accounts whenever various events take place. Financial statements eventually provide a formal structure to communicate the resulting balances to an array of interested parties.

  • Revenues, expenses, gains, and losses are presented on an income statement where they are combined to arrive at reported net income for the period.
  • Total income earned and dividends distributed by the company over its entire life are netted to compute the retained earnings balance to be reported.
  • Assets, liabilities, capital stock, and retained earnings are all displayed on a balance sheet.
  • Changes in cash are separated into operating activities, investing activities, and financing activities and disclosed on a statement of cash flows.
  • Notes offer pages of additional explanatory information.

The amount of financial data that is readily available to any decision maker is impressive.

Accountants for a business of any significant size face a daunting challenge in creating financial statements. They must gather, measure, and report the impact of the many varied events that occur virtually every day. As an example, for 2010, Xerox Corporation disclosed revenues of over $21.6 billion and operating expenses and other costs of $20.8 billion. At the end of 2010, the Kellogg Company reported holding $1.1 billion in inventory—which is a lot of cereal—and indicated that its operating activities that year generated a net cash inflow of approximately $1 billion. How can any organization possibly amass and maintain such an enormous volume of data so that financial statements can be produced with no material misstatements?

 

Answer: Over five hundred years ago, Venetian merchants in Italy developed a system that continues to serve in the twenty-first century as the basis for accumulating financial data throughout much of the world. Today, when every aspect of modern society seems to be in a constant state of flux, a process that has remained in use for over five centuries is almost impossible to comprehend. However, the double-entry bookkeepingA mechanical process created over five hundred years ago and documented by Fra Luca Bartolomeo de Pacioli that facilitates the gathering and reporting of financial information. procedures that were first documented in 1494 by Fra Luca Bartolomeo de Pacioli (a friend of Leonardo da Vinci) remain virtually unchanged by time. Organizations, both small and large, use the fundamentals of double-entry bookkeeping to gather the monetary information needed to produce financial statements that are fairly presented according to the rules of U.S. GAAP or IFRS.

Analyze, Record, Adjust, and Report

Question: This assertion sounds like science fiction. It hardly seems believable that Xerox keeps up with over $21.6 billion in revenue (approximately $59 million per day) using the same methods that Venetian merchants applied to their transactions during the Renaissance. How can a five-hundred-year-old bookkeeping system possibly be usable in today’s modern world?

 

Answer: State-of-the-art computers and other electronic devices are designed to refine and accelerate the financial accounting process, but the same basic organizing procedures have been utilized now for hundreds of years. In simplest terms, accounting systems are all created to follow four sequential steps:

  • Analyze
  • Record
  • Adjust
  • Report

The first two of these steps are studied in this chapter. As explained previously, financial accounting starts by analyzing each transaction—every event that has a monetary impact on the organization—to ascertain the changes created in accounts such as rent expense, cash, inventory, and dividends paid. Fortunately, a vast majority of any company’s transactions are repetitive so that many of the effects can be easily anticipated. A sale on credit always increases both accounts receivable and revenue. Regardless of the time or place, a cash purchase of a piece of equipment increases the balance reported for equipment while decreasing cash. Computer systems can be programmed to record the impact of these events automatically allowing the accountant to focus on analyzing more complex transactions.

Debits, Credits, and T-Accounts

Question: The second step in the financial accounting process is “record.” At the beginning of this chapter, a number of transactions were presented and their impact on individual accounts determined. Following this analysis, some method must be devised to capture the information in an orderly fashion. Officials could just list the effect of each transaction on a sheet of paper:

“Increase inventory $2,000 and increase accounts payable $2,000.”

“Increase salary expense $300 and decrease cash $300.”

“Increase cash $9,000 and increase note payable $9,000.”

However, this process is slow and poorly organized. A more efficient process is required for companies like Xerox and KelloggAfter all monetary changes are identified, how are these effects accumulated?

 

Answer: An essential step in understanding double-entry bookkeeping is to realize that financial information is accumulated by accountsDetailed records of the transactions and current balances of individual assets, liabilities, stockholders’ equity, revenues and expenses.. As mentioned previously, every balance to be reported in a set of financial statements is maintained in a separate account. Thus, for assets, an individual account is established to monitor cash, accounts receivable, inventory, and so on. To keep track of expenses, a number of additional accounts are needed, such as cost of goods sold, rent expense, salary expense, and repair expense. The same is true for revenues, liabilities, and other categories. A small organization might utilize only a few dozen accounts in its entire record-keeping system. A large business probably has thousands.

Based on the original Venetian model, the balance for each account is monitored in a form known as a T-accountMaintains the monetary balance for each of the accounts reported by an organization with a left (debit) side and a right (credit) side used to show increases and decreases. as displayed in Figure 4.2 “Examples of Common T-Accounts”. This structure provides room for recording on both the left side (known as the debitLeft side of a T-account; it indicates increases in assets, expenses, and dividends paid as well as decreases in liabilities, capital stock, and revenue and gains. side) and the right side (the creditRight side of a T-account; it indicates increases in liabilities, capital stock, retained earnings, and revenue and gains as well as decreases in assets, expenses, and dividends paid. side).

Figure 4.2 Examples of Common T-Accounts

One side of every T-account records increases; the other side records decreases. For over five hundred years, the following rules have applied.

In some accounts, debits indicate an increase and credits indicate a decrease. They are grouped together because they all refer to costs.

Increase Shown with a Debit:

  • Expenses and losses
  • Assets
  • Dividends paidOne method to keep track of these accounts initially is to remember them as the “DEAD” accounts: debits increase, expenses and losses, assets, and dividends paid. Quickly, though, through practice, such mnemonic devices will not be needed.

In other accounts, credits indicate an increase and debits indicate a decrease. They are grouped together because they all reflect sources of funding.

Increase Shown with a Credit:

  • Liabilities
  • Capital stock
  • Revenues and gains
  • Retained earningsChanges in the balance reported for retained earnings normally do not come as a direct result of a transaction. As discussed previously, this account reflects all the net income earned to date reduced by all dividend payments. Income is made up of revenues, expenses, gains, and losses. Accounting recognition of revenues and gains (which increase with credits) lead to a larger retained earnings balance. Expenses, losses, and dividends paid (which all increase with debits) reduce retained earnings. Consequently, credits cause an increase in retained earnings whereas debits produce a decrease.

The debit and credit rules for these seven general types of accounts provide a short-hand method for recording the financial impact that a transaction has on any account. They were constructed in this manner so that the following would be true:

Basic Rule for Double-Entry Bookkeeping Debits must always equal credits for every transaction.

At first view, the debit and credit rules might seem completely arbitrary. However, they are structured to mirror the cause-and-effect relationship found in every transaction. This is the basis of what the Venetian merchants came to understand so long ago: every effect must have a cause.

  • Assume an asset (such as cash) increases. As shown here, that change is recorded on the debit side of the T-account for that asset. What could cause an asset to become larger? A reason must exist. A liability—possibly a bank loan—could have been incurred (recorded as a credit); capital stock could have been issued to an owner (a credit); revenue could have been earned from a sale (a credit). The list of possible reasons is relatively short. In each case, the debit (increase) to the asset is caused by an equal and offsetting credit.
  • Assume an asset (such as cash) decreases. This change is recorded on the credit side of the asset’s T-account. What might cause this reduction? An expense could have been paid (recorded as a debit); a dividend could have been distributed to shareholders (a debit); a liability could have been extinguished (a debit); another asset could have been acquired (a debit). Once again, the cause-and-effect relationship is reflected; the debits equal the credits. Each effect is set equal and opposite to its cause.

There are only seven types of accounts. Therefore, a mastery of debit and credit rules can be achieved with a moderate amount of practice. Because of the fundamental role that debits and credits play within every accounting system, this knowledge is well worth the effort required to obtain it.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company incurs a transaction that is reflected in its accounting system through a debit to salary expense and a credit to salary payable for salary for one month. Which one of the following is the best description of the transaction that took place?

  1. Employee salaries for the past month were paid.
  2. Employee salaries for the upcoming month were paid.
  3. Employee salaries for the past month are recognized but not paid.
  4. Employee salaries for the past month have been accrued and are now paid.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: Employee salaries for the past month are recognized but not paid.

Explanation:

A debit to an expense is an increase, while a credit to a liability is also an increase. The expense increased, indicating that salary for the past month has been incurred. The payable also increased, which means that the amount owed to the employees has risen. Recognition is made here that an expense has been incurred but not yet paid.

Key Takeaway

Most companies participate in numerous transactions each day that must be examined and organized so that financial statements can eventually be prepared. This process requires four steps: analyze, record, adjust, and report. Over five hundred years ago, double-entry bookkeeping was created as a mechanical process to facilitate this gathering and reporting of financial information. A T-account is maintained for each account (such as cash, accounts payable, and rent expense) to be reported by a company. The left side of the T-account is the debit side, and the right side is the credit. Expenses and losses, assets, and dividends paid increase with debits. Liabilities, revenues and gains, capital stock, and retained earnings increase with credits. Debits always equal credits because every transaction must have both an effect and a cause for that effect.

4.4 Recording Transactions Using Journal Entries

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Describe the purpose and structure of a journal entry.
  2. Identify the purpose of a journal.
  3. Define trial balance and indicate the source of its monetary balances.
  4. Prepare journal entries to record the effect of acquiring inventory, paying salary, borrowing money, and selling merchandise.
  5. Define accrual accounting and list its two components.
  6. Explain the purpose of the revenue realization principle.
  7. Explain the purpose of the matching principle.

The Purpose of a Journal Entry

Question: In an accounting system, the impact of each transaction is analyzed and must then be recorded. Debits and credits are used for this purpose. How does the actual recording of a transaction take place?

 

Answer: The effects produced on various accounts by a transaction should be entered into an accounting system as quickly as possible so that information is not lost and mistakes have less time to occur. After each event is analyzed, the financial changes caused by a transaction are initially recorded as a journal entryThe physical form used in double-entry bookkeeping to record the financial changes caused by a transaction; each must have at least one debit and one credit and the total debit(s) must always equal the total credit(s)..In larger organizations, similar transactions are often grouped, summed, and recorded together for efficiency. For example, all cash sales at one store might be totaled automatically and recorded at one time at the end of each day. To help focus on the mechanics of the accounting process, the journal entries in this textbook will be prepared for transactions individually. A list of a company’s journal entries is maintained in a journalThe physical location of all journal entries; it is the financial diary of an organization capturing the impact of transactions as they took place; it is also referred to as the general journal. (also referred to as a general journalThe physical location of all journal entries; it is the financial diary of an organization capturing the impact of transactions as they took place; it is also referred to as the journal.), which is one of the most important components within any accounting system. The journal is a financial diary for a company. It provides a history of the impact of all financial events, recorded as they took place.

A journal entry is no more than an indication of the accounts and balances that were changed by a single transaction.

Practicing with Debits and Credits

Question: Debit and credit rules are best learned through practice. In order to master the use of debits and credits for recording purposes, where should the needed work begin?

 

Answer: When faced with debits and credits, everyone has to practice at first. That is normal and to be expected. These rules can be learned quickly but only by investing a bit of effort. Earlier in this chapter, a number of common transactions were presented (Figure 4.1 “Transactions Frequently Encountered by a Business”) and then analyzed to demonstrate their impact on account balances. Assume now that these same transactions are to be recorded as journal entries.

To provide more information for this illustration, the reporting company will be a small farm supply store known as the Lawndale Company that is located in a rural area. For convenience, assume that the business incurs each of these transactions during the final two days of Year Four, just prior to preparing financial statements.

Assume further that this company already has the various T-account balances as of December 29, Year Four, presented in Figure 4.3 “Balances From T-accounts in Ledger” before recording the impact of this last group of transactions. A company keeps its T-accounts together in a ledger (or general ledger). This listing of the account balances found in the ledger is known as a trial balanceList of account balances at a specific point in time for each of the T-accounts maintained in a company’s ledger; eventually, financial statements are created using these balances.. Note that the total of all the debit and credit balances do agree ($360,700) and that every account shows a positive balance. In other words, the current figure being reported is either a debit or credit based on what reflects an increase in that particular type of account. Few T-accounts contain negative balances.

Figure 4.3 Balances From T-accounts in Ledger

Journal Entry for Acquisition of Inventory on Credit

Question: After the balances in Figure 4.3 “Balances From T-accounts in Ledger” were determined, several additional transactions took place during the last two days of Year Four. The first transaction analyzed at the start of this chapter (Figure 4.1 “Transactions Frequently Encountered by a Business”) was the purchase of inventory on credit for $2,000. This acquisition increases the recorded amount of inventory while also raising one of the company’s liabilities (accounts payable). How is the acquisition of inventory on credit recorded in the form of a journal entry?

 

Answer: Following the transactional analysis, a journal entry is prepared to record the impact that the event has on the Lawndale Company. Inventory is an asset. An asset always uses a debit to note an increase. Accounts payable is a liability so that a credit indicates that an increase has occurred. Thus, the journal entry shown in Figure 4.4 “Journal Entry 1: Inventory Acquired on Credit” is appropriate.The parenthetical information is included here only for clarification purposes and does not appear in a true journal entry.

Figure 4.4 Journal Entry 1: Inventory Acquired on Credit

Notice that the word “inventory” is physically on the left of the journal entry and the words “accounts payable” are indented to the right. This positioning clearly shows which account is debited and which is credited. In the same way, the $2,000 numerical amount added to the inventory total appears on the left (debit) side whereas the $2,000 change in accounts payable is clearly on the right (credit) side.

Preparing journal entries is a mechanical process but one that is fundamental to the gathering of information for financial reporting purposes. Any person familiar with accounting could easily “read” the previous entry: Based on the debit and credit, both inventory and accounts payable have gone up so a purchase of merchandise for $2,000 on credit is indicated. Interestingly, with translation of the words, a Venetian merchant from the later part of the fifteenth century would be capable of understanding the information captured by this journal entry even if prepared by a modern company as large as Xerox or Kellogg.

Recording Payment of an Expense

Question: In Transaction 2, the Lawndale Company pays its employees salary of $300 for work performed during the past week. If no entry has been recorded previously for this amount, what journal entry is appropriate when a salary payment is made?

 

Answer: Because the information provided indicates that no entry has yet been made, neither the $300 salary expense nor the related salary payable already exists in the accounting records. Apparently, the $60,000 salary expense appearing in the trial balance reflects earlier payments made during the period to company employees.

Payment is made here for past work so this cost represents an expense rather than an asset. Thus, the balance recorded as salary expense goes up while cash decreases. As shown in Figure 4.5 “Journal Entry 2: Salary Paid to Employees”, increasing an expense is always shown by means of a debit. Decreasing an asset is reflected through a credit.

Figure 4.5 Journal Entry 2: Salary Paid to Employees

In practice, the date of each transaction could also be included here. For illustration purposes, this extra information is not necessary.

Journal Entry When Money Is Borrowed

Question: According to Transaction 3, $9,000 is borrowed from a bank when officials sign a note payable that will have to be repaid in several years. What journal entry is prepared by a company to reflect the inflow of cash received from a loan?

 

Answer: As always, recording begins with an analysis of the transaction. Cash—an asset—increases $9,000, which is shown as a debit. The notes payable balance also goes up by the same amount. As a liability, this increase is recorded through a credit. By using debits and credits in this way, a record of the financial effects of this transaction are entered into the accounting records.

Figure 4.6 Journal Entry 3: Money Borrowed from Bank

Test Yourself

Question:

An accountant looks at a journal entry found in a company’s journal that shows a debit to notes payable and a credit to cash. Which of the following events is being recorded?

  1. Money has been borrowed from a bank.
  2. Money has been contributed by an owner.
  3. Money has been received from a sale.
  4. Money has been paid on a liability.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: Money has been paid on a liability.

Explanation:

Cash is an asset that decreases by means of a credit. Notes payable is a liability that decreases with a debit. Both cash and notes payable decreased, indicating that a payment was made.

Recording Sale of Inventory on Credit

Question: In Transaction 1, inventory was bought for $2,000. That journal entry is recorded earlier. Now, in Transaction 4, these goods are sold for $5,000 to a customer with payment to be made at a later date. How is the sale of merchandise on credit recorded in journal entry form?

 

Answer: As discussed previously, two events happen when inventory is sold. First, the sale is made and, second, the customer takes possession of the merchandise from the company. Assuming again that a perpetual inventory system is in use, both the sale and the related expense are recorded immediately.

In the initial part of the transaction, the accounts receivable balance goes up $5,000 because the money from the customer will not be collected until a future point in time. The increase in this asset is shown by means of a debit. The new receivable resulted from a sale. Thus, revenue is also recorded (through a credit) to indicate the cause of that effect.

Figure 4.7 Journal Entry 4A: Sale of Inventory Made on Account

At the same time, inventory costing $2,000 is surrendered by the company. The reduction of any asset is recorded by means of a credit. The expense account that represents the outflow of inventory has been identified previously as “cost of goods sold.” Like any expense, it is entered into the accounting system through a debit.

Figure 4.8 Journal Entry 4B: Merchandise Acquired by Customers

The Role of Accrual Accounting

Question: In the previous transaction, the Lawndale Company made a sale but no cash was to be collected until some later date. Why is revenue reported at the time of sale rather than when cash is eventually collected? Accounting is conservative. Delaying recognition of sales revenue (and the resulting increase in net income) until the $5,000 is physically received seems logical. Why is the revenue recognized here before the cash is collected?

 

Answer: This question reflects a common misconception about the information conveyed through financial statements. As shown in Journal Entry 4A, the reporting of revenue is not tied directly to the receipt of cash. One of the most important components of U.S. GAAP is accrual accountingA method of accounting used by U.S. GAAP to standardize the timing of the recognition of revenues and expenses; it is made up of the revenue realization principle and the matching principle.. It serves as the basis for timing the recognition of revenues and expenses. Because of the direct impact on net income, such issues are among the most complicated and controversial in accounting. The accountant must constantly monitor events as they occur to determine the appropriate point in time for reporting each revenue and expense. Accrual accounting provides standard guidance for that process.

Accrual accounting is really made up of two distinct elements. The revenue realization principleThe component of accrual accounting that guides the timing of revenue recognition; it states that revenue is properly recognized when the earning process needed to generate the revenue is substantially complete and the amount to be received can be reasonably estimated. provides authoritative direction as to the proper timing for the recognition of revenue. The matching principleThe component of accrual accounting that guides the timing of expense recognition; it states that expense is properly recognized in the same time period as the revenue that it helped generate. establishes similar guidelines for expenses. These two principles have been utilized for decades in the application of U.S. GAAP. Their importance within financial accounting can hardly be overstated.

Revenue realization principle. Revenue is properly recognized at the point that (1) the earning process needed to generate the revenue is substantially complete and (2) the amount eventually to be received can be reasonably estimated. As the study of financial accounting progresses into more complex situations, both of these criteria will require careful analysis and understanding.

Matching principle. Expenses are recognized in the same time period as the revenue they help to create. Thus, if specific revenue is to be recognized in the year 2019, all associated costs should be reported as expenses in that same year. Expenses are matched with revenues. However, when a cost cannot be tied directly to identifiable revenue, matching is not possible. In those cases, the expense is recognized in the most logical time period, in some systematic fashion, or as incurred—depending on the situation.

Revenue is reported in Journal Entry 4A. Assuming that the Lawndale Company has substantially completed the work required of this sale and $5,000 is a reasonable estimate of the amount that will be collected, recognition at the time of sale is appropriate. Because the revenue is reported at that moment, the related expense (cost of goods sold) should also be recorded as can be seen in Journal Entry 4B.

Accrual accounting provides an excellent example of how U.S. GAAP guides the reporting process in order to produce fairly presented financial statements that can be understood by all possible decision makers.

Test Yourself

Question:

Which of the following statements is not true?

  1. Accrual accounting is a component of U.S. GAAP.
  2. According to the matching principle, revenues should be recognized in the same period as the expenses that help to generate those revenues.
  3. The revenue realization principle and the matching principle are components of accrual accounting.
  4. Revenues should not be recognized until the amount to be realized can be reasonably estimated.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: According to the matching principle, revenues should be recognized in the same period as the expenses that help to generate those revenues.

Explanation:

Accrual accounting is the U.S. GAAP that structures timing for reporting revenues and expenses. It is made up of the revenue realization principle and the matching principle. Revenues are reported when the earning process is substantially complete and the amount to be received can be reasonably estimated. Expenses are recognized in the same period as revenues they help generate. The answer is b; it is stated backward. Expenses are matched with revenues; revenues are not matched with expenses.

Key Takeaway

After the financial effects of a transaction are analyzed, the impact is recorded within a company’s accounting system through a journal entry. The purchase of inventory, payment of a salary, and borrowing of money are all typical transactions that are recorded in this manner by means of debits and credits. All journal entries are maintained within a journal. The timing of recognition is especially important in connection with revenues and expenses. Accrual accounting provides formal guidance within U.S. GAAP. Revenues are recognized when the earning process is substantially complete and the amount to be collected can be reasonably estimated. Expenses are recognized based on the matching principle. It holds that expenses should be reported in the same period as the revenue they help generate.

4.5 Connecting the Journal to the Ledger

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Prepare journal entries for basic transactions such as the payment of insurance, the acquisition of a long-lived asset, the contribution of capital by owners, the distribution of a dividend, and the like.
  2. Explain the recording of a gain or loss.
  3. Describe the recording of an unearned revenue.
  4. Understand the purpose within an accounting system of both the journal and the ledger.
  5. Discuss the posting of journal entries to T-accounts in the ledger and describe the purpose of that process.

Payment of a Previously Recognized Expense

Question: In Transaction 5, the Lawndale Company pays $700 for insurance coverage received over the past few months. Here, though, the amount has already been recognized. Both the insurance expense and an insurance payable were recorded as incurred. That information was provided in Figure 4.1 “Transactions Frequently Encountered by a Business”, and both amounts can be seen on the trial balance in Figure 4.3 “Balances From T-accounts in Ledger”. Apparently, Lawndale’s accounting system was programmed to recognize this particular expense as it grew over time. When an expense has already been recorded, what journal entry is appropriate at the time payment is made?

 

Answer: Because of the previous recognition, the expense should not now be recorded a second time. Instead, this payment eliminates the liability that was established by the accounting system. Cash—an asset—is decreased, which is shown in accounting by means of a credit. At the same time, the previously recorded payable is removed. Any reduction of a liability is communicated by a debit. To reiterate, no expense is included in this entry because that amount has already been recognized as incurred.

Figure 4.9 Journal Entry 5: Payment of Liability for Insurance Coverage

Note that Journal Entries 2 and 5 differ although the events are similar. As discussed previously, specific recording techniques are influenced by the manner in which the accounting system has handled earlier events. In Journal Entry 2, neither the expense nor the payable had yet been recorded. Thus, the expense was recognized at the time of payment. Conversely, in Journal Entry 5, both the expense and payable had already been entered into the records as the amount gradually grew over time. Hence, when paid, the liability is settled, but no further expense is recognized. The proper amount is already present in the insurance expense T-account.

Acquisition of an Asset

Question: In Transaction 6, a new truck is acquired by the Lawndale Company for $40,000. Cash of $10,000 is paid at the time of purchase but a note payable—due in several years—is signed for the remaining $30,000. This transaction impacts three accounts rather than just two. How is a journal entry constructed when more than two accounts are affected?

 

Answer: As has been discussed, every transaction changes at least two accounts because of the cause-and-effect relationship underlying all financial events. However, beyond that limit, any number of accounts can be impacted. Complex transactions often touch numerous balances. Here, the truck account (an asset) is increased and must be debited. Part of the acquisition was funded by paying cash (an asset) with that decrease recorded as a credit. The remainder of the cost was covered by signing a note payable (a liability). Any increase in a liability is recorded by means of a credit. Note that the debits do equal the credits even when more than two accounts are affected by a transaction.

Figure 4.10 Journal Entry 6: Truck Acquired for Cash and by Signing a Note

Issuance of Capital Stock

Question: In Transaction 7, the Lawndale Company needs additional financing so officials go to current or potential shareholders and convince them to contribute cash of $19,000 in exchange for new shares of the company’s capital stock. These individuals invest their money in order to join the ownership or increase the number of shares they already hold. What journal entry does a business record when capital stock is issued?

 

Answer: The asset cash is increased in this transaction, a change that is always shown as a debit. Capital stock also goes up because new shares are issued to company owners. As indicated in the debit and credit rules, the capital stock account increases by means of a credit.

Figure 4.11 Journal Entry 7: Capital Stock Issued for Cash

Test Yourself

Question:

A corporation issues a balance sheet on December 31, Year Ten. Within stockholders’ equity, a balance of $89,000 is reported in the capital stock account. What does this figure represent?

  1. The current market value of the company’s own stock.
  2. The current market value of stocks the company holds in other companies.
  3. The amount of assets contributed to the business by its owners since the company was created.
  4. The amount of assets contributed to the business by its owners in the current year.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: The amount of assets contributed to the business by its owners since the company was created.

Explanation:

The stockholders’ equity balances indicate the source of the company’s net assets (the amount by which assets exceed liabilities). Normally, the net assets come either from the owners or from the operations of the business (total net income minus all dividends). The capital stock account (sometimes shown as contributed capital) is the amount of net assets put into the company by the owners since the company was started.

Collection Made on Account Receivable

Question: In Journal Entry 4A, a sale was made on credit. An account receivable was established at that time for $5,000. Assume that the customer now pays this amount to the Lawndale Company. How does the collection of an amount from an earlier sales transaction affect the account balances?

 

Answer: When a customer makes payment on a previous sale, the cash balance increases while accounts receivable decrease. Both are assets; one balance goes up (by a debit) while the other is reduced (by a credit).

Figure 4.12 Journal Entry 8: Money Collected on Account

Note that cash is collected here, but no additional revenue is recorded. Based on the requirements of accrual accounting, revenue of $5,000 was recognized previously in Journal Entry 4A. Apparently, the revenue realization principle was met at that time, the earning process was substantially complete, and a reasonable estimation could be made of the amount to be received. Recognizing the revenue again at the current date would incorrectly inflate reported net income. Instead, the previously created receivable balance is removed.

Paying for a Previous Purchase

Question: In Journal Entry 1, inventory was purchased on credit for $2,000. Assume, now, in Transaction 9, that Lawndale makes payment of the entire amount that is due. How is a cash outflow to pay for inventory previously acquired shown in a company’s journal?

 

Answer: Inventory was bought at an earlier time, and payment is now being made. The inventory was properly recorded when acquired and should not be entered again. The merchandise was only obtained that one time. Here, cash is reduced (a credit). The liability set up in Journal Entry 1 (accounts payable) is removed by means of a debit.

Figure 4.13 Journal Entry 9: Money Paid for Previous Purchase

Prepayment of an Expense

Question: Company officials like the building that is being used for operations and decide to rent it for four additional months at a rate of $1,000 per month. An immediate payment of $4,000 is made. This cost provides a future economic benefit rather than a past value. Recognition of an expense is not yet appropriate. What recording is appropriate when rent or other costs such as insurance or advertising are paid in advance?

 

Answer: Cash is decreased by the payment made here to rent this building. As an asset, a reduction in cash is reported by means of a credit. However, this rent provides a future value for Lawndale Company. The cost is not for past usage of the building but rather for the upcoming months. Therefore, the amount paid creates an asset. The probable economic benefit is the ability to make use of this facility over the next four months to generate new revenue. When the $4,000 is paid, an asset—normally called prepaid rent—is recorded through a debit.

Figure 4.14 Journal Entry 10: Money Paid for Future Rent

Note that Lawndale does not record the building itself because the company does not gain ownership or control (beyond these four months). The payment only provides the right to make use of the building for the specified period in the future so that a prepaid rent balance is appropriate.

Acquisition of Land

Question: Before this illustration of typical journal entries is completed, four additional transactions will be examined. In total, these fourteen provide an excellent cross-section of basic events encountered by most businesses and the journal entries created to capture that information. An understanding of the recording of these transactions is of paramount importance in mastering the mechanical rules for debits and credits.

Officials of the Lawndale Company decide to purchase a small tract of land by paying $8,000 in cash. Perhaps they think the space might be used sometime in the future as a parking lot. What recording is made to reflect the cash purchase of a plot of land?

 

Answer: The transaction here is straightforward. As an asset, land increases with a debit. The company’s cash balance goes down because of the acquisition. That drop is recorded using a credit. As stated earlier in this section, Venetian merchants would probably have made the same recording five hundred years ago (although not in U.S. dollars).

Figure 4.15 Journal Entry 11: Land Acquired for Cash

Sale of an Asset Other Than Inventory

Question: Now, assume that—for demonstration purposes—this same piece of land is sold almost immediately to an outside party for cash of $11,000. A sale occurs but the land is not inventory. It was not bought specifically to be resold within the normal course of business. As a farm supply store, selling land is not the primary operation of the Lawndale Company. Should revenue be recorded along with cost of goods sold when land rather than inventory is sold? These two accounts are used in journalizing the sale of inventory. Does the same reporting apply to the sale of other assets such as land or equipment?

 

Answer: Because the sale of land is not viewed as a central portion of this company’s operations, neither revenue nor cost of goods sold is reported as in the sale of inventory. An $11,000 increase in cash is recorded along with the removal of the $8,000 cost of the land that was conveyed to the new owner. However, to alert decision makers that a tangential or incidental event has taken place, a gain (if the sales price is more than the cost of the land) or a loss (if sales price is less than cost) is recognized for the difference. The effect on net income is the same (a net increase of $3,000), but the method of reporting has changed.

The resulting gain or loss is then separated from revenues and expenses on the income statement to more clearly communicate information as to the nature of the transaction. The decision maker can see the operating income earned by the reporting company from the normal sale of goods and services distinct from any other gains and losses. For example, if an investor or creditor is looking at the financial statements produced by an Italian restaurant, the amount of income from selling pizzas, spaghetti, and the like is important information apart from any gains and losses that were not part of typical operations. Consequently, neither revenue nor cost of goods sold is found in the following entry as was demonstrated in Journal Entries 4A and 4B.

Figure 4.16 Journal Entry 12: Land Sold for Cash in Excess of Cost

Test Yourself

Question:

A company buys and sells pots and pans for the kitchen. This same company bought land for a possible warehouse for $43,000. Several years later, the land was sold for $54,000 cash when the decision was made not to construct the new warehouse. In its accounting system, the company increased revenues by $54,000 (along with cash). Cost of goods sold was also recorded as $43,000 (along with a decrease in the land account). Which of the following statements is true?

  1. Net income is correctly reported.
  2. Gross profit is correctly reported.
  3. The reported total for assets is overstated.
  4. The journal entry was properly made.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: Net income is correctly reported.

Explanation:

The company’s entry increased revenues and the cost of goods sold so that the gross profit was raised by $11,000 ($54,000 minus $43,000). However, a gain of $11,000 should have been reported instead. Thus, the components of net income are wrong, but the total impact of $11,000 is properly shown. The balance sheet accounts (cash and land) were recorded in an appropriate fashion.

Receiving Cash before the Earning Process Is Complete

Question: Accrual accounting, as specified in the revenue realization principle, mandates that revenues should not be recognized until the earning process is substantially complete. Assume a customer gives the Lawndale Company $3,000 in cash for some type of service to be performed at a future date. The work has not yet begun. Thus, Lawndale cannot report revenue of $3,000. How is a cash inflow recorded if received for work before the earning process is substantially complete?

 

Answer: Although cash is received, accrual accounting dictates that revenue cannot be recognized until the earning process is substantially complete. Here, the earning process will not take place for some time in the future. As an asset, the cash account is increased (debit) but no revenue can yet be recorded. Instead, an unearned revenue account is established for the $3,000 credit. This balance is reported by the Lawndale Company as a liability. Because the money has been accepted, the company is obliged to provide the service or return the $3,000 to the customer. Recording this liability mirrors that responsibility.

Figure 4.17 Journal Entry 13: Money Received for Work to Be Done Later

Distribution of a Dividend

Question: Here is one final transaction to provide a full range of basic examples at this preliminary stage of coverage. Many additional transactions and their journal entries will be introduced throughout this textbook, but these fourteen form a strong core of the typical events encountered by most businesses.

Assume that the Lawndale Company has been profitable. As a result, at the end of the year, the board of directors votes to distribute a cash dividend to all owners, a reward that totals $600. Payment is made immediately. What recording is appropriate when a dividend is distributed to the owners of a corporation?

 

Answer: Cash is reduced by this payment to the company’s owners. As an asset, a credit is appropriate. The cause of the decrease in cash was a dividend. Hence, a “dividends paid” account is established to measure this particular outflow of net assets. According to the debit and credit rules, an increase in this account is shown through a debit. Thus, the recording of this last illustration is as follows.

Figure 4.18 Journal Entry 14: Dividend Distributed to Owners

To help visualize the components of an accounting system, all of the journal entries presented here have been gathered into an actual journal in Figure 4.19 “Lawndale Company Journal—Final Days of Year Four” as the accountant for the Lawndale Company might have kept. Normally, a date for each entry is included for reference purposes, but that has been omitted here.

Figure 4.19 Lawndale Company Journal—Final Days of Year Four

Current T-Account Balances

Question: With adequate practice, obtaining an understanding of the rules for debits and credits is a reasonable goal. However, these journal entries do not provide the current balance of any account. They record the effect of each transaction but not the updated account totals, figures that could change many times every day. How does an accountant keep track of the current balance of cash, inventory, rent expense, or the myriad other accounts that appear on a set of financial statements?

 

Answer: In an accounting system, the recording process is composed of two distinct steps.

  1. After analyzing the financial impact of a transaction, a journal entry is created to reflect the monetary impact on relevant accounts.
  2. Then, each individual debit and credit is added to the specific T-account being altered, a process known as “posting.” A debit to cash in a journal entry is listed as a debit in the cash T-account. A credit made to notes payable is recorded as a credit within the corresponding T-account. After all entries are posted, the current balance for any account can be determined by adding the debit and the credit sides of the T-account and netting the two.

Historically, posting the individual changes shown in each journal entry to the specific T-accounts was a tedious and slow process performed manually. Today, automated systems are designed so that the impact of each entry is simultaneously recorded in the proper T-accounts found in the ledger.

For illustration purposes, all of the journal entries recorded earlier have been posted into the ledger T-accounts shown in Figure 4.19 “Lawndale Company Journal—Final Days of Year Four”. Each account includes the previous balance (PB) found in the trial balance in Figure 4.3 “Balances From T-accounts in Ledger”. The new debits and credits are then posted for each of the fourteen sample transactions. For cross-referencing purposes, the number of the corresponding journal entry is included. The debit and credit sides of each account are summed and netted to determine the current balance (CB). For example, the cash T-account has $67,000 as the total of all debits and $25,600 for all credits, which net to a current balance of $41,400.

After all of the additional journal entries have been posted into the ledger, an updated trial balance can be drawn from the individual T-account balances. No change is created by this process, but, as can be seen in Figure 4.21 “Lawndale Company Trial Balance (after all journal entries have been posted)—December 31, Year Four”, the accounts and their current balances are much easier to see. Simply the clarity of the information can help accountants spot accounts that may contain errors because of unusual or unexpected totals.

Figure 4.20 Lawndale Company Ledger—December 31, Year Four

Figure 4.21 Lawndale Company Trial Balance (after all journal entries have been posted)—December 31, Year Four

Key Takeaway

Initial coverage of the recording of basic transactions is concluded here through analysis of the payment of insurance, the contribution of capital, the purchase and sale of land, the receipt of cash prior to work being performed, the payment of dividends to owners, and the like. After the impact of each event is ascertained, debits and credits are used to record these changes within the journal. These journal entries are then posted to the appropriate T-accounts to monitor the ever-changing account balances. All T-accounts are physically located in a ledger, which is also known as a general ledger. Journal entries document the effect of transactions. T-accounts maintain the current balance of every account.

Talking with a Real Investing Pro (Continued)

Following is a continuation of our interview with Kevin G. Burns.

 

Question: When you were a college student majoring in accounting, you learned all the debit and credit rules as well as about the role of journal entries and the general ledger. In your years as an investment advisor, has this knowledge ever proven to be helpful to you and your career?

Kevin Burns: Although I never planned to be an accountant when I was in college, I found the internal logic of the debit and credit rules quite fascinating. Thinking through transactions and figuring out the proper recording process was a great introduction to business operations. In all honesty, as an investment advisor, I pay more attention to asset values and other balance sheet information than the accounting process that is used to gather this information. However, I also happen to own a restaurant and I always find it interesting when I dig through the specific expense accounts looking for ways to be more efficient.

For instance, recently when I saw that we had spent a lot of money last year on building maintenance, I could not imagine how that was possible. I dug through the T-account myself and found a recording error that needed to be fixed that changed our net income. My background allowed me to understand the entire process. Frequently, as I study the various debits within our expenses, I am able to spot areas where the restaurant can save money. I am always amazed that some business owners seem almost scared to look into their own financial information. I think they are afraid of feeling stupid. But, the more information you have, the more likely it is that you will make money.

4.6 End-of-Chapter Exercises

Questions

  1. What is a transaction?
  2. When and where was the basic accounting system developed that is still used by organizations today?
  3. What is meant by the term “double-entry bookkeeping”?
  4. What are the four basic steps followed in an accounting system?
  5. How is information about the impact of a transaction initially captured in an accounting system?
  6. How is information about specific account balances accumulated?
  7. Which accounts are increased with a debit?
  8. Which accounts are increased with a credit?
  9. Susan Osgood works as an accountant and maintains the journal for the Nelson Corporation. What is the purpose of a journal?
  10. In a journal entry, why do the debit figures always agree with the credit figures?
  11. What is a trial balance?
  12. What function does accrual accounting serve?
  13. Accrual accounting is composed of which two principles? Define each.
  14. An accountant indicates that a certain expense was recognized in the current year because of the matching principle. What does that mean?
  15. The Abraham Company receives $27,000 to do a job. However, the work is not yet completed. How is the receipt of this money recognized for financial reporting purposes?

True or False

  1. ____ Debits and credits must equal for every transaction.
  2. ____ A list of all recorded journal entries is recorded in the ledger, which is maintained by a company.
  3. ____ Revenue may not be recorded until cash is collected.
  4. ____ A transaction is any event that has a financial impact on a company.
  5. ____ The balance of an expense account is increased with a credit.
  6. ____ Examples of accrued expenses include salary, rent, and interest.
  7. ____ The term “revenue” and the term “gain” are interchangeable.
  8. ____ Posting refers to the process of analyzing transactions and producing journal entries.
  9. ____ A company must recognize each accrued expense as it is incurred.
  10. ____ The matching principle states that expenses should be recognized in the same period as the revenue they help generate.
  11. ____ Unearned revenue is reported on the balance sheet as a liability account.
  12. ____ The Hampstone Company buys 20,000 pieces of inventory (all identical) for $70,000. The company sells 8,000 units of this inventory for $5 each in cash. The company should debit cash for $40,000, credit inventory for $28,000, and credit gain for $12,000.
  13. ____ Assume a company buys inventory for $8,000 for cash. It then spends $700 in cash on advertising in order to sell 60 percent of the inventory for $11,000. Of that amount, it collects $5,000 immediately and will collect the remaining $6,000 next year. The company pays a cash dividend of $1,000. The amount of net income to be recognized this year will be $5,500.
  14. ____ A company buys inventory for $6,000 on credit on December 31, Year One. By accident, the journal entry is made backward (debits are shown as credits and credits are shown as debits). The company reports working capital of $140,000. The correct amount of working capital is $134,000.
  15. ____ A matching principle is the portion of U.S. GAAP that sets the rule for the timing of recognition of revenues.
  16. ____ Assume a company buys inventory for $3,000 on credit. It then spends $400 on advertising in order to sell 30 percent of the inventory for $9,000. Of that amount, it collects $5,000 immediately and will collect the remaining $4,000 next year. The amount of gross profit to be recognized this year will be $7,700.

Multiple Choice

  1. Which of the following is not true about double-entry bookkeeping?

    1. It originated in Italy.
    2. Debits and credits must equal.
    3. It is still used today by most businesses.
    4. Each entry can have only one credit and one debit.
  2. Which of the following entries could Yeats Company not make when they perform a service for a client?

    1. Figure 4.22

    2. Figure 4.23

    3. Figure 4.24

    4. Figure 4.25

  3. Which of the following is a transaction for Tyler Corporation?

    1. Tyler pays its employees $400 for work done.
    2. Tyler considers renting office space that will cost $1,500 per month.
    3. Tyler agrees to perform services for a client, which will cost $7,000.
    4. Tyler places an order for supplies that will be delivered in two weeks. The supplies cost $200.
  4. Elenor Company sells 400 units of inventory for $40 each. The inventory originally cost Elenor $26 each. What is Elenor’s gross profit on this transaction?

    1. $ 5,600
    2. $ 9,600
    3. $10,400
    4. $16,000
  5. Which of the following increases with a debit?

    1. Retained earnings
    2. Sales revenue
    3. Inventory
    4. Note payable
  6. In January, Rollins Company is paid $500 by a client for work that Rollins will not begin until February. Which of the following is the correct journal entry for Rollins to make when the $500 is received?

    1. Figure 4.26

    2. Figure 4.27

    3. Figure 4.28

    4. Figure 4.29

  7. The accountant for the Babson Corporation determines that the current Cash balance held by the company is $32,564. Which of the following could not have been the source of that information?

    1. Trial balance
    2. Journal
    3. T-account
    4. Ledger
  8. In the accounting system for the Caldwell Company, which of the following comes first?

    1. Journal
    2. Financial statements
    3. T-account
    4. Ledger
  9. Which of the following T-accounts is least likely to have a credit balance?

    1. Revenue
    2. Equipment
    3. Accounts payable
    4. Capital stock
  10. The Brooklyn Corporation rents a building for $100 per day. The company’s accounting system accrues this expense each day. After twelve days, payment is made. What account is debited when that payment is made?

    1. Rent expense
    2. Rent payable
    3. Cash
    4. Cannot be determined based on the information provided
  11. The Bronx Corporation rents a building for $100 per day. The company’s accounting system makes no recognition of this expense as it accrues. After twelve days, payment is made. What account is debited when that payment is made?

    1. Rent expense
    2. Rent payable
    3. Cash
    4. Cannot be determined based on the information provided

Video Problems

Professor Joe Hoyle discusses the answers to these two problems at the links that are indicated. After formulating your answers, watch each video to see how Professor Hoyle answers these questions.

  1. Your roommate is an English major. One of the roommate’s parents works as an accountant for the family’s business, a corporation that owns a number of ice cream stores in Florida. The parent is constantly talking about working with debits and credits, which seems like some foreign language to your roommate. One day, on the way to the fitness center, your roommate blurts out this question: “What in the world are debits and credits? How can they possibly be so important?” How would you respond?

  2. Your uncle and two friends started a small office supply store at the beginning of the current year. Almost immediately, it becomes obvious to them that they need some system for keeping their financial records. They will eventually have to report their income taxes, and they may well need monetary information for a bank loan. Your uncle knows that you are taking a financial accounting course in college. He sends you an e-mail and asks if you can provide some suggestions on getting started with this record-keeping process. He realizes that you have just started your course, but he hopes that you can give him some basic ideas on how to gather the needed information. How would you respond?

Problems

  1. For each of the following transactions of the Hamner Corporation, indicate what accounts are affected and whether they increase or decrease.

    1. Owners put $30,000 in cash into the business.
    2. The company borrows $15,000 in cash from the bank on a note payable.
    3. The company buys equipment for $19,000 using cash.
    4. The company buys machinery at a cost of $11,000 that will be paid within thirty days.
    5. The company sells services for $14,000. It collects $2,000 immediately (when the work is done) with the rest due at the end of the month.
    6. The company pays $5,000 in rent on a building that was used during the past month. The expense has not been accrued over that time.
    7. The company pays a $3,000 dividend to its owners.
    8. The company buys inventory for $10,000 on credit.
    9. The company sells the above inventory for $18,000. It collects $7,000 immediately with the rest to be received within the next few weeks.
    10. The company pays for inventory bought in transaction h.
    11. The company collects money due from the sale in transaction i.
  2. For each of the following is a debit or credit needed to reflect the impact?

    1. Equipment increases
    2. Salary payable increases
    3. Cash decreases
    4. Rent expense increases
    5. Sales revenue increases
    6. Accounts receivable decreases
    7. Capital stock increases
    8. Inventory decreases
    9. Accounts payable decreases
    10. Salary expense decreases
  3. Record the following journal entries for Taylor Company for the month of March:

    1. Borrowed $4,500 from Local Bank and Trust
    2. Investors contributed $10,000 in cash for shares of the company’s stock.
    3. Bought inventory costing $2,000 on credit
    4. Sold inventory that originally cost $400 for $600 on credit
    5. Purchased a new piece of equipment for $500 cash
    6. Collected $600 in cash from sale of inventory in (d)
    7. Paid for inventory purchased in (c)
    8. Paid $1,200 in cash for an insurance policy that covers the next year
    9. Employees earned $3,000 during the month but have not yet been paid; this amount has been recorded by the company as it was earned.
    10. Paid employees $2,900 of the wages earned and recorded during February
  4. For each of the following transactions, determine if Raymond Corporation has earned revenue during the month of May and, if so, how much has been earned.

    1. Customer A paid Raymond $1,500 for work Raymond will perform in June.
    2. Customer B purchased $6,000 in inventory with the total payment expected to be received in four weeks. Those items had cost Raymond $3,600 in February.
    3. Raymond performed a service for Customer C and was paid $3,400 in cash.
    4. Customer D paid Raymond $2,300 for inventory that was purchased previously in April.
  5. Record the journal entries for the transactions in number 4 above.
  6. The following are the account balances for the Ester Company for December 31, Year Four, and the year that ended. All accounts have normal debit or credit balances. For some reason, company accountants do not know the amount of sales revenue earned this year. What is the balance of that account?

    Figure 4.30 Trial Balance—Ester Company

  7. State whether a debit or credit balance is normal for each of the following T-accounts:

    1. Cash
    2. Dividends paid
    3. Notes payable
    4. Unearned revenue
    5. Cost of goods sold
    6. Prepaid rent
    7. Accounts receivable
    8. Capital stock
  8. Near the end of her freshman year at college, Heather Miller is faced with the decision of whether to get a summer job, go to summer school, or start a summer dress-making business. Heather has some experience designing and sewing and believes that third option might be the most lucrative of her summer alternatives. Consequently, she starts “Sew Cool.”

    During June, the first month of business, the following occur:

    1. Heather deposits $1,000 of her own money into Sew Cool’s checking account.
    2. Sew Cool purchases equipment for $1,000. The company signs a note payable for this purchase.
    3. Sew Cool purchases $1,000 in sewing supplies and material paying cash.
    4. Sew Cool gives Heather’s parents a check for $80 for rent ($70) and utilities ($10) for the past four weeks.
    5. Heather sews and sells twenty dresses during the month. Each dress has a price of $60. Cash is received for twelve of the dresses, with customers owing for the remaining eight.
    6. The dresses sold cost $35 each to make.
    7. Sew Cool purchases advertising for $50 cash.
    8. Sew Cool pays Heather a cash dividend of $10 cash.
    9. Sew Cool’s taxes, paid in cash, amount to $87.

      Required:

      1. Prepare journal entries for the previous transactions.
      2. Prepare t-accounts for each account used.
      3. Prepare a trial balance for June.
  9. Bowling Corporation had the following transactions occur during January:

    1. Bowling purchased $450,000 in inventory on credit.
    2. Bowling received $13,000 in cash from customers for subscriptions that will not begin until the following month.
    3. Bowling signed a note from Midwest Bank for $67,000.
    4. Bowling sold all the inventory purchased in (a) for $700,000 on account.
    5. Bowling paid employees $120,000 for services performed (and recorded) during the previous year.
    6. Bowling purchased land for $56,000 in cash.
    7. Bowling received $650,000 in cash from customers paying off previous accounts receivable.
    8. Bowling paid dividends to stockholders in the amount of $4,000.
    9. Bowling owes its employees $123,000 for work performed during the current month but not yet paid.
    10. Bowling paid $300,000 on its accounts payable.
    11. Bowling paid taxes in cash of $45,000.

      Required:

      1. Prepare journal entries for the previous transactions.
      2. Complete the following T-accounts. Numbers already under the accounts represent the prior balance in that account.

        Figure 4.31 Opening T-Account Balances

      3. Prepare a trial balance for the end of January.
  10. The following events occurred during the month of January for McLain Company.

    1. McLain purchases inventory costing $1,800 on account.
    2. McLain sells 240 units for $20 each. McLain collects cash for 200 of these units. These specific units cost McLain $8 each to purchase.
    3. McLain collects $500 in cash on its accounts receivable.
    4. McLain takes out a loan for $400.
    5. McLain pays out $350 cash in dividends.
    6. McLain receives a contribution of $600 in cash from its owners in exchange for capital stock shares.
    7. McLain purchased a new piece of equipment. The new equipment cost $1,000 and was paid for in cash.
    8. McLain pays $500 of its accounts payable.
    9. McLain incurs $500 in salaries expense, but will not pay workers until next month.
    10. McLain incurs $300 in rent expense and pays it in cash.
    11. McLain prepays $200 in cash for insurance.
    12. Taxes, paid in cash, are $110.

    Required:

    1. Prepare journal entries for the earlier transactions.
    2. Complete the following T-accounts. Numbers already under the accounts represent the prior balance in that account.

      Figure 4.32 Opening T-Account Balances

    3. Prepare a trial balance for January.

Research Assignment

A newspaper company collects money for subscriptions before its newspapers are physically delivered. How large is that liability, and when does it become revenue?

Go to http://www.nytimes.com/. At The New York Times Web site, scroll to the bottom of the screen and click on “The New York Times Company.” Click on “Investors” at the top of the next screen. Click on “Financials” on the left side of the next screen. In the center of the next page, click on “2010 Annual Report & Form 10-K” to download.

After the document has downloaded, scroll to page 63 to look at the company’s balance sheet. Does The New York Times Company report any unearned revenue within its liabilities?

Next, scroll to page 72. Within the notes to financial statements, a description is provided of the revenue recognition procedures used by The New York Times Company. What information is presented to decision makers by the last sentence in the fourth bullet point?

Chapter 3: How Is Financial Information Delivered to Decision Makers Such as Investors and Creditors?

Video Clip

(click to see video)

In this video, Professor Joe Hoyle introduces the essential points covered in Chapter 3 “How Is Financial Information Delivered to Decision Makers Such as Investors and Creditors?”.

3.1 Construction of Financial Statements Beginning with the Income Statement

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Understand that financial statements provide the physical structure for the financial information reported to decision makers by businesses and other organizations.
  2. Identify each of the four financial statements typically produced by a reporting entity.
  3. List the normal contents of an income statement.
  4. Define “gains” and “losses” and explain how they differ from “revenues” and “expenses.”
  5. Explain the term “cost of goods sold.”
  6. Compute gross profit and the gross profit percentage.

Financial Statements Provide Physical Structure for Financial Reporting

Question: The revenues, expenses, assets, and liabilities reported by an organization provide essential data for decision making. These figures and related information enable a thorough analysis and evaluation of the organization’s financial health and future prospects. How do outsiders learn of these amounts? How do decision makers obtain this data? How is financial information actually conveyed to interested parties?

For example, a company such as Marriott International Inc. (the hotel chain) has millions of current and potential shareholders, creditors, and employees. How does such a business communicate vital financial information to all of the groups and individuals that might want to make some type of evaluation?

 

Answer: Businesses and other organizations periodically produce financial statements that provide a formal structure for conveying financial information to decision makers. Smaller organizations distribute such statements each year, frequently as part of an annual report prepared by management. Larger companies, like Marriott International, issue yearly statements but also prepare interim statements, usually on a quarterly basis.Financial statements for many of the businesses that have their capital stock traded publicly on stock exchanges are readily available on corporate Web sites. For example, the statements released by Marriott International can be located through the following path. The financial statements issued by most large companies will be found by using similar steps.•

  1. Go to http://www.marriott.com.
  2. Click on “About Marriott” (probably at the bottom of the homepage).
  3. Click on “Investor.”
  4. Click on “Financial Information.”
  5. Click on “Financial Reports & Proxy.”
  6. Click on “Annual Report” (for the year desired).

 

Regardless of the frequency, financial statements serve as the vehicle to report all monetary balances and explanatory information required according to the rules and principles of U.S. GAAP (or IFRS, if applicable). When based on these standards, such statements create a fairly presented portrait of the organization—one that contains no material misstatements. In simple terms, an organization’s revenues, expenses, assets, liabilities, and other balances are reported to outsiders by means of financial statements.

Typically, a complete set of financial statements produced by a business includes four separate statements along with pages of comprehensive notes. When financial statements and the related notes are studied with knowledge and understanding, a vast array of information is available to decision makers who want to predict future stock prices, cash dividend payments, and cash flows.

Financial Statements and Accompanying Notes

Because final figures shown on the income statement and the statement of retained earnings are necessary to produce subsequent statements, the preparation of financial statements is carried out in the sequential order shown here.

  • Income statementA listing of all revenues earned and expenses incurred during a specific period of time as well as all gains and losses; also called statement of operations or statement of earnings. (also called a statement of operations or a statement or earnings)As will be discussed in a later chapter of this textbook, a statement of comprehensive income is also sometimes attached to or presented with an income statement.
  • Statement of retained earningsA financial statement that reports the change in a corporation’s retained earnings account from the beginning of a period to the end; the account is increased by net income and decreased by a reported net loss and/or any dividends declared. (or the more inclusive statement of stockholders’ equity)
  • Balance sheetA listing of all asset, liability, and stockholders’ equity accounts at a specific point in time; also called statement of financial position. (also called a statement of financial position)
  • Statement of cash flowsA listing of all cash inflows (sources) and cash outflows (uses) during a specific period of time categorized as operating activities, investing activities, and financing activities.
  • Notes to clarify and explain specified information further

The financial statements prepared by Marriott International as of December 31, 2010, and the year then ended were presented in just five pages of its annual report (pages 45 through 49) whereas the notes accompanying those statements made up the next twenty-eight pages. Although decision makers often focus, almost obsessively, on a few individual figures easily located in a set of financial statements, the vast wealth of information provided by the notes should never be ignored.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Winston Corporation has prepared an annual report for the past year that includes a complete set of financial statements. Which of the following is not likely to be included?

  1. Statement of changes in liabilities
  2. Balance sheet
  3. Income statement
  4. Statement of cash flows

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: Statement of changes in liabilities.

Explanation:

The balance sheet reports assets and liabilities at the end of the year. The income statement shows the revenues and expenses incurred during the year. The statement of retained earnings explains the change in the reported retained earnings figure for the year. The statement of cash flows indicates how the organization gained cash during this period and how it was used. There is no statement of changes in liabilities, although information about liabilities is available on the balance sheet.

Reporting Revenues and Expenses on an Income Statement

Question: Assume that an individual is analyzing the most recent income statement prepared by a business in hopes of deciding whether to buy its capital stock or, possibly, grant a loan application. Or, perhaps, this person is a current employee who must decide whether to stay with the company or take a job offer from another organization. Regardless of the reason, the decision maker wants to assess the company’s financial health and future prospects. Certainly, all of the available financial statements need to be studied but, initially, this individual is looking at the income statement. What types of financial data will be available on a typical income statement such as might be produced by a business like IBMApplePapa John’s, or Pizza Hut?

 

Answer: The main contents of an income statement are rather straightforward: a listing of all revenues earned and expenses incurred by the reporting organization during the period specified. As indicated previously in Chapter 2 “What Should Decision Makers Know in Order to Make Good Decisions about an Organization?”, revenue figures disclose increases in net assets (assets minus liabilities) that were created by the sale of goods or services. For IBM, revenues are derived from the sale and servicing of computers (a total of $99.9 billion in 2010) while, for Papa John’s International, the reported revenue figure for 2010 (a bit over $1.1 billion) measures the increase in net assets created by the sale of pizzas and related items.

Conversely, expenses are decreases in net assets incurred by a reporting organization in hopes of generating revenues. For example, salaries paid to sales people for the work they have done constitute an expense. The cost of facilities that have been rented is also an expense as is money paid for utilities, such as electricity, heat, and water.

For example, IBM reported selling, general, and administrative expenses during 2010 of $21.8 billion. That was just one category of expenses disclosed within the company’s income statement for this period.Financial information reported by large publicly traded companies tends to be highly aggregated. Thus, the expense figure shown by IBM is a summation of several somewhat related expenses. Those individual balances would be available within the company for internal decision making. During the same year, Papa John’s reported salaries and benefits as an expense for its domestic company-owned restaurants of $137.8 million. Financial accounting focuses on providing useful information about an organization, and both of these figures will help decision makers begin to glimpse a portrait of the underlying business.

Accounting is often said to provide transparency—the ability to see straight through the words and numbers to gain a vision of the actual company and its operations.

Reporting Gains and Losses

Question: Is nothing else presented on an income statement other than revenues and expenses?

 

Answer: An income statement also reports gains and losses for the same period of time. A gain is an increase in the net assets of an organization created by an occurrence that is outside its primary or central operations. A loss is a decrease in net assets from a similar type of incidental event.

When Apple sells or repairs a computer, it reports revenue because that is the sale of a good or service provided by this company. However, if Apple disposes of a piece of land adjacent to a warehouse, a gain is reported (if sold above cost) or a loss (if sold below cost). Selling computers falls within Apple’s primary operations whereas selling land does not.

If Pizza Hut sells a pepperoni pizza, the transaction increases net assets. Revenue has been earned and should be reported. If the company disposes of one of its old ovens, the result is reflected as either a gain or loss. Pizza Hut is not in the business of selling appliances. This classification split between revenues/expenses and gains/losses helps provide decision makers with a clearer portrait of what actually happened during the reporting period.

An example of an income statement for a small convenience store (Davidson Groceries) is shown in Figure 3.1 “Income Statement”. Note that the name of the company, the identity of the statement, and the period of time reflected are apparent. Although this is an illustration, it is quite similar structurally to the income statements created by virtually all business organizations in the United States and most other countries.

Figure 3.1 Income Statement

Test Yourself

Question:

The Bartolini Company has recently issued a set of financial statements. The company owns several restaurants that serve coffee and donuts. Each of the following balances appears in the company’s financial statements. Which was not included in the company’s reported income statement?

  1. Loss from fire in warehouse—$4,000
  2. Rent expense—$13,000
  3. Cash—$9,000
  4. Gain on sale of refrigerator—$1,000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: Cash—$9,000.

Explanation:

Revenues, expenses, gains, and losses all appear in a company’s income statement. Cash is an asset, and assets are shown on the balance sheet.

Cost of Goods Sold and Gross Profit

Question: A review of the sample income statement in Figure 3.1 “Income Statement” raises a number of questions. The meaning of balances such as salary expense, rent expense, advertising expense, and the like are relatively clear. These figures measure specific outflows or decreases in net assets that were incurred in attempting to generate revenue. However, the largest expense reported on this income statement is referred to as cost of goods sold. What does the cost of goods sold figure represent? What information is communicated by this $900,000 balance?

 

Answer: This convenience store generated sales of $1.4 million in Year 2XX4. Customers came in during that period and purchased merchandise for that amount. That is the first step in the sale and is reflected within the revenue balance. The customers then take their goods and leave the store. This merchandise no longer belongs to Davidson Groceries. In this second step, a decrease occurred in the company’s net assets; the goods were removed. Thus, an expense has occurred. As the title implies, “cost of goods sold” (sometimes referred to as “cost of sales”) is an expense reflecting the cost of the merchandise that customers purchased during the period. It is the amount that Davidson paid for inventory items—such as apples, bread, soap, tuna fish, and cheese—that were then sold. In the language of accounting, that is the meaning of “cost of goods sold.”

Note that the timing of expense recognition is not tied to the payment of cash but rather to the loss of the asset. As a simple illustration, assume Davidson Groceries pays $2 in cash for a box of cookies on Monday and then sells it to a customer for $3 on Friday. The income statement will recognize revenue of $3 (the increase in the net assets created by the sale) and cost of goods sold of $2 (the decrease in net assets resulting from the sale). Both the revenue and the related expense are recorded on Friday when the sale took place and the inventory was removed. That is when the change in net assets occurred. ApplePizza Hut, and thousands of other American businesses report the sale of merchandise in this manner because they all follow the same set of rules: U.S. GAAP.

The difference in revenue and cost of goods sold is often referred to as the company’s gross profitDifference between sales and cost of goods sold; also called gross margin or markup.gross marginDifference between sales price and cost of goods sold; also called gross profit or markup., or markupDifference between sales price and cost of goods sold on an item of inventory; also called gross profit or gross margin.. It is one of the reported figures studied carefully by decision makers. If a business buys inventory for $50 or $5,000, how much revenue can be generated by its sale? That difference is the gross profit.

As an example, assume that an investor or creditor is comparing two large home improvement companies: Lowe’s and Home Depot. For the year ended January 28, 2011, Lowe’s reported net sales revenues of $48.8 billion along with cost of goods sold of $31.7 billion. Thus, Lowe’s earned gross profit during that period of $17.1 billion. Sales of merchandise and services ($48.8 billion) exceeded the cost of those goods ($31.7 billion) by that amount. Lowe’s reported a gross profit that was 35.0 percent of sales ($17.1 million/$48.8 million). Thus, on the average, when a customer bought goods at Lowe’s for $100 during this period the markup above cost earned by the company was $35.00 (35.0 percent of $100 sales price). Any decision maker will find such numbers highly informative especially when compared with the company’s prior years or with competing enterprises.

For the year ended January 30, 2011, Home Depot reported net sales of $68.0 billion, cost of sales of $44.7 billion, and gross profit of $23.3 billion. Its gross profit percentage was 34.3 percent ($23.3 million/$68.0 million). On the average, when a customer bought goods at Home Depot for $100 during this period the markup above cost earned by the company was $34.30 (34.3 percent of $100 sales price). Home Depot is clearly a bigger business than Lowe’s, but during this year it earned a slightly smaller profit on each sales dollar than did its competitor.

Such reported information is studied carefully and allows decision makers to compare these two companies and their operations.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Hayes Corporation is a car dealer. A new car is received from the manufacturer during September at a cost of $33,000. This vehicle is sold in October to a customer for $42,000. In connection with this transaction, which of the following statements is correct?

  1. The company will report cost of goods sold of $42,000.
  2. The company will report gross profit of $42,000.
  3. The company will report cost of goods sold of $33,000.
  4. The company will report gross profit of $33,000.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: The company will report cost of goods sold of $33,000.

Explanation:

On the company’s income statement, revenue of $42,000 (the sales price) and cost of goods sold of $33,000 (the cost paid to acquire the inventory) will be reported. Gross profit is the difference in these two figures, or $9,000.

Placement of Income Taxes on an Income Statement

Question: In Figure 3.1 “Income Statement”, revenues and expenses are listed first to arrive at an operating income figure. That is followed by gains and losses. This sequencing is appropriate since revenues and expenses relate to the primary or central operations of the business and gains and losses are created by more incidental events. Why then is income tax expense listed last, by itself, on the bottom of the income statement and not with the other expenses?

 

Answer: State, federal, and international income taxes cost businesses considerable sums of money each year. Exxon Mobil Corp. reported income taxes of $21.6 billion at the bottom of its 2010 income statement. The income tax figure is segregated in this manner because it is not an expense in a traditional sense. As previously described, an expense—like cost of goods sold, advertising, or rent—is incurred in order to generate revenues. Income taxes do not create revenues. Instead, they are caused by a company’s revenues and related profitability.

Because the financial impact is the same as an expense (an outflow or decrease in net assets), “income tax expense” is often used for labeling purposes. A more appropriate title would be something like “income taxes assessed by government.” Because the nature of this “expense” is different, the income tax figure is frequently isolated at the bottom of the income statement, separate from true expenses.

Key Takeaway

Financial information is gathered about an organization, but the resulting figures must then be structured in some usable fashion that can be conveyed to interested decision makers. Financial statements serve this purpose. A typical set of financial statements is made up of an income statement, statement of retained earnings, balance sheet, statement of cash flows, and explanatory notes. The income statement reports revenues from the sale of goods and services as well as expenses such as rent and advertising. Gains and losses that arise from incidental activities are also included on the income statement but separately so that the income generated from primary operations is apparent. Cost of goods sold is an expense that reflects the cost of all inventory items acquired by customers. Income tax expense is reported at the bottom of the income statement because it is actually a government assessment rather than a true expense.

3.2 Reported Profitability and the Impact of Conservatism

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Describe the method used to differentiate assets from expenses.
  2. Discuss the rationale for the practice of conservatism and its effect on financial reporting.
  3. Explain the reason dividend distributions are not reported as expenses within net income.
  4. Discuss the need for decision makers to study an entire set of financial statements rather than focus exclusively on one or two numbers such as net income or gross profit.

Differentiating between an Asset and an Expense

Question: Previously, the term “asset” was defined as a probable future economic benefit owned or controlled by a reporting entity. On an income statement, items such as rent and advertising are listed as expenses. Why are such costs not grouped with the assets on the balance sheet? For example, rent paid for a building could provide a probable future economic benefit but it is included in Figure 3.1 “Income Statement” as an expense. The same is true for advertising. How does an organization determine whether a cost represents an asset or an expense?

 

Answer: Deciding whether a particular cost should be classified as an asset or an expense is not always easy for an accountant. If a business makes a $10,000 rent payment, an expense might have been incurred because an outflow of an asset (cash) has taken place. However, the cost of this rent could also be reported as an asset if it provides probable future economic benefit.

A cost is identified as an asset if the benefit clearly has value in generating future revenues whereas an expense is a cost that has already helped earn revenues in the past. With an asset, the utility associated with a cost is yet to be consumed completely. With an expense, the utility has already been consumed. To illustrate, assume that on December 31, Year One, a business pays $10,000 for rent on a building that was used during the previous month as a retail outlet. The benefit gained from occupying that space has already occurred. Use of the building helped the business make sales during December. The reduction in net assets to pay for the rent is reflected on the income statement as a rent expense. The benefit is in the past.

If on that same day, another $10,000 is paid to rent this building again during the upcoming month of January Year Two, the acquired benefit relates directly to the future. The building will be occupied in January in hopes of creating additional revenue. Until consumed, this second cost is shown as a $10,000 asset (referred to as “prepaid rent”).

  • Expense. A cost that helped a business generate revenue in the past.
  • Asset. A cost expected to help generate additional revenue in the future.

When a cost is incurred, the accountant must investigate its purpose to determine when the related benefit is expected. This timing—as guided by U.S. GAAP or IFRS—indicates whether an asset should be recognized or an expense.

Test Yourself

Question:

In a set of financial statements, a company reports an account balance of $19,000 labeled as “prepaid insurance.” Which of the following is not true in connection with this account?

  1. The account appears on the company’s income statement.
  2. The money was paid in the past but will provide benefit in the future.
  3. The account is an asset.
  4. The cost is expected to help generate future revenue.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: The account appears on the company’s income statement.

Explanation:

The account title implies a benefit to the company in the future. A payment has been made for insurance coverage on assets such as buildings and equipment over the next few months or years. Because the benefits are yet to be derived, this cost cannot be reported on the income statement; rather, it must be reported as an asset on the balance sheet.

Conservatism in Financial Accounting

Question: A business or other organization can face many complicated situations. Determining fair presentation is often not easy. For example, at times, the decision whether a cost will generate revenue in the future (and be reported as an asset) or has already helped create revenue in the past (and is, thus, an expense) is difficult. When an accountant encounters a case that is “too close to call,” what reporting is appropriate? To illustrate, assume that a business agrees to pay $24,000 but corporate officials cannot ascertain the amount of the related benefit that has already occurred versus the amount that will take place in the future. When clear delineation of a cost between asset and expense appears to be impossible, what reporting is made?

 

Answer: Working as an accountant is a relatively easy job when financial events are distinct and easily understood. Unfortunately, in real life, situations often arise where two or more outcomes seem equally likely. The distinction raised in this question between an asset and an expense is simply one of numerous possibilities where multiple portraits could be envisioned. At such times, financial accounting has a long history of following the practice of conservatismPreference of accountants to avoid making an organization look overly good; when faced with multiple reporting options that are equally likely, the worse possible outcome is reported to help protect the decision maker from information that is too optimistic..

The conservative nature of accounting influences many elements of U.S. GAAP and must be understood in order to appreciate the meaning of financial information conveyed about an organization. Simply put, conservatism holds that whenever an accountant faces two or more equally likely possibilities, the one that makes the reporting company look worse should be selected. In other words, financial accounting attempts to ensure that an organization never looks significantly better than it actually is.

Differentiating between an asset and an expense provides a perfect illustration of conservatism. If a cost is incurred that might have either a future value (an asset) or a past value (an expense), the accountant always reports the most likely possibility. That is the only appropriate way to paint a portrait of an organization that is the fairest representation. However, if neither scenario appears more likely to occur, the cost is classified as an expense rather than an asset because of conservatism. Reporting a past benefit rather than a future benefit has a detrimental impact on the company’s appearance to a decision maker. This handling reduces reported income as well as the amount shown as the total of the assets.

Conservatism can be seen throughout financial accounting. When the chance of two possibilities is the same, accounting prefers that the more optimistic approach be avoided.

The Reason for Conservatism

Question: Why does conservatism exist in financial accounting? Every organization must want to look as successful as possible. Why does a bias exist for reporting outcomes in a negative way?

 

Answer: Accountants are well aware that the financial statements they produce are relied on by decision makers around the world to determine future actions that will place significant amounts of money at risk. For example, if a company appears to be prosperous, an investor might decide to allocate scarce cash resources to obtain shares of its capital stock. Similarly, a creditor is more willing to make a loan to a business that seems to be doing well economically.

Such decision makers face potential losses that can be substantial. Accountants take their role in this process quite seriously. As a result, financial accounting has traditionally held that the users of financial statements are best protected if the reporting process is never overly optimistic in picturing an organization’s financial health and future prospects. Money is less likely to be lost if the accountant paints a portrait that is no more rosy than necessary. The practice of conservatism is simply an attempt by financial accounting to help safeguard the public.

The problem that can occur when a business appears excessively profitable can be seen in the downfall of WorldCom where investors and creditors lost billions of dollars. A major cause of this accounting scandal, one of the biggest in history, was the fraudulent decision by members of the company’s management to record a cost of nearly $4 billion as an asset rather than as an expense. Although any future benefit resulting from those expenditures was highly doubtful, the cost was reported to outsiders as an asset. Conservatism was clearly not followed.

Consequently, in its financial statements, WorldCom appeared to have $4 billion more in assets and be that much more profitable than was actually true. At the same time that its two chief rivals were reporting declines, WorldCom seemed to be prospering. Investors and creditors risked incredible amounts of their money based on the incorrect information they had received. Later, in 2002, when the misstatement was uncovered, the stock price plummeted, and WorldCom went bankrupt. Conservatism is designed to help prevent such unnecessary losses. If no outcome is viewed as most likely, the accountant should always work to prevent an overly optimistic picture of the reporting entity and its financial health.

Test Yourself

Question:

Which of the following is not an example of the effect of the practice of conservatism?

  1. A company has revenue, but the revenue is not reported because of some uncertainty.
  2. A company has a liability, but the liability is not reported because of some uncertainty.
  3. A company has an asset, but the asset is not reported because of some uncertainty.
  4. A company has a cost that is reported as expense because of an uncertainty about the future benefit.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: A company has a liability, but the liability is not reported because of some uncertainty.

Explanation:

The practice of conservatism holds that when outcomes are equally likely, the option that makes the reporting entity look worse should be reported. Delaying the revenue in A and the asset in C are both examples of conservative reporting. Recognizing an expense in D rather than an asset also reduces reported income and total assets. However, delaying the reporting of the liability in B improves the way the company’s financial position appears. Reporting fewer debts makes the company look better.

Reporting Dividend Distributions

Question: Previously, the term “dividends” was introduced and discussed. Dividend distributions made to owners reduce the net assets held by an organization. In Figure 3.1 “Income Statement”, a number of expenses are listed, but no dividends are mentioned. Why are dividend payments not included as expenses of a corporation on its income statement?

 

Answer: Dividends are not expenses and, therefore, are omitted in preparing an income statement. Such distributions obviously reduce the amount of net assets owned or controlled by a company. However, they are not related in any way to generating revenues. A dividend is a reward paid by a corporation (through the decision of its board of directors) to the owners of its capital stock. A dividend is a sharing of profits and not a cost incurred to create revenue.

In Figure 3.1 “Income Statement”, Davidson Groceries reports net income for the year of $230,000. The board of directors might look at that figure and opt to make a cash dividend distribution to company owners. That is one of the most important decisions for any board. Such payments usually please the owners but reduce the size of the company and—possibly—its future profitability.

An income statement reports revenues, expenses, gains, and losses. Dividend distributions do not qualify and must be reported elsewhere in the company’s financial statements.

Test Yourself

Question:

A company has the following reported balances at the end of the current year: revenues—$100,000, rent expense—$40,000, dividends paid—$12,000, loss on sale of truck—$2,000, salary expense—$19,000, gain on sale of land—$9,000, and prepaid insurance—$8,000. What should be reported by this company as its net income for the year?

  1. $28,000
  2. $36,000
  3. $40,000
  4. $48,000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: $48,000.

Explanation:

Net income is made up of revenues ($100,000) less expenses ($40,000 plus $19,000, or $59,000) plus gains ($9,000) less losses ($2,000), or $48,000. Dividends paid is not an expense, and prepaid insurance is an asset.

The Significance of Reported Net Income

Question: The final figure presented on the income statement is net income. This balance reflects the growth in an organization’s net assets during the period resulting from all revenues, expenses, gains, and losses. More specifically, it is the revenues and gains less the expenses and losses. For example, in 2010, the income statement reported by the Kellogg Company indicated that the size of that company’s net assets grew in that one year by $1.24 billion as a result of net income (revenues and gains less expenses and losses). In evaluating the operations of any business, this figure seems to be incredibly significant. It reflects the profitability for the period. Is net income the most important number to be found in a set of financial statements?

 

Answer: The net income figure reported for any business is an eagerly anticipated and carefully analyzed piece of financial information. It is the most discussed number disclosed by virtually any company. It is reported in newspapers and television, on the Internet and the radio.

However, financial statements present a vast array of data and the importance of any one balance should never be overemphasized. A portrait painted by an artist is not judged solely by the small section displaying the model’s ear or mouth but rather by the representation made of the entire person. Likewise, only the analysis of all information conveyed by a set of financial statements enables an interested party to arrive at the most appropriate decisions about an organization.

Some creditors and investors seek shortcuts when making business decisions rather than doing the detailed analysis that is appropriate. Those individuals often spend an exorbitant amount of time focusing on reported net income. Such a narrow view shows a fundamental misunderstanding of financial reporting and the depth and breadth of the information being conveyed. In judging a company’s financial health and future prospects, an evaluation should be carried out on the entity as a whole. Predicting stock prices, dividends, and cash flows requires a complete investigation. That is only possible by developing the capacity to work with all the data presented in a set of financial statements. If a single figure such as net income could be used reliably to evaluate a business organization, creditors and investors would never incur losses.

Key Takeaway

Conservatism is an often misunderstood term in financial reporting. Despite a reputation to the contrary, financial accounting is not radically conservative. However, when two reporting options are equally likely, the one that makes the company look best is avoided. The portrait that results is less likely to be overly optimistic. In this way, decision makers are protected. Their chance of incurring losses is reduced. For example, expenses refer to costs that helped generate revenue in the past while assets reflect costs that provide future economic benefits. If the timing of these benefits cannot be ascertained, the cost should be recognized as an expense. This assignment reduces both reported income and total assets. The resulting net income figure (revenues and gains less expenses and losses) is useful in evaluating the financial health and prospects of a company but no single figure should be the sole source of information for a decision maker. Dividend distributions are not included in this computation of net income because they reflect a sharing of profits with owners and not a cost incurred to generate revenue.

3.3 Increasing the Net Assets of a Company

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Define “retained earnings” and explain its composition.
  2. Define “capital stock” and explain the meaning of its reported account balance.
  3. Explain the lack of financial impact that the exchange of ownership shares between investors has on a corporation.

The Meaning of Retained Earnings

Question: The second financial statement is known as the statement of retained earnings.As indicated earlier, many businesses actually report a broader statement of changes in stockholders’ equity. At this initial point in the coverage, focusing solely on retained earnings makes the learning process easier. The term retained earnings has not yet been introduced. What information does a retained earnings balance communicate to an outside decision maker? For example, on May 1, 2010, Barnes & Noble reported retained earnings of aproximately $681.1 million, one of the largest amounts found in the company’s financial statements. What does that figure tell decision makers about this bookstore chain?

 

Answer: The retained earnings account (sometimes referred to as “reinvested earnings”) is one of the most misunderstood figures in all of financial reporting. As shown in Figure 3.2, this balance is the total amount of all net income earned by a business since it first began operations, less all dividends paid to stockholders during that same period of time. Retained earnings is a measure of the profits left in a business throughout its existence to create growth. For an organization like The Coca-Cola Company with a long history of profitability, much of its enormous expansion over the years has come from its own operations. That growth is reflected by the retained earnings balance, which is $49.2 billion for Coca-Cola as of December 31, 2010.

Figure 3.2

When a business earns income, it becomes larger because net assets have increased. Even if a portion of the profits is distributed to shareholders as a dividend, the company has grown in size as a result of its own operations. The retained earnings figure informs decision makers of the amount of that internally generated expansion. This reported balance answers the question: How much of the company’s net assets have been derived from operations during its life?

If a company reports an annual net income of $10,000 and then pays a $2,000 dividend to its owners each year, it is growing in size at the rate of $8,000 per year. After four years, for example, $32,000 ($8,000 × four years) of its net assets will have been generated by its own operating activities. That information is communicated through the retained earnings balance.

As of May 1, 2010, Barnes & Noble reported total assets of $3.7 billion and liabilities of $2.8 billion. Thus, the company had net assets of $900 million. Assets exceeded liabilities by that amount. Those additional assets did not appear by magic. They had to come from some source. One of the primary ways to increase the net assets of a business is through profitable operations. The balance for retained earnings shown by Barnes & Noble lets decision makers know that approximately $681 million of its net assets were generated by the total net income earned since the company’s inception, after all dividend distributions to shareholders were subtracted.

Test Yourself

Question:

On January 1, Year One, the Green River Company was started when owners contributed $100,000 cash to start operations. During the first year, the company earned a reported net income of $23,000 and paid a $2,000 dividend. During the second year, the company earned another $31,000 and paid a $5,000 dividend. What is reported on the company’s balance sheet as the total retained earnings at the end of Year Two?

  1. $47,000
  2. $54,000
  3. $147,000
  4. $154,000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: $47,000.

Explanation:

Retained earnings are a measure of a company’s growth in net assets because of its operations. Since its beginning, Green River made a total profit of $54,000 ($23,000 plus $31,000) and paid a total dividend of $7,000 ($2,000 plus $5,000). As a result, net assets rose by $47,000 ($54,000 less $7,000). This balance is reported as retained earnings. The increase from the money the owners put into the business is known as contributed capital (or capital stock), which is a separately reported figure.

The Reporting of Retained Earnings

Question: In Figure 3.2, Davidson Groceries calculated its net income for 2XX4 as $230,000. Assume that this company began operations on January 1, 2XX1, and reported the balances shown in Figure 3.3 over the years:

Figure 3.3

How is the growth of this company’s net assets reported? What is the structure of the statement of retained earnings as it appears within a set of financial statements?

 

Answer: In the three prior years of its existence, Davidson Groceries’ net assets increased by $320,000 as a result of operating activities. As can be seen in Figure 3.3, the company generated total profit during this earlier period of $530,000 while distributing dividends to shareholders of $210,000, a net increase of $320,000. During the current year (2XX4), net assets continued to rise as Davidson Groceries made an additional profit (see also Figure 3.1 “Income Statement”) of $230,000 but distributed another $100,000 in dividends. Thus, the net assets of Davidson Groceries increased in 2XX4 by $130,000 ($230,000 less $100,000) as a result of business operations. For all four years combined, net assets went up by $450,000 ($320,000 + $130,000), all net income for these years minus all dividends.

Figure 3.4 “Statement of Retained Earnings” shows the format by which this retained earnings information is conveyed to the decision makers who are evaluating Davidson Groceries. As can be seen here, this structure first presents the previous growth in net assets ($320,000) followed by the net income ($230,000) and dividends ($100,000) for just the current year.

Figure 3.4 Statement of Retained Earnings

Test Yourself

Question:

The London Corporation has just produced a set of financial statements at the end of its fifth year of operations. On its balance sheet, it shows assets of $700,000 and liabilities of $200,000. The retained earnings balance within stockholders’ equity is $100,000. Net income for the current year was reported as $90,000 with dividends of $50,000 distributed to the company’s owners. Which of the following statements is true?

  1. The company’s net income for the previous four years can be determined from this information.
  2. The company’s dividend payments for the previous four years can be determined from this information.
  3. The company’s retained earnings balance at the beginning of its fifth year was $10,000.
  4. Total income less dividends paid during the previous four years was $60,000.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: Total income less dividends paid during the previous four years was $60,000.

Explanation:

Retained earnings at the end of the fifth year was reported as $100,000. Of that, $40,000 is the growth in net assets during the current year from net income ($90,000) less dividends ($50,000). Retained earnings at the beginning of the year must have been $60,000 ($100,000 total less $40,000 increase). That represents the growth in net assets in all prior years from net income less dividends. The exact amount of income during this earlier period or the total dividends cannot be derived, only the net figure.

Assets Contributed to Gain Ownership Shares

Question: In the information provided, Barnes & Noble reported holding net assets of $900 million, but only $681 million of that amount was generated through operations as shown by the retained earnings balance. That raises an obvious question: How did Barnes & Noble get the rest of its net assets? Clearly, additional sources must have enabled the company to attain the $900 million reported total. Increases in net assets are not the result of magic or miracles. Other than through operations, how does a company derive net assets?

 

Answer: Beyond operations (as reflected by the retained earnings balance), a business accumulates net assets by receiving contributions from investors who become owners through the acquisition of capital stock.Other events can also impact the reported total of a company’s net assets. They will be discussed in other chapters. The two sources described here—capital stock and retained earnings—are shown by all corporations and are normally significantly large amounts. This is the other major method that an organization like Barnes & Noble uses to gather millions in net assets. In financial statements, the measure of this inflow is usually labeled something like capital stockOwnership (equity) shares of stock in a corporation that are issued to raise monetary financing for capital expenditures and operations.common stockA type of capital stock that is issued by every corporation; it provides rights to the owner that are specified by the laws of the state in which the organization is incorporated., or contributed capitalAmounts invested in a corporation by individuals or groups in order to attain ownership interests; balance indicates the amount of the corporation’s net assets that came directly from the owners.. Regardless of the exact title, the reported amount indicates the portion of the net assets that came into the business directly from stockholders who made the contribution to obtain an ownership interest.

The amount of a company’s net assets is the excess of its assets over its liabilities. For most businesses, two accounting balances indicate the primary sources of those net assets.

  • Capital stock (or contributed capital). This is the amount invested in the business by individuals and groups in order to become owners. For example, as of September 25, 2010, Apple Inc. reported assets of $75 billion and liabilities of $27 billion. Thus, the company was holding $48 billion in net assets ($75 billion less $27 billion). How did Apple get that amount of net assets? That is a question that should interest virtually any investor or creditor analyzing this business. A reported capital stock balance of nearly $11 billion shows that this portion of the $48 billion came from owners contributing assets in order to purchase shares of the company’s stock directly from Apple.
  • Retained earningsAccumulated total of the net income earned by an organization during its existence in excess of dividends distributed to the owners; indicates the amount of the net assets currently held that came from operations over the life of the organization.. This figure is the total net income earned by the organization over its life less amounts distributed as dividends to owners. On September 25, 2010, Apple Inc. reported a retained earnings balance of approximately $37 billion (see Figure 3.5 “Apple Inc.”). A growth in net assets of that amount resulted from the operating activities since the day Apple first got started.

Figure 3.5 Apple Inc.

These numbers reconcile because the total amount of net assets ($48 billion) must have a source of the same amount ($48 billion).

The Trading of Shares of Capital Stock

Question: A corporation issues (sells) ownership shares to investors to raise money. The source of the resulting inflow of assets into the business is reflected in financial accounting by the reporting of a capital stock (or contributed capital) balance. Thus, over its life, Apple has received assets of $11 billion in exchange for shares of capital stock. Does a company receive money when its shares are sold each day on the New York Stock Exchange, NASDAQ (National Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotations), or other stock exchanges?

 

Answer: No, purchases and sales on stock markets normally occur between two investors and not directly with the company. Only the initial issuance of the ownership shares to a stockholder creates the inflow of assets reported by a capital stock or contributed capital account.

To illustrate, assume that Investor A buys one thousand shares of capital stock shares directly from Business B for $179,000 in cash. This transaction increases the net assets of Business B by that amount. The source of the increase is communicated to decision makers by adding $179,000 to the capital stock balance reported by the company. Business B is bigger by $179,000, and the capital stock account provides information about that growth.

Subsequently, these shares may be exchanged between investors numerous times without any additional financial impact on Business B. For example, assume Investor A later sells the 1,000 shares to Investor Z for $200,000 using a stock market such as the New York Stock Exchange. Investor A earns a $21,000 gain ($200,000 received less $179,000 cost), and Investor Z has replaced Investor A as an owner of Business B. However, the financial condition of the company has not been affected by this new exchange. Business B did not receive anything. From its perspective, nothing happened except for a change in the identity of an owner. Thus, a corporation’s capital stock balance only measures the initial investment contributed directly to the business.

Key Takeaway

The source of a company’s net assets (assets minus liabilities) is of interest to outside decision makers. The reported retained earnings figure indicates the amount of these net assets that came from the operations of the company. This growth in size was internally generated. The reported retained earnings balance is all the net income earned since operations began less all dividend distributions. Net assets can also be derived from contributions made by parties seeking to become owners. The capital stock (or contributed capital) balance measures this source of net assets. There is no reported impact unless these assets go directly from the owners to the company. Hence, exchanges between investors using a stock exchange do not affect a business’s net assets or its financial reporting.

3.4 Reporting a Balance Sheet and a Statement of Cash Flows

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. List the types of accounts presented on a balance sheet.
  2. Explain the difference between current assets and liabilities and noncurrent assets and liabilities.
  3. Calculate working capital and the current ratio.
  4. Provide the reason for a balance sheet to always balance.
  5. Identify the three sections of a statement of cash flows and explain the types of events included in each.

Information Reported on a Balance Sheet

Question: The third financial statement is the balance sheet. If a decision maker studies a company’s balance sheet (on its Web site, for example), what information can be discovered?

 

Answer: The primary purpose of a balance sheet is to report a company’s assets and liabilities at a particular point in time. The format is quite simple. All assets are listed first—usually in order of liquidityLiquidity refers to the ease with which assets can be converted into cash. Thus, cash is normally reported first followed by investments in stock that are expected to be sold soon, accounts receivable, inventory, and so on.—followed by all liabilities. A portrait is provided of each future economic benefit owned or controlled by the company (its assets) as well as its debts (liabilities).

Figure 3.6 Balance SheetAs will be discussed in detail later in this textbook, noncurrent assets such as buildings and equipment are initially recorded at cost. This figure is then systematically reduced as the amount is moved gradually each period into an expense account over the life of the asset. Thus, balance sheet figures for these accounts are reported as “net” to show that only a portion of the original cost still remains recorded as an asset. This shift of the cost from asset to expense is known as depreciation and mirrors the using up of the utility of the property.

A typical balance sheet is reported in Figure 3.6 “Balance Sheet” for Davidson Groceries. Note that the assets are divided between current (those expected to be used or consumed within the following year) and noncurrent (those expected to remain with Davidson for longer than a year). Likewise, liabilities are split between current (to be paid during the upcoming year) and noncurrent (not to be paid until after the next year). This labeling is common and aids financial analysis. Davidson Groceries’ current liabilities ($57,000) can be subtracted from its current assets ($161,000) to arrive at a figure often studied by interested parties known as working capitalFormula measuring an organization’s liquidity (the ability to pay debts as they come due); calculated by subtracting current liabilities from current assets. ($104,000 in this example). It reflects short-term financial strength, the ability of a business or other organization to generate sufficient cash to pay debts as they come due.

Current assets can also be divided by current liabilities ($161,000/$57,000) to determine the company’s current ratioFormula measuring an organization’s liquidity (the ability to pay debts as they come due); calculated by dividing current assets by current liabilities. (2.82 to 1.00), another figure calculated by many decision makers as a useful measure of short-term operating strength.

The balance sheet shows the company’s financial condition on one specific date. All of the other financial statements report events occurring over a period of time (often a year or a quarter). However, the balance sheet discloses all assets and liabilities as of the one specified point in time.

Test Yourself

Question:

Which of the following statements is true?

  1. Rent payable appears on a company’s income statement.
  2. Capital stock appears on a company’s balance sheet.
  3. Gain on the sale of equipment appears on a company’s balance sheet.
  4. Accounts receivable appears on a company’s income statement.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: Capital stock appears on a company’s balance sheet.

Explanation:

Assets and liabilities such as accounts receivable and rent payable are shown on a company’s balance sheet at a particular point in time. Revenues, expenses, gains, and losses are shown on an income statement for a specified period of time. Capital stock, a measure of the amount of net assets put into the business by its owners, is reported within stockholders’ equity on the balance sheet.

The Accounting Equation

Question: Considerable information is included on the balance sheet presented in Figure 3.6 “Balance Sheet”. Assets such as cash, inventory, and land provide future economic benefits for the reporting entity. Liabilities for salaries, insurance, and the like reflect debts that are owed at the end of the fiscal period. The $179,000 capital stock figure indicates the amount of assets that the original owners contributed to the business. The retained earnings balance of $450,000 was computed earlier in Figure 3.4 “Statement of Retained Earnings” and identifies the portion of the net assets generated by the company’s own operations over the years. For convenience, a general term such as “stockholders’ equity” or “shareholders’ equity” usually encompasses the capital stock and the retained earnings balances.

Why does the balance sheet balance? This agreement cannot be an accident. The asset total of $1,206,000 is exactly the same as the liabilities ($577,000) plus the two stockholders’ equity accounts ($629,000—the total of capital stock and retained earnings). Thus, assets equal liabilities plus stockholders’ equity. What creates this monetary equilibrium?

 

Answer: The balance sheet will always balance unless a mistake is made. This is known as the accounting equationAssets = liabilities + stockholders’ equity. The equation balances because all assets must have a source: a liability, a contribution from an owner (contributed capital), or from operations (retained earnings)..

Accounting Equation (Version 1):

assets = liabilities + stockholders’ equity.

Or, if the stockholders’ equity account is broken down into its component parts:

Accounting Equation (Version 2):

assets = liabilities + capital stock + retained earnings.

As discussed previously, this equation stays in balance for one simple reason: assets must have a source. If a business or other organization has an increase in its total assets, that change can only be caused by (a) an increase in liabilities such as money being borrowed, (b) an increase in capital stock such as additional money being contributed by stockholders, or (c) an increase created by operations such as a sale that generates a rise in net income. No other increases occur.

One way to understand the accounting equation is that the left side (the assets) presents a picture of the future economic benefits that the reporting company holds. The right side provides information to show how those assets were derived (from liabilities, from investors, or from operations). Because no assets are held by a company without a source, the equation (and, hence, the balance sheet) must balance.

Accounting Equation (Version 3):

assets = the total source of those assets.

The Statement of Cash Flows

Question: The fourth and final financial statement is the statement of cash flows. Cash is so important to an organization and its financial health that a complete statement is devoted to presenting the changes that took place in this one asset. As can be inferred from the title, this statement provides a portrait of the various ways the reporting company generated cash during the year and the uses that were made of it. How is the statement of cash flows structured?

 

Answer: Decision makers place considerable emphasis on a company’s ability to generate significant cash inflows and then make wise use of that money. Figure 3.7 “Statement of Cash Flows” presents an example of that information in a statement of cash flows for Davidson Groceries for the year ended December 31, 2XX4. Note that all the cash changes are divided into three specific sections:

  • Operating activitiesA statement of cash flow category relating to cash receipts and disbursements arising from the primary activities of the organization.
  • Investing activitiesA statement of cash flow category relating to cash receipts and disbursements arising from an asset transaction other than one related to the primary activities of the organization.
  • Financing activitiesA statement of cash flow category relating to cash receipts and disbursements arising from a liability or stockholders’ equity transaction other than one related to the primary activities of the organization.

Figure 3.7 Statement of Cash FlowsThe cash flows resulting from operating activities are being shown here using the direct method, an approach recommended by the FASB. This format shows the actual amount of cash flows created by individual operating activities such as sales to customers and purchases of inventory. In the business world, an alternative known as the indirect method is more commonly encountered. This indirect method will be demonstrated in detail in Chapter 17 “In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed by the Statement of Cash Flows?”.

Classification of Cash Flows

Question: In studying the statement of cash flows, a company’s individual cash flows relating to selling inventory, advertising, selling land, buying a building, paying dividends and the like can be readily understood. For example, when the statement indicates that $120,000 was the “cash received from bank on a loan,” a decision maker should have a clear picture of what happened. There is no mystery.

All cash flows are divided into one of the three categories:

  1. Operating activities
  2. Investing activities
  3. Financing activities

How are these distinctions drawn? On a statement of cash flows, what is the difference in an operating activity, an investing activity, and a financing activity?

 

Answer: Cash flows listed as the result of operating activities relate to receipts and disbursements that arose in connection with the central activity of the organization. For Davidson Groceries, these cash changes were created by daily operations and include selling goods to customers, buying merchandise, paying salaries to employees, and the like. This section of the statement shows how much cash the primary business function generated during this period of time, a figure that is watched closely by virtually all financial analysts. Ultimately, a business is only worth the cash that it can create from its normal operations.

Investing activities report cash flows created by events that (1) are separate from the central or daily operations of the business and (2) involve an asset. Thus, the amount of cash collected when either equipment or land is sold is reported within this section. A convenience store does not participate in such transactions as a regular part of operations and both deal with an asset. Cash paid to buy a building or machinery will also be disclosed in this same category. Such purchases do not happen on a daily operating basis and an asset is involved.

Like investing activities, the third section of this statement—cash flows from financing activities—is unrelated to daily business operations but, here, the transactions relate to either a liability or a stockholders’ equity balance. Borrowing money from a bank meets these criteria as does distributing a dividend to shareholders. Issuing stock to new owners for cash is another financing activity as is payment of a noncurrent liability.

Any decision maker can study the cash flows of a business within these three separate sections to receive a picture of how company officials managed to generate cash during the period and what use was made of it.

Test Yourself

Question:

In reviewing a statement of cash flows, which one of the following statements is not true?

  1. Cash paid for rent is reported as an operating activity.
  2. Cash contributed to the business by an owner is an investing activity.
  3. Cash paid on a long-term note payable is a financing activity.
  4. Cash received from the sale of inventory is an operating activity.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: Cash contributed to the business by an owner is an investing activity.

Explanation:

Cash transactions such as the payment of rent or the sale of inventory that are incurred as part of daily operations are included within operating activities. Events that do not take place as part of daily operations are either investing or financing activities. Investing activities are carried out in connection with an asset such as a building or land. Financing activities impact either a liability (such as a note payable) or a stockholders’ equity account (such as contributed capital).

Key Takeaway

The balance sheet is the only one of the four financial statements that is created for a specific point in time. It reports the company’s assets as well as the source of those assets: liabilities, capital stock, and retained earnings. Assets and liabilities are divided between current and noncurrent. This classification system permits the reporting company’s working capital and current ratio to be computed for analysis purposes. The statement of cash flows explains how the cash balance changed during the year. All cash transactions are classified as falling within operating activities (daily activities), investing activities (nonoperating activities that affect an asset), or financing activities (nonoperating activities that affect either a liability or a stockholders’ equity account).

Talking with a Real Investing Pro (Continued)

Following is a continuation of our interview with Kevin G. Burns.

 

Question: Warren Buffett is one of the most celebrated investors in history and ranks high on any list of the richest people in the world. When asked how he became so successful at investing, Buffett answered quite simply: “We read hundreds and hundreds of annual reports every year.”See http://www.minterest.com/warren-buffet-quotes-quotations-on-investing/.

Annual reports, as you well know, are the documents that companies produce each year containing their latest financial statements. You are an investor yourself, one who provides expert investment analysis for your clients. What is your opinion of Mr. Buffett’s advice?

Kevin Burns: Warren Buffet—who is much richer and smarter than I am—is correct about the importance of annual reports. Once you get past the artwork and the slick photographs and into the “meat” of these reports, the financial statements are a treasure trove of information. Are sales going up or down? Are expenses (such as cost of goods sold) increasing or decreasing as a percentage of sales? Is the company making money? How much cash is the business generating? How are the officers compensated? Do they own stock in the company?

I actually worry when there are too many pages of notes. I prefer companies that don’t need so many pages to explain what is happening. I like companies that are able to keep their operations simple. Certainly, a great amount of important information can be gleaned from a careful study of the financial statements in any company’s annual report.

One of the great things about our current state of technology is that an investor can find a company’s annual report on the Internet in a matter of seconds. You can download information provided by two or three companies and make instant comparisons. That is so helpful for analysis purposes.

3.5 End-of-Chapter Exercises

Questions

  1. Why do businesses produce financial statements?
  2. What are the four financial statements that are typically prepared and distributed by a business or other organization?
  3. What is the purpose of the notes that are attached to financial statements?
  4. On which financial statement are revenues and expenses reported?
  5. How does a gain differ from a revenue?
  6. What is a loss?
  7. The Bestron Corporation has a loss of $32,000 and an expense of $74,000. How does a loss differ from an expense?
  8. In producing an income statement, why are revenues and expenses reported separately from gains and losses?
  9. What three pieces of information are typically listed at the top of a financial statement?
  10. Define “cost of goods sold.”
  11. The Amherst Company reported a “gross profit” of $743,800. What is the meaning of this term?
  12. The Algernon Corporation incurs a cost of $327,000. The company’s accountant is now trying to decide whether to report this balance as an asset or an expense. How do companies determine if a cost is an expense or an asset?
  13. From an accounting perspective, define “conservatism.”
  14. A company has experienced a situation where it is going to incur a loss. Officials believe the chances are 60 percent that the loss will be $13,000. However, there is also a 40 percent chance that the loss might be $98,000. What reporting should be made?
  15. Explain why dividends are not reported on the income statement.
  16. What are retained earnings?
  17. A business has been in operation for nine years and is now reporting a retained earnings balance of $127,000. What makes up that figure?
  18. The Olson Company reports a $116,000 figure that is labeled “capital stock” on its balance sheet. What information is being communicated?
  19. On which financial statement would assets and liabilities be reported?
  20. What differentiates a current asset from a noncurrent asset?
  21. What is the accounting equation, and explain why it is true.
  22. What are the three categories of cash flows that are reported on the statement of cash flow?
  23. On its statement of cash flows, the Jackson Company reported a total cash inflow of $226,000 from operating activities. It also reported a cash outflow of $142,000 from investing activities and a cash inflow of $34,000 from financing activities. How do operating, investing, and financing cash flows differ from one another?

True or False

  1. ____ The income statement reports a company’s revenues and expenses for one particular day of the year.
  2. ____ An increase in the net assets of a business that results from the sale of inventory is reported as a gain.
  3. ____ A business reports a retained earnings balance of $156,000. This figure represents the monetary amounts contributed to the business by its owners.
  4. ____ Assets and liabilities can be broken down into the categories of current and noncurrent.
  5. ____ Income tax expense is typically reported separately from other expenses.
  6. ____ Conservatism helps reporting companies look better to potential investors.
  7. ____ The dividends paid balance is reported on the balance sheet.
  8. ____ Companies receive money each time their stock is sold on a stock exchange such as the New York Stock Exchange.
  9. ____ A balance sheet must always balance.
  10. ____ The statement of cash flows is broken up into operating, investing, and financing activities.
  11. ____ If a business reports current assets of $300,000 and current liabilities of $200,000, it has working capital of $500,000.
  12. ____ Sales revenue less cost of goods sold is referred to as net income.
  13. ____ A gain is the amount of net income earned by a company over its life less any dividends it has paid.
  14. ____ The purpose of the balance sheet is to report the assets and liabilities of a company on a specific date.
  15. ____ The accounting equation identifies how retained earnings are calculated.
  16. ____ If a company has a possible loss, conservatism requires that this loss must always be reported.
  17. ____ A company buys merchandise for $175,000 and sells it to various customers for $240,000. The gross profit is $65,000.
  18. _____The Bagranoff Company has a current ratio of 3:1. The company collects a $20,000 accounts receivable. The current ratio will rise as a result of this collection.
  19. _____ The Clikeman Company has been in business for several years. The company starts the current year with net assets of $300,000 and ends the year with net assets of $430,000. For the current year, the company’s net income less its dividends must have been $130,000.
  20. _____ The Richmond Company has been in business for five years and now reports contributed capital as $310,000. This figure means that the owners put $310,000 worth of assets (probably cash) into the business five years ago when it was created.
  21. ______ A company needs money to build a new warehouse. Near the end of the current year (Year One), the company borrows $900,000 in cash from a bank on a ten-year loan. The company does not start the construction project until the next year (Year Two). On a statement of cash flows for Year One, a cash inflow of $900,000 should be reported as a financing activity.
  22. ______ Near the end of the current year, a company spent $27,000 in cash on a project that the accountant believed had future economic benefit. The accountant reported it in that manner. In truth, the project only had past economic benefit. The company went on to report net income of $200,000 for the current year along with total assets of $800,000. The company should have reported net income of $227,000 for the year and total assets of $773,000.
  23. ______ Assume the Albemarle Company buys inventory for $9,000. It pays 60 percent immediately and will pay the rest next year. The company then spends $900 in cash on advertising in order to sell 70 percent of the inventory for $14,000. Of that amount, it collects 80 percent immediately and will collect the remainder next year. The company pays a cash dividend this year of $2,000. As a result of just the operating activities, the company will report that its cash increased by $4,900 during the period.
  24. ______ A company is being sued because a product it made has apparently injured a few people. The company believes that it will win the lawsuit, but there is uncertainty. There is some chance (a 33 percent chance) that the company might lose $20,000. To arrive at fairly presented financial statements in connection with this uncertainty, this lawsuit should be reported on the income statement of this year as a $6,600 loss.
  25. ______ A company has the following account balances: revenues—$120,000, salary payable—$7,000, cost of goods sold—$50,000, dividends paid—$3,000, rent expense—$12,000, gain on sale of land—$4,000, accounts receivable—$13,000, cash—$15,000, and advertising expense—$8,000. Reported net income for the period is $54,000.
  26. ______ A company gets $10,000 cash from its owners when it is started at the beginning of Year One. It gets another $15,000 from a bank loan. Revenues for that year were $70,000, expenses were $39,000, and dividends paid to the owners were $3,000. The retained earnings balance at the start of Year Two was $38,000.
  27. ______ The Watson Corporation reported net income of $334,000. During the year, a $10,000 expenditure was erroneously recorded by this business as an asset when it should have been reported as an expense. For an error, $10,000 is not viewed as material by this company. Therefore, net income is fairly presented as reported at $334,000.

Multiple Choice

  1. You are the chief executive officer of Fisher Corporation. You are very concerned with presenting the best financial picture possible to the owners so you can get a big bonus at the end of this year. Unfortunately, Fisher has a lawsuit pending that could result in the company having to pay a large sum of money. Lawyers believe the company will win and pay nothing. However, they believe there is a 20 percent chance of a $100,000 loss and a 10 percent chance of a $300,000 loss. What amount should be reported?

    1. Zero
    2. $50,000
    3. $100,000
    4. $300,000
  2. Henderson Inc. reports the following: assets of $500,000, liabilities of $350,000 and capital stock of $100,000. What is the balance reported as retained earnings?

    1. $50,000
    2. $250,000
    3. $450,000
    4. $750,000
  3. Giles Corporation borrowed $675,000 from Midwest Bank during the year. Where is this event be reported on Giles’s statement of cash flows?

    1. Operating activities
    2. Investing activities
    3. Financing activities
    4. It would not be reported on the statement of cash flows
  4. You are considering investing in the stock of Mogul Corporation. On which of the following statements would you find information about what the company holds in inventory at the end of the most recent year?

    1. Income statement
    2. Statement of retained earnings
    3. Balance sheet
    4. Statement of cash flows
  5. You are considering investing in the stock of the Maintland Corporation. On which of the following statements would you find information about the cost of the merchandise that the company sold to its customers this past year?

    1. Income statement
    2. Statement of retained earnings
    3. Balance sheet
    4. Statement of cash flows
  6. The Drexel Company began operations on January 1, Year One. In Year One, the company reported net income of $23,000 and, in Year Two, reported net income of another $31,000. In the current year of Year Three, the company reported net income of $37,000. Drexel paid no dividends in Year One but paid $10,000 in Year Two and $12,000 in Year Three. On the December 31, Year Three, balance sheet, what is reported as retained earnings?

    1. $22,000
    2. $25,000
    3. $69,000
    4. $91,000
  7. The Shelby Corporation has been in business now for six years. At the end of its latest fiscal year, the company reported $560,000 in assets, $320,000 in liabilities, $100,000 in contributed capital, and $140,000 in retained earnings. What is the total of stockholders’ equity?

    1. $140,000
    2. $240,000
    3. $420,000
    4. $560,000
  8. The Valdese Corporation operates a restaurant and has sales revenue of $300,000, cost of goods sold of $170,000, other expenses of $50,000, and a gain on the sale of a truck of $14,000. Which of the following statements is true?

    1. Gross profit is $80,000, and net income is $80,000.
    2. Gross profit is $80,000, and net income is $94,000.
    3. Gross profit is $130,000, and net income is $94,000.
    4. Gross profit is $144,000, and net income is $80,000.
  9. Which of the following is true about the usual reporting of income taxes?

    1. They are reported within cost of goods sold.
    2. They are reported the same as any other expense.
    3. They are netted against sales revenue.
    4. They are reported separately at the bottom of the income statement.
  10. A company had a number of cash transactions this year. It paid $22,000 in dividends to its owners, borrowed $100,000 from a bank on a long-term loan, bought a building for $288,000, sold equipment for $23,000, sold inventory for $16,000, and issued capital stock to an investor for $35,000. On a statement of cash flows, what is the net amount to be reported as financing activities?

    1. Cash inflow of $78,000
    2. Cash inflow of $113,000
    3. Cash inflow of $157,000
    4. Cash inflow of $265,000
  11. A company had a number of cash transactions this year. It paid $43,000 in dividends to its owners, borrowed $200,000 from a bank on a long-term loan, bought a building for $312,000, sold equipment for $51,000, sold inventory for $25,000, and issued capital stock to an investor for $85,000. On a statement of cash flows, what is the net amount to be reported as investing activities?

    1. Cash outflow of $112,000
    2. Cash outflow of $176,000
    3. Cash outflow of $242,000
    4. Cash outflow of $261,000
  12. A company reports total assets of $500,000 ($300,000 current and $200,000 noncurrent). The same company reports total liabilities of $350,000 ($75,000 current and $275,000 noncurrent). What is the amount of working capital?

    1. $150,000
    2. $225,000
    3. $300,000
    4. $500,000
  13. A company is producing financial statements. Which statements should be prepared initially?

    1. Income statement and balance sheet
    2. Income statement and statement of retained earnings
    3. Statement of cash flows and statement of retained earnings
    4. Statement of cash flows and balance sheet

Video Problems

Professor Joe Hoyle discusses the answers to these two problems at the links that are indicated. After formulating your answers, watch each video to see how Professor Hoyle answers these questions.

  1. Your roommate is an English major. The roommate’s parents own an ice cream shop in a resort community in Florida. They often try to talk with your roommate about their business and use terms such as financial statements, inventory, assets, liabilities, revenue, expenses, contributed capital, and gross profit. The roommate is usually lost in these conversations and feels dumb. One evening on the way to see a movie, your roommate mentions that you are taking a financial accounting course and asks you to explain these terms in some relatively simple fashion. How would you respond?

  2. Your uncle and two friends started a small office supply store three years ago (January 1, Year One). They each invested $20,000 in cash. They then rented a building for $2,000 per month and hired an employee for $3,000 per month. The business buys $9,000 in merchandise per month and sells it for cash of $16,000 in that same month. For convenience, assume that all transactions are for cash. Each owner takes out $4,000 in cash each year as a dividend.

    At the end of Year Three, the owners decide to apply for a loan so they can purchase a building that will allow them to expand operations. The bank has asked for several pieces of information, and your uncle recently sent you an e-mail asking that you help him determine the appropriate amounts to report. What figures should be provided for each of the following?

    1. Gross profit for Year Three
    2. Gross profit percentage for Year Three
    3. Net income for Year Three
    4. Contributed capital as of the end of Year Three
    5. Retained earnings as of the end of Year Three

Problems

  1. On which financial statement will a decision maker find each of the following account balances?

    1. ____ Sales revenue
    2. ____ Cash
    3. ____ Gain on sale of building
    4. ____ Retained earnings
    5. ____ Salary expense
    6. ____ Salary payable
    7. ____ Capital stock
    8. ____ Dividends paid
    9. ____ Loss on the sale of land
    10. ____ Income tax expense
    11. ____ Net income
  2. The following relate to the Farr Corporation for the month of April:

    Sales Revenue $170,000
    Gain on the Sale of Land $20,000
    Equipment $125,000
    Tax Expense $14,000
    Inventory $10,000
    Dividends Paid $7,000
    Loss on Lawsuit $24,000
    Cost of Goods Sold $82,000
    Advertising Expense $15,000
    1. Determine Farr’s gross profit for the month of April.
    2. Determine Farr’s net income for the month of April.
    3. If retained earnings at the beginning of April is reported as $800,000, what should retained earnings be reported as at the end of April?
  3. The Maverick Company has the following account balances at the end of December. Show that Maverick’s balance sheet does balance using the accounting equation.

    Cash $8,000
    Capital Stock $120,000
    Inventory $16,000
    Note Payable $45,000
    Retained Earnings $29,000
    Building $158,000
    Equipment $30,000
    Accounts Payable $11,000
    Salary Payable $7,000
  4. The Ramond Company has hired you to prepare financial statements for the year ending December 31 of the current year. On your first day of work, your assistant uncovers several items that could be classified as expenses or could be classified as assets. The assistant has asked for your help. Determine whether the following items should be recorded as an expense or an asset within the financial statements currently being prepared.

    1. On December 31, Ramond paid $14,000 to rent office space for the next twelve months.
    2. On October 1, Ramond paid $40,000 for fire insurance that covered the company’s property for the last quarter of the year.
    3. On July 1, Ramond purchased $27,000 in supplies, all of which were used by the end of the year.
    4. On December 31, Ramond purchased $5,000 worth of supplies for the coming month.
  5. For each of the following, determine the missing balance.

    1. Net Income $82,900
      Cost of Goods Sold $459,030
      Advertising Expense $56,000
      Gain on Sale of Equipment $5,000
      Income Tax Expense $50,000
      Sales Revenue ?
    2. Net Income $6,500
      Retained Earnings, 12/31 $16,200
      Dividends $2,900
      Retained Earnings, 1/1 ?
    3. Cash $460,000
      Accounts Receivable $540,200
      Current Assets $1,670,000
      Inventory ?
    4. Total Assets $54,000
      Total Liabilities $32,000
      Capital Stock $15,000
      Retained Earnings ?
  6. Rescue Records needs rescuing. The downloading of songs over the Internet is killing its business. The owners of Rescue want to know if they made a net income or a net loss during the current year that ended on December 31, Year One. Given the following account balances, prepare an income statement for Rescue similar to the example shown in Figure 3.1 “Income Statement”.

    Advertising Expense $4,600
    Salary Expense $25,470
    Cost of Goods Sold $109,000
    Sales Revenue $197,000
    Income Tax Expense $3,800
    Loss on Sale of Land $12,090
    Rent Expense $35,000
  7. Your lawn care business, A Cut Above, has grown beyond your wildest dreams—to the point where you would like to buy some new equipment and hire some people to help you. Unfortunately, you don’t have that kind of money sitting around, so you are applying for a loan. The bank has requested financial statements, including, of course, a balance sheet. The following are the balances you have on December 31, Year One. Prepare a classified balance sheet to submit to the bank.

    Cash $2,400
    Prepaid Insurance $1,600
    Note Payable Due Two Years from Now (Loan from Mom) $5,000
    Capital Stock (Money You Invested to Start Business) $2,000
    Accounts Receivable $500
    Supplies Inventory $300
    Equipment $3,000
    Accounts Payable $200
    Retained Earnings, 12/31 $600
  8. Maria Sanchez, an accountant by trade, earns extra cash by working in the evenings as a personal trainer at the local gymnasium. Maria is curious about her cash inflows and outflows from this extra work. The following is the information that she gathered for the month of February. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Maria.

    Cash Paid for Supplies Inventory $500
    Cash Paid for Advertising $400
    Cash Paid for Equipment $900
    Cash Received from Bank Loan $1,000
    Cash Paid for Insurance $700
    Cash Received from Customers $2,200
    Cash Paid for Taxes $400
    Cash Balance, Beginning of February $500
  9. The Eli Company started business on January 1, Year One. In Year One, the company made a net income of $100,000 and paid cash dividends of $30,000. At the end of Year Two, the company has the following accounts and their appropriate balances:

    Repair Expense $10,000
    Cost of Goods Sold $170,000
    Advertising Expense $10,000
    Inventory $120,000
    Dividends Paid in Year Two $80,000
    Accounts Payable $40,000
    Salary Payable $10,000
    Land and Equipment $300,000
    Contributed Capital (Capital Stock) $120,000
    Notes Payable (Due in Year Six) $210,000
    Salary Expense $40,000
    Loss on Sale of Equipment $10,000
    Sales Revenue $470,000
    Income Tax Expense $30,000
    Cash $50,000
    Accounts Receivable $100,000

    Retained earnings at the beginning of Year Two can be computed from the information provided at the beginning of the problem.

    1. Prepare an income statement for the Eli Company for Year Two in the form presented in Figure 3.1 “Income Statement”.
    2. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the Eli Company for Year Two in the form presented in Figure 3.4 “Statement of Retained Earnings”.
    3. Prepare a balance sheet for the Eli Company for the end of Year Two (December 31) in the form presented in Figure 3.6 “Balance Sheet”.

Research Assignment

  1. Go to http://www.hersheys.com/. At The Hershey Company Web site, click on “Corporate Information” at the bottom of the page. Click on “Investors” on the top of the next screen. Then, click on “Financial Reports” on the left side of the screen. You should see a drop-down menu. Click on “Annual & Quarterly Reports.” Finally, click on “2010 Annual Report to Stockholders/Form 10-K” to download the form. The Form 10-K is the document that many businesses must file with the U.S. government each year. Because it requires that financial statements be included, some companies like Hershey also use it as the annual report for their stockholders.

    Using The Hershey Company’s Form 10-K, answer the following questions:

    1. On page 54 of the 2010 financial statements for The Hershey Company, an income statement is presented. For 2008 and also for 2010, determine the following balances. Has this company’s income picture improved from 2008 to 2010?

      • Gross profit
      • Gross profit percentage
      • Provision for income taxes (income tax expense)
      • Net Income
    2. On page 55 of the 2010 financial statements, a balance sheet is presented. Determine the following balances as of December 31, 2009, and also December 31, 2010.

      • Working capital
      • Current ratio
      • Retained earnings
    3. On page 56 of the 2010 financial statements, a statement of cash flows is presented. Determine the amount of cash that Hershey generated from its operating activities during 2010.
    4. On page 57 of the 2010 financial statements, a statement of stockholders’ equity is presented. The middle column is for retained earnings and serves the same purpose as a statement of retained earnings. How much did Hershey pay its stockholders as dividends in 2008, 2009, and 2010?

Chapter 2: What Should Decision Makers Know in Order to Make Good Decisions about an Organization?

Video Clip

(click to see video)

In this video, Professor Joe Hoyle introduces the essential points covered in Chapter 2 “What Should Decision Makers Know in Order to Make Good Decisions about an Organization?”.

2.1 Creating a Portrait of an Organization That Can Be Used by Decision Makers

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Explain the comparison of financial accounting to the painting of a portrait.
  2. Understand the reasons why financial accounting information does not need to be exact.
  3. Define the term “material” and describe its fundamental role in financial accounting.
  4. Define the term “misstatement” and differentiate between the two types of misstatements: errors and fraud.

Financial Statements: The Portrait of an Organization

Question: In Chapter 1 “What Is Financial Accounting, and Why Is It Important?”, mention was made that financial accounting is somewhat analogous to the painting of a giant, complex portrait. How could financial accounting possibly be compared to an artistic endeavor such as the creation of a painted portrait?

 

Answer: The purpose of a portrait—as might have been created by Rembrandt, van Gogh, or even Picasso—is to capture a likeness of the artist’s model. In a somewhat parallel fashion, financial accounting attempts to present a portrait of an organization that can be used by interested parties to assess its financial health and future prospects. If well painted, this picture should enable individuals to estimate future stock prices, dividend payments, and cash flows. Accounting even has specific terms (such as representational faithfulnessA reasonable agreement between reported information and the event or balance it purports to represent; this term refers to the communication of an appropriate picture of an organization, which can serve as the basis for appropriate decisions. and presents fairlyFinancial information that contains no material misstatements in accordance with an accepted standard for financial reporting.) that are used to indicate that financial information successfully provides a reasonable likeness of the reporting organization.

In accounting, this portrait is most often presented in the form of financial statementsQuantitative reports and related verbal disclosures that convey monetary information describing the operations, financial position, and cash flows of an organization as a basis for representing its financial health and future prospects.. The accountant takes all appropriate monetary information and constructs a set of financial statements to be distributed to decision makers. Financial statements are a representation of an organization’s operations, financial position, and cash flows. These statements provide the form and structure for the conveyance of financial information that will create a likeness of the reporting organization. This textbook is about the preparation of those financial statements and the meaning of their contents.

A Likeness Does Not Have to Be Exact

Question: Financial accounting deals with numbers that are exact. A 3 is a 3 and nothing else. In describing the production of financial statements, why are the results not compared to a photograph rather than a painted portrait? After all, a photograph is a much more precise likeness than a painting.

 

Answer: A human portrait, even by a master such as Rembrandt, will not be completely accurate. The shape of the person’s chin or the turn of the neck may be off slightly. The color of the eyes and hair cannot possibly be a perfect replica of life. It is a painted portrait, not a photograph (which is much more mechanically accurate). Fortunately, absolute exactness is not necessary for capturing the essence of a model. A likeness is achieved when a viewer exclaims, “I know that person!” Exact precision is not required to meet that objective.

Despite public perception to the contrary, financial accounting information is rarely an exactly accurate portrait. The accountant’s goal is to create financial statements that present a likeness of an organization that can be used to make decisions. For example, the reported cost of constructing a building may be off slightly because of the sheer volume of money being spent on the many different aspects of the project. No one expects the reported cost of a $50 million manufacturing plant to be accurate to the penny. As with the painted portrait, that does not necessarily reduce the usefulness of the data. If financial information provides a fair representation, an interested party should be able to make use of it to arrive at the desired projections such as future stock prices. A potential investor or creditor does not need numbers that are absolutely accurate in order to assert, “Based on the information available in the financial statements, I understand enough about this business to make informed decisions. Even if I could obtain figures that were more accurate, I believe that I would still take the same actions.”

An artist applies oil paints, pastels, or watercolors to a canvas to present a likeness of a subject. An accountant does something quite similar in constructing financial statements with numbers and words. The goal is much the same: to produce a likeness that truly reflects the essence of the model, which, in this case, is an entire organization.

Test Yourself

Question:

For the year ending January 31, 2011, Walmart reported having made sales to its customers (net of returns and allowances) of $418,952,000,000. James Forrest is studying the available information in order to decide whether to buy ownership shares of Walmart on the New York Stock Exchange at the current price. Which of the following statements is true about the figure reported as the company’s net sales?

  1. Walmart made net sales during these twelve months of exactly $418,952,000,000.
  2. The $418,952,000,000 is accurate, although the number has been rounded to the nearest million.
  3. Net sales were probably not $418,952,000,000 for the year, but that figure is close enough to be a fair presentation, one that Forrest can rely on in making his decision.
  4. If this net sales figure had not been correct, Walmart’s accountants would not have allowed the company to report the amount.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: Net sales were probably not $418,952,000,000 for the year, but that figure is close enough to be a fair presentation, one that Forrest can rely on in making his decision.

Explanation:

Accounting data are rarely accurate. That degree of exactness is often impossible to achieve and is not required when assessing a company’s financial health. Financial statements are created to provide a fair presentation. Forrest ultimately wants to estimate stock prices and dividend payments. Net sales were almost certainly not as reported, but any difference between this number and the actual amount is not expected to be large enough to have an impact on the decisions that will be made.

Material Misstatements

Question: This is a surprising, possibly shocking, revelation. Financial accounting information has universally been branded as exhibiting rigid exactness. In fact, accountants are often referred to as “bean counters” because of their perceived need to count every bean in the bowl to arrive at obsessively accurate numbers. Here, though, the assertion is made that accounting information is not a precise picture but merely a fair representation of an organization’s financial health and future prospects. How correct or exact is the financial information that is reported by a business or other organization?

 

Answer: In financial accounting, the data presented to decision makers by an organization should never contain any misstatementsErrors or frauds that cause reported financial information to differ from the approach required by an official standard for reporting such as the U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (U.S. GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). that are deemed to be materialThe magnitude of an omission or misstatement of accounting information that makes it probable that the judgment of a reasonable person relying on the information would have been changed or influenced by that omission or misstatement.. This basic standard has long served as the required level for accuracy in financial reporting. Decision makers want financial statements—such as those prepared by Starbucks or Intel—that they can trust and use. That requires the statements to be free of any material misstatements. In that condition, reported financial information will be viewed as a likeness of the organization that is presented fairly. Thus, financial statements do not need exact accuracy. However, they must be free of material misstatements in order to be of use to decision makers.

A misstatement is an errorAn unintentional misstatement of financial information. (made accidentally) or fraudAn intentional misstatement of financial information; it can result from misappropriation of assets (theft) or fraudulent financial reporting. (done intentionally) where reported figures or words actually differ from the underlying reality. In simple terms, the information is wrong.

For example, a corporate official could erroneously record a $100,000 expenditure that was made in connection with the construction of a new building as if it pertained to the purchase of land. Consequently, the building’s cost might be reported as only $2.3 million when it was actually $2.4 million. This reported number is misstated; it is wrong. The balance presented for the building contains a $100,000 error, as does the figure shown for land. This misstatement, though, might not be viewed as material.

A misstatement is deemed to be material if it is so significant that its presence would impact a decision made by an interested party. Using the previous illustration, assume the accidental $100,000 reduction in the reported cost of this building leads an outside decision maker to alter a choice being made (such as whether to buy or sell the business’s capital stock or whether to grant a loan). Because of the change in the decision, the misstatement is judged to be material by definition. If no decision is affected, a misstatement is not material, and its existence does not prevent the reported information from still being fairly presented. The reported information is usable for decision making.

Financial information can (and almost always does) contain misstatements. However, the reporting entity must take adequate precautions to ensure that reported information holds no material misstatements for the simple reason that it is no longer fairly presented. If any material misstatements exist within the information, the portrait of the organization is not a proper likeness of the model. The decision maker is being misled.

The concept of materiality can seem rather nebulous. For the financial statements of a small convenience store, a $10 misstatement is not material whereas a $10 million one certainly is. For a business with real estate holdings of $30 billion, even a $10 million misstatement is probably not material. The problem for the accountant is determining where to draw the line for a particular organization. That is one of the most difficult decisions for any financial accountant. An exact dollar amount for materiality is virtually impossible to identify because it is a measure of the effect of a misstatement on an external party’s judgment.

Other than sheer magnitude, the cause of the problem must also be taken into consideration. An accidental mistake of $100,000 is less likely to be judged material than one of $100,000 that resulted from a fraudulent act. Fraud occurs when someone wants to misrepresent reported numbers to make the organization look differently than it is or to cover theft. Fraud includes the intent to deceive and is more troublesome to decision makers than a mere error. Thus, both size and cause should be weighed in considering whether the presence of a misstatement has the ability to impact the actions of any decision makers.

Consequently, a financial accountant never claims that reported information is correct, accurate, or exact. Such precision is rarely possible and not needed when decision makers are analyzing the financial health and future prospects of an organization. However, the accountant must take all precautions necessary to ensure that reported data contain no material misstatements. Financial figures are never released without reasonable assurance being obtained that no errors or other mistakes are included that could be material, or in other words, that could impact the decisions that are made. All parties need to believe that reported information can be used with confidence because it presents a fair likeness of the organization as a whole.

When a company reports that a building was constructed at a cost of $2.3 million, the real message is that the actual cost was not materially different from $2.3 million. This figure is a fair representation of the amount spent, one that can be used in making decisions about the organization such as whether to invest in its capital stock or provide it with a loan.

Test Yourself

Question:

For the year ending January 31, 2011, Walmart reported earning net income of $16,389,000,000. Which of the following statements is not true?

  1. Net income is probably not $16,389,000,000, but it is not materially different than the reported figure.
  2. To aid investors, actual net income could be lower than $16,389,000,000 but should not be any higher.
  3. Decision makers should feel comfortable making decisions about the company based on this figure.
  4. With companies of such size, determining an exact net income is impossible.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: To aid investors, actual net income could be lower than $16,389,000,000 but should not be any higher.

Explanation:

Net income reflects a likeness of a company’s earnings that a decision maker can use. With so many complex transactions, precisely accurate figures are impossible. Company officials do need to have sufficient evidence to indicate that net income contains no material misstatements. Accountants tend to be conservative, which is likely to reduce reported income figures. Therefore, actual net income is more likely to be slightly higher than the reported figure rather than lower.

Key Takeaway

Financial accounting does not attempt to provide exact numbers because such accuracy is often impossible to achieve and not really required by decision makers. Instead, reported accounting information is intended to provide a likeness of an organization and its operations—a type of portrait. To achieve this goal, financial accountants must ensure that reported balances and other data cannot contain any material misstatements. A misstatement is inaccurate information included by accident (an error) or intentionally (fraud). Materiality refers to the point at which the size or the nature of such misstatements would cause a change in the decisions made by an individual using that information. If all material misstatements can be eliminated, the information is considered to be presented fairly. That likeness can then be used by interested parties to make considered decisions.

2.2 Dealing with Uncertainty

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Discuss the challenge created for financial accountants by the presence of uncertainty.
  2. List examples of uncertainty that an accountant might face in reporting financial information about an organization.
  3. Explain how financial accounting resembles a language, such as Spanish or Japanese.

Uncertainty, the True Challenge for Reporting

Question: Financial accounting figures can certainly be exact. If a cash register is bought for $836.54, the reported cost is $836.54. However, decision makers do not need financial figures with such absolute accuracy. If reported information is presented fairly, in other words if it contains no material misstatements, it can be used to estimate a corporation’s future stock prices, cash dividend payments, and cash flows. Even if not necessary for decision makers, what prevents reported financial information from being correct in an absolute sense? Why are all reported figures not as precise as the reporting of the cash register?

 

Answer: In truth, a reasonable percentage of numbers reported in a set of financial statements are exact. Materiality is not an issue in such cases. The cash register mentioned here has a reported cost of $836.54—a precise measure of the amount paid. Likewise, a cash balance shown as $2,785.16 is exact to the penny. However, many of the other figures reported by an organization do not lend themselves to such accuracy.

The primary reason that exactness is not a goal—often not even a possibility in financial accounting—can be summed up in a single word: uncertainty. Many of the events encountered every day by an organization contain some degree of uncertainty. Unfortunately, no technique exists to report uncertain events in precise terms.

When first introduced to financial accounting, many students assume that it is little more than the listing of cash receipts and disbursements in much the same way that elementary school children report how they spent their weekly allowances. That is a misconception. Financial accounting is a structured attempt to paint a fairly presented portrait of an organization’s overall operations, financial condition, and cash flows. This requires the reporting of many events where a final resolution might not occur for months or even years. Here are just a few examples of the kinds of uncertainty that virtually every business (and financial accountant) faces in creating financial statements.

  • A business is the subject of a lawsuit. Perhaps a customer has filed this legal action claiming damage as a result of one of the company’s products. Such legal proceedings are exceedingly common and can drag on in the courts for an extended period of time before a settlement is reached. The actual amount won or lost (if either ever occurs) might not be known for years. What should the business report now?
  • A sale of merchandise is made today for $300 with the money to be collected from the customer in several months. Until the cash is received, no one can be sure of the exact amount that will be collected. What should the business report now?
  • An employee is promised a cash bonus next year that will be calculated based on any rise in the market price of the corporation’s capital stock. Until the time passes and the actual increase (if any) is determined, the amount of this bonus remains a mystery. What should the business report now?
  • A retail store sells a microwave oven today with a warranty. If the appliance breaks at any time during the next three years, the store has to pay for the repairs. No one knows whether the microwave will need to be fixed during this period. What should the business report now?

Any comprehensive list of the uncertainties faced regularly by most organizations would require pages to enumerate. Many of the most important accounting rules have been created to establish requirements for the reporting of uncertain situations. Because of the quantity and variety of such unknowns, exactness simply cannot be an objective of financial reporting.

For many accountants, dealing with so much uncertainty is the most interesting aspect of their job. Whenever an organization encounters a situation of this type, the accountant must first come to understand what has happened and then determine a logical method to communicate a fair representation of that information within the framework provided by financial accounting rules. Thus, reporting events in the face of uncertainty is surely one of the major challenges of being a financial accountant.

Accounting as the Language of Business

Question: Accounting is sometimes referred to as the “language of business.” However, in this book, financial accounting has already been compared to the painting of a fairly presented portrait of an organization. Given the references throughout this chapter to painting, is accounting really a type of language? Is it possible for accounting to paint portraits and also be a language?

 

Answer: The simple answer to this question is that accounting is a language, one that enables an organization to communicate a portrait of its financial health and future prospects to interested parties by using words and numbers rather than oils or watercolors. The formal structure of that language becomes especially helpful when an organization faces the task of reporting complex uncertainties.

Any language, whether it is English, Spanish, Japanese, or the like, has been developed through much use to allow for the effective transfer of information between two or more parties. If a sentence such as “I drive a red car” is spoken, communication is successful but only if both the speaker and the listener have an adequate understanding of the English language. Based solely on the arrangement of these five words, information can be passed from one person to the another.

This process succeeds because English (as well as other languages) relies on relatively standardized terminology. Words such as “red,” “car,” and “drive” have defined meanings that the speaker and the listener both know with a degree of certainty. In addition, grammar rules such as syntax and punctuation are utilized to provide a framework for the communication. Thus, effective communication is possible in a language when

  1. Set terminology exists
  2. Structural rules and principles are applied

As will be gradually introduced throughout this textbook, financial accounting has its own terminology. Many words and terms (such as “LIFO” and “accumulated depreciation”) have very specific meanings. In addition, a comprehensive set of rules and principles has been established over the decades to provide structure and standardization. They guide the reporting process so that the resulting information will be fairly presented and can be readily understood by all interested parties, both inside and outside of the organization.

Some students who read this textbook will eventually become accountants. Those individuals must learn specific terminology, rules, and principles in order to communicate financial information about an organization that is presented fairly. Others (probably most readers) will become external decision makers. They will make financial decisions. They will evaluate loan applications, buy capital stock, grant credit, make employment decisions, provide investment advice, and the like. They will not present financial information with all of its uncertainties but rather they will need to make use of it. The more such individuals know about financial accounting terminology, rules, and principles, the more likely it is that they will arrive at appropriate decisions.

To communicate a portrait properly in any language, both the speaker and the listener must understand the terminology as well as the structural rules and principles. That holds true even if the language is financial accounting.

Key Takeaway

At any point in time, organizations face numerous uncertain outcomes, such as the settlement of litigation or the collection of a receivable. The conveyance of useful information about these uncertain situations goes beyond the simple reporting of exact numbers. To communicate a fair representation of such uncertainty, financial accounting must serve as a language. Thus, it will have established terminology and structural rules much like that of any language. For successful communication of financial information, both the terminology and the structural rules must be understood by all parties involved.

2.3 The Need for Accounting Standards

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Describe the purpose of accounting standards such as U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (U.S. GAAP) and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and the benefits that these rules provide.
  2. Explain the importance of accounting standards to the development of a capitalistic economy.
  3. Understand the role played by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) in the ongoing evolution of accounting standards in the United States.
  4. Discuss the advantages and the possibility that financial reporting will switch from U.S. GAAP to IFRS.

The Existence of Formal Accounting Standards

Question: Rules and principles exist within financial accounting that must be followed. They provide the structural guidance that is essential for achieving effective communication. For example, assume that a reporting organization encounters an uncertainty (such as a lawsuit) and is now preparing financial information to portray the reality of that event. When faced with such complexity, how does the financial accountant know which method of reporting is appropriate? How does a decision maker who analyzes that reported information know what guidelines were used in its preparation?

 

Answer: The existence of financial accounting standards is essential to ensure that all communicated information is understood properly. Both the accountants within the reporting organization and the decision makers analyzing the resulting financial statements must understand those rules. The question that has haunted the accounting profession in recent times is, who should have the authority to create those standards?

For decades, a wide variety of formal accounting principles were developed in the United States as well as throughout the rest of the world. Japanese accounting rules evolved differently from those in Australia while Australian standards were not consistent with those in the United States. In earlier times, such country-by-country rules caused few problems because most businesses operated solely within their country’s boundaries. During the past ten years or so, as a truly global economy became a reality, two primary systems of accounting rules emerged. U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (U.S. GAAP)A recognized set of accounting rules used and followed in the United States; it is created and updated by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB). are applied to most financial information presented within the United States. International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) are now used almost exclusively in the rest of the world. In accounting at the present time, two languages exist rather than one.

Having two bodies of rules causes problems for decision makers. For example, on its Web site, BP presents a 2010 set of financial statements prepared according to IFRS. One of its biggest competitors, Exxon Mobil, posted its own 2010 financial statements, but those amounts and explanations were created by following U.S. GAAP. Clarity and understanding are not enhanced when different communication standards are applied by such similar businesses.

Not surprisingly, many corporate officials and decision makers would prefer to see one universal set of accounting standards. If that were to happen, a corporation in Michigan and a corporation in Germany would produce comparable financial information that could be utilized for all reporting purposes around the world.

Over the past few years, extensive progress has been made in bringing these two sets of standards into alignment. However, a number of significant differences continue to exist. Many interested parties want to see IFRS adopted exclusively in the United States. According to this group, it is unlikely that the rest of the world will choose to follow U.S. GAAP so harmony can only be achieved by a general acceptance of IFRS. Others believe that U.S. GAAP is a superior system and should not be abandoned.

The debate has been intense and promises to continue to be so until some type of official resolution occurs.

Typical Opinions on Moving to the Use of IFRS

  • Ford (Motor Co.) supports the move to International Financial Reporting Standards, saying the company would save money by simplifying and standardizing its accounting across all 138 countries where Ford operates.”
  • “Companies like Hallador Energy Co., a small Denver coal-mining company that doesn’t do business outside the United States (opposes) moving to the international standards. ‘We didn’t join the metric system when everybody else did,’ says W. Anderson Bishop, Hallador’s chief financial officer. U. S. accounting rules are ‘the gold standard, and why would we want to lower our standards just to make the rest of the world happy?”
  • “Larger companies, big accounting firms, and top rule makers favor the switch. They contend that global unity would save companies money by consolidating bookkeeping and make it easier to raise capital around the world.”
  • “James Barlow, chief financial officer of drug company Allergan Inc. and an opponent of IFRS, estimates the change could cost companies as much as 1 percent of revenues.”Michael Rapoport, “Accounting Move Pits Big vs. Small,” The Wall Street Journal, July 6, 2011, C1.

At the time of this writing, U.S. GAAP continues to be the required system for most of the financial reporting found in the United States although a mandated switch to IFRS (in some form) during the next few years is quite possible. Because of the current situation and the uncertainty as to how legal requirements will eventually change, this textbook is primarily a presentation of U.S. GAAP. For the most part, U.S. GAAP and IFRS are based on the same accounting principles. However, varying interpretations of those principles have resulted in differences between U.S. GAAP and IFRS standards. In areas where IFRS disagrees with U.S. GAAP in significant ways, both methods of reporting will be described in this textbook.

The Development of Accounting Standards

Question: Whether in the form of U.S. GAAP or IFRS, financial accounting standards must be created in some logical fashion. Who is in charge of the production of formal accounting standards? How often do these official standards come into existence?

 

Answer: The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) has held the authority to develop U.S. GAAP since 1973. An abundance of information can be found about this board and its activities by going to http://www.fasb.org/ and clicking on “About FASB.”

IFRS are produced by the London-based International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). This group took over responsibility for international standards from a predecessor group in 2001. Information about the resulting official pronouncements and the standard setting process is available at http://www.iasb.org/ by clicking on “About us.”

Although some basic elements of accounting standards have been in use almost throughout history, many reporting rules are relatively new—often developed within the last few decades. Whether U.S. GAAP or IFRS, accounting standards evolve quite quickly as the nature of business changes and new reporting issues, problems, and resolutions arise. The growth of advanced technology speeds this process even more quickly. Fairly important changes in the formal structure of accounting rules occur virtually every year.

In the United States, the existence of U.S. GAAP means that a business in Seattle, Washington, and a business in Atlanta, Georgia, must account for financial information in much the same manner. As will be discussed later in this textbook, a few allowed alternatives do exist in connection with specific reporting challenges.

Because standardization exists in most areas of the reporting process, any decision maker with an adequate knowledge of financial accounting—whether located in Phoenix, Arizona, or in Portland, Maine—should be able to understand the fairly presented financial information conveyed by a wide variety of organizations. They all speak the same language. Put simply, the existence of accounting standards enables organizations and other interested parties to communicate successfully.

Test Yourself

Question:

An investor is studying a set of financial statements prepared for a company. He is considering buying some of its ownership shares. While studying the financial statements, he notices that they have been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Which of the following statements is true?

  1. The rules and principles that make up U.S. GAAP have been the same now for over forty years.
  2. The rules and principles that make up U.S. GAAP are consistent throughout the United States.
  3. The rules and principles that make up U.S. GAAP are used consistently throughout the world.
  4. The rules and principles that make up U.S. GAAP are the same as those used for income tax purposes.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: The rules and principles that make up U.S. GAAP are consistent throughout the United States.

Explanation:

U.S. GAAP provides a standardization of rules so that information can be better understood. These rules evolve rapidly; thus, much of U.S. GAAP is less than ten to fifteen years old. A different set of rules known as IFRS is used in much of the rest of the world and might eventually be applied in the United States. Income tax laws help governments raise revenues, a completely different purpose than U.S. GAAP. U.S. GAAP is designed to help organizations produce fairly presented financial statements.

The Importance of Accounting Standards

Question: Several years ago, a front page article in the Wall Street Journal contained a controversial assessment of U.S. GAAP: “When the intellectual achievements of the 20th century are tallied, GAAP should be on everyone’s Top 10 list. The idea of GAAP—so simple yet so radical—is that there should be a standard way of accounting for profit and loss in public businesses, allowing investors to see how a public company manages its money. This transparency is what allows investors to compare businesses as different as McDonald’sIBM and Tupperware, and it makes U.S. markets the envy of the world.”Clay Shirky, “How Priceline Became a Real Business,” Wall Street Journal, August 13, 2001, A-12.

Could formal accounting standards be so very important? Can the development of U.S. GAAP possibly be one of the ten most important intellectual achievements of the entire twentieth century? A list of other accomplishments during this period includes air travel, creation of computers, birth of the Internet, landing on the moon, and the development of penicillin. With that level of competition, U.S. GAAP does not seem an obvious choice to be in the top ten. How can it be so important?

 

Answer: The United States has a capitalistic economy, which means that businesses are (for the most part) owned by private citizens and groups rather than by the government. To operate and grow, these companies must convince investors and creditors to contribute huge amounts of their own money voluntarily. Not surprisingly, such financing is only forthcoming if the possible risks and rewards can be assessed and then evaluated with sufficient reliability. Before handing over thousands or even millions of dollars, decision makers must believe that they are using reliable data to make reasonable estimations of future stock prices, cash dividends, and cash flows. Otherwise, buying stocks and granting credit is no more than gambling. As this quote asserts, U.S. GAAP enables these outside parties to obtain the financial information they need to reduce their perceived risk to acceptable levels. Thus, money can be raised, and businesses can grow and prosper.

Without U.S. GAAP, investors and creditors would encounter significant difficulties in evaluating the financial health and future prospects of an organization.The wide-scale financial meltdown in the world economy that began to be evident in 2008 put a serious strain on the traditional capitalist model. The United States and other governments had to spend billions of dollars to bail out (and, in some cases, take over) major enterprises. Whether U.S. GAAP could have done a better job to help avoid this calamity will probably not be fully known for years. Because of that uncertainty, they would be more likely to hold on to their money or invest only in other, safer options. Consequently, if accounting standards did not exist, the development and expansion of thousands of the businesses that have become a central part of today’s society might be limited or impossible simply because of the lack of available resources. An expanding economy requires capital investment. That funding is more likely to be available when financial information can be understood because it is stated in a common language: U.S. GAAP.

By any method of measurement, the explosive development of the U.S. economy during the twentieth century (especially following World War II) has been spectacular, close to unbelievable. This growth has been fueled by massive amounts of money flowing from inside and outside the United States into the country’s businesses. Much of the vitality of the U.S. economy results from the willingness of people to risk their money by buying capital stock or making loans or extending credit to such companies as McDonald’sIBM, and Tupperware. Without those resources, most businesses would be small or nonexistent, and the United States would surely be a radically different country.

The Evolution of Accounting Standards

 

Question: Accounting standards are important to businesses and decision makers alike. FASB is in charge of the creation of U.S. GAAP. As stated, all accounting standards tend to evolve over time. Official rules are modified, deleted, or added every year. How do new accounting standards come into existence?

 

Answer: As indicated earlier, since 1973, FASB has served as the primary authoritative body in charge of producing U.S. GAAP for nongovernmental entities such as businesses and private not-for-profit organizations. FASB is an independent group supported by the U.S. government, various accounting organizations, and many private businesses.

Typically, accounting problems arise over time within the various areas of financial reporting. New types of financial events can be created, for example, that are not covered by U.S. GAAP or, perhaps, weaknesses in earlier rules start to become evident. If such concerns grow to be serious, FASB steps in to study the issues and alternatives. After a period of study, the board might pass new rules or make amendments to previous ones. FASB is methodical in its deliberations, and the entire process can take years. Changes to U.S. GAAP are never made without proper consideration.

Several other official bodies also play important roles in the creation of U.S. GAAP. They are normally discussed in detail in upper-level accounting textbooks. However, the major authority for the ongoing evolution of U.S. GAAP lies with FASB and its seven-member board. It has released scores of official statements during its first four decades of existence. The impact that those rulings have had on U.S. GAAP and the financial reporting process in this country is almost impossible to overemphasize.

As just one example, FASB recently made a number of changes in the required reporting of receivables because of the chance that some (perhaps many) of these balances would not be collected. Possibly as a result of the current economic difficulties around the world, the members of FASB felt that more information was needed from organizations to inform decision makers about the risk involved with the collection of these receivables. This type of evolution takes place frequently in the language known as financial accounting. Whether U.S. GAAP or IFRS, financial accounting rules must be updated as needed to meet current informational needs.

In 2009, FASB combined all authoritative accounting literature into a single source for U.S. GAAP, which is known as the Accounting Standards Codification. By bringing together hundreds of authoritative documents, FASB has made U.S. GAAP both more understandable and easier to access. A multitude of pronouncements has been woven together in a logical fashion so that all rules on each topic are now gathered in one location.

Key Takeaway

No language can enable communication without some standardization of terminology and rules. At present, U.S. GAAP plays this role in the United States. The availability of these authoritative guidelines has served a central role in the growth of the U.S. economy since the end of the Great Depression and World War II. These uniform accounting rules allow investors and creditors to assess the possible risks and rewards they face. U.S. GAAP is constantly evolving as accountants seek better methods of providing financial information in an ever-changing business world. The main authority for the development of U.S. GAAP lies with the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB). FASB looks constantly for reporting issues that need to be studied so that needed changes can be made in official accounting rules. IFRS plays this same role in much of the rest of the world. The future of IFRS rules in the United States is yet to be determined, but acceptance of a single set of accounting standards in some form has many supporters.

Talking with an Independent Auditor about International Financial Reporting Standards

Robert A. Vallejo is a partner in the assurance (audit) practice of the public accounting firm PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC). Rob began his career with PwC in 1992 and has spent five years working in Europe (two in Paris and three in Amsterdam). Because of his time in Europe, he has extensive practical experience dealing with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and actively helps his U.S. clients understand the significant differences between U.S. accounting standards and IFRS. He currently works in the firm’s Richmond, Virginia, office. Rob is the founder of the Philadelphia Chapter of ALPFA (the Association of Latino Professionals in Finance and Accounting) and is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) and the Virginia Society of CPAs.

 

Question: Over the past fifty years or so, the accounting profession in the United States has developed a very comprehensive set of official guidelines referred to collectively as U.S. GAAP. Recently, a strong push has developed to move away from those principles and adopt the pronouncements of the International Accounting Standards Board. If U.S. GAAP has worked successfully for so many years, why should we now think about abandoning it in favor of IFRS, a system that is not necessarily well understood in the United States?

Rob Vallejo: Economic events continue to illustrate how interrelated the world’s economies really are. Therefore, it makes common sense that all companies around the world should report their financial information in accordance with the same set of accounting standards. For investors and creditors, it is hard to compare two companies that use different reporting standards unless the individual has a truly in-depth understanding of the differences. Unfortunately, both sets of standards are complex, which makes it very difficult to have a solid grasp of both. The United States is one of the few remaining jurisdictions that has not adopted IFRS, limiting the understanding and usefulness of our standards beyond our borders. Another argument in favor of the adoption of IFRS is the complexity of U.S. GAAP. It is a very rules-based set of standards that has evolved over many decades to address the ever-changing world of business, creating a maze of standards that is difficult to navigate. IFRS is more principles-based, allowing the preparers of financial information more judgment in applying general rules to a wide variety of situations. Lastly, U.S. standard setters have become more involved in the evolution of IFRS. FASB has been working with the IASB in many instances to converge U.S. GAAP and IFRS even if formal adoption of IFRS never occurs in the United States.

 

Question: Rob, at key spots throughout this textbook, you have agreed to explain the impact that a possible change to IFRS will have on financial reporting in the United States. Obviously, the future is always difficult to anticipate with precision. However, what is your best guess as to when IFRS will start to be used in the financial statements issued by U.S. companies? At a basic level, as is appropriate in an introductory financial accounting course, how much real difference will be created by a change from U.S. GAAP to IFRS?

RV: The move to IFRS is being driven by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), which has legal responsibility for much of the financial reporting in the United States. In 2008, the SEC published a road map that called for the largest U.S. publicly traded companies to publish their annual results for the year ending December 31, 2014, in accordance with IFRS. In February 2010, the SEC decided that IFRS would not be required of U.S. public companies prior to 2015 and, even then, only after additional study. A final decision is now expected from the SEC relatively soon, but the momentum leading to an inevitable switch to IFRS has subsided. Many believe that a much slower convergence approach, ensuring that all newly issued standards are the same under U.S. GAAP and IFRS, seems to be gaining traction. In general, any move to IFRS will not have a substantial impact on the financial information being reported by most U.S. companies. However, because of the many subtle differences between IFRS and U.S. GAAP, preparers of financial information have a lot of work to do to transition the reporting properly. As is the case many times, the devil is in the details.

Note: The role played in the U.S. economy by public accounting firms will be described in a later chapter. Some of these organizations have grown to an enormous size. According to its Web site as of July 14, 2011 (http://www.pwc.com/), PricewaterhouseCoopers employs approximately 161,000 individuals working in over 150 countries. During 2010, the firm earned in excess of $26 billion in revenues from customers as a result of the services that it rendered for them.

2.4 Four Essential Terms Encountered in Financial Accounting

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Define “asset” and provide examples found in financial reporting.
  2. Define “liability” and provide examples found in financial reporting.
  3. Define “revenue” and provide examples found in financial reporting.
  4. Define “expense” and provide examples found in financial reporting.

Assets, Liabilities, Revenues, and Expenses

Question: Attaining a thorough understanding of financial accounting and its underlying standards is a worthwhile endeavor especially if a person hopes to become successful at making decisions about businesses or other organizations. Where should the journey to gain knowledge of financial accounting and its principles begin?

 

Answer: The study of a language usually starts with basic terminology. That is also an appropriate point of entry for an exploration into financial accounting. Consequently, four fundamental terms are introduced here in this section. Knowledge of these words is essential in gaining an understanding of accounting because they serve as the foundation for a significant portion of the financial information provided by any organization.

To illustrate, when examining the financial statements presented by Sears (formally known as Sears Holdings Corporation) for January 29, 2011, and the year then ended, four monetary balances immediately stand out because of their enormous size. On this date, the corporation reported $24.3 billion in assetsProbable future economic benefits owned or controlled by an organization. along with $15.6 billion in liabilitiesProbable future sacrifices of economic benefits arising from present obligations; the debts of an organization.. During that year, Sears generated revenuesMeasures of the increases in or inflows of net assets (assets minus liabilities) resulting from the sale of goods and services. of $43.3 billion and incurred expensesMeasures of decreases in or outflows of net assets (assets minus liabilities) incurred in connection with the generation of revenues. of $43.2 billion.

  • Assets
  • Liabilities
  • Revenues
  • Expenses

There are thousands of words and concepts found in accounting. No terms are more crucial to a comprehensive understanding of the reporting process than these four. Almost all discussions concerning financial information, whether practical or theoretical, come back to one or more of these words.

Definition of the Term “Asset”

Question: The first essential term presented here is “asset.” Is an asset a complicated accounting concept? What general information is conveyed to a decision maker by the term “asset”?

 

Answer: Simply put, an asset is a probable future economic benefit that an organization either owns or controls.This is one of the opening chapters in an introductory financial accounting textbook. Definitions are somewhat simplified here so that they will be more understandable to students who are just beginning their exploration of accounting. Many terms and definitions will be expanded in later chapters of this textbook or in upper-level financial accounting courses. On January 29, 2011, Sears reported holding over $24.3 billion of these economic benefits. If a customer walks into one of the company’s retail stores, many of these assets are easy to spot. The building itself may well be owned by Sears and certainly provides a probable future economic benefit by allowing the company to display merchandise and make sales. Other visible assets are likely to include cash registers, the cash held in those machines, available merchandise from jewelry to car tires to children’s clothing (usually referred to as inventoryA current asset bought or manufactured for the purpose of selling in order to generate revenue. in financial accounting), shopping carts, delivery trucks, and the shelves and display cases. Each of those assets is acquired with the hope that it will help Sears prosper in the future.

Examples of Typical Assets

Question: All decision makers who evaluate the financial health and future prospects of an organization should be interested in learning about its assets because those balances reflect the economic resources held at the present time. This is valuable information. What are some of the largest asset balances that a business like Sears is likely to report?

 

Answer: Every business has its own particular mix of assets. Virtually all have cash and accounts receivable (money due from customers). Many also have inventory (merchandise held for resale). The size and type of other assets will vary significantly based on the company and the industry in which it operates.

However, as a result of financial reporting and the existence of the Internet, such information is readily available to anyone wanting to learn about virtually any business. The assets are reported in the financial statements. As of January 29, 2011, the following four assets were reported by Sears as having the highest dollar amounts. Each of these asset categories will be discussed in detail later in this textbook.

Merchandise inventories $9.1 billion
Buildings and improvements $6.3 billion
Trade names and other intangible assets $3.1 billion
Furniture, fixtures, and equipment $2.9 billion

Test Yourself

Question:

Alice Roanoke has decided to start an Internet business to provide expert financial advice to customers who sign up and pay a monthly fee. She hires Matt Showalter, a renowned expert in setting up investment strategies. She rents a building, paying for the next two years in advance. She also buys several large computers and a small library of books on investing and providing financial advice. Which of the following is not an asset to her new company?

  1. Having Showalter as an employee
  2. Owning the investment books
  3. Paying the rent on the building for the subsequent two-year period
  4. Acquiring the computers

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: Having Showalter as an employee.

Explanation:

An asset is a future economic benefit that an organization owns or controls. A person cannot be owned or controlled and therefore is not deemed an asset for reporting purposes regardless of how smart or helpful the person is. Showalter could quit tomorrow. Company officials cannot force him to work for them; slavery was outlawed approximately 150 years ago. The books, the building, and the computers all have future economic benefit, and the company does have ownership or control.

Definition of the Term “Liability”

Question: As of January 29, 2011, Sears also reports owing more than $15.6 billion in liabilities. Does this figure reflect the total amount that the reporting company will eventually have to pay to outside parties? What does the balance reported as liabilities represent?

 

Answer: A more formal definition of a liability is that it is a probable future sacrifice of economic benefits arising from present obligations, but, for coverage here at the introductory level, liabilities can be viewed as the debts of the organization.

The $15.6 billion liability total disclosed by Sears most likely includes (1) amounts owed to the vendors who supply merchandise to the company’s stores, (2) notes due to banks as a result of loans, (3) income tax obligations, and (4) balances to be paid to employees, utility companies, advertising agencies, and the like. The amount of such liabilities owed by many businesses can be staggering. Walmart, for example, disclosed approximately $109 billion in liabilities as of January 31, 2011. Even that amount pales in comparison to the $627 billion liability total reported by General Electric at the end of 2010. To ensure that a fairly presented portrait is shown to decision makers, businesses such as SearsWalmart, and General Electric must make certain that the reported data contain no material misstatements. Thus, all the information that is provided about liabilities should be based on the rules and principles to be found in U.S. GAAP.

Another term that is often encountered in financial reporting is “net assets.” The net asset total for an organization is simply its assets (future benefits) less its liabilities (debts). This balance is also known as “equity” in reference to the owners’ rights to all assets in excess of the amount owed on liabilities. A business’s net assets will increase if assets go up or if liabilities decrease. Changes in net assets show growth (or shrinkage) in the size of the organization over time. For example, IBM reported net assets of $22.7 billion at the end of 2009 (assets of $109.0 billion and liabilities of $86.3 billion). That number had risen to $23.2 billion by the end of 2010 (assets of $113.5 billion and liabilities of $90.3 billion). The ability of this business to increase its net assets by $500 million ($33.2 billion less $32.7 billion) during 2010 is certainly of interest to every decision maker analyzing the financial health and future prospects of IBM.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Jackson Corporation is a women’s clothing store located in Upper Lakeview. On Friday, the company’s accountant is looking at four recent events so that the amount of liabilities can be reported as of the end of this week. Which of the following is not a liability for reporting purposes?

  1. A new sales person was hired this morning, will begin work on the following Monday, and will be paid $600 per week.
  2. Twenty dresses were received three days ago at a cost of $80 each, but they will not be sold until next week and payment will be made then.
  3. The cost of renting the company’s sales room is $1,300 per week, but the amount for this week will not be paid until next week.
  4. The company borrowed $900,000 to build a new store, but construction will not start until next week.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice a: A new sales person was hired this morning, will begin work on the following Monday, and will be paid $600 per week.

Explanation:

With the dresses, the rent, and the loan, an event has already occurred that created an obligation. The dresses have been received, the room has been used, and money from the loan has been collected. In each case, the company has a debt. The new employee has not yet begun the job, so no debt has accrued. A commitment has been made to pay this person, but only if work is done. At that time, as the sales person works, the company does begin to have a debt (or liability) that must be reported.

Definition of the Term “Revenue”

Question: In financial accounting, a business or other organization reports its assets, which are probable future economic benefits, such as buildings, equipment, and cash. Liabilities (debts) are also included in the financial information being disclosed. Both of these terms seem relatively straightforward. The third essential term to be discussed at this time—revenue—is one that initially appears to be a bit less clear. Sears reported that its stores generated revenues of $43.3 billion in 2010 alone. What does that tell a decision maker about SearsWhat information is conveyed by the reporting of a revenue balance?

 

Answer: “Revenue” is a measure of the financial impact on an organization that results from a particular process. This process is a sale. A customer enters a Sears store at the local mall and pays $100 to purchase several items, such as hammers, shirts, socks, and scarves. Sears receives an asset—possibly $100 in cash. This asset inflow into the business results from a sale and is called revenue. Revenue is not an asset; it is a measure of the increase in net assets created by the sale of inventory and services. Thus, for The Coca-Cola Company, revenues are derived (net assets are increased) from the sale of soft drinks. For The Hershey Company, revenues come from sales of chocolate whereas The Walt Disney Company generates revenue by selling admission to its amusement parks and movies.

For timing purposes, as will be discussed in a later chapter, revenue is recognized when the earning process takes place. That is normally when the goods or services are delivered. Therefore, throughout each day of the year, Sears makes sales to customers and accepts cash, checks, or credit card payments. The reported revenue figure is merely a total of all sales made during the period, clearly relevant information to any decision maker attempting to determine the financial prospects of this company. During 2010, the multitude of Sears stores located both inside and outside the United States sold inventory and services and received $43.3 billion in assets in exchange. That is the information communicated by the reported revenue balance. To reiterate, this figure is not exact, precise, accurate, or correct. However, according to Sears, $43.3 billion is a fairly presented total determined according to the rules of U.S. GAAP so that it contains no material misstatement. Any outside party analyzing Sears should be able to rely on this number with confidence in making possible finanical decisions about this business as a whole.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Rowe Company is a restaurant in a remote area of Tennessee. The owner buys a steak from a local farmer for $7. The chef is paid $2 to cook this meat. A waitress is paid $1 to deliver the steak to a customer. The customer is charged $18, which is paid in cash. The customer leaves a tip for the waitress of $3. According to U.S. GAAP, what amount of revenue should the Rowe Company report in connection with this series of events?

  1. $8
  2. $10
  3. $13
  4. $18

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: $18.

Explanation:

The term “revenue” refers to the increase in net assets brought into an organization as a result of a sale. There is a lot of interesting and relevant information here. However, only the payment made by the customer to the business is reported as revenue because that is the increase in net assets brought into the company by the sale.

Test Yourself

Question:

The McCutcheon Company is a restaurant in a remote area of Montana. The owner buys a steak from a local farmer for $7. On Tuesday, the chef is paid $2 to cook this meat. A waitress is paid $1 to deliver the steak to a customer. The customer is charged $18. The customer does not have any money with him and tells the owner that he will pay the amount in the following week. The owner knows the customer and allows the payment to be delayed. According to U.S. GAAP, what amount of revenue should the McCutcheon Company report on Tuesday when the sale is made?

  1. Zero
  2. $8
  3. $10
  4. $18

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: $18.

Explanation:

The term “revenue” refers to the increase in net assets as a result of the sale of a good or service. Here, the business received a promise to pay that is viewed as an asset because it has future economic benefit. Although no cash was collected, the business did gain an $18 asset (a receivable) as a result of the sale. Revenue was $18. Some very small organizations use cash systems that only recognize revenues when cash is received, but they are not reporting according to the rules of U.S. GAAP.

Definition of the Term “Expense”

Question: That leaves “expense” as the last of the four essential accounting terms introduced at this point. Sears reported $43.2 billion in total expenses during 2010. This figure apparently is important information that helps paint a proper portrait of the company, a portrait that can be used by decision makers. What is an expense?

 

Answer: An expense is an outflow or reduction in net assetsAn expense often causes an immediate reduction in assets, especially if cash is paid. Frequently, though, an expense creates an increase in liabilities instead of a reduction in assets. That happens if the cost is incurred but payment is delayed until a later date. In either case—the reduction of an asset or the creation of a liability—the amount of net assets held by the organization decreases as a result of the expense. that was incurred by an organization in hopes of generating revenue. To illustrate, assume that—at the end of a week—a local business pays its employees $12,000 for the work performed during the previous few days. A $12,000 salary expense must be reported. Cash (an asset) was reduced by that amount, and this cost was incurred because the company employed those individuals to help generate revenues. That is an expense. The same general logic can be applied in recording insurance expense, rent expense, advertising expense, utility expense (such as for electricity and water), and many other similar costs. For each, net assets are reduced (assets go down or liabilities go up) to help create sales.

In some ways, expenses are the opposite of revenues that measure the inflows or increases in net assets that are created by sales. Expense figures reflect outflows or decreases in net assets incurred in hopes of generating revenues.

Test Yourself

Question:

The Hathaway Corporation started business on January 1, Year One, as a restaurant in Toledo, Ohio. During Year One, the company paid $10,000 each month to rent a building to serve as its kitchen and dining room. Because operations were so successful, on the final day of Year One, the company paid $150,000 to buy a new building for the restaurant. The company hopes to move over the New Year’s Day holiday from the old rental facility to the newly acquired one. In connection with these events, how much should Hathaway report as its total expenses for Year One?

  1. Zero
  2. $120,000
  3. $150,000
  4. $270,000

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: $120,000.

Explanation:

The company’s net assets decreased by $10,000 per month as a result of renting the first space. The benefit from that rental has passed because the restaurant was used at that time to generate revenue. That is an expense. In contrast, the new building is an asset. In acquiring the building, one asset (cash) was exchanged for another (building). Net assets did not change; one asset went up and one went down. Thus, no expense resulted. The expense for Year One is $120,000 in rent.

Four Essential Terms Encountered in Financial Accounting

Question: To reiterate, four terms are basic to an understanding of financial accounting. Almost any coverage of accounting starts with these four. What is the meaning of asset, liability, revenue, and expense?

 

Answer:

  • Asset. A probable future economic benefit owned or controlled by the reporting company, such as inventory, land, or equipment.
  • Liability. A probable future economic sacrifice or, in simple terms, a debt.
  • Revenue. A measure of the inflow or increase in net assets generated by the sales made by a business. It is a reflection of the amounts brought in by the sales process during a specified period of time.
  • Expense. A measure of the outflow or reduction in net assets caused by a business’s attempt to generate revenue and includes many common costs, such as rent expense, salary expense, and insurance expense.

Key Takeaway

A strong knowledge of basic accounting terminology is essential for successful communication to take place in the reporting of financial information. Four terms provide a foundational core around which much of the accounting process is constructed. Assets are probable future economic benefits owned or controlled by an organization. Assets typically include cash, inventory, land, buildings, and equipment. Liabilities are the debts of the reporting entity, such as salary payable, rent payable, and notes payable. Revenue figures indicate the increase in a company’s net assets (its assets minus its liabilities) created by the sale of goods or services. Revenues are the lifeblood of any organization. Without the inflow of cash or receivables that comes from generating sales, a business cannot exist for long. Expenses are decreases in net assets that are incurred in hopes of generating revenues. Expenses incurred by most companies run a full gamut from rent and salary to insurance and electricity.

Talking with a Real Investing Pro (Continued)

Following is a continuation of our interview with Kevin G. Burns.

 

Question: Financial accountants tend to place a heavy emphasis on the importance of generally accepted accounting principles (U.S. GAAP) to the world of business. After nearly three decades as an investment advisor, what is your opinion of the relevance of U.S. GAAP?

Kevin Burns: Before the accounting scandals of the late 1990s—such as Enron and WorldCom—financial information that adhered to U.S. GAAP was trusted worldwide. Investors around the globe took comfort in a standard that had such a great reputation for integrity. In the 1990s, though, I felt that U.S. GAAP become somewhat muddied because investors wanted to depend too heavily on one or two figures rather than judging the company as a whole. In the last several years, FASB has moved back to stressing clearer transparency for reported information. That objective enables investors to better see and understand the organization standing behind those statements. That is very important in order to maintain investor confidence.

As for the current state of the U.S. GAAP, it is certainly superior to the majority of the world’s standards. Unfortunately, it is getting more complicated every year, which is not always a good goal.

 

Question: Your answer is quite interesting because of the push in recent years toward International Financial Reporting Standards as a single global set of standards for all businesses. Some people love the idea of the same accounting rules for everyone. Others hate the idea that IFRS could replace U.S. GAAP. What is your feeling?

KB: For an investor, that is a very interesting question. Given that we truly are a global economy I would love a worldwide standard but only if it was equal to or more transparent than the current U.S. standards. As an investment advisor, I would love to be able to compare business valuations here and in China (for example) side by side and have confidence that I am truly comparing apples to apples.

 

Question: When you begin to study the financial data reported by a company that you are analyzing as an investment possibility, which do you look at first: revenues, expenses, assets, or liabilities?

KB: For me, assets have always been the most important determination in the investments that I have chosen. However, that is because I have always been strictly a value investor. There are many different styles of investing. Value investors look at the value of a company’s assets and then look for bargains based on current stock market prices. In comparison, growth investors look at earnings momentum and don’t care too much about asset values. They like to see a consistent rise in profitability each year. Over the years, being a value investor has worked well for my clients and me.

Video Clip

(click to see video)

Professor Joe Hoyle talks about the five most important points in Chapter 2 “What Should Decision Makers Know in Order to Make Good Decisions about an Organization?”.

2.5 End-of-Chapter Exercises

Questions

  1. Why is the information reported by financial accounting not necessarily correct or accurate?
  2. What is a misstatement?
  3. In reference to a misstatement, what is meant by materiality?
  4. How is materiality determined?
  5. When is a misstatement considered fraud?
  6. Provide several examples of uncertainties faced by businesses that can impact the financial reporting process.
  7. Why is financial accounting compared to the painting of a portrait?
  8. Why is financial accounting compared to a language?
  9. What is U.S. GAAP and how has U.S. GAAP developed over the years?
  10. Why is U.S. GAAP so important to the capital market system in the United States?
  11. Why is there a push to accept International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as the universal standards for financial accounting?
  12. Define “asset” and give several examples.
  13. Define “liability” and give several examples.
  14. What is meant by the term “net assets?”
  15. Define “revenue.”
  16. Define “expense.”

True or False

  1. ____ Most countries require companies that operate within their borders to follow U.S. GAAP in preparing their financial statements.
  2. ____ Companies face many uncertainties when preparing their financial statements.
  3. ____ If a company reports equipment costing $122,756,255, that is the amount that it actually did cost.
  4. ____ A liability is defined as a probable future economic benefit that an organization owns or controls.
  5. ____ Creation of U.S. GAAP is primarily done by the U.S. government.
  6. ____ IFRS has been in wide use in many countries since 1976.
  7. ____ In order for investors to properly evaluate the financial information of a business or other organization, it is vital that the financial information be exact.
  8. ____ A corporation reports sales of $33,453,750 when the actual figure was $33,453,843. This information contained a misstatement.
  9. ____ Materiality depends on the size of the organization.
  10. ____ A material misstatement that is made in a set of financial statements is acceptable as long as there is only one.
  11. ____ A misstatement has to be caused by fraud.
  12. ____ The reporting of a pending lawsuit is relatively simple.
  13. ____ One business has a misstatement of $10,000 that is caused by fraud. It also has another misstatement of $10,000 that is caused by error. If one of these misstatements is material, then they both are.
  14. ____ Only accountants need to understand the terminology that is found in accounting.
  15. ____ For a business or other organization, an employee is an example of an asset.
  16. ____ A sales transaction is normally considered revenue even if cash is not collected until the following year.
  17. ____ The purchase of a building for $2.4 million is recorded as an expense.

Multiple Choice

  1. Which of the following is not an example of an uncertainty that companies often face in their financial reporting?

    1. Sales that have not yet been collected in cash
    2. Warranties
    3. A loan due to a bank
    4. A lawsuit that has been filed against the company
  2. Which of the following is true about U.S. GAAP?

    1. U.S. GAAP has been developed over the past ten years.
    2. U.S. GAAP allows financial statement users to compare the financial information of companies around the world.
    3. U.S. GAAP helps accountants achieve an exact presentation of a company’s financial results.
    4. U.S. GAAP helps investors and creditors evaluate the financial health of a business.

    Questions 3, 4, and 5 are based on the following:

    Mike Gomez owns a music store called Mike’s Music and More. The store has inventory for sale that includes pianos, guitars, and other musical instruments. Mike rents the building in which his store is located, but owns the equipment and fixtures inside it. Last week, Mike’s Music made sales of $3,000. Some of the sales were made in cash. Some were made to customers who have an account with Mike’s Music and are billed at the end of the month. Last month, Mike’s Music borrowed $10,000 from a local bank to expand the amount of inventory being sold.

  3. Which of the following is not an asset owned by Mike’s Music?

    1. The inventory of musical instruments
    2. The building in which the store is located
    3. The amount owed to Mike’s Music by its customers
    4. The equipment and fixtures in the store
  4. Which of the following is a liability to Mike’s Music?

    1. The loan amount that must be repaid to the bank
    2. The amount owed to Mike’s Music by its customers
    3. The sales Mike’s Music made last week
    4. The cash collected from customers on the sales made last week
  5. Which of the following statements is true?

    1. Mike’s Music is too small for any outside party to care about its financial information.
    2. The sales Mike’s Music made last week are considered revenue.
    3. The intent of Mike’s Music to expand is an asset.
    4. The sales Mike’s Music made on credit last week is viewed as a liability.
  6. The Acme Company reports financial information to potential investors. The information is said to be “presented fairly according to U.S. GAAP.” What does that mean?

    1. The information contains no material misstatements according to the rules and standards of U.S. GAAP.
    2. The information is correct and follows the rules of U.S. GAAP.
    3. The information contains neither errors nor fraudulent numbers as specified by U.S. GAAP.
    4. The information is comparable to that reported by other companies around the world.
  7. Which of the following statements is true?

    1. Accounting rules referred to as IFRS are more complex than those existing within U.S. GAAP.
    2. Accounting rules referred to as IFRS have been developed for as long a period of time as the rules that make up U.S. GAAP.
    3. Accounting rules referred to as IFRS have become dominant in the world of accounting outside of the United States.
    4. Accounting rules referred to as IFRS will become mandatory in the United States in 2014.
  8. The Remingshire Corporation paid $2,000 at the end of the week to employees who worked for the business during that week. The corporation also paid another $3,000 at the end of the week for rent on the retail space that was occupied that week. Which of the following statements is true?

    1. The $2,000 is an expense for this period, but the $3,000 is not.
    2. The $3,000 is an expense for this period, but the $2,000 is not.
    3. Neither the $2,000 nor the $3,000 is an expense for this period.
    4. Both the $2,000 and the $3,000 are expenses for this period.
  9. Officials for the Boston Company have just borrowed $25,000 on a three-year loan from a bank. Which of the following is true?

    1. The company has an expense as a result of this transaction.
    2. The company’s net assets have gone down as a result of this transaction.
    3. The company’s net asserts have gone up as a result of this transaction.
    4. No change took place in this company’s net assets as a result of this transaction.

Video Problems

Professor Joe Hoyle discusses the answers to these two problems at the links that are indicated. After formulating your answers, watch each video to see how Professor Hoyle answers these questions.

  1. Your roommate is an English major. The roommate knows that you are taking a course in financial accounting. The roommate has never once considered taking a class in business and is interested in what you are learning. One evening, while listening to some music on the Internet, you mention that financial accounting is a type of language. The roommate is completely baffled by this assertion and wants to know how anything in accounting could possibly resemble a language such as English. How would you respond?

  2. Your uncle has worked for a large office supply business for the past twenty years. He is responsible for a small team of employees who do the interior design work for each of the company’s stores located around the country. One day he sends you the following e-mail:. “As a reward for twenty years of service, my company has offered to sell me one thousand shares of their capital stock for $23 per share. That’s $23,000, and that is a lot of money. I’ve never been interested in this aspect of business, but I don’t want to make a dumb decision. The company furnished me with a set of financial statements that are just full of numbers and odd terms. At one point, I found a statement that this information was presented fairly in conformity with U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles. I understand you are taking a financial accounting course in college. What is meant by ‘presented fairly’? What is meant by ‘U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles’? Most important, why is this important to me as I look through financial statements in hopes of making a good decision?”

Problems

  1. Mark each of the following with an (A) to indicate it is an asset, an (L) to indicate it is a liability, an (R) to indicate it is revenue, or an (E) to indicate it is an expense.

    1. ____ Cash
    2. ____ Building
    3. ____ Loan due to the bank
    4. ____ Inventory
    5. ____ Salary expense
    6. ____ Rent expense
    7. ____ Amounts owed to employees for work done
    8. ____ Equipment
    9. ____ Amounts owed to suppliers
    10. ____ Sales
  2. For each of the following, indicate at least one area of uncertainty that would impact the financial reporting of the balance.

    1. Inventory
    2. Receivable from a customer
    3. Equipment
    4. Income taxes payable
    5. Liability from lawsuit
  3. The Winslow Corporation operates a jewelry store in Topeka, Kansas. The business has recently issued a set of financial statements. One asset, inventory, was reported at $1.5 million. Later, it was determined that this balance was misstated. Describe several reasons why this misstatement might have happened.
  4. For each of the following events, indicate whether the net assets of the reporting company increase, decrease, or remain the same.

    1. The company owes $1,000 for some purchases made last month and pays that amount now.
    2. The company borrows $220,000 from a bank on a loan.
    3. The company sells a service to a customer for $30,000 with payment made immediately.
    4. The company sells a service to a customer for $40,000, but payment will not be made for several months.
    5. The company pays $8,000 in cash for several pieces of equipment.
    6. The company rented a large truck for one day for $500, which it paid at the end of the work day.

Research Assignments

  1. Go to http://www.aboutmcdonalds.com/. At the McDonald’s Web site, click on “Investors” at the left of the page. Click on “Annual Reports” on the right of the next screen. Finally, click on “2010 Annual Report” to download. Answer the following questions:

    1. On page 26 of the 2010 annual report for McDonald’s, you will see a list of revenues and expenses. What is the largest revenue and what is the amount? What is the largest expense and what is the amount?
    2. On page 27 of the 2010 annual report for McDonald’s, you will see a list of assets and liabilities. What is the largest asset and what is the amount? What is the largest liability and what is the amount?
  2. IBM Corporation provides information about accounting to help decision makers understand the financial statements that the business provides. Go to the following URL and read the sections presented on “Assets” and on “Liabilities.”

    http://www.ibm.com/investor/help/guide/statement-basics.wss#assets

    For the coverage of assets, and then also for liabilities, list two pieces of information that you already knew based on the coverage here in Chapter 2 “What Should Decision Makers Know in Order to Make Good Decisions about an Organization?”. Next, list one piece of information about both assets and liabilities that you learned from the IBM essay.

  3. Go to http://www.google.com/finance/. In the box labeled “Get quotes,” enter “Johnson & Johnson.” On the page that appears, scroll down and find “Investor Relations” on the right side. Click on that link and then click on “Annual Reports” on the left side of the next page. Click on “2010 Annual Report” in the middle of the next page that appears. After the annual report downloads, scroll to page 41. You should find a listing of the company’s assets and liabilities.

    1. What is the total amount reported for the company’s assets?
    2. What is the total amount reported for the company’s liabilities?
    3. Determine the net assets for Johnson & Johnson.

Chapter 1: What Is Financial Accounting, and Why Is It Important?

Video Clip

(click to see video)

In this video, Professor Joe Hoyle introduces the essential points covered in Chapter 1 “What Is Financial Accounting, and Why Is It Important?”.

1.1 Making Good Financial Decisions about an Organization

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Define “financial accounting.”
  2. Understand the connection between financial accounting and the communication of information about an organization.
  3. Explain the importance of gaining an understanding of financial accounting.
  4. List decisions that an individual might make about an organization.
  5. Differentiate between financial accounting and managerial accounting.
  6. Provide reasons for individuals to study the financial accounting information supplied by their employers.

Financial Accounting and Information

Question: In the June 30, 2011, edition of The Wall Street Journal, numerous headlines described the recent activities of various business organizations. Here are just a few:

“TMX and LSE Give Up on Planned Merger”

“Ally Financial Faces Charge for Mortgage Losses”

“HomeAway Jumps 49% in Debut”

“Ad-Seller Acquiring Myspace for a Song”

Millions of individuals around the world read such stories each day with rapt interest. From teen-agers to elderly billionaires, this type of information is analyzed obsessively. How are these people able to understand all the data and details being provided? For most, the secret is straightforward: a strong knowledge of financial accounting.

This textbook provides an introduction to financial accounting. A logical place to begin such an exploration is to ask the obvious question: What is financial accounting?

Answer: In simplest terms, financial accountingThe communication of financial information about a business or other type of organization to external audiences to help them assess its financial health and future prospects. is the communication of information about a business or other type of organization (such as a charity or government) so that individuals can assess its financial health and future prospects. No single word is more relevant to financial accounting than “information.” Whether it is gathering monetary information about a specific organization, putting that information into a format designed to enhance communication, or analyzing the information that is conveyed, financial accounting is intertwined with information.

In today’s world, information is king. Financial accounting provides the rules and structure for the conveyance of financial information about businesses (and other organizations) to maximize clarity and understanding. Although a wide array of organizations present financial information to interested parties, this book primarily focuses on the reporting of businesses because that is where the widest use of financial accounting occurs.

organization → reports information based on the principles of financial accounting → interested individuals assess financial health and future prospects

At any point in time, some businesses are poised to prosper while others teeter on the verge of failure. Many people want to be able to evaluate the degree of success achieved to date by a particular organization as well as its prospects for the future. They seek information and the knowledge that comes from understanding that information. How well did The Coca Cola Company do last year, and how well should this business do in the coming year? Those are simple questions to ask, but the answers can make the difference between earning millions and losing millions.

Financial accounting provides data that these individuals need and want.

Financial Accounting and Wise Decision Making

Question: Every semester, most college students are enrolled in several courses as well as participate in numerous outside activities. All of these compete for the hours that make up each person’s day. Why should a student invest valuable time to learn the principles of financial accounting? Why should anyone be concerned with the information communicated about an organization? What makes financial accounting important?

Answer: Many possible benefits can be gained from acquiring a strong knowledge of financial accounting because it provides the accepted methods for communicating relevant information about an organization. In this book, justification for the serious study that is required to master this subject matter is simple and straightforward. Obtaining a working knowledge of financial accounting and its underlying principles enables a person to understand the information conveyed about an organization so that better decisions can be made.

Around the world each day, millions of individuals make critical judgments about the businesses and other organizations they encounter. Developing the ability to analyze financial information and then making use of that knowledge to arrive at sound decisions can be critically important. Whether an organization is as gigantic as Walmart or as tiny as a local convenience store, individuals have many, varied reasons for studying the information that is available.

As just a single example, a recent college graduate looking at full-time employment opportunities might want to determine the probability that Company A will have a brighter economic future than Company B. Although such decisions can never be correct 100 percent of the time, knowledge of financial accounting and the information being communicated greatly increases the likelihood of success. As Kofi Annan, former secretary-general of the United Nations, has said, “Knowledge is power. Information is liberating.”See http://www.deepsky.com/~madmagic/kofi.html.

Thus, the ultimate purpose of this book is to provide students with a rich understanding of the rules and nuances of financial accounting so they can evaluate available information about organizations and then make good decisions. In the world of business, most successful individuals have developed this ability and are able to use it to achieve their investing and career objectives.

Common Decisions about Organizations

Question: Knowledge of financial accounting assists individuals in making informed decisions about businesses and other organizations. What kinds of evaluations are typically made? For example, assume that a former student—one who recently graduated from college—has been assigned the task of analyzing financial data provided by the Acme Company. What real-life decisions could a person be facing where an understanding of financial accounting would be beneficial?

Answer: The number of possible judgments that an individual might need to make about a business or other organization is close to unlimited. However, many of these decisions deal with the current financial health and prospects for future success. In order to analyze available data to make such assessments, a working knowledge of financial accounting is invaluable. The more in-depth the understanding is of those principles, the more likely the person will be able to use the information to arrive at the best possible choices. Common examples include the following:

  • Should a bank loan money to the Acme Company? The college graduate might be employed by a bank to work in its corporate lending department. Assume, for example, that the Acme Company is a local business that has applied to the bank for a large loan so that it can expand. The graduate has been instructed by bank management to prepare an assessment of Acme to determine if it is likely to be financially healthy in the future so that it will be able to repay the borrowed money when due. A correct decision to provide the loan eventually earns a profit for the bank because Acme will be required to pay an extra amount (known as interestThe charge for using money over time, often associated with long-term loans; even if not specifically mentioned in the debt agreement, financial accounting rules require it to be computed and reported based on a reasonable rate.) on the money borrowed. Conversely, an incorrect analysis of the information could lead to a substantial loss if the loan is granted and Acme is unable to fulfill its obligation. Bank officials must weigh the potential for profit against the risk of loss. That is a daily challenge in virtually all businesses. The former student’s career with the bank might depend on the ability to analyze financial accounting data and then make appropriate choices about the actions to be taken. Should a loan be made to this company?
  • Should another business make sales on credit to the Acme Company? The college graduate might hold a job as a credit analyst for a manufacturing company that sells its products to retail stores. Assume that Acme is a relatively new retailer that wants to buy goods (inventory) on credit from this manufacturer to sell in its stores. The former student must judge whether to permit Acme to buy merchandise now but wait until later to remit the money. If payments are received on a timely basis, the manufacturer will have found a new outlet for its merchandise. Profits will likely increase. Unfortunately, Acme could also make expensive purchases but then be unable to make payment, creating significant losses for the manufacturer. Again, the possibility of profit must be measured against the chance for loss.
  • Should an individual invest money to become one of the owners of the Acme Company? The college graduate might be employed by a firm that provides financial advice to its clients. Assume that the firm is presently considering whether to recommend acquisition of ownership shares of Acme as a good investment strategy. The former student has been assigned to gather and evaluate relevant financial information as a basis for this decision. If Acme is poised to become larger and more profitable, its ownership shares will likely rise in value over time, earning money for the firm’s clients. Conversely, if the prospects for Acme appear to be dim, the value of these shares might start to drop (possibly precipitously) so that the investment firm should avoid suggesting the purchase of an ownership interest in this business.

Success in life—especially in business—frequently results from being able to make appropriate decisions. Many economic choices, such as those described earlier, depend on a person’s ability to understand and make use of financial information about organizations. That financial information is produced and presented in accordance with the rules and principles underlying financial accounting.

Test Yourself

Question:

James Esposito is a college student who has just completed a class in financial accounting. He earned a good grade and wants to make use of his knowledge. He wants to invest $10,000 that he recently inherited from a distant uncle. In which of the following decisions is Esposito most likely to have used his understanding of financial accounting?

  1. He decides to deposit the money in a bank to earn interest.
  2. He decides to buy ownership shares in Microsoft Corporation in hopes that they will appreciate in value.
  3. He decides to trade in his old car and buy a new one that uses less gasoline.
  4. He decides to buy a new computer so that he can make money by typing papers for his classmates.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: He decides to buy ownership shares in Microsoft Corporation in hopes that they will appreciate in value.

Explanation:

All of these are potentially good economic decisions. However, financial accounting focuses on conveying data to help reflect the financial health and prospects of organizations. His decision to buy ownership shares of Microsoft rather than any other company indicates that he believes that Microsoft is poised to grow and prosper. This decision is exactly the type that investors around the world make each day with the use of their knowledge of financial accounting.

Financial Accounting versus Managerial Accounting

Question: A great number of possible decisions could be addressed in connection with any business. Is an understanding of financial accounting relevant to all decisions made about an organization? What about the following?

  • Should a business buy a building to serve as its new headquarters or rent a facility instead?
  • What price should a data processing company charge customers for its services?
  • Should advertisements to alert the public about a new product be carried on the Internet or on television?

Answer: Decisions such as these three are extremely important for the success of any organization. However, these examples are not made about the reporting organization. Rather, they are made within the organization in connection with some element of its operations.

The general term “accounting” refers to the communication of financial information for decision-making purposes. Accounting is then further subdivided into (a) financial accounting and (b) managerial accountingThe communication of financial information within an organization so internal decisions can be made in an appropriate manner..Tax accounting is another distinct branch of accounting. It is less focused on decision making and more on providing information needed by a business to comply with all government rules and regulations. Even in tax accounting, though, decision making is important as businesses seek to take all possible legal actions to minimize tax payments. Financial accounting is the subject explored in this textbook. It focuses on conveying relevant data (primarily to external parties) about an organization (such as Motorola Mobility or Starbucks) as a whole so that wise decisions can be made. Thus, questions such as the following all fall within the discussion of financial accounting:

  • Do we loan money to the Acme Company?
  • Do we sell on credit to the Acme Company?
  • Do we recommend that our clients buy the ownership shares of the Acme Company?

These decisions pertain to an overall evaluation of the financial health and future prospects of the Acme Company.

Managerial accounting is the subject of other books and other courses. This second branch of accounting refers to the communication of information within an organization so that internal decisions (such as whether to buy or rent a building) can be made in an appropriate manner. Individuals studying an organization as a whole have different goals than do internal parties making operational decisions. Thus, many unique characteristics have developed in connection with each of these two branches of accounting. Financial accounting and managerial accounting have evolved independently over the decades to address the specific needs of the users being served and the decisions being made. This textbook is designed to explain those attributes that are fundamental to attaining a useable understanding of financial accounting.

It is not that one of these areas of accounting is more useful or more important than the other. Financial accounting and managerial accounting have simply been created to achieve different objectives. They both do their jobs well, but they do not have the same jobs.

Test Yourself

Question:

Janet Wineston is vice president of the State Bank of Main Street. Here are four decisions that she made at her job today. Which of these decisions was likely to have required her to make use of her knowledge of financial accounting?

  1. She gave one of the tellers who works at the bank a pay raise.
  2. She hired an advertising consultant to produce a television commercial for the bank.
  3. She granted a $300,000 loan to one company but not another.
  4. She decided on the rate of interest that would be paid to customers on a new type of savings account.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice c: She granted a $300,000 loan to one company but not another.

Explanation:

Financial accounting focuses on decisions about organizations. When money was loaned to one company but not the other, Wineston was making decisions about both. She must have viewed one as more financially healthy than the other. Her other three decisions all relate to internal operations. Accounting information can certainly help in arriving at proper choices for these three, but it is managerial accounting that is designed to produce the needed data for such decisions.

Financial Accounting Information and Company Employees

Question: Financial accounting refers to the conveyance of information about an organization as a whole and is most frequently distributed to assist outside decision makers. Does a person who is employed by an organization care about the financial accounting data that is reported? Why should an employee in the marketing or personnel department of the Acme Company be interested in the financial information that this business generates and distributes?

Answer: Financial accounting is designed to portray the overall financial condition and prospects of an organization. Virtually every employee should be interested in studying that information to judge future employment prospects. A business that is doing well will possibly award larger pay raises or perhaps significant end-of-year cash bonuses. A financially healthy organization can afford to hire new employees, buy additional equipment, or pursue major new initiatives. Conversely, when a business is struggling and prospects are dim, employees might anticipate layoffs, pay cuts, or reductions in resources.

Thus, although financial accounting information is directed to outside decision makers, employees should be keenly interested in the financial health of their own organization. No one wants to be clueless as to whether their employer is headed for prosperity or bankruptcy. In reality, employees are often the most avid readers of the financial accounting information distributed by employers because the results can have such an immediate and direct impact on their jobs and, hence, their lives.

Key Takeaway

Financial accounting encompasses the rules and procedures covering the conveyance of monetary information to describe a business or other organization. Individuals who attain a sufficient level of knowledge of financial accounting can then utilize this information to make decisions based on the organization’s perceived financial health and future prospects. Such decisions might include assessing employment potential, lending money, granting credit, and buying or selling ownership shares. However, financial accounting does not address issues that are purely of an internal nature, such as whether an organization should buy or lease equipment or the level of pay raises. Information to guide such internal decisions is generated according to managerial accounting rules and procedures that are introduced in other books and courses. Although financial accounting is not directed toward the inner workings of an organization, most employees are interested in the resulting information because it helps them assess the future of their employer.

1.2 Incorporation and the Trading of Capital Shares

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. Define incorporation.
  2. Explain the popularity of investing in the capital stock of a corporation.
  3. Discuss the necessity and purpose of a board of directors.
  4. List the potential benefits gained from acquiring capital stock.

The Ownership Shares of an Incorporated Business

Question: In discussing possible decisions that could be made about a business organization, ownership shares were mentioned. Virtually every day, on television, in newspapers, or on the Internet, mention is made that the shares of one company or another have gone up or down in price because of trading on one of the stock markets. Why does a person acquire ownership shares of a business such as Capital One or Intel?

Answer: In the United States, as well as in many other countries, owners of a business can apply to the state government to become identified as an entity legally set apart from its owners. This process is referred to as incorporationLegal process by which owners of an organization apply to a state government to have it identified as an entity legally separate from its owners (a corporation); corporations are the legal form of most businesses of any size in the United States.. Therefore, a corporationAn organization that has been formally recognized by the state government as a separate legal entity so that it can sell ownership shares to raise money for capital expenditures and operations. is an organization that has been formally recognized by the state government as a separate legal entity that can act independently of its owners. A business that has not been incorporated is either a sole proprietorshipAn unincorporated business created, owned, and operated by a single individual; the business is not legally separate from its owner. (one owner) or a partnershipAn unincorporated business created, owned, and operated by more than one individual; the business is not legally separate from its owners. (more than one owner). These businesses are not separate from their ownership.

As will be discussed in detail in a later chapter, several advantages are gained from incorporation. One is especially important in connection with the study of financial accounting. A corporation has the ability to obtain monetary resources by selling (also known as issuing) capital shares that allow investors to become owners. They are then known as stockholdersIndividuals or organizations that hold the ownership shares of capital stock of a corporation; same as shareholders. or shareholdersIndividuals or organizations that hold the ownership shares of capital stock of a corporation; same as stockholders..

Millions of corporations operate in the United States. The Walt Disney Company and General Electric are just two well-known examples of corporations. They exist as legal entities completely distinct from the multitude of individuals and organizations that possess their ownership shares (also known as equity or capital stockOwnership (equity) shares of stock in a corporation that are issued to raise monetary financing for capital expenditures and operations.).

Any investor who acquires one or more shares of the capital stock of a corporation becomes an owner and has all of the rights that are specified by the state government or on the stock certificate. The number of shares and owners can be staggering. At the end of 2010, stockholders held over 2.3 billion shares of The Coca-Cola Company. Thus, possession of one share of the capital stock of The Coca-Cola Company provided a person with approximately a 1/2,300,000,000th part of the ownership.

One of the great advantages of incorporation is the ease by which most capital stock can be exchanged. For most companies, investors are able to buy or sell ownership shares on stock exchanges in a matter of moments. In contrast, sole proprietorships and partnerships rarely sell capital shares. Without the separation provided by incorporation, a clear distinction between owner and business does not exist. For example, debts incurred by a business that is a sole proprietorship or partnership may ultimately have to be satisfied by the owner personally. Thus, individuals tend to avoid making investments in unincorporated businesses unless they can be involved directly in the management. However, partnerships and sole proprietorships still remain popular because they are easy to create and offer possible income tax benefits as will be described in a later chapter.

If traded on a stock exchange, shares of the capital stock of a corporation continually go up and down in value based on myriad factors, including the perceived financial health and future prospects of the organization. As an example, during trading on July 1, 2011, the price of an ownership share of Intel rose by $0.37 to $22.53, while a share of Capital One went up by $0.98 to $52.65.

For countless individuals and groups around the world, the most popular method of investment is through the purchase and sell of these capital shares of corporate ownership. Although many other types of investment opportunities are available (such as the acquisition of gold or land), few come close to evoking the level of interest of capital stock.The most prevalent form of capital stock is common stock so that these two terms have come to be used somewhat interchangeably. As will be discussed in a later chapter, the capital stock of some corporations is made up of both common stock and preferred stock. On the New York Stock ExchangeOrganized stock market that efficiently matches buyers and sellers of capital stock at a mutually agreed-upon price allowing ownership in companies to change hands easily. The New York Stock Exchange is the largest stock exchange in the world followed by NASDAQ, the London Stock Exchange, the Tokyo Stock Exchange, and the Shanghai Stock Exchange. alone, billions of shares are bought and sold every business day at a wide range of prices. As of June 30, 2011, an ownership share of Sprint Nextel was trading for $5.39, while a single share of Berkshire Hathaway sold for $116,105.00.

Test Yourself

Question:

Ray Nesbitt owns a store in his hometown of Charlotte, North Carolina, that sells food and a variety of other goods. He has always operated this store as a sole proprietorship because he was the only owner. Recently, he went to his lawyer and began the legal process of turning his business into a corporation. Which of the following is the most likely reason for this action?

  1. He can sell a wider variety of goods as a corporation.
  2. He has plans to build a second, and maybe a third, store in the area.
  3. The store has reached a size where incorporation has become mandatory.
  4. He hopes his son will one day decide to become a member of the management.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice b: He has plans to build a second, and maybe a third, store in the area.

Explanation:

One of the most important reasons to incorporate a business is that additional sources of capital can be tapped by issuing stock. Nesbitt may be planning to get the money needed to build the new stores by encouraging others to acquire stock and become owners. There is no size limit for incorporation, and the decision has little or nothing to do with operations. Neither the selection of goods nor the members of the management team is affected by the legal form of the business.

The Operational Structure of a Corporation

Question: The owners of most small corporations can operate their businesses effectively as both stockholders and managers. For example, two friends might each own half of the capital stock of a bakery or a retail clothing store. Those individuals probably work together to manage this business on a day-to-day basis.

Because of the number of people who can be involved, large corporations offer a significantly different challenge. How do millions of investors possessing billions of capital shares of a corporation ever serve in any reasonable capacity as the owners and managers of that business?

Answer: Obviously, a great many corporations like The Coca-Cola Company have an enormous quantity of capital shares held by tens of thousands of investors. Virtually none of these owners can expect to have any impact on the daily operations of the business. A different operational structure is needed. In a vast number of such organizations, stockholders vote to elect a representative group to oversee operations. This body—called the board of directorsA group that oversees the management of a corporation; the members are voted to this position by stockholders; it hires the management to run the company on a daily basis and then meets periodically to review operating, investing, and financing results and also to approve policy and strategy.A story produced by National Public Radio on the roles played by a board of directors can be found at http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=105576374.—is made up of approximately ten to twenty-five knowledgeable individuals.

As shown in Figure 1.1 “Company Operational Structure”, the board of directors hires the members of management who run the business on a daily basis. The board then meets periodically (often quarterly) to review operating, investing, and financing results as well as to approve strategic policy initiatives.

Figure 1.1 Company Operational Structure

Occasionally, the original founders of a business (or their descendants) continue to hold enough shares to influence or actually control operating and other significant decisions of a business. Or wealthy outside investors might acquire enough shares to gain this same level of power. Such owners have genuine authority within the corporation. Even that degree of control, though, is normally carried out through membership on the board of directors. For example, at the end of 2010, the Ford Motor Company had fifteen members on its board of directors, three of whom were named Ford. Except in rare circumstances, the hierarchy of owners, board of directors, management, and employees remains intact. Thus, most stockholders are not involved with the operating decisions of any large corporation.

Predicting the Appreciation of Capital Stock Values

Question: The acquisition of capital shares of a corporation is an extremely popular investment strategy for a wide range of the population. A buyer becomes one of the owners of the business. Why spend money in this way especially since very few stockholders can ever hope to hold enough shares to participate in managing or influencing operations? Ownership shares sometimes cost small amounts but can also require hundreds if not thousands of dollars. What is the potential benefit of buying capital stock issued by a business organization such as PepsiCo or Chevron?

Answer: Capital shares of thousands of corporations trade each day on markets around the world such as the New York Stock Exchange or NASDAQ (National Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotations)An electronic market that allows for the trading of capital shares in approximately three thousand companies, providing instantaneous price quotations to efficiently match buyers and sellers allowing ownership in companies to change hands.. One party is looking to sell shares whereas another is seeking shares to buy. Stock markets match up these buyers and sellers so that a mutually agreed-upon price can be negotiated. This bargaining process allows the ownership interests of these companies to change hands with relative ease.

When investors believe a business is financially healthy and its future is bright, they expect prosperity and growth to continue. If that happens, the negotiated price for the capital shares of the corporation should rise over time. Investors around the world attempt to anticipate such movements in order to buy the stock at a low price and sell later at a higher one. Conversely, if predictions are not optimistic, then a business’s share price is likely to drop so that owners will experience losses in the value of their investments.

Financial accounting information plays an invaluable role in this market process as millions of investors attempt to assess the financial condition and prospects of various business organizations on an ongoing basis. Being able to understand and make use of reported financial data helps improve the investor’s knowledge of a corporation and, thus, the chance of making wise decisions about the buying and selling of capital shares. Ignorance often leads to poor decisions and much less lucrative outcomes.

In the United States, such investment gains—if successfully generated—are especially appealing to individuals when ownership shares are held for over twelve months before being sold. For income tax purposes, the difference between the buy and sale prices for such investments is referred to as a long-term capital gain or loss. Under certain circumstances, significant tax reductions are attributed to long-term capital gains.This same tax benefit is not available to corporate taxpayers, only individuals. The U.S. Congress created this tax incentive to encourage additional investment so that businesses could more easily obtain money for growth purposes. When businesses prosper and expand, the entire economy tends to do better.

Test Yourself

Question:

Mr. and Mrs. Randolph Ostar buy one thousand shares of a well-known company at $25 per share on July 1, Year One. They hold no other investments. The stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange, and the price goes up over time to $36 per share. On June 27, Year Two, the couple is considering the sale of these shares so that they can buy a new car. At the last moment, they postpone these transactions for one week. What is the most likely reason for this delay?

  1. Automobile prices tend to go down after July 1 each year.
  2. It normally takes several weeks to sell the shares of a large corporation.
  3. Laws delay the immediate use of money from the sale of investments for several weeks.
  4. They are hoping to reduce the amount of income taxes to be paid.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: They are hoping to reduce the amount of income taxes to be paid.

Explanation:

For individuals who own stock, gains on the sale of capital assets (such as these shares) are taxed at low rates, but only if long-term (held for over one year). The Ostars anticipate making an $11,000 profit ($36 − $25 × 1,000 shares). Currently, the shares have been held for slightly less than one year. If sold in June, the gain is short-term and taxed at a higher rate. By holding them for just one more week, the gain becomes long-term, and a significant amount of tax money is saved.

The Receipt of Dividends

Question: Investors acquire ownership shares of selected corporations hoping that the stock price will rise over time. This investment strategy is especially tempting because long-term capital gains are often taxed at a relatively low rate. Is the possibility for appreciation in value the only reason that investors choose to acquire capital shares?

Answer: Many corporations—although certainly not all—pay cash dividendsDistributions made by a corporation to its shareholders as a reward when income has been earned; decision to pay is made by the board of directors; shareholders often receive favorable tax treatment when cash dividends are collected. to their stockholders periodically. A dividend is a reward for being an owner of a business that is prospering. It is not a required payment; it is a sharing of profits with the stockholders. As an example, for 2010, Duke Energy reported earning profits (net income) of $1.32 billion. During that same period, the corporation distributed total cash dividends of approximately $1.28 billion to the owners of its capital stock.The receipt of cash dividends is additionally appealing to stockholders because, in most cases, they are taxed at the same reduced rates as are applied to net long-term capital gains.

The board of directors determines whether to pay dividends. Some boards prefer to leave money within the business to stimulate future growth and additional profits. For example, Google Inc. reported profits (net income) for 2010 of $8.51 billion but distributed no dividends to its owners. Newer companies often choose to pay less dividends than older companies as they try to grow quickly to a desired size.

Not surprisingly, a variety of investing strategies abound. Many investors acquire ownership shares almost exclusively in hopes of benefiting from an anticipated appreciation of stock prices. Another large segment of the investing public is more likely to be drawn to the possibility of dividend payments. Unless an owner has the chance to influence or control the operations of a business, only these two potential benefits can accrue from the ownership of capital shares: appreciation in the value of the stock price and cash dividends.

Annual Rate of Return on an Investment in Capital Stock

Question: An investor can put money into a savings account at a bank and earn a small but relatively risk-free profit. For example, $100 could be invested on January 1 and then be worth $102 at the end of the year because interest is added to the balance. The extra $2 means that the investor earned an annual return of 2 percent ($2 increase/$100 investment). This computation helps in comparing one possible investment opportunity against another. How is the annual rate of return computed when the capital stock of a corporation is acquired as an investment and then held for a period of time?

Answer: Capital stock investments are certainly not risk free. Profits can be high, but losses always loom as a possibility. The annual rate of return measures those profits and losses in the past and is often anticipated for the future as a way of making investment decisions.

To illustrate, assume that on January 1, Year One, an investor spends $100 for one ownership share of the Ace Company and another $100 for a share of the Base Company. During the year, Ace distributes a dividend of $1.00 per share to each of its owners while Base pays a dividend of $5.00 per share. On December 31, the capital stock of the Ace Company is selling on a stock market for $108 per share whereas the stock of the Base Company has a price of only $91 per share.

This investor now holds a total value of $109 as a result of the purchase of the share of the Ace Company: the cash dividend of $1 and a share of capital stock worth $108. In one year, the total value has risen by $9 ($109 less $100) so that the annual rate return was 9 percent ($9 increase/$100 investment).

The shares of the Base Company did not perform as well. At the end of the year, the total value of this investment is only $96: the cash dividend of $5 plus one share of stock worth $91. That is a drop of $4 during the year ($96 less $100). The annual rate of return on this investment is a negative 4 percent ($4 decrease/$100 investment).

As a result of this first year, buying a share of Ace obviously proved to be a better investment than buying a share of Base because of the higher annual rate of return. However, a careful analysis of the financial accounting data available at the start of the year might have helped this investor realize in advance that the rate of return on the investment in Ace would be higher. An assessment of the financial health and future prospects of both businesses could have shown that a higher return was expected in connection with the investment in Ace.

Therefore, estimating the annual rate of return is important for investors because it helps them select from among multiple investment opportunities. This computation provides a method for quantifying the financial benefit earned in the past and expected in the future. Logically, investors should simply choose the investment that provides the highest anticipated rate of return. However, as with all predictions, the risk that actual actions will not follow the expected course must be taken into consideration. Investing often breaks down to anticipating profits while measuring the likelihood and amount of potential losses.

Key Takeaway

Incorporation allows an organization to be viewed legally as a separate entity apart from its ownership. In most large corporations, few owners are able to be involved in the operational decision making. Instead, stockholders elect a board of directors to oversee the business and direct the work of management. Corporations can issue shares of capital stock that give the holder an ownership right and enables the business to raise monetary funds. If the organization is financially healthy and prospering, these shares can increase in value over time—possibly by a significant amount. In addition, a profitable organization may well share its good fortune with its ownership through the distribution of cash dividends. Investors often attempt to estimate the annual rate of return that can be expected from an investment as a way of comparing it to other investment alternatives. This computation takes the profit for the year (stock appreciation and dividends) and divides it by the amount of the investment at the start of the period.

1.3 Using Financial Accounting for Wise Decision Making

Learning Objectives

At the end of this section, students should be able to meet the following objectives:

  1. List the predictions that investors and potential investors want to make about a business organization.
  2. List the predictions that creditors and potential creditors want to make about a business organization.
  3. Explain the reporting of monetary amounts as a central focus of financial accounting.
  4. Explain how financial accounting information is enhanced and clarified by verbal explanations.
  5. Understand the function played by the annual report published by many businesses and other organizations.

Financial Accounting Information and Investments in Capital Stock

Question: Investors are interested (sometimes almost obsessively interested) in the financial information that is produced by a business organization according to the rules and principles of financial accounting. They want to use this information to make wise investing decisions. What do investors actually hope to learn about a business by analyzing published financial information?

Answer: The information reported by financial accounting is similar to a giant, complex portrait painted of the organization. There are probably hundreds, if not thousands, of aspects of the picture that can be examined, analyzed, and evaluated to help assess the financial health and future prospects of the model. Theories abound as to which pieces of information are best to use when studying a business. One investor might prefer to focus on a particular portion of the data almost exclusively (such as profitability) whereas another may believe that entirely different information is most significant (such as the sources and uses of cash).

Ultimately, in connection with the buying and selling of capital stock, all investors are trying to arrive at the same two insights. They are attempting to use the provided financial accounting data to estimate the following:

  1. The price of the corporation’s capital stock in the future
  2. The amount of cash dividends that will be paid over time by the business

Despite the complexity of the information, these two goals are rather simplistic. If an investor owns capital shares of a business and feels that the current accounting information signals either a rise in stock prices or strong dividend distributions, holding the investment or even buying more shares is probably warranted. Conversely, if careful analysis indicates a possible drop in stock price or a reduction in dividend payments, sale of the stock is likely to be the appropriate action.

Interestingly, by the very nature of the market, any exchange of ownership shares means that the buyer has studied available information and believes the future to be relatively optimistic for the business in question. In contrast, the seller has looked at similar data and arrived at a different, more pessimistic outlook.

Test Yourself

Question:

An investor is currently studying the financial information produced by Company A and also by Company B. The investor holds ownership shares of Company A but not Company B. After studying all the available data, the investor sells her shares of Company A and uses the proceeds to buy shares of Company B. What is the most likely explanation for these actions?

  1. Company B has been more profitable than Company A in the past.
  2. Company B has paid a larger dividend than Company A in the past.
  3. Last year, the price of Company B’s stock rose faster than that of Company A.
  4. Company B is poised to be more profitable than Company A in the future.

Answer:

The correct answer is choice d: Company B is poised to be more profitable than Company A in the future.

Explanation:

Investors use data to anticipate changes in stock prices and dividend payments. Such events are affected by an organization’s financial health and future prospects. Historical data, such as profitability, dividends, and stock prices, are helpful but only if they provide guidance as to what will happen in the future. If Company B is expected to be more profitable in the coming year, that outcome may well translate into a strong appreciation in the price of the stock or high dividend payments.

Financial Accounting Information and Other Interested Parties

Question: Are there reasons to analyze the financial accounting information produced by a particular business other than to help investors predict stock prices and cash dividend payments?

Answer: The desire to analyze an organization’s financial situation is not limited to investors in the stock market. For example, as discussed previously, a loan might be requested from a bank, or one business could be considering the sale of its merchandise to another on credit. Such obligations require eventual payment. Therefore, another portion of the individuals and groups that study the financial information reported by an organization wants to assess the likelihood that money will be available in the future to pay debts. Stock prices and cash dividend distributions are much less significant to a creditor.

The same financial data utilized by investors who are buying or selling capital stock will also be of benefit to current and potential creditors. However, this group is likely to focus attention on particular elements of the information such as the sheer amount of the debt owed, when that debt is scheduled to come due, and the perceived ability to generate sufficient cash to meet those demands in a timely fashion. Ultimately, creditors attempt to anticipate the organization’s future cash flows to measure the risk that debt principal and interest payments might not be forthcoming when due.Cash flows also influence stock prices and dividend payments and would, thus, be information useful for potential investors in the capital stock of a company as well as its creditors.

Therefore, millions of individuals and groups use reported financial information to assess business organizations in order to make three predictions:

  • Future stock market prices for the capital shares issued by the business
  • Future cash dividend distributions
  • Future ability to generate sufficient cash to meet debts as they mature

The first two relate to investors in the capital stock issued by the corporation; the third is of more significance to the creditors of that organization.

The Nature of Financial Information

Question: The term “financial information” comes up frequently in these discussions. What is meant by financial information?

Answer: Financial information reported by and about an organization consists of data that can be measured in monetary terms. For example, if a building costs $4 million to acquire, that is financial information, as is the statement that a debt of $700,000 is owed to a bank. In both cases, relevant information is communicated to decision makers as a monetary balance. However, if a business has eight thousand employees, that fact might be interesting, but it is not financial information. The figure is not a dollar amount; it is not stated in the form that is most useful for decision-making purposes by either investors or creditors. Assuming that those workers were paid a total of $500 million during the most recent year, then that number is financial information because it reflects the amount of money spent.

Likewise, a men’s clothing store does not include in its financial accounting information that it holds ten thousand shirts to be sold. Instead, the business reports that it currently owns shirts for sale (frequently referred to as inventoryA current asset bought or manufactured for the purpose of selling in order to generate revenue.) with a cost of, perhaps, $300,000. Or, after having sold these items to customers, it could explain that total sales of $500,000 were made during the period.

Financial Accounting and Verbal Explanations

Question: The value of reported data seems somewhat restricted if only amounts measured in dollars is included. Is financial accounting information limited solely to figures that can be stated in monetary terms?

Answer: Although financial accounting starts by reporting balances as monetary amounts, the communication process does not stop there. Extensive verbal explanations as well as additional numerical data are also provided to clarify or expand the monetary information where necessary. To illustrate, assume that an organization is the subject of a lawsuit and estimates an eventual loss of $750,000. This is financial information that must be reported based on the rules of financial accounting. However, the organization should also communicate other nonfinancial information such as the cause of the lawsuit and the likelihood that the loss will actually occur. The dollar amount alone does not provide sufficient information for either investors or creditors.

Thus, accounting actually communicates to decision makers in two distinct steps:

  1. Financial information is provided in monetary terms
  2. Further explanation is given to clarify and expand on those monetary balances

The Annual Report

Question: Businesses and other organizations must have some structural method for conveying financial information and additional verbal explanations to outside decision makers. If a potential investor or creditor wants to assess a business organization such as Johnson & Johnson or Colgate-Palmolive, in what form is that information delivered?

Answer: Most companies regardless of size prepare and distribute an annual report shortly after the end of each year. For example, the 2010 annual report of the McDonald’s Corporation can be downloaded from the Internet at http://www.aboutmcdonalds.com/mcd/investors/annual_reports.html.The annual report for the McDonald’s Corporation can also be found by following these steps:

  1. Go to http://www.mcdonalds.com.
  2. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on “Corporate.”
  3. At the top of the next screen, click on “Investors” at the top of the page.
  4. A picture of McDonald’s latest annual report should be on the next screen. Click on that picture for it to download.

 

This publication is over fifty pages in length and contains virtually any financial accounting information that a potential investor or creditor could need to make an estimation of the future stock price for the capital stock issued by McDonald’s as well as future dividend distributions and cash inflows and outflows. For example, here are some of the most relevant pieces of information included in the company’s 2010 annual report.

  • Pages 1 through 3 is a letter to shareholders from the chief executive office, the person who is the head of McDonald’s management.
  • Page 4 is a letter to shareholders from the chair of the board of directors.
  • Pages 9 through 25 present management’s discussion and analysis of the company’s financial condition and results of operations.
  • Pages 26 through 29 contain the financial accounting information formally reported by McDonald’s.
  • Pages 30 through 42 provide verbal explanations and other additional information to help clarify the monetary balances reported on pages 26 through 29.
  • Page 46 identifies the executive members of management and the officers who work for McDonald’s.
  • Page 47 lists the members of the board of directors.

This textbook will focus on helping students gain an understanding of the financial accounting information that is produced by a business organization as exemplified by McDonald’s on pages 26 through 29 and then explained further in pages 30 through 42. Those seventeen pages form the heart of the financial reporting process for this organization. Here in Chapter 1 “What Is Financial Accounting, and Why Is It Important?”, most students will understand very little of the available data about McDonald’s. However, with careful reading, thought, and work, by the conclusion of Chapter 17 “In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed by the Statement of Cash Flows?”, students should have a working knowledge of financial accounting and its rules and procedures. They will then be able to analyze a good percentage of the information reported by any business as a basis for making wise decisions about the buying and selling of its capital stock and the extension of credit and loans.

Key Takeaway

Throughout the world each day, investors buy and sell the capital stock shares of thousands of businesses. Other individuals choose to loan money or grant credit to these same organizations. Such decisions are based on assessing potential risks and rewards. Financial accounting provides information to these decision makers to help them evaluate the possibility of capital stock price appreciation, cash dividend distributions, and the business’s ability to generate cash to meet obligations as they come due. This information is financial in nature, meaning that it is stated in monetary terms. However, numerical data alone is of limited value. Thus, financial accounting provides monetary balances as well as clarifying verbal explanations to assist users in assessing the financial health and future prospects of a particular business. This information is made available to interested parties as one portion of the annual report that most business corporations produce each year.

Talking with a Real Investing Pro

Kevin G. Burns is a partner in his own registered investment advisory firm, the LLBH Private Wealth Management Group, an organization that specializes in asset management, concentrated stock strategies, and wealth transfer. LLBH consults on investing strategies for assets of nearly $1 billion. Before starting his own firm in October 2008, he was first vice president of Merrill Lynch Private Banking and Investment Group. Burns began his career on Wall Street in 1981 at Paine Webber. He has also worked at Oppenheimer & Co. and Smith Barney. Burns has appeared several times on the CBS Evening News. He has been kind enough to agree to be interviewed about his opinions and experiences in using financial accounting information. His thoughts will appear at the end of each chapter. His firm’s Web site is http://www.LLBHprivatewealthmanagement.com.

Question: You majored in accounting in college but you never worked in the accounting field. Instead, you became an investment advisor. If you never planned to become an accountant, why did you major in that subject?

Kevin Burns: In my view, accounting is the backbone of any business major in college. Being able to translate the information that a company provides, prepare a budget, understand the concept of revenues and expenses, and the like has been enormously helpful in my investment management business. Anyone majoring in any aspect of business needs that knowledge. I also liked being able to know I had the right answers on the tests that my accounting professors gave me when all the numbers added up properly.

Question: Why do you prefer to invest in the capital stock of a business rather than put your client’s money in other forms of investment such as gold or real estate?

KB: I think it is very important to diversify investments. In my world, that includes stocks as well as other types of investments. Of course, there is a place for investments in real estate, commodities, and the like. My personal preference is to invest only in very liquid assets; those—such as capital shares—that can be turned into cash quickly through trades on a stock exchange. I like to know, even if I am investing for the long term, that I can sell my investments five minutes after I buy them should I change my mind. I simply prefer liquid investments. Real estate is not very liquid as the housing market has recently shown. Gold, of course, is liquid. However, while it has appreciated lately, it was selling for around $800 an ounce when I was in high school and is now about $1,800 an ounce. Over a thirty-year period of time, that is not a very big profit. If my clients earned that small of a return on their money over thirty years, they would fire me.

What Was Truly Important?

To students of Financial Accounting:

You have now read Chapter 1 “What Is Financial Accounting, and Why Is It Important?”. What were the five points that you discovered in this chapter that seemed most important to you? A lot of information is provided here. What stood out as truly significant? After you make your choices, go to the following link and watch a short video clip where Professor Joe Hoyle will choose his top five points from Chapter 1 “What Is Financial Accounting, and Why Is It Important?”. You can learn his rationale for these picks and see whether you agree or disagree with those selections.

Video Clip

(click to see video)

Professor Joe Hoyle talks about the five most important points in Chapter 1 “What Is Financial Accounting, and Why Is It Important?”.

1.4 End-of-Chapter Exercises

Questions

  1. James Watkins is signing up for classes at his college for the upcoming semester and is thinking of taking a course in financial accounting. What is financial accounting?
  2. What decisions are often associated with financial accounting?
  3. How does financial accounting differ from managerial accounting?
  4. Who are some of the most likely users of the information provided by financial accounting?
  5. Betsy Ligando and Cynthia Zvyvco are planning to start a business where they will sell greeting cards in a leased space at the local shopping center. A friend told them that they should create their business as a corporation. What is a corporation?
  6. From question 5, assume that the owners choose not to incorporate their business. What type of business will they create and what risks are involved?
  7. From question 5, assume that the owners decide that their business will be created as a corporation. How does a business become a corporation?
  8. What are the advantages of operating a business as a corporation?
  9. What purpose does a board of directors serve in a corporation?
  10. Tyrone Waters works part time during the school year and has saved up cash amounting to $2,000. He wants to invest that money in the capital stock of a business such as Walmart. Why would Waters use his money to buy ownership shares of this business?
  11. An investor in the capital stock of a business will often look at available financial accounting information in a different way than a creditor or lender. How do the needs of these two groups differ?
  12. What is financial information?
  13. What is a dividend? Who makes the decision for a business corporation to distribute a dividend? Why is a dividend distributed?
  14. Daisy Miller owns one hundred shares of the capital stock of Aground International, a business organization with its headquarters in her hometown. The company mails her a copy of its latest annual report. What is the purpose of the annual report?
  15. Jimi Tattaro puts $500 into a savings account and closes it out one year later by removing all $515 that is now in the account. He also spent $600 to invest in the capital shares of the YxWho Corporation. He sold those shares one year later for $638. Before the sale, he received a $4 cash dividend from YxWho. What is the annual return on each of these investments?

True or False

  1. ____ Financial accounting information is generated primarily to help with decisions made inside a business or by some other organization.
  2. ____ Typically, a business operated as a sole proprietorship will be able to raise money from issuing capital shares easier than will a business operated as a corporation.
  3. ____ Employees have no reason to be interested in any financial accounting information provided by their employer.
  4. ____ Most investors in the capital stock of a business want to be involved in the daily operations.
  5. ____ The board of directors of a corporation is elected by its shareholders.
  6. ____ Investors who hold investments in capital stock for longer than a year may enjoy a tax benefit.
  7. ____ In analyzing a business, creditors are most interested in the possibility that the corporation’s stock price might decline.
  8. ____ Corporations that report earning additional profits are required by law to pay dividends to their shareholders.
  9. ____ Purchasing the capital stock of a business is typically a riskier investment than opening a savings account.
  10. ____ Financial information is communicated in monetary terms but may be explained verbally.
  11. ____ Most businesses report their financial accounting information as part of an annual report released to owners and other interested parties.
  12. ____ Accountants are the primary users of the information provided by financial accounting.
  13. ____ An entity that loans money to a business is referred to as a “shareholder.”

Multiple Choice

  1. Ramon Sanchez is a loan officer at Washington Bank. He is in the process of deciding whether or not to loan money to Medlock Corporation. Which of the following would have the most influence on Sanchez when making this decision?

    1. Medlock generated positive cash flows last year.
    2. Medlock paid dividends last year.
    3. Medlock’s stock price increased last year.
    4. The number of stockholders in Medlock increased last year.
  2. Which of the following is not a reason for an investor to purchase capital stock in a relatively large corporation?

    1. To receive dividend payments
    2. To sell the stock for a gain if the share price increases
    3. To earn a return on their investment
    4. To participate in the day-to-day operations of the business
  3. Which of the following is not a decision that is normally made using financial accounting information?

    1. An investor decided to acquire shares of the capital stock of Rayburn Corporation.
    2. A credit analyst at Mayfield Corporation rejected a request for credit from Rayburn Corporation.
    3. A Rayburn Corporation manager decided to increase the quantity of widgets produced each month for sales purposes.
    4. A loan officer at Fairburn Bank chose to grant a loan request made by Rayburn Corporation so the company could expand.
  4. Which of the following individuals is most likely to have a say in the policy decisions made by a large corporation?

    1. A stockholder
    2. A member of the board of directors
    3. An employee
    4. A creditor
  5. Leon Williams is an investor in Springfield Corporation. On January 1, Year One, he purchased 150 shares of the corporation’s capital stock at a price of $45 per share. On October 15, Year One, Springfield distributed a cash dividend of $1.50 per share to its stockholders. On December 31, Year One, Springfield’s stock is selling for $47 per share. What is the annual rate of return on William’s investment during Year One, rounded to one decimal point?

    1. 3.3 percent
    2. 4.4 percent
    3. 5.5 percent
    4. 7.8 percent
  6. At the beginning of the current year, the capital stock of the Ajax Corporation was selling for $24 per share, but, by the end of the year it was selling for $35 per share. Which of the following individuals is the least likely to pay significant attention to this jump in stock price?

    1. The vice president in charge of advertising working on the budget for this coming year
    2. The loan officer at the bank who granted Ajax a loan late last year
    3. Chair of the board of directors
    4. Head of a local investment advisory company
  7. Which of the following is least likely to be found in the financial information provided in the annual report of a large corporation?

    1. The amount of cash dividends paid in each of the last three years.
    2. The total amount of debt owed by the corporation.
    3. The rationale for deciding to rent a new airplane rather than buying it.
    4. The amount of cash held by the business at the end of the year.
  8. William Alexander invests money to become one of the owners of a local restaurant. He sells his interest three months later because he wants to invest in a bookstore. Which is the most likely legal structure for the restaurant?

    1. Sole proprietorship
    2. Partnership
    3. Standard operating business
    4. Corporation

Video Problems

Professor Joe Hoyle discusses the answers to these two problems at the links that are indicated. After formulating your answers, watch each video to see how Professor Hoyle answers these questions.

  1. Your roommate is an English major. The roommate has just learned that you are taking a course in financial accounting. The roommate has never once considered taking a class in business and is mystified that you have chosen to spend your time learning this material. One evening, over pizza, you two are discussing your classes for the semester. The roommate wants to know why anyone could possibly benefit from a class in financial accounting. How would you respond?

  2. Your uncle has worked for a large office supply business for twenty years. They have approximately one hundred retail stores located across the country. He is responsible for a small team of employees who do the interior design work in each of these stores. One day he sends you the following e-mail: “As a reward for twenty years of service, my company has offered to sell me one thousand shares of their capital stock for $23 per share. That’s $23,000, and that is a lot of money. I’ve never been interested in this aspect of business. I understand you are taking a financial accounting course in college. What are capital shares? More importantly, how can I determine whether to spend $23,000 for these shares?”

Problems

  1. Explain how each of the following individuals might use the information provided by financial accounting about the Nguyen Company, which is located in Falls Church, Virginia.

    1. Bank loan officer considering loaning money to Nguyen Company
    2. Current employee of Nguyen Company
    3. Potential employee of Nguyen Company
    4. Current investor in Nguyen Company
    5. Potential investor in Nguyen Company
    6. A credit analyst of company wanting to sell inventory to Nguyen Company
  2. Mark each of the following with an (F) to indicate if it is financial information or an (N) to indicate if it is nonfinancial information.

    Metro Corporation has the following:

    1. ____ Cash of $4,000,000
    2. ____ A building that cost $50,000,000
    3. ____ 2,000 employees
    4. ____ Inventory with a cost of $16,000,000
    5. ____ 500 shares of capital stock
    6. ____ 1,000 trucks
    7. ____ Sales of merchandise for $45,000,000
    8. ____ 2,000 cans of beans for resale purposes
    9. ____ 2,000 cans of beans to be used in the employee cafeteria
  3. Assume that a person you know tells the following story: “I inherited $3,000 from a distant uncle. I took that money and invested it all in the capital shares of Ford Motor Co. I had looked at several other corporations including IntelPepsiCoMicrosoft, and Google. Eventually, though, I put my money into Ford.”

    Answer the following questions:

    1. What is meant by “the capital shares of Ford Motor Co.?”
    2. Why would a person spend $3,000 to buy the capital shares of any business?
    3. Provide some possible reasons for this person to have invested in Ford rather than in those other corporations.
    4. In what way might the annual report of Ford Motor Co. have helped the person to make this decision?

Research Assignments

  1. The chapter introduced several forms of business, including a corporation, sole proprietorship, and partnership. Other forms of business exist as well. Do an Internet search to learn as much as you can about each of the following business forms:

    • Sole proprietorship
    • Partnership
    • Limited partnership
    • C corporation
    • S corporation
    • Limited liability corporation (LLC)

    For each of these legal forms, discuss the following issues: ease of organization and maintenance of form, number of people involved, government involvement, liability to owners, ease of exit, taxation, day-to-day management, and funding sources.

  2. A great amount of financial information is available on the Internet about most business corporations of any significant size. For example, visit http://www.google.com/finance/. In the “Get Quotes” box, type in “Starbucks Corporation.”

    Answer each of the following questions based on the information provided at this site:

    1. For what price is the capital stock issued by Starbucks currently selling?
    2. On what stock market or exchange are the shares of Starbucks bought and sold?
    3. For convenience, the names of corporations that are listed on stock markets have a ticker symbol. This symbol is a shorthand method of identifying the business. What is the ticker symbol for Starbucks?
    4. Investors are often interested in the movement of the price of a share of stock during recent months. What is the fifty-two week range in the price of Starbucks’ stock? Is the current price closer to the high or to the low in that range?
    5. Investors are also interested in comparing a business operation to other businesses in the same or related industry. Investors want to know how the company does in comparison to its chief competitors. List three corporations that may be competitors of Starbucks.
    6. Read the description of this business and list three things that you found most interesting.
    7. Provide the names of three officers and three members of the board of directors.
  3. The U.S. Department of Labor has a page on its Web site at http://www.bls.gov/oco/ocos001.htm that is titled “Accountants and Auditors.” Go to this site and read this page. Use that information to answer the following questions:

    1. In general, what functions do accountants perform?
    2. Briefly list the different types of accountants and what they do.
    3. What education is required to become an accountant or an auditor?
    4. What is a CPA?
    5. What are the typical requirements to become a CPA?
    6. What other certifications are available for accountants?
    7. What is the current job outlook for the accounting profession?
  4. Go to http://www.target.com/. At the Target Corporation Web site, scroll to the bottom of that page, find “Company Information,” and click on “Investors.” Then, click on “Annual Reports.” Click on the 2010 annual report and answer the following question:

    Starting on page 2, a two-page letter is included “to our shareholders” from the chairman, president, and CEO. Read that letter. Assume you are thinking about buying shares of the capital stock of Target. List two or three pieces of information that you found in this letter that you felt were especially relevant to your decision.

Chapter 1: Fundamental Skills

Microsoft® Excel® is a tool that can be used in virtually all careers and is valuable in both professional and personal settings. Whether you need to keep track of medications in inventory for a hospital or create a financial plan for your retirement, Excel enables you to do these activities efficiently and accurately. This chapter introduces the fundamental skills necessary to get you started in using Excel. You will find that just a few skills can make you very productive in a short period of time.

1.1 An Overview of Microsoft® Excel®

Learning Objectives

  1. Examine the value of using Excel to make decisions.
  2. Learn how to start Excel.
  3. Become familiar with the Excel workbook.
  4. Understand how to navigate worksheets.
  5. Examine the Excel Ribbon.
  6. Become familiar with the Quick Access Toolbar.
  7. Examine the right-click menu options.
  8. Become familiar with the commands in the File tab.
  9. Learn how to save workbooks.
  10. Save workbooks in the Excel 97-2003 file type.
  11. Examine the Status Bar.
  12. Become familiar with the features in the Excel Help window.

Microsoft® Office contains a variety of tools that help people accomplish many personal and professional objectives. Microsoft Excel is perhaps the most versatile and widely used of all the Office applications. No matter which career path you choose, you will likely need to use Excel to accomplish your professional objectives, some of which may occur daily. This chapter provides an overview of the Excel application along with an orientation for accessing the commands and features of an Excel workbook.

Making Decisions with Excel

Follow-along file: Not needed for this skill

Taking a very simple view, Excel is a tool that allows you to enter quantitative data into an electronic spreadsheet to apply one or many mathematical computations. These computations ultimately convert that quantitative data into information. The information produced in Excel can be used to make decisions in both professional and personal contexts. For example, employees can use Excel to determine how much inventory to buy for a clothing retailer, how much medication to administer to a patient, or how much money to spend to stay within a budget. With respect to personal decisions, you can use Excel to determine how much money you can spend on a house, how much you can spend on car lease payments, or how much you need to save to reach your retirement goals. We will demonstrate how you can use Excel to make these decisions and many more throughout this text.

Figure 1.1 “Example of an Excel Worksheet with Embedded Chart” shows a completed Excel worksheet that will be constructed in this chapter. The information shown in this worksheet is top-line sales data for a hypothetical merchandise retail company. The worksheet data can help this retailer determine the number of salespeople needed for each month, how much inventory is needed to satisfy sales, and what types of products should be purchased. Notice that the embedded chart makes it very easy to see which months have the highest unit sales.

Figure 1.1 Example of an Excel Worksheet with Embedded Chart

Starting Excel

Follow-along file: Not needed for this skill

The following steps will guide you in starting the Excel application. Note that these steps along with Figure 1.2 “Start Menu” relate to the Windows 7 operating system, which is very similar to the Windows Vista operating system.

  1. Click the Start button on the lower left corner of your computer screen.
  2. Click the All Programs arrow at the bottom left of the Start menu.
  3. Click the Microsoft Office folder on the Start menu. This will open the list of Microsoft Office applications.
  4. Click the Microsoft Excel 2010 option. This will start the Excel application.

Figure 1.2 Start Menu

The Excel Workbook

Follow-along file: Not needed for this skill

Once Excel is started, a blank workbook will open on your screen. A workbookAn Excel file that contains one or more worksheets. is an Excel file that contains one or more worksheetsMay also be referred to as a spreadsheet and contains rectangles called cells for entering numeric and nonnumeric data. (sometimes referred to as spreadsheets). Excel will assign a file name to the workbook, such as Book1, Book2, Book3, and so on, depending on how many new workbooks are opened. Figure 1.3 “Blank Workbook” shows a blank workbook after starting Excel.

Figure 1.3 Blank Workbook

Your workbook should already be maximized (or shown at full size) once Excel is started, as shown in Figure 1.3 “Blank Workbook”. However, if your screen looks like Figure 1.4 “Restored Worksheet” after starting Excel, you should click the Maximize button, as shown in the figure.

Figure 1.4 Restored Worksheet

Navigating Worksheets

Follow-along file: Not needed for this skill

Data are entered and managed in an Excel worksheet. The worksheet contains several rectangles called cells for entering numeric and nonnumeric data. Each cellA specific location on a worksheet where data are entered and stored. in an Excel worksheet contains an address, which is defined by a column letter followed by a row number. For example, the cell that is currently activated in Figure 1.4 “Restored Worksheet” is A1. This would be referred to as cell locationA column letter followed by a row number used to identify specific cells on a worksheet. A1 or cell referenceWhen cell locations are used in formulas, Excel will reference the data that is entered into the cell. The cell reference is the cell location address. A1. The following steps explain how you can navigate in an Excel worksheet:

  1. Place your mouse pointer over cell D5 and left click.
  2. Check to make sure column letter D and row number 5 are highlighted in orange, as shown in Figure 1.5 “Activating a Cell Location”.

    Figure 1.5 Activating a Cell Location

  3. Move the mouse pointer to cell A1.
  4. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer back to cell D5.
  5. Release the left mouse button. You should see several cells highlighted, as shown in Figure 1.6 “Highlighting a Range of Cells”. This is referred to as a cell rangeAny group of contiguous cell locations; a cell range is noted as two cell locations separated by a colon. and is documented as follows: A1:D5. Any two cell locations separated by a colon are known as a cell range. The first cell is the top left corner of the range, and the second cell is the lower right corner of the range.

    Figure 1.6 Highlighting a Range of Cells

  6. Click the Sheet3 worksheet tab at the bottom of the worksheet. This is how you open a worksheet within a workbook.
  7. Click the Sheet1 worksheet tab at the bottom of the worksheet to return to the worksheet shown in Figure 1.6 “Highlighting a Range of Cells”.

Mouseless Commands

Basic Worksheet Navigation

  • Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to activate cells on the worksheet.
  • Hold the SHIFT key and press the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight a range of cells in a worksheet.
  • Hold the CTRL key while pressing the PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP keys to open other worksheets in a workbook.

The Excel Ribbon

Follow-along file: Not needed for this skill

Excel’s features and commands are found in the RibbonThe upper area of the Excel screen that contains several tabs running across the top. Each tab provides access to a different set of Excel commands., which is the upper area of the Excel screen that contains several tabs running across the top. Each tab provides access to a different set of Excel commands. Figure 1.7 “Ribbon for Excel” shows the commands available in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Table 1.1 “Command Overview for Each Tab of the Ribbon” provides an overview of the commands that are found in each tab of the Ribbon.

Figure 1.7 Ribbon for Excel

Table 1.1 Command Overview for Each Tab of the Ribbon

Tab Name Description of Commands
File Also known as the Backstage view of the Excel workbook. Contains all commands for opening, closing, saving, and creating new Excel workbooks. Includes print commands, document properties, e-mailing options, and help features. The default settings and options are also found in this tab.
Home Contains the most frequently used Excel commands. Formatting commands are found in this tab along with commands for cutting, copying, pasting, and for inserting and deleting rows and columns.
Insert Used to insert objects such as charts, pictures, shapes, PivotTables, Internet links, symbols, or text boxes.
Page Layout Contains commands used to prepare a worksheet for printing. Also includes commands used to show and print the gridlines on a worksheet.
Formulas Includes commands for adding mathematical functions to a worksheet. Also contains tools for auditing mathematical formulas.
Data Used when working with external data sources such as Microsoft® Access®, text files, or the Internet. Also contains sorting commands and access to scenario tools.
Review Includes Spelling and Track Changes features. Also contains protection features to password protect worksheets or workbooks.
View Used to adjust the visual appearance of a workbook. Common commands include the Zoom and Page Layout view.

The Ribbon shown in Figure 1.7 “Ribbon for Excel” is full, or maximized. The benefit of having a full Ribbon is that the commands are always visible while you are developing a worksheet. However, depending on the screen dimensions of your computer, you may find that the Ribbon takes up too much vertical space on your worksheet. If this is the case, you can minimize the Ribbon by clicking the button shown in Figure 1.7 “Ribbon for Excel”. When minimized, the Ribbon will show only the tabs and not the command buttons. When you click on a tab, the command buttons will appear until you select a command or click anywhere on your worksheet.

Mouseless Commands

Minimizing or Maximizing the Ribbon

  • Hold down the CTRL key and press the F1 key.
  • Hold down the CTRL key and press the F1 key again to maximize the Ribbon.

Quick Access Toolbar and Right-Click Menu

Follow-along file: Not needed for this skill

The Quick Access ToolbarLocated at the upper-left side of the Excel screen above the Ribbon, this toolbar provides access to the most frequently used commands, such as Save and Undo. is found at the upper left side of the Excel screen above the Ribbon, as shown in Figure 1.3 “Blank Workbook”. This area provides access to the most frequently used commands, such as Save and Undo. You also can customize the Quick Access Toolbar by adding commands that you use on a regular basis. By placing these commands in the Quick Access Toolbar, you do not have to navigate through the Ribbon to find them. To customize the Quick Access Toolbar, click the down arrow as shown in Figure 1.8 “Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar”. This will open a menu of commands that you can add to the Quick Access Toolbar. If you do not see the command you are looking for on the list, select the More Commands option.

Figure 1.8 Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar

In addition to the Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar, you can also access commands by right clicking anywhere on the worksheet. Figure 1.9 “Right-Click Menu” shows an example of the commands available in the right-click menu.

Figure 1.9 Right-Click Menu

The File Tab

Follow-along file: Not needed for this skill

If you have used Office 2007, you may have noticed that the Office button has disappeared in the 2010 version. It has been replaced with the File tab on the far left side of the Ribbon. The File tab is also known as the Backstage viewThis view, which is opened through the File tab on the Ribbon, contains a variety of features and commands related to the workbook that is currently open. of the workbook. It contains a variety of features and commands related to the workbook that is currently open, new workbooks, or workbooks stored in other locations on your computer or network. Figure 1.10 “File Tab or Backstage View of a Workbook” shows the options available in the File tab or Backstage view. To leave the Backstage view and return to the worksheet, click any tab on the Ribbon or click the image of the worksheet on the right side of the window. You must click the Info button (highlighted in green in Figure 1.10 “File Tab or Backstage View of a Workbook”) to see the image of your worksheet on the right side of the window.

Figure 1.10 File Tab or Backstage View of a Workbook

Included in the File tab are the default settings for the Excel application that can be accessed and modified by clicking the Options button. Figure 1.11 “Excel Options Window” shows the Excel Options window, which gives you access to settings such as the default font style, font size, and the number of worksheets that appear in new workbooks.

Figure 1.11 Excel Options Window

Saving Workbooks (Save As)

Follow-along file: Not needed for this skill

Once you create a new workbook, you will need to change the file name and choose a location on your computer or network to save it. The following steps explain how to save a new workbook and assign it a file name. It is important to remember where you save this workbook on your computer or network as you will be using this file in the Section 1.2 “Entering, Editing, and Managing Data” to construct the workbook shown in Figure 1.1 “Example of an Excel Worksheet with Embedded Chart”.

  1. If you have not done so already, start Excel. A blank workbook should appear on your screen. Check to make sure the workbook is maximized (see Figure 1.4 “Restored Worksheet”).
  2. Click the File tab.
  3. Click the Save As button in the upper left side of the Backstage view window, as shown in Figure 1.10 “File Tab or Backstage View of a Workbook”. This will open the Save As dialog box.
  4. Click in the File Name box at the bottom of the Save As dialog box.
  5. Use the BACKSPACE key to remove the current file name of the workbook.
  6. Type the file name: Excel Objective 1.0.
  7. Click the Desktop button on the left side of the Save As dialog box if you wish to save this file on your desktop. If you want to save this workbook in a different location on your computer or network, double click the Computer option, as shown in Figure 1.12 “Save As Dialog Box”, and select your preferred location.
  8. Click the Save button on the lower right side of the Save As dialog box.

Figure 1.12 Save As Dialog Box

Mouseless Commands

Save As

  • Press the F12 key and use the tab and arrow keys to navigate around the Save As dialog box. Use the ENTER key to make a selection.
  • Or press the ALT key on your keyboard. You will see letters and numbers, called Key Tips, appear on the Ribbon. Press the F key on your keyboard for the File tab and then the A key. This will open the Save As dialog box.

Skill Refresher: Saving Workbooks (Save As)

  1. Click the File tab on the Ribbon.
  2. Click the Save As option.
  3. Select a location on your PC or network.
  4. Click in the File name box and type a new file name if needed.
  5. Click the down arrow next to the “Save as type” box and select the appropriate file type if needed.
  6. Click the Save button.

Excel 97-2003 File Type

Follow-along file: Open a blank workbook.

If you are working with someone who is using a version of Microsoft Office that is older than Office 2007, you will have to save your workbook under the Excel 97-2003 Workbook format. A person who is running Office 2003 will not be able to open workbooks that are saved under the Office 2010 or Office 2007 file types. You can save a workbook as an Excel 97-2003 file type by clicking the down arrow next to the “Save as type” box in the Save As dialog box (see Figure 1.12 “Save As Dialog Box”).

You can also change the file type of your workbook by using the File tab on the Ribbon. The following steps explain this method:

  1. Open the workbook you wish to convert to the Excel 97-2003 file type.
  2. Click the File tab on the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Save & Send button on the left side of the Backstage view.
  4. Click the Change File Type button.
  5. Double click the Excel 97-2003 Workbook option on the right side of the Backstage view. This will open up the Save As dialog box and set the file type box to Excel 97-2003 Workbook (see Figure 1.13 “Changing the File Type of a Workbook”).
  6. Check to make sure the Save As dialog box is set to the location where you want to save your workbook.
  7. Click the Save button at the bottom of the Save As dialog box.

Figure 1.13 Changing the File Type of a Workbook

Why?

No Office 2007 File Type

Workbooks that are created in Office 2010 are automatically compatible with Office 2007. A person who is running Office 2007 will be able to open, edit, and save workbooks created in Office 2010.

When you convert an existing workbook created in Office 2010 to the Excel 97-2003 file type, you may not notice any changes on the workbook itself. If you are using a feature or format that is not compatible with Office 97-2003, a warning will appear upon saving the file. You may want to remove these features and formats before sending the workbook to a person who is running an older version of Office. When you open a file that is saved in the Excel 97-2003 format, you will see the Compatibility Mode indicator next to the workbook name, as shown in Figure 1.14 “Workbook That Has Been Saved in Excel 97-2003 Format”.

Figure 1.14 Workbook That Has Been Saved in Excel 97-2003 Format

The Status Bar

Follow-along file: Continue with a blank workbook or open a new one.

The Status BarLocated below the worksheet tabs on the Excel screen, it displays a variety of information, such as the status of certain keys on your keyboard (e.g., CAPS LOCK), the available views for a workbook, the magnification of the screen, or mathematical functions that can be performed when data are highlighted on a worksheet. is located below the worksheet tabs on the Excel screen (see Figure 1.15 “Customizing the Status Bar”). It displays a variety of information, such as the status of certain keys on your keyboard (e.g., CAPS LOCK), the available views for a workbook, the magnification of the screen, and mathematical functions that can be performed when data are highlighted on a worksheet. You can customize the Status Bar as follows:

  1. Place the mouse pointer over any area of the Status Bar and right click (see Figure 1.15 “Customizing the Status Bar”).
  2. Select the Caps Lock option from the menu (see Figure 1.15 “Customizing the Status Bar”).
  3. Press the CAPS LOCK key on your keyboard. You will see the Caps Lock indicator on the lower right side of the Status Bar.
  4. Press the CAPS LOCK key again. The indicator on the Status Bar goes away.

Figure 1.15 Customizing the Status Bar

Excel Help

Follow-along file: Continue with a blank workbook or open a new one.

The Help feature provides extensive information about the Excel application. Although some of this information may be stored on your computer, the Help window will automatically connect to the Internet, if you have a live connection, to provide you with resources that can answer most of your questions. You can open the Excel Help window by clicking the question mark in the upper right corner of the screen (see Figure 1.3 “Blank Workbook”). Here you can search for specific topics or type a question in the upper-left side of the window, as shown in Figure 1.16 “Excel Help Window”.

Figure 1.16 Excel Help Window

Mouseless Command

Excel Help

  • Press the F1 key on your keyboard.

Key Takeaways

  • Excel is a powerful tool for processing data for the purposes of making decisions.
  • You can find Excel commands throughout the tabs in the Ribbon.
  • You can customize the Quick Access Toolbar by adding commands you frequently use.
  • You must save your workbook in the Excel 97-2003 file format when sharing workbooks with people who are running Microsoft Office 2003 and older versions.
  • Office 2007 can open files created in Office 2010.
  • You can add or remove the information that is displayed on the Status Bar.
  • The Help window provides you with extensive information about Excel.

Exercises

  1. Which of the following responses best defines the notation A1:B15?

    1. The contents in cell A1 are identical to the contents in cell B15.
    2. The cells between A1 and B15 are hidden.
    3. A cell range or contiguous group of cells that begins with cell A1 and include all cells up to and including cell B15.
    4. A cell link that connects cell A1 to B15.
  2. The Spell Check feature is in which tab of the Excel Ribbon?

    1. Home
    2. Review
    3. Data
    4. Formulas
  3. Holding down the CTRL key and pressing the F1 key on your keyboard is used to

    1. minimize the Ribbon
    2. open the Excel Help window
    3. save a workbook
    4. switch between open workbooks
  4. If you are sending an Excel workbook created in Office 2010 to a person who is running Office 2007, you should do the following:

    1. Use the Save As command to save the workbook in the Office 2007 file format.
    2. Use the Save As command to save the workbook in the Excel 97-2003 file format.
    3. Use the Save As command to save the workbook in the Universal Compatibility format.
    4. Nothing. Office 2007 can open files created in Office 2010.

1.2 Entering, Editing, and Managing Data

Learning Objectives

  1. Understand how to enter data into a worksheet.
  2. Examine how to edit data in a worksheet.
  3. Examine how Auto Fill is used when entering data.
  4. Understand how to delete data from a worksheet and use the Undo command.
  5. Examine how to adjust column widths and row heights in a worksheet.
  6. Understand how to hide columns and rows in a worksheet.
  7. Examine how to insert columns and rows into a worksheet.
  8. Understand how to delete columns and rows from a worksheet.
  9. Learn how to move data to different locations in a worksheet.

In this section, we will begin the development of the workbook shown in Figure 1.1 “Example of an Excel Worksheet with Embedded Chart”. The skills covered in this section are typically used in the early stages of developing one or more worksheets in a workbook.

Entering Data

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (This is a blank workbook that was named in the previous section. If you skipped the previous section, open a new workbook and save it with the file name “Excel Objective 1.0.”)

We will begin building the workbook shown in Figure 1.1 “Example of an Excel Worksheet with Embedded Chart” by manually entering data into the worksheet. There are other ways in which you can bring data into an Excel worksheet, such as importing data from a website or a Microsoft Access database. However, we will demonstrate these other methods later. The following steps explain how the column headings in Row 2 are typed into the worksheet:

  1. Activate cell location A2 on the worksheet.
  2. Type the word Month.
  3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key. This will enter the word into cell A2 and activate the next cell to the right.
  4. Type Unit Sales and press the RIGHT ARROW key.
  5. Repeat step 4 for the words Average Price and Sales Dollars.

    Figure 1.17 “Entering Column Headings into a Worksheet” shows how your worksheet should appear after you have typed the column headings into Row 2. Notice that the word Price in cell location C2 is not visible. This is because the column is too narrow to fit the entry you typed. We will examine formatting techniques to correct this problem in the next section.

    Figure 1.17 Entering Column Headings into a Worksheet

    Integrity Check

    Column Headings

    It is critical to include column headings that accurately describe the data in each column of a worksheet. In professional environments, you will likely be sharing Excel workbooks with coworkers. Good column headings reduce the chance of someone misinterpreting the data contained in a worksheet, which could lead to costly errors depending on your career.

  6. Activate cell location B3.
  7. Type the number 2670 and press the ENTER key. After you press the ENTER key, cell B4 will be activated. Using the ENTER key is an efficient way to enter data vertically down a column.
  8. Repeat step 7 by entering the following numbers in cells B4 through B14: 2160, 515, 590, 1030, 2875, 2700, 900, 775, 1180, 1800, and 3560.

    Why?

    Avoid Formatting Symbols When Entering Numbers

    When typing numbers into an Excel worksheet, it is best to avoid adding any formatting symbols such as dollar signs and commas. Although Excel allows you to add these symbols while typing numbers, it slows down the process of entering data. It is more efficient to use Excel’s formatting features to add these symbols to numbers after you type them into a worksheet.

  9. Activate cell location C3.
  10. Type the number 9.99 and press the ENTER key.
  11. Repeat step 10 by entering the following numbers in cells C4 through C14: 12.49, 14.99, 17.49, 14.99, 12.49, 9.99, 19.99, 19.99, 19.99, 17.49, and 14.99.
  12. Activate cell location D3.
  13. Type the number 26685 and press the ENTER key.
  14. Repeat step 13 by entering the following numbers in cells D4 through D14: 26937, 7701, 10269, 15405, 35916, 26937, 17958, 15708, 23562, 31416, and 53370.

Integrity Check

Data Entry

It is very important to proofread your worksheet carefully, especially when you have entered numbers. Transposing numbers when entering data manually into a worksheet is a common error. For example, the number 563 could be transposed to 536. Such errors can seriously compromise the integrity of your workbook.

Figure 1.18 “Completed Data Entry for Columns B, C, and D” shows how your worksheet should appear after entering the data. Check your numbers carefully to make sure they are accurately entered into the worksheet.

Figure 1.18 Completed Data Entry for Columns B, C, and D

Editing Data

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.01 if you are starting with this skill.)

Data that has been entered in a cell can be changed by double clicking the cell location or using the Formula BarThe area just above the column letters on a worksheet. It can be used for entering data into cells as well as for editing data that already exists in cells.. You may have noticed that as you were typing data into a cell location, the data you typed appeared in the Formula Bar. The Formula Bar can be used for entering data into cells as well as for editing data that already exists in a cell. The following steps provide an example of entering and then editing data that has been entered into a cell location:

  1. Activate cell A15 in the Sheet1 worksheet.
  2. Type the abbreviation Tot and press the ENTER key.
  3. Click cell A15.
  4. Move the mouse pointer up to the Formula Bar. You will see the pointer turn into a cursor. Move the cursor to the end of the abbreviation Tot and left click.
  5. Type the letters al to complete the word Total.
  6. Click the checkmark to the left of the Formula Bar (see Figure 1.19 “Using the Formula Bar to Edit and Enter Data”). This will enter the change into the cell.

    Figure 1.19 Using the Formula Bar to Edit and Enter Data

  7. Double click cell A15.
  8. Add a space after the word Total and type the word Sales.
  9. Press the ENTER key.

Mouseless Command

Editing Data in a Cell

  • Activate the cell that is to be edited and press the F2 key on your keyboard.

Auto Fill

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.02 if you are starting with this skill.)

The Auto FillAn Excel feature used to complete data in either a quantitative or qualitative sequence. It can also be used to copy and paste data in a worksheet. feature is a valuable tool when manually entering data into a worksheet. This feature has many uses, but it is most beneficial when you are entering data in a defined sequence, such as the numbers 2, 4, 6, 8, and so on, or nonnumeric data such as the days of the week or months of the year. The following steps demonstrate how Auto Fill can be used to enter the months of the year in Column A:

  1. Activate cell A3 in the Sheet1 worksheet.
  2. Type the word January and press the ENTER key.
  3. Activate cell A3 again.
  4. Move the mouse pointer to the lower right corner of cell A3. You will see a small square in this corner of the cell; this is called the Fill HandleA small square in lower right corner of an activated cell. When the mouse pointer gets close to the Fill Handle, the white block plus sign turns into a black plus sign. (see Figure 1.20 “Fill Handle”). When the mouse pointer gets close to the Fill Handle, the white block plus sign will turn into a black plus sign.

    Figure 1.20 Fill Handle

  5. Left click and drag the Fill Handle to cell A14. Notice that the Auto Fill tip box indicates what month will be placed into each cell (see Figure 1.21 “Using Auto Fill to Enter the Months of the Year”). Release the left mouse button when the tip box reads “December.”

    Figure 1.21 Using Auto Fill to Enter the Months of the Year

    Once you release the left mouse button, all twelve months of the year should appear in the cell range A3:A14, as shown in Figure 1.22 “Auto Fill Options Button”. You will also see the Auto Fill Options button. By clicking this button, you have several options for inserting data into a group of cells.

    Figure 1.22 Auto Fill Options Button

  6. Left click the Auto Fill Options button.
  7. Left click the Copy Cells option. This will change the months in the range A4:A14 to January.
  8. Left click the Auto Fill Options button again.
  9. Left click the Fill Months option to return the months of the year to the cell range A4:A14. The Fill Series option will provide the same result.

Deleting Data and the Undo Command

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.03 if you are starting with this skill.)

There are several methods for removing data from a worksheet, a few of which are demonstrated here. With each method, you use the Undo command. This is a helpful command in the event you mistakenly remove data from your worksheet. The following steps demonstrate how you can delete data from a cell or range of cells:

  1. Activate cell C2 by placing the mouse pointer over the cell and clicking the left mouse button.
  2. Press the DELETE key on your keyboard. This removes the contents of the cell.
  3. Highlight the range C3:C14 by placing the mouse pointer over cell C3. Then left click and drag the mouse pointer down to cell C14.
  4. Place the mouse pointer over the Fill Handle. You will see the white block plus sign change to a black plus sign.
  5. Left click and drag the mouse pointer up to cell C3 (see Figure 1.23 “Using Auto Fill to Delete Contents of Cell”). Release the mouse button. The contents in the range C3:C14 will be removed.

    Figure 1.23 Using Auto Fill to Delete Contents of Cell

  6. Click the Undo button in the Quick Access Toolbar (see Figure 1.3 “Blank Workbook”). This should replace the data in the range C3:C14.
  7. Click the Undo button again. This should replace the data in cell C2.

    Mouseless Command

    Undo Command

    • Hold down the CTRL key while pressing the letter Z on your keyboard.
  8. Highlight the range C2:C14 by placing the mouse pointer over cell C2. Then left click and drag the mouse pointer down to cell C14.
  9. Click the Clear button in the Home tab of the Ribbon, which is next to the Cells group of commands (see Figure 1.24 “Clear Command Drop-Down Menu”). This opens a drop-down menu that contains several options for removing or clearing data from a cell. Notice that you also have options for clearing just the formats in a cell or the hyperlinks in a cell.
  10. Click the Clear All option. This removes the data in the cell range.
  11. Click the Undo button. This replaces the data in the range C2:C14.

Figure 1.24 Clear Command Drop-Down Menu

Adjusting Columns and Rows

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.03 if you are starting with this skill.)

In Figure 1.22 “Auto Fill Options Button”, there are a few entries that appear cut off. For example, the last letter of the word September cannot be seen in cell A11. This is because the column is too narrow for this word. The columns and rows on an Excel worksheet can be adjusted to accommodate the data that is being entered into a cell. The following steps explain how to adjust the column widths and row heights in a worksheet:

  1. Bring the mouse pointer between Column A and Column B in the Sheet1 worksheet, as shown in Figure 1.25 “Adjusting Column Widths”. You will see the white block plus sign turn into double arrows.
  2. Left click and drag the column to the right so the entire word September in cell A11 can be seen. As you drag the column, you will see the column width tip boxA box that appears when the width of a column is being adjusted using the click-and-drag method. It displays the number of characters that will fit into the column using Calibri 11-point font.. This box displays the number of characters that will fit into the column using the Calibri 11-point font.
  3. Release the left mouse button.

    Figure 1.25 Adjusting Column Widths

    You may find that using the click-and-drag method is inefficient if you need to set a specific character width for one or more columns. Steps 4 through 7 illustrate a second method for adjusting column widths when using a specific number of characters:

  4. Activate any cell location in Column A by moving the mouse pointer over a cell location and clicking the left mouse button. You can highlight cell locations in multiple columns if you are setting the same character width for more than one column.
  5. In the Home tab of the Ribbon, left click the Format button in the Cells group (see Figure 1.26 “Cells Group in the Home Tab”).
  6. Click the Column Width option from the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.27 “Format Drop-Down Menu”). This will open the Column Width dialog box.
  7. Type the number 13 and click the OK button on the Column Width dialog box. This will set Column A to this character width (see Figure 1.28 “Column Width Dialog Box”).

    Figure 1.26 Cells Group in the Home Tab

    Figure 1.27 Format Drop-Down Menu

    Figure 1.28 Column Width Dialog Box

    Mouseless Command

    Column Width

    • Press the ALT key on your keyboard, then press the letters H, O, and W one at a time.

    Steps 8 through 10 demonstrate how to adjust row height, which is similar to adjusting column width:

  8. Activate cell A15 by placing the mouse pointer over the cell and clicking the left mouse button.
  9. In the Home tab of the Ribbon, left click the Format button in the Cells group (see Figure 1.26 “Cells Group in the Home Tab”).
  10. Click the Row Height option from the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.27 “Format Drop-Down Menu”). This will open the Row Height dialog box.
  11. Type the number 24 and click the OK button on the Row Height dialog box. This will set Row 15 to a height of 24 points. A pointMetric used when measuring the height of a row; equivalent to approximately 1/72 of an inch. is equivalent to approximately 1/72 of an inch. This adjustment in row height was made to create space between the totals for this worksheet and the rest of the data.

Mouseless Command

Row Height

  • Press the ALT key on your keyboard, then press the letters H, O, and H one at a time.

Figure 1.29 “Excel Objective 1.0 with Column A and Row 15 Adjusted” shows the appearance of the worksheet after Column A and Row 15 are adjusted.

Figure 1.29 Excel Objective 1.0 with Column A and Row 15 Adjusted

Skill Refresher: Adjusting Columns and Rows

  1. Activate at least one cell in the row or column you are adjusting.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Format button in the Cells group.
  4. Click either Row Height or Column Width from the drop-down menu.
  5. Enter the Row Height in points or Column Width in characters in the dialog box.
  6. Click the OK button.

Hiding Columns and Rows

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.04 if you are starting with this skill.)

In addition to adjusting the columns and rows on a worksheet, you can also hide columns and rows. This is a useful technique for enhancing the visual appearance of a worksheet that contains data that is not necessary to display. These features will be demonstrated using the Excel Objective 1.0 workbook. However, there is no need to have hidden columns or rows for this worksheet. The use of these skills here will be for demonstration purposes only.

  1. Activate cell C1 in the Sheet1 worksheet by placing the mouse pointer over the cell location and clicking the left mouse button.
  2. Click the Format button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Place the mouse pointer over the Hide & Unhide option in the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.27 “Format Drop-Down Menu”). This will open a submenu of options.
  4. Click the Hide Columns option in the submenu of options (see Figure 1.30 “Hide & Unhide Submenu”). This will hide Column C.

    Figure 1.30 Hide & Unhide Submenu

    Mouseless Command

    Hiding Columns

    • Hold down the CTRL key while pressing the number 0 on your keyboard.

    Figure 1.31 “Hidden Column” shows the workbook with Column C hidden in the Sheet1 worksheet. You can tell a column is hidden by the missing letter C.

    Figure 1.31 Hidden Column

    To unhide a column, follow these steps:

  5. Highlight the range B1:D1 by activating cell B1 and clicking and dragging over to cell D1.
  6. Click the Format button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  7. Place the mouse pointer over the Hide & Unhide option in the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.27 “Format Drop-Down Menu”).
  8. Click the Unhide Columns option in the submenu of options (see Figure 1.30 “Hide & Unhide Submenu”). Column C will now be visible on the worksheet.

    Mouseless Command

    Unhiding Columns

    • Highlight cells on either side of the hidden column(s), then hold down the CTRL key and the SHIFT key while pressing the close parenthesis key ()) on your keyboard.

    The following steps demonstrate how to hide rows, which is similar to hiding columns:

  9. Activate cell A3 in the Sheet1 worksheet by placing the mouse pointer over the cell location and clicking the left mouse button.
  10. Click the Format button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  11. Place the mouse pointer over the Hide & Unhide option in the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.27 “Format Drop-Down Menu”). This will open a submenu of options.
  12. Click the Hide Rows option in the submenu of options (see Figure 1.30 “Hide & Unhide Submenu”). This will hide Row 3.

    Mouseless Command

    Hiding Rows

    • Hold down the CTRL key while pressing the number 9 key on your keyboard.

    To unhide a row, follow these steps:

  13. Highlight the range A2:A4 by activating cell A2 and clicking and dragging over to cell A4.
  14. Click the Format button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  15. Place the mouse pointer over the Hide & Unhide option in the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.27 “Format Drop-Down Menu”).
  16. Click the Unhide Rows option in the submenu of options (see Figure 1.30 “Hide & Unhide Submenu”). Row 3 will now be visible on the worksheet.

Mouseless Command

Unhiding Rows

  • Highlight cells above and below the hidden row(s), then hold down the CTRL key and the SHIFT key while pressing the open parenthesis key (() on your keyboard.

Integrity Check

Hidden Rows and Columns

In most careers, it is common for professionals to use Excel workbooks that have been designed by a coworker. Before you use a workbook developed by someone else, always check for hidden rows and columns. You can quickly see whether a row or column is hidden if a row number or column letter is missing.

Skill Refresher: Hiding Columns and Rows

  1. Activate at least one cell in the row(s) or column(s) you are hiding.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Format button in the Cells group.
  4. Place the mouse pointer over the Hide & Unhide option.
  5. Click either the Hide Rows or Hide Columns option.

Skill Refresher: Unhiding Columns and Rows

  1. Highlight the cells above and below the hidden row(s) or to the left and right of the hidden column(s).
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Format button in the Cells group.
  4. Place the mouse pointer over the Hide & Unhide option.
  5. Click either the Unhide Rows or Unhide Columns option.

Inserting Columns and Rows

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.04 if you are starting with this skill.)

Using Excel workbooks that have been created by others is a very efficient way to work because it eliminates the need to create data worksheets from scratch. However, you may find that to accomplish your goals, you need to add additional columns or rows of data. In this case, you can insert blank columns or rows into a worksheet. The following steps demonstrate how to do this:

  1. Activate cell C1 in the Sheet1 worksheet by placing the mouse pointer over the cell location and clicking the left mouse button.
  2. Click the down arrow on the Insert button in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.32 “Insert Button (Down Arrow)”).

    Figure 1.32 Insert Button (Down Arrow)

  3. Click the Insert Sheet Columns option from the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.33 “Insert Drop-Down Menu”). A blank column will be inserted to the left of Column C. The contents that were previously in Column C now appear in Column D. Note that columns are always inserted to the left of the activated cell.

    Mouseless Command

    Inserting Columns

    • Press the ALT key and then the letters H, I, and C one at a time. A column will be inserted to the left of the activated cell.

    Figure 1.33 Insert Drop-Down Menu

  4. Activate cell A3 in the Sheet1 worksheet by placing the mouse pointer over the cell location and clicking the left mouse button.
  5. Click the down arrow on the Insert button in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.32 “Insert Button (Down Arrow)”).
  6. Click the Insert Sheet Rows option from the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.33 “Insert Drop-Down Menu”). A blank row will be inserted above Row 3. The contents that were previously in Row 3 now appear in Row 4. Note that rows are always inserted above the activated cell.

Mouseless Command

Inserting Rows

  • Press the ALT key and then the letters H, I, and R one at a time. A row will be inserted above the activated cell.

Skill Refresher: Inserting Columns and Rows

  1. Activate the cell to the right of the desired blank column or below the desired blank row.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow on the Insert button in the Cells group.
  4. Click either the Insert Sheet Columns or Insert Sheet Rows option.

Moving Data

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.05 if you skipped the previous skill and are starting with this skill.)

Once data are entered into a worksheet, you have the ability to move it to different locations. The following steps demonstrate how to move data to different locations on a worksheet:

  1. Highlight the range D2:D15 by activating cell D2 and clicking and dragging down to cell D15.
  2. Bring the mouse pointer to the left edge of cell D2. You will see the white block plus sign change to cross arrows (see Figure 1.34 “Moving Data”). This indicates that you can left click and drag the data to a new location.

    Figure 1.34 Moving Data

  3. Left click and drag the mouse pointer to cell C2.
  4. Release the left mouse button. The data now appears in Column C.
  5. Click the Undo button in the Quick Access Toolbar. This moves the data back to Column D.

Integrity Check

Moving Data

Before moving data on a worksheet, make sure you identify all the components that belong with the series you are moving. For example, if you are moving a column of data, make sure the column heading is included. Also, make sure all values are highlighted in the column before moving it.

Deleting Columns and Rows

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.05 if you are starting with this skill.)

You may need to delete entire columns or rows of data from a worksheet. This need may arise if you need to remove either blank columns or rows from a worksheet or columns and rows that contain data. The methods for removing cell contents were covered earlier and can be used to delete unwanted data. However, if you do not want a blank row or column in your workbook, you can delete it using the following steps:

  1. Activate cell A3 by placing the mouse pointer over the cell location and clicking the left mouse button.
  2. Click the down arrow on the Delete button in the Cells group in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Delete Sheet Rows option from the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.35 “Delete Drop-Down Menu”). This removes Row 3 and shifts all the data (below Row 2) in the worksheet up one row.

    Mouseless Command

    Deleting Rows

    • Press the ALT key and then the letters H, D, and R one at a time. The row with the activated cell will be deleted.

    Figure 1.35 Delete Drop-Down Menu

  4. Activate cell C1 by placing the mouse pointer over the cell location and clicking the left mouse button.
  5. Click the down arrow on the Delete button in the Cells group in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  6. Click the Delete Sheet Columns option from the drop-down menu (see Figure 1.35 “Delete Drop-Down Menu”). This removes Column C and shifts all the data in the worksheet (to the right of Column B) over one column to the left.

Mouseless Command

Deleting Columns

  • Press the ALT key and then the letters H, D, and C one at a time. The column with the activated cell will be deleted.

Skill Refresher: Deleting Columns and Rows

  1. Activate any cell in the row or column that is to be deleted.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow on the Delete button in the Cells group.
  4. Click either the Delete Sheet Columns or the Delete Sheet Rows option.

Key Takeaways

  • Column headings should be used in a worksheet and should accurately describe the data contained in each column.
  • Using symbols such as dollar signs when entering numbers into a worksheet can slow down the data entry process.
  • Worksheets must be carefully proofread when data has been manually entered.
  • The Undo command is a valuable tool for recovering data that was deleted from a worksheet.
  • When using a worksheet that was developed by someone else, look carefully for hidden column or rows.

Exercises

  1. When entering numeric data into an Excel worksheet, you should omit symbols such as commas or dollar signs because:

    1. These numbers will not be usable in mathematical functions or formulas.
    2. Excel will convert this to text data.
    3. Excel will not accept these entries into a cell location.
    4. It slows down the data entry process.
  2. Which of the following statements is true with respect to editing the content in a cell location?

    1. Activate the cell location and press the F2 key on your keyboard to edit the data in the cell.
    2. Double click the cell location to edit the data in a cell location.
    3. Activate the cell location, click the Formula Bar, and make any edits for the cell location in the Formula Bar.
    4. All of the above are true.
  3. Which of the following will enable you to identify hidden columns in a worksheet?

    1. The column letter appears in a tip box when the mouse pointer is moved over a hidden column.
    2. Clicking the Page Layout View button in the View tab of the Ribbon shows all columns in the worksheet and shades hidden columns.
    3. The column letters that appear above the columns in a worksheet will be missing for hidden columns.
    4. Click the Hidden Columns indicator in the Status Bar.
  4. Which of the following is true with respect to inserting blank rows into a worksheet?

    1. Blank rows are inserted above the activated cell or cell range in a worksheet.
    2. Blank rows are always inserted in the center of a cell range. At least two or more cells in a worksheet must be highlighted before a row can be inserted.
    3. The command for inserting blank rows and columns can be found by clicking the Format button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
    4. When inserting blank rows into a worksheet, the Undo button is disabled. You must use the Delete button in the Home tab of the Ribbon to remove unwanted blank rows.

1.3 Formatting and Data Analysis

Learning Objectives

  1. Use formatting techniques to enhance the appearance of a worksheet.
  2. Understand how to align data in cell locations.
  3. Examine how to enter multiple lines of text in a cell location.
  4. Understand how to add borders to a worksheet.
  5. Examine how to use the AutoSum feature to calculate totals.
  6. Understand how to insert a chart into a worksheet.
  7. Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to manipulate the data on a worksheet.
  8. Examine how to use the Sort command to rank data on a worksheet.
  9. Understand how to move, rename, insert, and delete worksheet tabs.

This section addresses formatting commands that can be used to enhance the visual appearance of a worksheet. It also provides an introduction to mathematical calculations and charts. The skills introduced in this section will give you powerful tools for analyzing the data that we have been working with in this workbook and will highlight how Excel is used to make key decisions in virtually any career.

Formatting Data and Cells

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.04 if you are starting with this skill.)

Enhancing the visual appearance of a worksheet is a critical step in creating a valuable tool for you or your coworkers when making key decisions. The following steps demonstrate several fundamental formatting skills that will be applied to the workbook that we are developing for this chapter. Several of these formatting skills are identical to ones that you may have already used in other Microsoft applications such as Microsoft® Word® or Microsoft® PowerPoint®.

  1. Highlight the range A2:D2 in the Sheet1 worksheet by placing the mouse pointer over cell A2 and left clicking and dragging to cell D2.
  2. Click the Bold button in the Font group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.36 “Font Group of Commands”).

    Figure 1.36 Font Group of Commands

    Mouseless Command

    Bold Format

    • Hold the CTRL key while pressing the letter B on your keyboard.
  3. Highlight the range A15:D15 by placing the mouse pointer over cell A15 and left clicking and dragging to cell D15.
  4. Click the Bold button in the Font group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  5. Click the Italics button in the Font group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.36 “Font Group of Commands”).
  6. Click the Underline button in the Font group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.36 “Font Group of Commands”). Notice that there is a drop-down arrow next to the Underline button. This is for selecting a double underline format, which is common in careers that deal with accounting or budgeting activities.

    Mouseless Command

    Italics Format

    • Hold the CTRL key while pressing the letter I on your keyboard.

    Mouseless Command

    Underline Format

    • Hold the CTRL key while pressing the letter U on your keyboard.

    Why?

    Format Column Headings and Totals

    Applying formatting enhancements to the column headings and column totals in a worksheet is a very important technique, especially if you are sharing a workbook with other people. These formatting techniques allow users of the worksheet to clearly see the column headings that define the data. In addition, the column totals usually contain the most important data on a worksheet with respect to making decisions, and formatting techniques allow users to quickly see this information.

  7. Highlight the range B3:B14 by placing the mouse pointer over cell B3 and left clicking and dragging down to cell B14.
  8. Click the Comma Style button in the Number group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.37 “Number Group of Commands”).

    Figure 1.37 Number Group of Commands

  9. Click the Decrease Decimal button in the Number group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.37 “Number Group of Commands”).
  10. The numbers will also be reduced to zero decimal places.
  11. Highlight the range C3:C14 by placing the mouse pointer over cell C3 and left clicking and dragging down to cell C14.
  12. Click the Accounting Number Format button in the Number group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.37 “Number Group of Commands”). This will add the US currency symbol and two decimal places to the values. This format is common when working with pricing data.
  13. Highlight the range D3:D14 by placing the mouse pointer over cell D3 and left clicking and dragging down to cell D14.
  14. Again, this will add the US currency symbol to the values as well as two decimal places.
  15. Click the Decrease Decimal button in the Number group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  16. This will add the US currency symbol to the values and reduce the decimal places to zero.
  17. Highlight the range A1:D1 by placing the mouse pointer over cell A1 and left clicking and dragging over to cell D1.
  18. Click the down arrow next to the Fill Color button in the Font group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.38 “Fill Color Palette”).

    Figure 1.38 Fill Color Palette

  19. Click the Aqua, Accent 5, Darker 25% color from the palette (see Figure 1.38 “Fill Color Palette”). Notice that as you move the mouse pointer over the color palette, you will see a preview of how the color will appear in the highlighted cells.
  20. Click the down arrow next to the Font Color button in the Font group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.36 “Font Group of Commands”).
  21. This change will be visible once text is typed into the highlighted cells.
  22. Click the Increase Font Size button in the Font group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.38 “Fill Color Palette”).
  23. Highlight the range A1:D15 by placing the mouse pointer over cell A1 and left clicking and dragging down to cell D15.
  24. Click the drop-down arrow on the right side of the Font button in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.36 “Font Group of Commands”).
  25. Notice that as you move the mouse pointer over the font style options, you can see the font change in the highlighted cells.
  26. Expand the row width of Column D to 10 characters.

Why?

Pound Signs (####) Appear in Columns

When a column is too narrow for a long number, Excel will automatically convert the number to a series of pound signs (####). In the case of words or text data, Excel will only show the characters that fit in the column. However, this is not the case with numeric data because it can give the appearance of a number that is much smaller than what is actually in the cell. To remove the pound signs, increase the width of the column.

Figure 1.39 “Formatting Techniques Applied” shows how the Sheet1 worksheet should appear after the formatting techniques are applied.

Figure 1.39 Formatting Techniques Applied

Data Alignment (Wrap Text, Merge Cells, and Center)

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.06 if you are starting with this skill.)

The skills presented in this segment show how data are aligned within cell locations. For example, text and numbers can be centered in a cell location, left justified, right justified, and so on. In some cases you may want to stack multiword text entries vertically in a cell instead of expanding the width of a column. This is referred to as wrapping textStacking multiword text entries vertically in a cell.. These skills are demonstrated in the following steps:

  1. Highlight the range B2:D2 by placing the mouse pointer over cell B2 and left clicking and dragging over to cell D2.
  2. Click the Center button in the Alignment group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.40 “Alignment Group in Home Tab”). This will center the column headings in each cell location.

    Figure 1.40 Alignment Group in Home Tab

  3. Click the Wrap Text button in the Alignment group (see Figure 1.40 “Alignment Group in Home Tab”). The height of Row 2 automatically expands, and the words that were cut off because the columns were too narrow are now stacked vertically (see Figure 1.42 “Sheet1 with Data Alignment Features Added”).

    Mouseless Command

    Wrap Text

    • Press the ALT key and then the letters H and W one at a time.

    Why?

    Wrap Text

    The benefit of using the Wrap Text command is that it significantly reduces the need to expand the column width to accommodate multiword column headings. The problem with increasing the column width is that you may reduce the amount of data that can fit on a piece of paper or one screen. This makes it cumbersome to analyze the data in the worksheet and could increase the time it takes to make a decision.

  4. Highlight the range A1:D1 by placing the mouse pointer over cell A1 and left clicking and dragging over to cell D1.
  5. Click the down arrow on the right side of the Merge & Center button in the Alignment group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  6. Left click the Merge & Center option (see Figure 1.41 “Merge Cell Drop-Down Menu”). This will create one large cell location running across the top of the data set.

Mouseless Commands

Merge Commands

  • Merge & Center: Press the ALT key and then the letters H, M, and C one at a time.
  • Merge Cells: Press the ALT key and then the letters H, M, and M one at a time.
  • Unmerge Cells: Press the ALT key and then the letters H, M, and U one at a time.

Figure 1.41 Merge Cell Drop-Down Menu

Why?

Merge & Center

One of the most common reasons the Merge & Center command is used is to center the title of a worksheet directly above the columns of data. Once the cells above the column headings are merged, a title can be centered above the columns of data. It is very difficult to center the title over the columns of data if the cells are not merged.

Figure 1.42 “Sheet1 with Data Alignment Features Added” shows the Sheet1 worksheet with the data alignment commands applied. The reason for merging the cells in the range A1:D1 will become apparent in the next segment.

Figure 1.42 Sheet1 with Data Alignment Features Added

Skill Refresher: Wrap Text

  1. Activate the cell or range of cells that contain text data.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Wrap Text button.

Skill Refresher: Merge Cells

  1. Highlight a range of cells that will be merged.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow next to the Merge & Center button.
  4. Select an option from the Merge & Center list.

Entering Multiple Lines of Text

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.07 if you are starting with this skill.)

In the Sheet1 worksheet, the cells in the range A1:D1 were merged for the purposes of adding a title to the worksheet. This title will require that two lines of text be entered into a cell. The following steps explain how you can enter text into a cell and determine where you want the second line of text to begin:

  1. Activate cell A1 in the Sheet1 worksheet by placing the mouse pointer over cell A1 and clicking the left mouse button. Since the cells were merged, clicking cell A1 will automatically activate the range A1:D1.
  2. Type the text General Merchandise World.
  3. Hold down the ALT key and press the ENTER key. This will start a new line of text in this cell location.
  4. Type the text 2011 Retail Sales (in millions) and press the ENTER key.
  5. Select cell A1. Then click the Italics button in the Font group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  6. Increase the height of Row 1 to 30 points. Once the row height is increased, all the text typed into the cell will be visible (see Figure 1.43 “Title Added to the Sheet1 Worksheet”).

Figure 1.43 Title Added to the Sheet1 Worksheet

Skill Refresher: Entering Multiple Lines of Text

  1. Activate a cell location.
  2. Type the first line of text.
  3. Hold down the ALT key and press the ENTER key.
  4. Type the second line of text and press the ENTER key.

Borders (Adding Lines to a Worksheet)

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.08 if you are starting with this skill.)

In Excel, adding custom lines to a worksheet is known as adding borders. BordersLines that are added to a worksheet to separate the data in columns and rows. are different from the grid lines that appear on a worksheet and that define the perimeter of the cell locations. The Borders command lets you add a variety of line styles to a worksheet that can make reading the worksheet much easier. The following steps illustrate methods for adding preset borders and custom borders to a worksheet:

  1. Note that when you click on cell A1, cells B1:D1 will also activate since they are merged.
  2. Click the down arrow to the right of the Borders button in the Font group of commands in the Home page of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.44 “Borders Drop-Down Menu”).

    Figure 1.44 Borders Drop-Down Menu

  3. Left click the All Borders option from the Borders drop-down menu (see Figure 1.44 “Borders Drop-Down Menu”). This will add vertical and horizontal lines to the range A1:D15.
  4. Highlight the range A2:D2 by placing the mouse pointer over cell A2 and left clicking and dragging over to cell D2.
  5. Click the down arrow to the right of the Borders button.
  6. Left click the Thick Bottom Border option from the Borders drop-down menu.
  7. Highlight the range A1:D15.
  8. Click the down arrow to the right of the Borders button.
  9. This will open the Format Cells dialog box (see Figure 1.45 “Borders Tab of the Format Cells Dialog Box”). You can access all formatting commands in Excel through this dialog box.
  10. In the Style section of the Borders tab, left click the thickest line style (see Figure 1.45 “Borders Tab of the Format Cells Dialog Box”).
  11. Left click the Outline button in the Presets section (see Figure 1.45 “Borders Tab of the Format Cells Dialog Box”).
  12. Click the OK button at the bottom of the dialog box (see Figure 1.45 “Borders Tab of the Format Cells Dialog Box”).

Figure 1.45 Borders Tab of the Format Cells Dialog Box

Figure 1.46 Borders Added to the Sheet1 Worksheet

Skill Refresher: Preset Borders

  1. Highlight a range of cells that require borders.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow next to the Borders button.
  4. Select an option from the preset borders list.

Skill Refresher: Custom Borders

  1. Highlight a range of cells that require borders.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow next to the Borders button.
  4. Select the More Borders option at the bottom of the options list.
  5. Select a line style and line color.
  6. Select a placement option.
  7. Click the OK button on the dialog box.

AutoSum

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.09 if you are starting with this skill.)

You will see at the bottom of Figure 1.46 “Borders Added to the Sheet1 Worksheet” that Row 15 is intended to show the totals for the data in this worksheet. Applying mathematical computations to a range of cells is accomplished through functionsMathematical computations that are applied to a range of cells or specific cells on a worksheet. in Excel. Chapter 2 “Mathematical Computations” will review mathematical formulas and functions in detail. However, the following steps will demonstrate how you can quickly sum the values in a column of data using the AutoSum command:

  1. Activate cell B15 in the Sheet1 worksheet.
  2. Click the Formulas tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow below the AutoSum button in the Function Library group of commands (see Figure 1.47 “AutoSum Drop-Down List”). Note that the AutoSum button can also be found in the Editing group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.

    Figure 1.47 AutoSum Drop-Down List

  4. Click the Sum option from the AutoSum drop-down menu.
  5. Excel will provide a total for the values in the Unit Sales column.
  6. Activate cell D15.
  7. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to sum the values in the Sales Dollars column (see Figure 1.48 “Totals Added to the Sheet1 Worksheet”).
  8. This will remove the pound signs (####) and show the total.

Figure 1.48 Totals Added to the Sheet1 Worksheet

Skill Refresher: AutoSum

  1. Highlight a cell location below or to the right of a range of cells that contain numeric values.
  2. Click the Formulas tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow below the AutoSum button.
  4. Select a mathematical function from the list.

Inserting a Column Chart

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.10 if you are starting with this skill.)

As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, Excel serves as a critical tool for making decisions in both personal and professional contexts. ChartsTools used to graphically display the data in a worksheet. are a powerful tool in Excel that allow you to graphically display the data in a worksheet. Graphical displays allow the reader to immediately identify key trends and behaviors in the data that is being analyzed. For the workbook that we are using for this chapter, understanding the trends in monthly sales data is critical for making decisions such as how many staff members to assign to the store for each month as well as supplying the store with enough inventory to accommodate expected sales. To assist the reader in analyzing this data, a column chart will be created to graphically display the data. It is important for you to plan which type of chart will best display the data so your readers can quickly see key trends. More details on creating charts and on chart types will be presented in a later chapter. The following steps are an introduction to creating the column chart required for this chapter’s objective:

  1. Highlight the range A2:B14.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Column button (see Figure 1.49 “Column Chart Drop-Down Menu”). This will open the column chart drop-down menu of options.

    Figure 1.49 Column Chart Drop-Down Menu

  4. Select the Clustered Column option from the list of column chart options (see Figure 1.49 “Column Chart Drop-Down Menu”). This will create an embedded chart in the Sheet1 worksheet (see Figure 1.50 “Embedded Column Chart in Sheet1”).

    Figure 1.50 “Embedded Column Chart in Sheet1” shows the column chart that is created once a selection is made from the column chart drop-down menu. Notice that there are three new tabs added to the Ribbon. These tabs contain features for enhancing the appearance and construction of Excel charts. These commands will be covered in more detail in a later chapter. For now, you will see that Excel places the chart over the data in the worksheet. The following steps explain how to move and resize the chart:

    Figure 1.50 Embedded Column Chart in Sheet1

  5. The block white plus sign will become black cross arrows (see Figure 1.50 “Embedded Column Chart in Sheet1”).
  6. Left click and drag the chart so the upper left corner is placed in the middle of cell F1 (see Figure 1.51 “Moving an Embedded Chart”).

    Figure 1.51 Moving an Embedded Chart

  7. Place the mouse pointer over the top center sizing handleDots that appear around the perimeter of an embedded chart in a worksheet. They can be clicked and dragged to desired dimensions to change the size of a chart. (see Figure 1.50 “Embedded Column Chart in Sheet1”). You will see the mouse pointer change from a white block plus sign to a vertical double arrow. Make sure the mouse pointer is not in the cross arrow mode as shown in Figure 1.50 “Embedded Column Chart in Sheet1” as this will move the chart instead of resizing it.
  8. While holding down the ALT key on your keyboard, left click and drag the mouse pointer slightly up. The chart will automatically adjust up to the top of Row 1.
  9. Place the mouse pointer over the left center sizing handle.
  10. While holding down the ALT key on your keyboard, left click and drag the mouse slightly toward the left. The chart will automatically adjust to the left side of Column F.
  11. Place the mouse pointer over the lower center sizing handle.
  12. While holding down the ALT key on your keyboard, left click and drag the mouse slightly down. The chart will automatically adjust to the bottom of Row 14.
  13. Place the mouse pointer over the right center sizing handle.
  14. While holding down the ALT key on your keyboard, left click and drag the mouse slightly to the right. The chart will automatically adjust to the right side of Column M.

    Why?

    There Are No Sizing Handles on a Chart

    If you do not see the dots or sizing handles around the perimeter of a chart, it could be that the chart is not activated. To activate a chart, left click anywhere on the chart.

    Figure 1.52 “Embedded Chart Moved and Resized” shows the column chart moved and resized. Notice that the sizing handles are not visible around the perimeter of the chart. This is because the chart is not activated. Once you click anywhere on the worksheet outside the chart area, the chart is automatically deactivated.

    Figure 1.52 Embedded Chart Moved and Resized

    Why?

    Use the ALT Key When Resizing a Chart

    Using the ALT key while resizing an embedded chart locks the perimeter of the chart to the columns and rows of the worksheet. This gives you the ability to adjust the chart to precise sizes as you adjust the width and height of the worksheet rows and columns.

    As shown in Figure 1.50 “Embedded Column Chart in Sheet1”, when a chart is created, three tabs are added to the Ribbon. The following steps explain how to use a few of the formatting and design features in these tabs:

  15. Check to make sure the column chart in Sheet1 is activated. To activate the chart, left click anywhere on the chart.
  16. Click the Design tab under the Chart Tools set of tabs on the Ribbon.
  17. Click the down arrow on the right side of the Chart Styles section (see Figure 1.53 “Chart Styles in the Design Tab”).

    Figure 1.53 Chart Styles in the Design Tab

  18. Click Style 44 in the Chart Styles section. This style has a black background with red columns (see Figure 1.53 “Chart Styles in the Design Tab”).
  19. Click the Format tab under the Chart Tools set of tabs on the Ribbon.
  20. Click the down arrow on the right side of the WordArt Styles section (see Figure 1.54 “WordArt Styles in the Format Tab”).

Figure 1.54 WordArt Styles in the Format Tab

Click the Blue, Accent 1, Inner Shadow option (see Figure 1.54 “WordArt Styles in the Format Tab”). Notice that as you move the mouse pointer over the WordArt Styles options, the format of the chart title as well as the X and Y axis titles changes.

Figure 1.55 “Formatting Features Applied to the Column Chart” shows the embedded column chart with the formatting features applied. This chart is very effective in displaying the Unit Sales trends for this company. You can see very quickly that the tallest bar in the chart is the month of December, followed by the months of June, July, January, and February.

Figure 1.55 Formatting Features Applied to the Column Chart

Skill Refresher: Creating a Column Chart

  1. Highlight a range of cells that contain data that will be used to create the chart.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Column button in the Charts group.
  4. Select an option from the Column drop-down menu.

Cut, Copy, and Paste

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.11 if you are starting with this skill.)

The Cut, Copy, and Paste commands are perhaps the most widely used commands in Microsoft Office. With regard to Excel, the Copy and Paste commands are often used to make copies of worksheets for developing different scenarios or versions for the data being analyzed. The following steps demonstrate how these commands are used for the objective in this chapter:

  1. Click the Select All button in the upper left corner of the Sheet1 worksheet (see Figure 1.56 “Clipboard Group of Commands”).

    Figure 1.56 Clipboard Group of Commands

  2. Click the Copy button in the Clipboard group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.56 “Clipboard Group of Commands”).

    Mouseless Command

    Copy

    • Press the CTRL key and then the letter C key on your keyboard.
  3. Open the Sheet2 worksheet by left clicking on the Sheet2 worksheet tab at the bottom of the workbook.
  4. Activate cell location A1.
  5. Click the Paste button in the Clipboard group of commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Be sure to click the upper area of the Paste button and not the down arrow at the bottom of the button. A copy of Sheet1 will now appear in Sheet2.

    Mouseless Command

    Paste

    • Press the CTRL key and then the letter V key on your keyboard.
  6. Click anywhere on the chart in the Sheet2 worksheet.
  7. Click the Cut button in the Clipboard group on the Home tab of the Ribbon. This will remove the chart from the Sheet2 worksheet.

    Mouseless Command

    Cut

    • Press the CTRL key and then the letter X key on your keyboard.
  8. Open the Sheet3 worksheet by left clicking on the Sheet3 worksheet tab at the bottom of the workbook.
  9. Activate cell location A1.
  10. Click the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon. This will paste the chart from the Sheet2 worksheet into the Sheet3 worksheet.

Sorting Data (One Level)

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.12 if you are starting with this skill.)

As mentioned earlier in this section, a chart is a tool that enables worksheet readers to analyze data quickly to spot key trends or patterns. Another powerful tool that provides similar benefits is the SortAn Excel command used to rank the data in a worksheet based on designated criteria. command. This feature ranks the rows of data in a worksheet based on designated criteria. The following steps demonstrate how the Sort command is used to rank the data in the Sheet2 worksheet:

  1. In the Sheet2 worksheet, highlight the range A2:D14.
  2. Click the Data tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Sort button in the Sort & Filter group of commands. This will open the Sort dialog box (see Figure 1.57 “Sort & Filter Group of Commands”).

    Figure 1.57 Sort & Filter Group of Commands

  4. Click the down arrow next to the “Sort by” drop-down box in the Sort dialog box (see Figure 1.58 “Sort Dialog Box”).

    Figure 1.58 Sort Dialog Box

  5. Click the Unit Sales option from the drop-down list.
  6. Click the down arrow next to the Order drop-down box.
  7. Click Largest to Smallest from the drop-down list.
  8. Click the OK button at the bottom of the Sort dialog box. The data in the range A2:D14 will now be sorted in descending order based on the values in the Unit Sales column.

Integrity Check

Sorting Data

Carefully check the highlighted range of the data you are sorting. It is critical that all columns in a contiguous range of data are highlighted before sorting. If you do not sort all the columns in a data set, the data could become corrupted in such a way that it may not be corrected. If Excel detects that you are trying to sort only part of a contiguous range of data, it will give you a warning dialog box.

Figure 1.59 “Data Sorted Based on Unit Sales” shows the data in the Sheet2 worksheet sorted based on the values in the Unit Sales column. Similar to the chart, the Sort command makes it easy to identify the months of the year with the highest unit sales.

Figure 1.59 Data Sorted Based on Unit Sales

Skill Refresher: Sorting Data (One Level)

  1. Highlight a range of cells to be sorted.
  2. Click the Data tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Sort button in the Sort & Filter group.
  4. Select a column from the “Sort by” drop-down list.
  5. Select a sort order from the Order drop-down list.
  6. Click the OK button on the Sort dialog box.

Moving, Renaming, Inserting, and Deleting Worksheets

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.13 if you are starting with this skill.)

The default names for the worksheet tabs at the bottom of workbook are Sheet1, Sheet2, and so on. However, you can change the worksheet tab names to identify the data you are using in a workbook. Additionally, you can change the order in which the worksheet tabs appear in the workbook. The following steps explain how to rename and move the worksheets in a workbook:

  1. With the left mouse button, double click the Sheet1 worksheet tab at the bottom of the workbook (see Figure 1.60 “Renaming a Worksheet Tab”).
  2. Type the name Sales by Month.
  3. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
  4. With the left mouse button, double click the Sheet2 worksheet tab at the bottom of the workbook.
  5. Type the name Unit Sales Rank.
  6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.

    Figure 1.60 Renaming a Worksheet Tab

  7. Left click and drag the Unit Sales Rank worksheet tab to the left of the Sales by Month worksheet tab.
  8. Click the Sheet3 worksheet tab.
  9. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  10. Click the down arrow on the Delete button in the Cells group of commands.
  11. Click the Delete Sheet option from the drop-down list (see Figure 1.35 “Delete Drop-Down Menu”).
  12. Click the Delete button on the Delete warning box.
  13. Click the Insert Worksheet tab at the bottom of the workbook (see Figure 1.60 “Renaming a Worksheet Tab”).

Integrity Check

Deleting Worksheets

Be very cautious when deleting worksheets that contain data. Once a worksheet is deleted, you cannot use the Undo command to bring the sheet back. Deleting a worksheet is a permanent command.

Mouseless Command

Inserting New Worksheets

  • Press the SHIFT key and then the F11 key on your keyboard.

Figure 1.61 “Final Appearance of the Excel Objective 1.0 Workbook” shows the final appearance of the Excel Objective 1.0 workbook after the worksheet tabs have been renamed and moved.

Figure 1.61 Final Appearance of the Excel Objective 1.0 Workbook

Skill Refresher: Renaming Worksheets

  1. Double click the worksheet tab.
  2. Type the new name.
  3. Press the ENTER key.

Skill Refresher: Moving Worksheets

  1. Left click the worksheet tab.
  2. Drag it to the desired position.

Skill Refresher: Deleting Worksheets

  1. Open the worksheet to be deleted.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow on the Delete button.
  4. Select the Delete Sheet option.
  5. Click Delete on the warning box.

Key Takeaways

  • Formatting skills are critical for creating worksheets that are easy to read and have a professional appearance.
  • A series of pound signs (####) in a cell location indicates that the column is too narrow to display the number entered.
  • Using the Wrap Text command allows you to stack multiword column headings vertically in a cell location, reducing the need to expand column widths.
  • Use the Merge & Center command to center the title of a worksheet directly over the columns that contain data.
  • Adding borders or lines will make your worksheet easier to read and helps to separate the data in each column and row.
  • Effective charts enable readers to immediately identify key trends in the data you are displaying.
  • Check to make sure all the data in a contiguous range of cells is highlighted before using the Sort command. Highlighting and sorting only part of a contiguous data set could corrupt your data in such a way that its integrity may not be restored.
  • You cannot use the Undo command to bring back a worksheet that has been deleted.

Exercises

  1. The pound signs (####) that appear in a cell location indicate that:

    1. A computational error has occurred.
    2. The AutoSum feature was applied to text data instead of numeric data.
    3. A number is too long for the current width of a column.
    4. You must click the Calculate Sheet command in the Formulas tab of the Ribbon.
  2. Which of the following is most accurate with respect to the Wrap Text command?

    1. It allows you to designate which words are placed on a second line in a cell.
    2. It reduces the need to expand the width of the columns in a worksheet.
    3. It converts any numeric data to text data.
    4. It can be accessed only through the right-click menu of options.
  3. What is the quickest way to center a title over six columns of data?

    1. Type the title into the cell location over the left-most column and use the space bar to try and place the title over the center of the six columns.
    2. Type the title into the cell location over the left-most column and click the Center alignment button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
    3. Type the title into the cell location over the third column and use the BACKSPACE key to place the title over the center of the six columns.
    4. Highlight the six cell locations over each of the columns and click the Merge & Center button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  4. Which of the following is true with respect to deleting worksheets?

    1. You cannot use the Undo button to bring back a worksheet once it has been deleted.
    2. Click the Select All button and press the DELETE key on your keyboard to delete a worksheet from a workbook.
    3. Holding down the SHIFT key while pressing the F11 key on your keyboard will delete a worksheet from your workbook.
    4. Excel will not let you delete a worksheet that contains data. All data must be removed from the worksheet before the worksheet can be deleted.

1.4 Printing

Learning Objectives

  1. Use the Page Layout tab to prepare a worksheet for printing.
  2. Add headers and footers to a printed worksheet.
  3. Examine how to print worksheets and workbooks.

Once you have completed a workbook, it is good practice to select the appropriate settings for printing. These settings are in the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon and discussed in this section of the chapter.

Page Setup

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.14 if you are starting with this skill.)

Before you can properly print the worksheets in a workbook, you must establish appropriate settings. The following steps explain several of the commands in the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon used to prepare a worksheet for printing:

  1. Open the Unit Sales Rank worksheet by left clicking on the worksheet tab.
  2. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Margins button in the Page Setup group of commands. This will open a drop-down list of options for setting the margins of your printed document.
  4. Click the Wide option from the Margins drop-down list.
  5. Open the Sales by Month worksheet by left clicking on the worksheet tab.
  6. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 1.62 “Page Layout Commands for Printing”).
  7. Click the Margins button in the Page Setup group of commands.
  8. Click the Narrow option from the Margins drop-down list.
  9. Click the Orientation button in the Page Setup group of commands.
  10. Click the Landscape option.
  11. Click the down arrow to the right of the Width button in the Scale to Fit group of commands.
  12. Click the 1 Page option from the drop-down list.
  13. Click the down arrow to the right of the Height button in the Scale to Fit group of commands.
  14. Click the 1 Page option from the drop-down list. This step along with step 12 will automatically reduce the worksheet so that it fits on one piece of paper. It is very common for professionals to create worksheets that fit within the width of the paper being used. However, for long data sets, you may need to set the height to more than one page. Table 1.2 “Printing Resources: Purpose and Use for Page Setup Commands” provides a list of commands found in the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon

Why?

Use Print Settings

Because professionals often share Excel workbooks, it is a good practice to select the appropriate print settings in the Page Layout tab even if you do not intend to print the worksheets in a workbook. It can be extremely frustrating for recipients of a workbook who wish to print your worksheets to find that the necessary print settings have not been selected. This may reflect poorly on your attention to detail, especially if the recipient of the workbook is your boss.

Figure 1.62 Page Layout Commands for Printing

Table 1.2 Printing Resources: Purpose and Use for Page Setup Commands

Command Purpose Use
Margins Sets the top, bottom, right, and left margin space for the printed document 1. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
2. Click the Margin button.
3. Click one of the preset margin options or click Custom Margins.
Orientation Sets the orientation of the printed document to either portrait or landscape 1. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
2. Click the Orientation button.
3. Click one of the preset orientation options.
Size Sets the paper size for the printed document 1. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
2. Click the Size button.
3. Click one of the preset paper size options or click More Paper Sizes.
Print Area Used for printing only a specific area or range of cells on a worksheet 1. Highlight the range of cells on a worksheet that you wish to print.
2. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
3. Click the Print Area button.
4. Click the Set Print Area option from the drop-down list.
Breaks Allows you to manually set the page breaks on a worksheet 1. Activate a cell on the worksheet where the page break should be placed. Breaks are created above and to the left of the activated cell.
2. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
3. Click the Breaks button.
4. Click the Insert Page Break option from the drop-down list.
Background Adds a picture behind the cell locations in a worksheet 1. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
2. Click the Background button.
3. Select a picture stored on your computer or network.
Print Titles Used when printing large data sets that are several pages long. This command will repeat the column headings at the top of each printed page. 1. Click the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
2. Click the Print Titles button.
3. Click in the Rows to Repeat at Top input box in the Page Setup dialog box.
4. Click any cell in the row that contains the column headings for your worksheet.
5. Click the OK button at the bottom of the Page Setup dialog box.

Headers and Footers

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.15 if you are starting with this skill.)

When printing worksheets from Excel, it is common to add headersSpace at the top of a printed worksheet that contains information such as the date, page number, file name, company name, and so on. and footersSpace at the bottom of a printed worksheet that contains information such as the date, page number, file name, company name, and so on. to the printed document. Information in the header or footer could include the date, page number, file name, company name, and so on. The following steps explain how to add headers and footers to the Excel Objective 1.0 workbook:

  1. Open the Unit Sales Rank worksheet by left clicking on the worksheet tab.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Header & Footer button in the Text group of commands. You will see the Design tab added to the Ribbon; this is used for creating the headers and footers for the printed worksheet. Also, this will convert the view of the worksheet from Normal to Page Layout (see Figure 1.63 “Design Tab for Creating Headers and Footers”).

    Figure 1.63 Design Tab for Creating Headers and Footers

  4. Type your name in the center section of the Header.
  5. Place the mouse pointer over the left section of the Header and left click (see Figure 1.63 “Design Tab for Creating Headers and Footers”).
  6. Click the Current Date button in the Header & Footer Elements group of commands in the Design tab of the Ribbon.
  7. Click the Go to Footer button in the Navigation group of commands in the Design tab of the Ribbon.
  8. Place the mouse pointer over the far right section of the footer and left click.
  9. Click the Page Number button in the Header & Footer Elements group of commands in the Design tab of the Ribbon.
  10. Click any cell location outside the header or footer area. The Design tab for creating headers and footers will disappear.
  11. Click the Normal view button in the lower right side of the Status Bar (see Figure 1.64 “Worksheet in Page Layout View”).

    Figure 1.64 Worksheet in Page Layout View

  12. Open the Sales by Month worksheet by left clicking the worksheet tab.
  13. Repeat steps 2 through 11 to create the same header and footer for this worksheet.

Printing Worksheets and Workbooks

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 1.0 (Use file Excel Objective 1.16 if you are starting with this skill.)

Once you have established the print settings for the worksheets in a workbook and have added headers and footers, you are ready to print your worksheets. The following steps explain how to print the worksheets in the Excel Objective 1.0 workbook:

  1. Open the Unit Sales Rank worksheet by left clicking on the worksheet tab.
  2. Click the File tab on the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Print option on the left side of the Backstage view (see Figure 1.65 “Print Preview”). On the right side of the Backstage view, you will be able to see a preview of your printed worksheet.

    Figure 1.65 Print Preview

  4. Click the Print Active Sheets button in the Print section of the Backstage view (see Figure 1.65 “Print Preview”).
  5. Click the Print Entire Workbook option from the drop-down list. This will print all worksheets in a workbook when the Print button is clicked.
  6. Click the Next Page arrow at the bottom of the preview window.
  7. Click the Print button.
  8. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  9. Save and close the Excel Objective 1.0 workbook.

Key Takeaways

  • The commands in the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon are used to prepare a worksheet for printing.
  • You can add headers and footers to a worksheet to show key information such as page numbers, the date, the file name, your name, and so on.
  • The Print commands are in the File tab of the Ribbon.

Exercises

  1. Which of the following commands is used to print the column headings in a worksheet at the top of each printed page for a worksheet that contains 100 rows of data?

    1. the Header & Footer command in the Insert tab of the Ribbon
    2. the Print Titles command in the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon
    3. the Insert command in the Home tab of the Ribbon
    4. the Conditional Formatting command in the Home tab of the Ribbon
  2. Which of the following is true with respect to printing Excel worksheets?

    1. Setting the Width and Height drop-down lists to 1 Page will ensure that all the worksheets in a workbook are printed on one page.
    2. The page layout settings must be set for each worksheet in a workbook.
    3. You can print only one worksheet at a time in a workbook that contains multiple worksheets.
    4. All of the above are true.

1.5 Chapter Assignments and Tests

To assess your understanding of the material covered in the chapter, please complete the following assignments.

Careers in Practice (Skills Review)

Basic Monthly Budget for Medical Office (Comprehensive Review)

Starter File: Chapter 1 CiP Exercise 1

Difficulty: Level 1

Creating and maintaining budgets are common practices in many careers. Budgets play a critical role in helping a business or household control expenditures. In this exercise you will create a budget for a hypothetical medical office while reviewing the skills covered in this chapter. Begin the exercise by opening the file named Chapter 1 CiP Exercise 1.

Entering, Editing, and Managing Data

  1. Activate all the cell locations in the Sheet1 worksheet by left clicking the Select All button in the upper left corner of the worksheet.
  2. In the Home tab of the Ribbon, set the font style to Arial and the font size to 12 points.
  3. Increase the width of Column A so all the entries in the range A3:A8 are visible. Place the mouse pointer between the letter A and letter B of Column A and Column B. When the mouse pointer changes to a double arrow, left click and drag it to the right until the character width is 18.00.
  4. Enter Quarter 1 in cell B2.
  5. Use AutoFill to complete the headings in the range C2:E2. Activate cell B2 and place the mouse pointer over the Fill Handle. When the mouse pointer changes to a black plus sign, left click and drag it to cell E2.
  6. Increase the width of Columns B, C, D, and E to 10.14 characters. Highlight the range B2:E2 and click the Format button in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Click the Column Width option, type 10.14 in the Column Width dialog box, and then click the OK button in the Column Width dialog box.
  7. Enter the words Medical Office Budget in cell A1.
  8. Insert a blank column between Columns A and B. Activate any cell location in Column B. Then, click the drop-down arrow of the Insert button in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Click the Insert Sheet Columns option.
  9. Enter the words Budget Cost in cell B2.
  10. Adjust the width of Column B to 13.29 characters.

    Formatting and Basic Charts

  11. Merge the cells in the range A1:F1. Highlight the range and click the Merge & Center button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  12. Make the following format adjustments to the range A1:F1: bold; italics; change the font size to 14 points; change the cell fill color to Aqua, Accent 5, Darker 50%; and change the font color to white.
  13. Increase the height of Row 1 to 24.75 points.
  14. Center the title of the worksheet in the range A1:F1 vertically. Activate the range and then click the Middle Align button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  15. Make the following format adjustment to the range A2:F2: bold; and change the cell fill color to Tan, Background 2, Darker 10%.
  16. Set the alignment in cell B2 to Wrap Text. Activate the cell location and click the Wrap Text button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  17. Copy cell C3 and paste the contents into the range D3:F3.
  18. Copy the contents in the range C6:C8 by highlighting the range and clicking the Copy button in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Then, highlight the range D6:F8 and click the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  19. Calculate the total budget for all four quarters for the salaries. Activate cell B3 and click the down arrow on the AutoSum button in the Formulas tab of the Ribbon. Click the Sum option from the drop-down list. Then, highlight the range C3:F3 and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
  20. Copy the contents of cell B3 and paste them into the range B4:B8.
  21. Format the range B3:F8 with a US dollar sign and zero decimal places.
  22. Sort the data in the range A2:F8 based on the values in the Quarter 4 column in ascending order. Highlight the range A2:F8 and click the Sort button in the Data tab of the Ribbon. Select Quarter 4 in the “Sort by” drop-down box and select Smallest to Largest in the Order drop-down box. Click the OK button.
  23. Add vertical and horizontal lines to the range A1:F8. Highlight the range and click the down arrow next to the Borders button in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Select the All Borders option from the drop-down list.
  24. Change the name of the Sheet1 worksheet tab to “Budget.” Double click the worksheet tab, type the word Budget, and press the ENTER key.
  25. Insert a pie chart using the data in the range A2:B8. Highlight the range and click the Pie button in the Insert tab of the Ribbon. Click the first option on the list (the Pie option).
  26. Click and drag the chart so the upper left corner is in the center of cell H2.
  27. Add labels to the chart by clicking the Layout 1 option from the Chart Layouts list in the Design tab of the Ribbon. Make sure the chart is activated by clicking it once before you look for the Layout 1 Chart Layout option.

    Printing

  28. Change the orientation of the Budget worksheet so it prints landscape instead of portrait.
  29. Adjust the appropriate settings so the Budget worksheet prints on one piece of paper.
  30. Add a header to the Budget worksheet that shows the date in the upper left corner and your name in the center.
  31. Add a footer to the Budget worksheet that shows the page number in the lower right corner.
  32. Use the Save As command in the File tab of the Ribbon to save the workbook by adding your name in front of the current workbook name (i.e., “your name Chapter 1 CiP Exercise 1”).
  33. Close the workbook and Excel.

Figure 1.66 Completed Medical Budget Exercise

Marketing for Specialty Women’s Apparel

Starter File: Chapter 1 CiP Exercise 2

Difficulty: Level 2

A key activity for marketing professionals is to analyze how population demographics change in certain regions. This is especially important for specialty retail stores that target a specific age group within a population. This exercise utilizes the skills covered in this chapter to analyze hypothetical population trends. The decisions that can be made with such information include where to open new stores, whether existing stores should be closed and reopened in other communities, or whether the product assortment should be adjusted. The purpose of this exercise is to use the skills presented in this chapter to analyze hypothetical population trends for a fashion retailer.

  1. In the Sheet1 worksheet, enter the year 2008 into cell B3.
  2. Use AutoFill to fill the years 2009 to 2012 in the range C3:F3.
  3. Change the font style to Arial and the font size to 12 points for all cell locations in the Sheet1 worksheet.
  4. Merge and center the cells in the range A1:F1.
  5. Make the following formatting adjustments to the range A1:F1: bold; italics; change the cell fill color to Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60%; change the font size to 14 points.
  6. Enter the title for this worksheet into the range A1:F1 on two lines. The first line should read Population Trends by Age Group. The second line should read for Region 5.
  7. Increase the height of Row 1 so the title is visible.
  8. Delete Row 2.
  9. Increase the height of Row 2 to 21 points.
  10. Format the values in the range B3:F6 so a comma separates each thousands place with zero decimal places.
  11. Make the necessary adjustments to remove any pound signs (####) that may have appeared after formatting the values.
  12. Sort the data in the range A2:F6 based on the values in the year 2008 from largest to smallest.
  13. Enter the word Totals in cell A7.
  14. Increase the height of Row 7 to 22.50 points.
  15. Format the range A7:F7 so entries are bold and italic.
  16. In cell B7, add a total that sums the values in the range B3:B6. Format the value with zero decimal places and a comma for each thousands place.
  17. Copy the contents of cell B7 and paste them into the range C7:F7.
  18. Add vertical and horizontal lines to the range A1:F7.
  19. Add a very bold orange border around the perimeter of the range A1:F7.
  20. Insert a column chart using the data in the range A2:F6. Select the 2-D Stacked Column format.
  21. Move the column chart so the upper left corner is in the middle of cell A8.
  22. Rename the Sheet1 worksheet tab to Population Trends.
  23. Adjust the appropriate settings so the Population Trends worksheet prints on one piece of paper.
  24. Add a header to the Population Trends worksheet that shows the date in the upper left corner and your name in the center.
  25. Save the workbook by adding your name in front of the current workbook name (i.e., “your name Chapter 1 CiP Exercise 2”). (Hint: you will need to Save As.)
  26. Close the workbook and Excel.

Figure 1.67 Completed Population Trends Exercise

Integrity Check

Starter File: Chapter 1 IC Exercise 1

Difficulty: Level 3

The purpose of this exercise is to analyze a worksheet to determine whether there are any integrity flaws. First, read the scenario below. Then, open the file that is related to this exercise and analyze the worksheets contained in the workbook. You will find a worksheet in the workbook named AnswerSheet. This worksheet is to be used for any written responses required for this exercise.

Scenario

Your coworker provides you with sales data in an Excel workbook, which you intend to use for a sales strategy meeting with your boss. The workbook was attached to an e-mail with the following points stated in the message.

  • The data represents the top-selling items for the company last year with respect to sales dollars.
  • I received the data from an analyst in my department who insisted the cost data for each item was included. However, I don’t see it. You might have to manually enter this yourself. I included the cost for each item below.
  • The original data I received is in Sheet1. I copied this data and pasted it into Sheet2. I thought you might like to see this sorted.
  • Cost per item data:

    Item Cost
    Black Flat $35.00
    Bracelet $30.00
    Brown Pump $25.00
    Daisy Print $40.00
    Grey Stripe $110.00
    Jersey Knit $80.00
    Navy Pinstripe $125.00
    Navy Wool $135.00
    Quartz Watch $80.00
    Sandal $45.00
    Tan Trench $115.00
    Topaz Ring $50.00

Assignment

  1. Analyze the data in this workbook carefully. Would you be comfortable using this data in a meeting with your boss? Use the AnswerSheet in this workbook to briefly list any concerns you have with this data.
  2. If it is necessary to enter the cost information, enter it in the Sheet1 worksheet. If not, state why in the AnswerSheet.
  3. Correct any problems and make any adjustments you think are appropriate to this workbook.
  4. Save the workbook by adding your name in front of the current workbook name.

Applying Excel Skills

The assignment in this section requires that you apply the skills presented in this chapter to achieve the stated objective. Read the assignment first and then open the file and complete the stated requirements. When you complete an assignment, save the file by adding your name in front of the current name of the workbook.

Starter File: Chapter 1 AES Assignment 1

Difficulty: Level 3

The workbook for this assignment contains sales plan data by month for merchandise categories sold by a hypothetical clothing retailer. Use the skills covered in this chapter to accomplish the points listed below.

  1. Show the total sales plan dollars next to each category in Column B.
  2. Instead of showing the sales plan dollars by month, calculate the plan dollars for each quarter (see the following figure, “Layout for Sales by Quarter”). The months assigned to each quarter are as follows:

    • Quarter 1: February, March, and April
    • Quarter 2: May, June, and July
    • Quarter 3: August, September, and October
    • Quarter 4: November, December, and January
  3. Show the total plan for each quarter.
  4. Sort the merchandise categories based on the total sales plan dollars.
  5. Add any additional formatting enhancements that will make the worksheet easier to read.

Figure 1.68 Layout for Sales by Quarter

Chapter Skills Test

Starter File: Chapter 1 Skills Test

Difficulty: Level 2

Answer the following questions by executing the skills on the starter file required for this test. Answer each question in the order in which it appears. If you do not know the answer, skip to the next question. Open the starter file listed above before you begin this test.

  1. In the Sheet1 worksheet, enter the word Totals in cell C14.
  2. Format all the cells in Sheet1 to Arial font style and a 12-point font size.
  3. Set the character width for Columns A through G to 12.71.
  4. Edit the entry in cell B2 to read “Item Number.”
  5. Use AutoFill to fill the contents of cell B3 into the range B4:B13.
  6. Copy the contents of cell A3 and paste them into the range A4:A8.
  7. Delete Column F.
  8. Format the range A1:F2 so the text is Bold.
  9. Set the alignment in the range A2:F2 to Wrap Text.
  10. Change the fill color of the cells in the range A1:F1 to Red, Accent 2, Darker 25%.
  11. Make the following font changes to the range A1:F1: set the font color to white, add italics, and set the font size to 14.
  12. Merge and center the cells in the range A1:F1.
  13. Enter the title for this worksheet in the range A1:F1. The title should appear on two lines. The first line should read Status Report. The second line should read Sales and Inventory by Item.
  14. Increase the height of Row 1 so the entire title is visible.
  15. Insert a blank row above Row 14.
  16. Format the values in the range C3:C13 with a US dollar sign and two decimal places.
  17. Format the values in the range E3:F13 with zero decimal places and a comma at each thousands place.
  18. In cell E15, use AutoSum to calculate the sum of the values in the range E3:E14.
  19. Add vertical and horizontal lines to the range A1:F15.
  20. Add a bold line border around the perimeter of the range A1:F15.
  21. Insert a column chart using the data in the range D2:E13.
  22. Move the chart so the upper left corner is in the middle of cell H2.
  23. Sort the data in the range A2:F13 based on the values in the Sales in Units column. Sort the values in descending order or largest to smallest.
  24. Insert a new blank worksheet in the workbook.
  25. Delete Sheet3.
  26. Move Sheet4 ahead of Sheet2 so the order of the worksheets is Sheet1, Sheet4, and Sheet2.
  27. Rename the Sheet1 worksheet tab to “Status Report.”
  28. Change the orientation of the Status Report worksheet so it prints landscape instead of portrait.
  29. Adjust the appropriate settings so the Status Report worksheet prints on one piece of paper.
  30. Add a header to the Status Report worksheet that shows the date in the upper left corner and your name in the center.
  31. Add a footer to the Status Report worksheet that shows the page number in the lower right corner.
  32. Save the workbook by adding your name in front of the current workbook name (i.e., “your name Chapter 1 Skills Test”). (Hint: you will use Save As.)
  33. Close the workbook and Excel.

Chapter 4: Presenting Data with Charts

Chapter 1 “Fundamental Skills” provided a brief introduction to creating charts in Excel. This chapter provides more details for enhancing the appearance of your charts and addresses how to choose the best chart type for your data. One of the most important things to consider when using charts in Excel is that they are intended to be used for communicating an idea to an audience. Your audience can be reading your charts in a written document or listening to you in a live presentation. In fact, Excel charts are often imported or pasted into Word documents or PowerPoint slides, which serve this very purpose of communicating ideas to an audience. Although there are no rules set in stone for using specific charts for certain data types, some chart types are designed to communicate certain messages better than others. This chapter explores numerous charts that can be used for a variety of purposes. In addition, we will examine formatting charts and using those charts in Word and PowerPoint documents.

4.1 Choosing a Chart Type

Learning Objectives

  1. Construct a line chart to show a time series trend.
  2. Learn how to adjust the Y axis scale.
  3. Construct a line chart to present a comparison of two trends.
  4. Learn how to use a column chart to show a frequency distribution.
  5. Create a separate chart sheet for a chart embedded in a worksheet.
  6. Construct a column chart that compares two frequency distributions.
  7. Learn how to use a pie chart to show the percent of total for a data set.
  8. Construct a stacked column chart to show how a percent of total changes over time.

This section reviews the most commonly used Excel chart types. To demonstrate the variety of chart types available in Excel, it is necessary to use a variety of data sets. Therefore, instead of addressing a specific theme, we will use a variety of themes. This is necessary not only to demonstrate the construction of charts but also to explain how to choose the right type of chart given your data and the idea you intend to communicate.

Before we begin, let’s review a few key points you need to consider before creating any chart in Excel. The first is identifying your idea or message. It is important to keep in mind that the primary purpose of a chart is to present quantitative information to an audience. Therefore, you must first decide what message or idea you wish to present. This is critical in helping you select specific data from a worksheet that will be used in a chart. Throughout this chapter, we will reinforce the intended message first before creating each chart.

The second key point is selecting the right chart type. The chart type you select will depend on the data you have and the message you intend to communicate.

The third key point is identifying the values that should appear on the X and Y axes. One of the ways to identify which values belong on the X and Y axes is to sketch the chart on paper first. If you can visualize what your chart is supposed to look like, you will have an easier time using Excel to construct an effective chart that accurately communicates your message. Table 4.1 “Key Steps before Constructing an Excel Chart” provides a brief summary of these points.

Integrity Check

Carefully Select Data When Creating a Chart

Just because you have data in a worksheet does not mean it must all be placed onto a chart. When creating a chart, it is common for only specific data points to be used. To determine what data should be used when creating a chart, you must first identify the message or idea that you want to communicate to an audience.

Table 4.1 Key Steps before Constructing an Excel Chart

Step Description
1. Define your message. Identify the main idea you are trying to communicate to an audience. If there is no main point or important message that can be revealed by a chart, you might want to question the necessity of creating a chart.
2. Identify the data you need. Once you have a clear message, identify the data on a worksheet that you will need to construct a chart. In some cases, you may need to create formulas or consolidate items into broader categories.
3. Select a chart type. The type of chart you select will depend on the message you are communicating and the data you are using.
4. Identify the values for the X and Y axes. After you have selected a chart type, you may find that drawing a sketch is helpful in identifying which values should be on the X and Y axes. (The X axis is horizontal, and the Y axis is vertical.)

Time Series Trend: Line Chart 1

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 4.00

Lesson Video: Line Chart 1 (Time Series Trend)

The first chart we will demonstrate is a line chart. Figure 4.1 “52 Week Data for the S&P 500 and Microsoft” shows part of the data that will be used to create two line charts. The first line chart will show the trend of the S&P 500An aggregate price index for five hundred of the largest publicly traded US companies. stock index. This is an aggregate price index of five hundred of the largest publicly traded companies. This chart will be used to communicate a simple message: to show how the index has performed over a fifty-two-week period. We can use this chart in a presentation to show whether stock prices have been increasing, decreasing, or remaining constant over the designated period of time.

Figure 4.1 52 Week Data for the S&P 500 and Microsoft

Before we create the line chart, it is important to identify why it is an appropriate chart type given the message we wish to communicate and the data we have. When presenting the trend for any data over a designated period of time, the most commonly used chart types are the line chart and the column chart. With the column chart, you are limited to a certain number of bars or data points. As you increase the number of bars on a column chart, it becomes increasingly difficult to read. As you scroll through the data on the worksheet shown in Figure 4.1 “52 Week Data for the S&P 500 and Microsoft”, you will see that there are fifty-two points of data used to construct the chart. This is generally too many data points to put on a column chart, which is why we are using a line chart. Our line chart will show the closing price for the S&P 500 on the Y axisThe vertical axis of a chart. and the week number on the X axisThe horizontal axis of a chart.. The following steps explain how to construct this chart:

  1. Highlight the range A3:B55 on the Stock Trend worksheet.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Line button in the Charts group of commands (see Figure 4.2 “Selecting the Basic Line Chart”).
  4. Click the first option from the list, which is a basic line chart (see Figure 4.2 “Selecting the Basic Line Chart”). This adds, or embeds, the line chart to the worksheet, as shown in Figure 4.3 “Embedded Line Chart in the Stock Trend Worksheet”.

Figure 4.2 Selecting the Basic Line Chart

Why?

Line Chart vs. Column Chart

We can use both a line chart and a column chart to illustrate a trend over time. However, a line chart is far more effective when there are many periods of time being measured. For example, if we are measuring fifty-two weeks, a column chart would require fifty-two bars. A general rule of thumb is to use a column chart when twenty bars or less are required. A column chart becomes difficult to read as the number of bars exceeds twenty.

Figure 4.3 “Embedded Line Chart in the Stock Trend Worksheet” shows the embedded line chart in the Stock Trend worksheet. Notice that three additional tabs, or contextual tabsHidden tabs on the Ribbon that contain commands related to a specific object. Contextual tabs become visible when the related object is added or activated., are added to the Ribbon. We will demonstrate the commands in these tabs throughout this chapter. These tabs appear only when the chart is activated.

Figure 4.3 Embedded Line Chart in the Stock Trend Worksheet

As shown in Figure 4.3 “Embedded Line Chart in the Stock Trend Worksheet”, the embedded chartAny chart that is created and placed within a worksheet. is not placed in an ideal location on the worksheet since it is covering several cell locations that contain data. The following steps demonstrate common adjustments that are made when working with embedded charts:

  1. Moving a chart: Click and drag the upper left corner of the chart to the center of cell H2.
  2. Resizing a chart: Place the mouse pointer over the left middle sizing handle, hold down the ALT key on your keyboard, and click and drag the chart so it “snaps” to the left side of Column H.
  3. Repeat step 2 to resize the chart so the top “snaps” to the top of Row 2, the bottom “snaps” to the bottom of Row 17, and the right side “snaps” to the right side of Column P.
  4. Adjusting the chart title: Click the chart title once. Then click in front of the letter S. You should see a blinking cursor in front of the letter S. This allows you to modify the title of the chart.
  5. Type the following in front of the letter S in the chart title: 52 Week Trend for the.
  6. Removing the legend: Click the legend once and press the DELETE key on your keyboard. This removes the legend from the chart. Since the chart contains only one data series, the legend is not necessary. Once you remove the legend, the plot area automatically expands.

Figure 4.4 “Line Chart Moved and Resized” shows the line chart after it is moved and resized. You can also see that the title of the chart has been edited to read 52 Week Trend for the S&P 500. Also notice that the sizing handles do not appear around the perimeter of the chart. This is because the chart has been deactivated. To activate the chart, click anywhere inside the chart perimeter.

Figure 4.4 Line Chart Moved and Resized

Integrity Check

The X Axes on Line Charts Use Labels, Not Values

When using line charts in Excel, keep in mind that anything placed on the X axis is considered a descriptive label, not a numeric value. This is important because there will never be a change in the spacing of any items placed on the X axis of a line chart. If you need to create a line chart using numeric data on the X axis, you must use a scatter chart type.

Skill Refresher: Inserting a Line Chart

  1. Highlight a range of cells that contain data that will be used to create the chart.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Line button in the Charts group.
  4. Select a format option from the Line Chart drop-down menu.

Adjusting the Y Axis Scale

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.01 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Adjusting the Y Axis Scale

After creating an Excel chart, you may find it necessary to adjust the scale of the Y axis. Excel automatically sets the maximum value for the Y axis based on the data used to create the chart. However, the minimum value is usually set to zero. Depending on the data you are using to create the chart, setting the minimum value to zero can substantially minimize the graphical presentation of a trend. For example, the trend shown in Figure 4.4 “Line Chart Moved and Resized” appears to be increasing slightly. However, the S&P 500 increased by over 20% during this period, which is substantial. The presentation of this trend can be improved if the minimum value started at eight hundred. While it is certainly possible for the S&P 500 to fall below eight hundred, it is most likely remote. The following steps explain how to make this adjustment to the Y axis:

  1. Click anywhere on the Y axis on the 52 Week Trend for the S&P 500 line chart (Stock Trend worksheet).
  2. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Format Selection button in the Current Selection group of commands (see Figure 4.5 “Format Axis Dialog Box”). This opens the Format Axis dialog box.

    Figure 4.5 Format Axis Dialog Box

  4. Click the Fixed option next to the “Minimum” axis option in the Format Axis dialog box.
  5. Click the input box for the “Minimum” axis option and delete the zero. Then type the number 800. As soon as you make this change, the Y axis on the chart adjusts.
  6. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Axis dialog box.

Figure 4.6 “Adjusted Y Axis for the S&P 500 Chart” shows the change in the presentation of the trendline. Notice that with the Y axis starting at 800, the trend for the S&P 500 is more pronounced and reflects the substantial increase over the 52-week period. This adjustment makes it easier for the audience to see the magnitude of the trend.

Figure 4.6 Adjusted Y Axis for the S&P 500 Chart

Skill Refresher: Adjusting the Y Axis Scale

  1. Click anywhere along the Y axis to activate it.
  2. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Format Selection button in the Current Selection group of commands.
  4. In the Format Axis dialog box, click the Fixed option next to any axis option where you wish to change the value.
  5. Click in the input box next to the desired axis option and then type the new scale value.
  6. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Axis dialog box.

Trend Comparisons: Line Chart 2

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.02 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Line Chart 2 (Trend Comparisons)

We will now create a second line chart using the data in the Stock Trend worksheet. The purpose of this chart is to compare two trends: the change in value for the S&P 500 and the Microsoft common stock. Chapter 3 “Logical and Lookup Functions” presented a personal investment portfolio where the investments were compared to a benchmark. The S&P 500 is a benchmark that is commonly used to judge the performance of individual stocks. The purpose and message of this chart is to show whether Microsoft is performing better or worse than the S&P 500 index. This type of analysis can be used to determine whether a stock should be sold, purchased, or held.

Before creating the chart to compare the S&P 500 and Microsoft, it is important to review the data in the range E4:F55 on the Stock Trend worksheet. We cannot use the price data for Microsoft and the S&P 500 because the values are not comparable. That is, the data for Microsoft is in a range of $22.00 to $28.00, but the data for the S&P 500 is in a range of 1,022 to 1,363. If we used these values to create a chart, we would not be able to see any substantial change in the trend for either the S&P 500 or Microsoft. Therefore, formulas were used to calculate the percent change in value for the S&P 500 and Microsoft for each week. For example, looking at cells E5 and F5 on the Stock Trend worksheet, you see that the S&P 500 increased 2.4% in week 2, whereas Microsoft increased 3.1%. The percent change calculations now provide an appropriate method of comparison. This is a very important step to consider when comparing trends.

The construction of this second line chart will be similar to the first line chart. The X axis will be the 52 weeks in the range A4:A55. However, the Y axis will be the percentages in the range E4:F55. This creates a problem because Columns B, C, and D will not be used in this chart. Therefore, we cannot simply highlight one contiguous range of cells to create the chart. In this chapter we will demonstrate two options for charting data that is not in a contiguous range. The following steps demonstrate the first option:

  1. Highlight the range A3:A55 on the Stock Trend worksheet.
  2. Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and highlight the range E3:F55.
  3. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  4. Click the Line button in the Charts group of commands.
  5. Click the first option from the list, which is a basic line chart.

    Figure 4.7 “Trend Comparison Line Chart” shows the appearance of the line chart comparing the S&P 500 and Microsoft before it is moved and resized. Notice that Excel does not add a title to the chart.

    Figure 4.7 Trend Comparison Line Chart

  6. Move the chart so the upper left corner is in the middle of cell H20.
  7. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column H, the right side is locked to the right side of Column P, the top is locked to the top of Row 20, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 35.
  8. Click the Layout tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  9. Click the Chart Title button in the Labels group of commands. Select the Above Chart option from the drop-down list (see Figure 4.8 “Adding a Title to a Chart”). This adds a generic title above the plot area of the chart.
  10. Click in the text box containing the chart title. Delete the generic chart title and replace it with the following: 52 Week Trend Comparison.

Figure 4.8 Adding a Title to a Chart

Figure 4.9 “Final Trend Comparison Line Chart” shows that Microsoft has not performed as well as the S&P 500 benchmark. From week 31 to week 52, Microsoft is showing a significant decline compared to the S&P 500, which continues to grow. What makes this chart effective is that an audience can quickly see how Microsoft compares with the S&P 500 over the 52-week period.

Figure 4.9 Final Trend Comparison Line Chart

Integrity Check

Comparing Trends with Incompatible Values

When creating a chart to compare the trends of two or more data series, the values for each data series must be compatible. In other words, the values for each data series must be within a reasonable range in order for an effective comparison to be made. If the variance between the values in your data series is never less than a multiple of 2 (i.e., 500 × 2 = 1000 or 1000 ÷ 2 = 500), calculate the percent change for each point in time on your worksheet. The percent change must be calculated with respect to the first data point for each series. Then create your chart using the percentages instead of the actual values for each data series.

Frequency Distribution: Column Chart 1

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.03 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Column Chart 1 (Frequency Distribution)

A column chart is commonly used to show trends over time so long as the data are limited to approximately twenty points or less. For example, in Chapter 1 “Fundamental Skills” we showed a sales trend over a twelve-month period. Another common use for column charts is frequency distributions. A frequency distributionThe number of occurrences for an established set of categories. shows the number of occurrences by established categories. For example, a common frequency distribution used in most academic institutions is a grade distribution. A grade distribution shows the number of students that achieve each level of a typical grading scale (A, A−, B+, B, etc.). The Grade Distribution worksheet contains final grades for a hypothetical academic class. To show the grade frequency distribution, the numbers of students appear on the Y axis and the grade categories appear on the X axis. The following steps explain how to create this chart:

  1. Highlight the range A3:B8 on the Grade Distribution worksheet. Column B shows the number of students that achieved a grade within the grade category shown in Column A.
  2. Click the Column button in the Charts group section on the Insert tab of the Ribbon. Select the first format from the drop-down list of options, which is the Clustered Column format.
  3. Click and drag the chart so the upper left corner is in the middle of cell H2.
  4. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column H, the right side is locked to the right side of Column P, the top is locked to the top of Row 2, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 16.
  5. Click the legend one time and press the DELETE key on your keyboard. Since the chart presents only one data series, the legend is not necessary.
  6. Click the title of the chart twice so the cursor is placed in front of the word Class.
  7. Type the following in front of the word Class: Final Grades for the.
  8. Click any cell location on the Grade Distribution worksheet to deactivate the chart.

Figure 4.10 “Grade Frequency Distribution Chart” shows the completed grade frequency distribution chart. By looking at the chart, you can immediately see that the greatest number of students earned a final grade in the B+ to B− or the C+ to C− categories.

Figure 4.10 Grade Frequency Distribution Chart

Why?

Column Chart vs. Bar Chart

When using charts to show frequency distributions, the difference between a column chart and a bar chart is really a matter of preference. Both are very effective in showing frequency distributions. However, if you are showing a trend over a period of time, a column chart is preferred over a bar chart. This is because a period of time is typically shown horizontally, with the oldest date on the far left and the newest date on the far right. Therefore, the descriptive categories for the chart would have to fall on the X axis, which is the configuration of a column chart. On a bar chart, the descriptive categories are displayed vertically along the Y axis.

Creating a Chart Sheet

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.04 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Chart Sheets

The charts we have created up to this point have been added to, or embedded in, an existing worksheet. Charts can also be placed in a dedicated worksheet called a chart sheetAn Excel worksheet that is designated for a chart.. It is called a chart sheet because it can contain only an Excel chart. Chart sheets are useful if you need to create several charts using the data in a single worksheet. If you embed several charts in one worksheet, it can be cumbersome to navigate and browse through the charts. It is easier to browse through charts when they are moved to a chart sheet because a separate sheet tab is added to the workbook for each chart. The following steps explain how to move the grade frequency distribution chart to a dedicated chart sheet:

  1. Click anywhere on the Final Grades for the Class chart on the Grade Distribution worksheet.
  2. Click the Move Chart button in the Design tab of the Chart Tools set of commands. This opens the Move Chart dialog box. You can use this dialog box to move the chart to a different worksheet or create a dedicated chart sheet.
  3. Click the New sheet option on the Move Chart dialog box.
  4. The entry in the input box for assigning a name to the chart sheet tab should automatically be highlighted once you click the New sheet option (see Figure 4.11 “Moving a Chart to a Chart Sheet”). Type Class Grades. This replaces the generic name in the input box.
  5. Click the OK button at the bottom of the Move Chart dialog box. This adds a new chart sheet to the workbook with the name Class Grades.

Figure 4.11 Moving a Chart to a Chart Sheet

Figure 4.12 “Chart Sheet Added to the Workbook” shows the Final Grades for the Class column chart in a separate chart sheet. Notice the new sheet tab added to the workbook matches the tab name entered into the Move Chart dialog box. Since the chart is moved to a separate chart sheet, it no longer is displayed in the Grade Distribution worksheet.

Figure 4.12 Chart Sheet Added to the Workbook

Frequency Comparison: Column Chart 2

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.05 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Column Chart 2 (Frequency Comparison)

We will create a second column chart to show a comparison between two frequency distributions. Column C on the Grade Distribution worksheet contains data showing the number of students who received grades within each category for the entire college. We will use a column chart to compare the grade distribution for the class (Column B) with the overall grade distribution for the college (Column C). However, since the number of students in the class is significantly different from the total number of students in the college, we must calculate percentages in order to make an effective comparison. The following steps explain how to calculate the percentages:

  1. Highlight the range B9:C9 on the Grade Distribution worksheet.
  2. Click the AutoSum button in the Editing group of commands on the Home tab of the Ribbon. This automatically adds SUM functions that sum the values in the range B4:B8 and C4:C8.
  3. Activate cell E4 on the Grade Distribution worksheet.
  4. Enter a formula that divides the value in cell B4 by the total in cell B9. Add an absolute reference to cell B9 in the formula =B4/$B$9.
  5. Copy the formula in cell E4 and paste it into the range E5:E8 using the Paste Formulas command.
  6. Activate cell F4 on the Grade Distribution worksheet.
  7. Enter a formula that divides the value in cell C4 by the total in cell C9. Add an absolute reference to cell C9 in the formula =C4/$C$9.
  8. Copy the formula in cell F4 and paste it into the range F5:F8 using the Paste Formulas command.

Figure 4.13 Completed Grade Distribution Percentages

Figure 4.13 “Completed Grade Distribution Percentages” shows the completed percentages added to the Grade Distribution worksheet. The column chart uses the grade categories in the range A4:A8 on the X axis and the percentages in the range E4:F8 on the Y axis. Similar to the trend comparison line chart, this chart uses data that is not in a contiguous range. The following steps explain a second method for creating charts with data that is not in a contiguous range:

  1. Activate cell H2 on the Grade Distribution worksheet. It is important to note that this is a blank cell that is not adjacent to any data on the worksheet.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Column button in the Charts group of commands. Select the first option from the drop-down list of chart formats, which is the Clustered Column. This adds a blank chart to the worksheet.
  4. Click and drag the blank chart so the upper left corner is in the middle of cell H2.
  5. Resize the blank chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column H, the right side is locked to the right side of Column P, the top is locked to the top of Row 2, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 16.
  6. Click the Select Data button in the Design tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. This opens the Select Data Source dialog box.
  7. Click the Add button on the Select Data Source dialog box. This opens the Edit Series dialog box.
  8. In the Series name input box on the Edit Series dialog box, type the word Class.
  9. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series values input box on the Edit Series dialog box.
  10. Highlight the range E4:E8 on the Grade Distribution worksheet. This automatically adds the range to the Series values input box. You also see bars added to the column chart (see Figure 4.14 “Completed Data Series for the Class Grade Distribution”).
  11. Click the OK button on the Edit Series dialog box.

    Figure 4.14 Completed Data Series for the Class Grade Distribution

  12. Click the Add button on the Select Data Source dialog box.
  13. In the Series name input box on the Edit Series dialog box, type the word College.
  14. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series values input box on the Edit Series dialog box.
  15. Highlight the range F4:F8 on the Grade Distribution worksheet. This automatically adds the range to the Series values input box. You also see bars added to the column chart.
  16. Click the OK button on the Edit Series dialog box.
  17. Click the Edit button on the right side of the Select Data Source dialog box under the Horizontal (Category) Axis Labels section. This is used to define the labels that will appear on the X axis of the chart and opens the Axis Labels dialog box.
  18. Highlight the range A4:A8 on the Grade Distribution worksheet. This adds the range to the Axis Labels dialog box, and the labels appear on the X axis on the column chart (see Figure 4.15 “Final Settings for the Select Data Source Dialog Box”).
  19. Click the OK button on the Axis Labels dialog box.
  20. Click the OK button on the Select Data Source dialog box.

    Figure 4.15 Final Settings for the Select Data Source Dialog Box

  21. Click the Chart Title button on the Layout tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. Select the Above Chart option from the drop-down list.
  22. Click in the text box containing the chart title. Delete the generic chart title and replace it with the following: Grade Distribution Comparison.

Figure 4.16 “Completed Grade Distribution Column Chart” shows the final appearance of the column chart. The column chart is an appropriate type for this data because there are fewer than twenty data points and we can easily see the comparison for each category. An audience can quickly see that the class issued fewer As compared to the college. However, the class had more Bs and Cs compared with the college population.

Figure 4.16 Completed Grade Distribution Column Chart

Integrity Check

Too Many Bars on a Column Chart?

Although there is no specific limit for the number of bars you should use on a column chart, a general rule of thumb is twenty bars or less. Figure 4.17 “Poor Use of a Column Chart” contains a total of thirty-two bars. This is considered a poor use of a column chart because it is difficult to identify meaningful trends or comparisons. The data used to create this chart might be better used in two or three different column charts, each with a distinct idea or message.

Figure 4.17 Poor Use of a Column Chart

Skill Refresher: Charts: Using Data in a Noncontiguous Range

  1. Click a blank cell location that is not adjacent to any data on the worksheet.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Select a chart type and format in the Charts group of commands.
  4. Click the Select Data button in the Design tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  5. Click the Add button on the Select Data Source dialog box.
  6. In the Edit Series dialog box, type a name in the Series name input box or highlight a cell location on the worksheet that contains a description for the data series.
  7. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series values input box.
  8. Highlight the range of cells on the worksheet that contain the data that will appear on the Y axis for the series identified in step 6.
  9. Click the OK button on the Edit Series dialog box.
  10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for each data series that you need to add to the chart.
  11. Click the Edit button on the right side of the Select Data Source dialog box.
  12. Highlight the range of cells that contain the descriptions for the X axis.
  13. Click the OK button on the Axis Labels dialog box.
  14. Click the OK button on the Select Data Source dialog box.

Percent of Total: Pie Chart

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.06 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Pie Chart (Percent of Total)

The next chart we will demonstrate is a pie chart. A pie chartA chart used to show the percent of total for each component of a data set. is used to show a percent of total for a data set at a specific point in time. The data we will use to demonstrate a pie chart is related to the overall spending activity in the health-care industry. The Health Care worksheet contains data that shows total spending in the United States for the years 1969 and 2009. In 1969, the total amount spent in the United States for health-related expenses was over $66 billion. The pie chart shows how this $66 billion was funded. The following steps explain how to accomplish this:

  1. Highlight the range A2:B7 on the Health Care worksheet.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Pie button in the Charts group of commands.
  4. Select the “Exploded pie in 3-D” option from the drop-down list of options.
  5. Click and drag the pie chart so the upper left corner is in the middle of cell E2.
  6. Resize the pie chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column E, the right side is locked to the right side of Column M, the top is locked to the top of Row 2, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 17 (see Figure 4.18 “Pie Chart Moved and Resized”).

    Figure 4.18 Pie Chart Moved and Resized

  7. Click the chart legend once and press the DELETE key on your keyboard. A pie chart typically shows labels next to each wedge. Therefore, the legend is not needed.
  8. Click the Data Labels button in the Layout tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  9. Select More Data Label Options from the drop-down list. This opens the Format Data Labels dialog box.
  10. Click the box next to the Value option under the Label Options section in the Format Data Labels dialog box. This removes the check mark (see Figure 4.19 “Final Settings in the Format Data Labels Dialog Box”).
  11. Click the Percentage option under the Label Options section in the Format Data Labels dialog box. A green check should appear in the box next to this option (see Figure 4.19 “Final Settings in the Format Data Labels Dialog Box”).
  12. Click the Category Name option under the Label Options section in the Format Data Labels dialog box. A green check should appear in the box next to this option (see Figure 4.19 “Final Settings in the Format Data Labels Dialog Box”).
  13. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Data Labels dialog box.
  14. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon and then click the Bold button. This should bold the data labels on the pie chart.

    Figure 4.19 Final Settings in the Format Data Labels Dialog Box

  15. Click the chart title twice.
  16. Click in front of the year 1969 and type Health Care Spending by Source:.

Figure 4.20 “Final Health Care Pie Chart” shows the completed pie chart. You can quickly see that Health Insurance and Out of Pocket made up the majority of health-care spending in 1969. Similar to the column chart, the key to creating an effective pie chart is the number of categories presented on the chart. Although there are no specific limits for the number of categories you can use on a pie chart, a good rule of thumb is ten or less. As the number of categories exceeds ten, it becomes more difficult to identify key categories that make up the majority of the total. In this example, it is easy to see that two categories compose 75% of the total.

Figure 4.20 Final Health Care Pie Chart

Skill Refresher: Inserting a Pie Chart

  1. Highlight a range of cells that contain the data you will use to create the chart.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Pie button in the Charts group.
  4. Select a format option from the Pie Chart drop-down menu.

Percent of Total Trend: Stacked Column Chart

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.07 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Stacked Column Chart (Percent of Total Trend)

The last chart type we will demonstrate is the stacked column chartA chart used to show how a percent of total changes over time or between two or more entities.. We use a stacked column chart to show how a percent of total changes over time. For example, the data on the Health Care worksheet shows spending by source for 1969 and 2009. A stacked column chart can show whether there is any change in the percent of total for each source between the two years. The Y axis of the chart shows the percentage from 0% to 100%. The X axis shows the two years: 1969 and 2009. The following steps explain how to create this chart:

  1. Highlight the range A2:C7 on the Health Care worksheet.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Column button in the Charts group of commands. Select the 100% Stacked Column format option from the drop-down list (see Figure 4.21 “Selecting the 100% Stacked Column Format”).

    Figure 4.21 Selecting the 100% Stacked Column Format

    Figure 4.22 “Initial Construction of the 100% Stacked Column Chart” shows the column chart that is created after selecting the 100% Stacked Column format option. As mentioned, the goal of this chart is to show the percentages on the Y axis and the years 1969 and 2009 on the X axis. However, notice that Excel places the spend sources on the X axis. The remaining steps explain how to correct this problem and complete the chart:

    Figure 4.22 Initial Construction of the 100% Stacked Column Chart

  4. Click the Switch Row/Column button in the Design tab on the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. This reverses the legend and current X axis categories (see Figure 4.22 “Initial Construction of the 100% Stacked Column Chart”).
  5. Click and drag the chart so the upper left corner is in the middle of cell E19.
  6. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column E, the right side is locked to the right side of Column N, the top is locked to the top of Row 19, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 37.
  7. Click the legend one time and press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
  8. Click the Layout tab on the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  9. Click the Data Table button in the Labels group of commands and select the Show Data Table with Legend Keys option from the drop-down menu. This is another way of displaying a legend for a column chart along with the numerical values that make up each component.
  10. Click the Chart Title button in the Layout tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  11. Select the Above Chart option for the drop-down menu.
  12. Click the chart title two times. Delete the generic chart title name and type Change in Health Care Spend Source.

Figure 4.23 “Final 100% Stacked Column Chart” shows the final stacked column chart. Notice that the Out of Pocket category, or the amount of cash people paid for health-care expenses, decreased significantly from 1969 to 2009. However, the Health Insurance category increased significantly from 1969 to 2009. Overall, the chart shows that the total out-of-pocket and health insurance expense increased significantly from 1969 to 2009. These two categories made up approximately 75% of total health-care spending in 1969. By 2009, these two categories increased to over 80% of total health-care spending.

Figure 4.23 Final 100% Stacked Column Chart

Skill Refresher: Inserting a Stacked Column Chart

  1. Highlight a range of cells that contain data that will be used to create the chart.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Column button in the Charts group.
  4. Select the Stacked Column format option from the Column Chart drop-down menu to show the values of each category on the Y axis. Select the 100% Stacked Column option to show the percent of total for each category on the Y axis.

Key Takeaways

  • Identifying the message you wish to convey to an audience is a critical first step in creating an Excel chart.
  • Both a column chart and a line chart can be used to present a trend over a period of time. However, a line chart is preferred over a column chart when presenting data over long periods of time.
  • The number of bars on a column chart should be limited to approximately twenty bars or less.
  • For column, line, and bar charts, the X axis can be used only for labels, not for numeric values.
  • When creating a chart to compare trends, the values for each data series must be within a reasonable range. If there is a wide variance between the values in the two data series (two times or more), the percent change should be calculated with respect to the first data point for each series.
  • When working with frequency distributions, the use of a column chart or a bar chart is a matter of preference. However, a column chart is preferred when working with a trend over a period of time.
  • A pie chart is used to present the percent of total for a data set.
  • A stacked column chart is used to show how a percent total changes over time.

Exercises

  1. You need to create a chart showing the past year sales results for the university bookstore. Your chart will show the total sales by month for twelve months. Which of the following is the best chart type?

    1. pie chart
    2. line chart
    3. scatter chart
    4. either line or column chart
  2. Which of the following should you do first to create an effective chart in Excel?

    1. Identify a chart type.
    2. Define the message you need to communicate.
    3. Determine which values belong on the Y axis.
    4. Highlight all the data on your worksheet.
  3. Which of the following is the most efficient method for adding labels to each section of a pie chart?

    1. Use the Data Labels button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
    2. Click the Text Box button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon and add labels next to each section of the chart.
    3. Use the Legend button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon to reposition the legend around each section of the chart.
    4. Click the Select Data button in the Design tab of the Ribbon to select and arrange specific data points to be placed on the chart.
  4. You have established a personal budget for your household. The spending section of the budget is broken down into five major categories. To show how the percent of total for each spend category has changed over a three-year period of time, it would be best to use which of the following chart types?

    1. column chart
    2. line chart
    3. stacked column chart
    4. pie chart

4.2 Formatting Charts

Learning Objectives

  1. Apply formatting commands to the X and Y axes.
  2. Enhance the visual appearance of the chart title and chart legend by using various formatting techniques.
  3. Assign titles to the X and Y axes that clarify labels and numeric values for the reader.
  4. Apply labels and formatting techniques to the data series in the plot area of a chart.
  5. Apply formatting commands to the chart area and the plot area of a chart.
  6. Employ series lines and annotations to enhance trends and provide additional information on a chart.

You can use a variety of formatting techniques to enhance the appearance of a chart once you have created it. Formatting commands are applied to a chart for the same reason they are applied to a worksheet: they make the chart easier to read. However, formatting techniques also help you qualify and explain the data in a chart. For example, you can add footnotes explaining the data source as well as notes that clarify the type of numbers being presented (i.e., if the numbers in a chart are truncated, you can state whether they are in thousands, millions, etc.). These notes are also helpful in answering questions if you are using charts in a live presentation. We will demonstrate these formatting techniques using the column chart and stacked column chart from the previous section.

X and Y Axis Formats

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.08 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: X and Y Axis Formats

There are numerous formatting commands we can apply to the X and Y axes of the chart. Although adjusting the font size, style, and color are common, many more options are available through the Format Axis dialog box (see Figure 4.5 “Format Axis Dialog Box”). The following steps demonstrate a few of these formatting techniques on the Grade Distribution Comparison chart:

  1. Click anywhere along the X axis (horizontal axis) of the Grade Distribution Comparison chart on the Grade Distribution worksheet.
  2. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Change the font style to Arial. Notice that as the mouse pointer hovers over a font style, you can preview the change on the chart before you make a selection.
  4. Change the font size to 11 points and bold the font. The final appearance of the X axis is shown in Figure 4.24 “Formatted X Axis”.
  5. Click anywhere along the Y axis to activate it.
  6. Repeat steps 3 and 4.

    Figure 4.24 Formatted X Axis

  7. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  8. Click the Format Selection button in the Current Selection group of commands. This opens the Format Axis dialog box.
  9. Click Number from the list of options on the left side of the Format Axis dialog box (see Figure 4.25 “Formatting Numbers on the Y Axis”). The commands in this section of the Format Axis dialog box are used to format numbers that appear on the X and Y axes of a chart.
  10. Click in the Decimal places input box and change the value to 0 (see Figure 4.25 “Formatting Numbers on the Y Axis”).
  11. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Axis dialog box. The formatting adjustments are shown in Figure 4.26 “Completed X and Y Axis Formats”.

Figure 4.25 Formatting Numbers on the Y Axis

Figure 4.26 Completed X and Y Axis Formats

Skill Refresher: Formatting the X and Y Axis

  1. Click anywhere along the X or Y axis to activate it.
  2. Click either the Home tab or Design tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Select any of the available formatting commands in these tabs.

Skill Refresher: X and Y Axis Number Formats

  1. Click anywhere along the X or Y axis to activate it.
  2. Click the Layout tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Format Selection button in the Current Selection group of commands.
  4. Click Number from the list of options on the left side of the Format Axis dialog box.
  5. Select a number format and set decimal places on the right side of the Format Axis dialog box.
  6. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Axis dialog box.

Chart Legend and Title Formats

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.09 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Chart Legend and Title Formats

The next items we will format on the Grade Distribution Comparison chart are the chart legend and title. Similar to the how we formatted the X and Y axes, we can format these items by activating them and using the formatting commands in the Home tab or the Format tab of the Ribbon. The following steps explain how to add these formats:

  1. Click the legend on the Grade Distribution Comparison chart in the Grade Distribution worksheet.
  2. Click and drag the legend so the top of the legend aligns with the 35% line next to the plot area (see Figure 4.27 “Moving the Legend”).

    Figure 4.27 Moving the Legend

  3. Change the font style in the Home tab of the Ribbon to Arial.
  4. Change the font size to 12 points.
  5. Click the bold and italics commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  6. Click and drag the left sizing handle so the legend is against the plot area (see Figure 4.28 “Legend Formatted and Resized”).
  7. Click and drag the lower center sizing handle so the bottom of the legend is aligned with the 25% line of the plot area (see Figure 4.28 “Legend Formatted and Resized”).

    Figure 4.28 Legend Formatted and Resized

  8. Click the chart title to activate it.
  9. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  10. Click the More down arrow in the Shape Styles group of commands to open the complete set of preset format styles (see Figure 4.28 “Legend Formatted and Resized”).
  11. Click the Subtle Effect – Blue, Accent 1 option, which is in the fourth row, second style from the left. As the mouse hovers over a style, you can preview the appearance on the chart.
  12. In the Home tab of the Ribbon, change the font style to Arial and reduce the font size to 14 points (see Figure 4.29 “Chart Legend and Title Formatted”).

Figure 4.29 Chart Legend and Title Formatted

Skill Refresher: Formatting the Chart Legend

  1. Click the Legend to activate it.
  2. Click either the Home tab or the Format tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Select any of the available formatting commands in these tabs.
  4. Click and drag the legend to move it.
  5. Click and drag any of the sizing handles to adjust the size of the legend.

Skill Refresher: Formatting the Chart Title

  1. Click anywhere on the chart title.
  2. Click either the Home tab or the Format tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Select any of the available formatting commands in these tabs.

X and Y Axis Titles

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.10 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: X and Y Axis Titles

Titles for the X and Y axes are necessary for defining the numbers and categories presented on a chart. For example, by looking at the Grade Distribution Comparison chart, it is not clear what the percentages along the Y axis represent. The following steps explain how to add titles to the X and Y axes to define these numbers and categories:

  1. Click anywhere on the Grade Distribution Comparison chart in the Grade Distribution worksheet to activate it.
  2. Click the Layout tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Axis Titles button in the Labels group of commands.
  4. Place the mouse pointer over the Primary Vertical Axis TitleCommand used to add a title to the Y axis of a chart. option from the drop-down list. This opens a second drop-down list. Select the Rotated Title option from the second drop-down list. This adds a title next to the Y axis (see Figure 4.30 “Selecting a Title for the Y Axis”).

    Figure 4.30 Selecting a Title for the Y Axis

  5. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  6. Click the Colored Outline – Blue, Accent 1 preset style option in the Shape Styles group of commands.
  7. Change the font style in the Home tab to Arial. Change the font size to 11 points.
  8. Click in the beginning of the Y axis title and delete the generic title. Type Percent of Enrolled Students.
  9. Click and drag the Y axis title so it is between 0% and 30% in the plot area (see Figure 4.31 “Adding and Formatting the Y Axis Title”).

    Figure 4.31 Adding and Formatting the Y Axis Title

  10. Click the Layout tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  11. Click the Axis Titles button in the Labels group of commands.
  12. Place the mouse pointer over the Primary Horizontal Axis TitleCommand used to add a title to the X axis of a chart. option. Select Title Below Axis from the second drop-down list.
  13. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  14. Click the Colored Outline – Blue, Accent 1 preset style option in the Shape Styles group of commands.
  15. Change the font style in the Home tab to Arial. Change the font size to 11 points.
  16. Click in the beginning of the X axis title and delete the generic title. Type Final Course Grade.

Figure 4.32 “X and Y Axis Titles Added” shows the added titles for the X and Y axes. The titles provide definitions for the grade categories along the X axis as well as the percentages on the Y axis.

Figure 4.32 X and Y Axis Titles Added

Skill Refresher: X and Y Axis Titles

  1. Click anywhere on the chart to activate it.
  2. Click the Layout tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Axis Titles button in the Labels group of commands.
  4. Place the mouse pointer over the Primary Horizontal Axis Title (X axis) or the Primary Vertical Axis Title (Y axis) option.
  5. Select one of the configuration formats from the second drop-down list.
  6. Click in the axis title to remove the generic title and type a new title.

Data Series Labels and Formats

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.11 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Data Series Labels and Formats

Adding labels to the data series of a chart is a key formatting feature. A data seriesA quantitative data set that is displayed graphically on a chart. Data sets are typically displayed in the form of columns or lines on a chart. is the item that is being displayed graphically on a chart. For example, the blue bars on the Grade Distribution Comparison chart represent one data series. We can add labels at the end of each bar to show the exact percentage the bar represents. In addition, we can add other formatting enhancements to the data series, such as changing the color of the bars or adding an effect. The following steps explain how to add these labels and formats to the chart:

  1. Click any red bar representing the College data series on the Grade Distribution Comparison chart in the Grade Distribution worksheet. Clicking one bar automatically activates all bars in the data series. If you click a bar a second time, only that bar is activated.
  2. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow on the Shape Fill button in the Shape Styles group of commands.
  4. Click the orange color square from the drop-down color palette (see Figure 4.33 “Changing the Color of a Data Series”). As you move the mouse pointer over other colors on the palette, you can preview the change on the data bars.

    Figure 4.33 Changing the Color of a Data Series

  5. Click the Layout tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  6. Click the Data Labels button in the Labels group of commands. Select More Data Label Options at the bottom of the drop-down list to open the Format Data Labels dialog box.
  7. Click the Number option from the list on the left side of the Format Data Labels dialog box.
  8. Select Percentage on the right side of the Format Data Labels dialog box (see Figure 4.34 “Adding Labels to a Data Series”).
  9. Click in the Decimal Places input box and change the number of decimal places to zero.
  10. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Data Labels dialog box.
  11. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  12. Change the font style to Arial, change the font size to 9 points, and select the Bold command.
  13. Click any blue bar in the Class data series.
  14. Repeat steps 5 through 12.

Figure 4.34 Adding Labels to a Data Series

Figure 4.35 “Completed Formatting Adjustments for the Data Series” shows the Grade Distribution Comparison chart with the completed formatting adjustments and labels added to the data series. Note that we can move each individual data label. This might be necessary if two data labels overlap or if a data label falls in the middle of a grid line. To move an individual data label, click it twice, then click and drag.

Figure 4.35 Completed Formatting Adjustments for the Data Series

Skill Refresher: Adding Data Labels

  1. Click anywhere on the chart to activate it.
  2. Click the Layout tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Data Labels button in the Labels group of commands.
  4. Select one of the preset positions from the drop-down list or select More Data Label Options to open the Format Data Labels dialog box.

Skill Refresher: Formatting a Data Series

  1. Click any bar or line for a data series.
  2. Click either the Home tab or the Format tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Select any of the available formatting commands in these tabs.

Formatting the Plot and Chart Areas

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.12 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Formatting the Plot and Chart Areas

The last items we will format on the Grade Distribution Comparison chart are the plot and chart areas. We format these areas primarily to enhance the visibility of the data series. The following steps explain how to add these formatting enhancements to the chart:

  1. Click anywhere in the chart area of the Grade Distribution Comparison chart in the Grade Distribution worksheet.
  2. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the down arrow on the Shape Fill button in the Shape Styles group of commands.
  4. Select the Tan, Background 2, Darker 25% option from the color palette (see Figure 4.36 “Formatting the Chart Area”).
  5. Click anywhere in the plot area to activate it. Be sure not to click a grid line or one of the data series.
  6. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  7. Click the Shape Effects button in the Shape Styles group of commands.
  8. Place the mouse pointer over the Bevel option from the drop-down list. Then select the Circle bevel option from the second drop-down list (see Figure 4.37 “Putting a Bevel Effect on the Plot Area”).

Figure 4.36 Formatting the Chart Area

Figure 4.37 Putting a Bevel Effect on the Plot Area

Figure 4.38 “Grade Distribution Comparison Chart with Formats Applied” shows the completed Grade Distribution Comparison chart. The darker shade on the chart area along with the bevel effect on the plot area make the data series the main focal point of the chart.

Figure 4.38 Grade Distribution Comparison Chart with Formats Applied

Skill Refresher: Formatting the Chart Area

  1. Click anywhere on the chart area.
  2. Click either the Home tab or the Format tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Select any of the available formatting commands in these tabs.

Skill Refresher: Formatting the Plot Area

  1. Click anywhere on the plot area.
  2. Click either the Home tab or the Format tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Select any of the available formatting commands in these tabs.

Adding Series Lines and Annotations to a Chart

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.13 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Adding Series Lines and Annotations

The last formatting features we will demonstrate are adding series lines and annotations to a chart. To demonstrate these skills, we will use the Change in Health Care Spend Source stacked column chart. Series linesLines that are typically used in a stacked column chart to connect the data series between two or more stacks. are commonly used in stacked column charts to show the change from one stack to the next. AnnotationsNotes or comments that explain the nature and source of the data presented on a chart. are useful for clarifying the data presented in a chart or for identifying data sources. In addition to demonstrating these skills, we will review several of the formatting skills that were covered in this section. The following steps include the skills review as well as the new formatting features:

  1. Locate the Change in Health Care Spend Source chart on the Health Care worksheet. Activate the chart by clicking anywhere inside the chart perimeter.
  2. Move the chart to a separate chart sheet by clicking the Move Chart button in the Design tab of the Ribbon. Type the following sheet tab label in the New sheet input box: Health Spending Chart. Click the OK button.
  3. Click anywhere on the X axis to activate it. In the Home tab of the Ribbon, change the font style to Arial, change the font size to 12 points, and select the bold command.
  4. Activate the Y axis and apply the same formatting adjustments as stated in step 3.
  5. Add a Y axis title using the Rotated Title option. In the Format tab under the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon, select the first preset style option, Colored Outline – Black, Dark 1, in the Shape Styles group of commands. Then, in the Home tab of the Ribbon, change the font style to Arial and the font size to 14 points.
  6. Change the wording of the Y axis title to read Percent of Total Annual Spend.
  7. Activate the title of the chart by clicking it once. In the Format tab under the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon, select the first preset style option, Colored Outline – Black, Dark 1, in the Shape Styles group of commands. Then, in the Home tab of the Ribbon, change the font style to Arial.
  8. Click anywhere in the chart area to activate it.
  9. Click the Format tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon and click the down arrow on the Shape Fill button. Select the Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 60% option on the color palette.
  10. Click anywhere on the plot area to activate it. Be sure not to click on a grid line.
  11. Click the Shape Effects button in the Format tab of the Ribbon. Place the mouse pointer over the Bevel option from the drop-down menu. Select the first option from the Bevel format list, which is the “Circle” bevel option.
  12. Click and drag down the top center sizing handle of the plot area approximately one inch (see Figure 4.39 “Adjusting the Size of the Plot Area”).
  13. Click and drag up the bottom center sizing handle approximately three-quarters of an inch (see Figure 4.39 “Adjusting the Size of the Plot Area”). This step and step 12 are necessary to create space at the top and bottom of the chart to add annotations.

    Figure 4.39 “Adjusting the Size of the Plot Area” shows the Change in Health Care Spend Source chart prior to adding the series lines and annotations. Notice that the Ribbon has been minimized to improve the visibility of the chart. The remaining steps will focus on adding lines and annotations:

    Figure 4.39 Adjusting the Size of the Plot Area

  14. Click the Layout tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  15. Click the Lines button in the Analysis group of commands.
  16. Click the Series Lines option from the drop-down list. This adds lines to the chart, connecting each data series between the two stacks (see Figure 4.40 “Selecting the Series Lines Option”).

    Figure 4.40 Selecting the Series Lines Option

  17. Click any of the series lines added to the chart. Clicking one line will activate all lines on the chart (see Figure 4.41 “Activating the Series Lines”).

    Figure 4.41 Activating the Series Lines

  18. Click the Shape Outline button in the Format tab of the Ribbon. Place the mouse pointer over the Weight option and select the “2¼ line weight” option.

    Figure 4.42 “Series Lines Added to the Stacked Column Chart” shows the appearance of the chart with the series lines connecting the two stacks. This formatting enhancement is common for stacked column charts. The lines help focus the audience’s attention to changes in the percent of total trend. In this case, the audience can quickly see the decline in the Out of Pocket category (blue) and the increase in the Health Insurance category (red).

    Figure 4.42 Series Lines Added to the Stacked Column Chart

  19. Click anywhere in the chart area of the Change in Health Care Spend Source chart.
  20. Click the Text Box button in the Insert tab of the Ribbon (see Figure 4.43 “Lines Added to the Stacked Column Chart”).
  21. Place the mouse pointer on the left edge of the chart area approximately one-quarter inch from the top. Click and drag a rectangle approximately one and a half inches wide and one-quarter inch high (see Figure 4.43 “Lines Added to the Stacked Column Chart”).
  22. Click the Home tab of the Ribbon and change the font style to Arial, change the font size to 10 points, and select the bold and italics commands.
  23. Type Dollars in Millions. This tells the audience that the numbers have been truncated and represent denominations in millions. This means you would add six zeros to the end of each number on the chart. Therefore, the Out of Pocket value for 1969 is shown as $22,617 but is actually $22,617,000,000, or $22.6 billion.

    Figure 4.43 Lines Added to the Stacked Column Chart

  24. Repeat steps 19–22 to add a second text box to the chart. Begin drawing this text box below the first box approximately one inch in from the left edge of the chart (see Figure 4.43 “Lines Added to the Stacked Column Chart”). Complete the formatting changes in step 22 and select the Align Text Right command.
  25. Type 100% = in the second text box.
  26. Repeat steps 19–22 to add a third text box to the chart. Center this text box over the 1969 stack. In addition to the formatting commands in step 22, select the Center align command and the Underline command.
  27. Type $66,172 in the third text box.
  28. Repeat steps 19–22 to add a fourth text box to the chart. Center this text box over the 2009 stack. In addition to the formatting commands in step 22, select the Center align command and the Underline command.
  29. Type $2,486,293 in the fourth text box.
  30. Repeat steps 19–22 to add a fifth text box to the chart. Begin drawing this text box at the bottom left edge of the chart, just below the data table. The text box will need to be at least four inches wide.
  31. Type Source: US Department of Health and Human Services in the fifth text box.

Figure 4.44 “Completed Stacked Column Chart with Annotations” shows the completed Change in Health Care Spend Source stacked column chart. The lines and annotations provide key information for understanding the data and interpreting the trends presented on the chart.

Figure 4.44 Completed Stacked Column Chart with Annotations

Integrity Check

Annotations and Axis Titles

Although adding annotations and axis titles can be a tedious process, doing so maintains a high level of integrity for your charts. People can misinterpret the message being conveyed by the chart if they make inaccurate assumptions about the values displayed. Axis titles and annotations help prevent readers from making false assumptions and ensure that readers see the most accurate representation of the message being conveyed by the chart.

Skill Refresher: Adding Series Lines

  1. Click anywhere on the chart area.
  2. Click the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Lines button in the Analysis group of commands.
  4. Click the Series Lines option from the drop-down list.

Skill Refresher: Adding Annotations

  1. Click anywhere on the chart area.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Text Box button in the Text group of commands.
  4. Click and drag the size of the text box needed on the chart.
  5. Apply any desired format changes from the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  6. Type the desired text.

Key Takeaways

  • Applying appropriate formatting techniques is critical for making a chart easier to read.
  • Many formatting commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon can be applied to a chart.
  • To change the number format for a data label, you must use the Number section in the Format Data Labels dialog box. You cannot use the Number format commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  • To change the number format for the values on the Y axis, and the X axis in the case of a scatter chart, you must use the Number section of the Format Axis dialog box. You cannot use the Number format commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  • Axis titles and annotations help prevent false assumptions from being made and ensure that the reader sees the most accurate representation of the information presented on a chart.

Exercises

  1. You need to format the numbers along the Y axis of a column chart to US dollars with zero decimal places. Which of the following describes the method that would allow you to accomplish this?

    1. Activate the Y axis and use any of the number formatting commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
    2. Activate the Y axis and click the Data Labels button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
    3. Activate the Y axis and click the Format Selection button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
    4. Activate the Y axis and click the Axis Titles button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
  2. Which of the following statements is accurate with regard to changing the color of a data series on a column chart?

    1. Click one bar on the column chart plot area to activate all bars for that data series. Click the Fill Color button in the Home tab of the Ribbon and select a color.
    2. Click one bar on the column chart plot area twice to activate all bars for that data series. Click the Shape Fill button in the Format tab of the Ribbon and select a color.
    3. Click the Legend one time and then click the name of the data series to activate it. Click the Shape Fill button in the Format tab of the Ribbon and select a color.
    4. Both A and C are valid methods for changing the color of a data series.
  3. Which of the following methods is accurate with respect to formatting the legend?

    1. Click the legend one time and use any of the available formatting commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
    2. Click the Legend button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon and select from the drop-down list of commands.
    3. Click the legend one time to activate it and use any of the formatting commands in the Design tab of the Ribbon.
    4. None of the above.
  4. Which of the following is the most efficient way to add a title to the Y axis of a chart?

    1. Add a text box to the plot area and drag it over to the Y axis.
    2. Type the title into the formula bar. This adds a text box to the plot area that can be dragged over to the Y axis.
    3. Select the vertical axis option from the Axis Titles button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
    4. Select the axis title option in the Select Data Source dialog box after clicking the Select Data button in the Design tab of the Ribbon.

4.3 The Scatter Chart

Learning Objectives

  1. Construct a scatter chart to show the supply and demand curves for a market.
  2. Learn how to adjust the scale of the X and Y axes of a scatter chart.
  3. Add a trendline and line equation to a data series on a scatter chart.

This section focuses on the scatter chartChart used when quantitative or numeric values are required for both the X and Y axes. type. What makes this chart different from the other charts demonstrated in this chapter is that values are used on both the X and Y axes. So far, the charts we have demonstrated in this chapter use categories or qualitative labels for the X axis. This means that the distance between each category on the X axis will always be the same, even if numbers are used. In a scatter chart, the X axis operates just like the Y axis. In other words, the distance between the values on the X axis will vary depending on the value of the number. Depending on the format, we can create the scatter chart to look just like a line chart. Since both the X and Y axes contain quantitative values, the scatter chart is a valuable tool for studying various shapes or functional forms for a line chart. In fact, a common feature used with the scatter chart is the trendline and equation. Excel can evaluate the line that is produced on a scatter chart and produce a mathematical equation. We will demonstrate these features in this section.

Supply and Demand: The Scatter Chart

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.14 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Supply and Demand (Scatter Chart)

A common use for a scatter chart is the study of supply and demand curves. This is because the data points for both the supply and demand lines require quantitative values on both the X and Y axes. The Y axis contains the price of a certain good or item; the X axis contains the quantity sold for that good or item. Fundamental economic laws state that as prices rise, sellers are willing to increase supply and sell more goods. However, the reverse is true for consumers. As prices rise, consumers purchase fewer goods. The Supply & Demand worksheet contains hypothetical data for the supply and demand of breakfast cereal. There are ten data points to show the change in supply and demand as the price changes in Column A. The values you see in Columns A through C are formula outputs that are driven by the percentage in cell C14. For example, if the percentage in cell C14 is changed to 10, each price listed in Column A will increase, as shown in Figure 4.45 “Hypothetical Supply and Demand Data”.

Figure 4.45 Hypothetical Supply and Demand Data

We will use the scatter chart to study the change in quantity supplied and demanded as the price increases over ten data points, as shown in Figure 4.45 “Hypothetical Supply and Demand Data”. For many of the charts demonstrated in this chapter, we were able to highlight a range of cells and insert the chart type we needed. This was especially the case when the data was in a contiguous range of cells. However, this method rarely works when creating a scatter chart, even if the data are in a contiguous range. As a result, the method we present here starts with a blank chart and demonstrates how each data series is added to the chart individually. The following steps explain how we create this chart:

  1. Change the value in cell C14 on the Supply & Demand worksheet to zero.
  2. Activate cell E1 on the Supply & Demand worksheet. It is important to note that this cell location is not adjacent to any data on the worksheet.
  3. Click the Scatter button from the Charts group of commands on the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  4. Select the Scatter with Smooth Lines and Markers format from the drop-down list of options (see Figure 4.46 “Selecting a Scatter Chart Format”). This adds a blank chart to the worksheet.

    Figure 4.46 Selecting a Scatter Chart Format

  5. Click and drag the chart so the upper left corner is in the center of cell E2.
  6. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column E, the right side is locked to the right side of Column M, the top is locked to the top of Row 2, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 17.
  7. Click the Design tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. Then click the Select Data button in the Data group of commands. This opens the Select Data Source dialog box.
  8. Click the Add button on the left side of the Select Data Source dialog box. This opens the Edit Series dialog box. Notice on this dialog box there are inputs for defining values for both the X and Y axes. Charts that we previously created using this method only had an input for putting values on the Y axis.
  9. Type the series name Demand. This should appear in the Series name input box.
  10. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series X values input box on the Edit Series dialog box.
  11. Highlight the range B3:B12 on the Supply & Demand worksheet. You will see this range appear in the Series X values input box after it is highlighted.
  12. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series Y values input box on the Edit Series dialog box.
  13. Highlight the range A3:A12 on the Supply & Demand worksheet.

    Figure 4.47 “Defining the Demand Data Series” shows the final settings in the Edit Series dialog box for the Demand data series. You will see that as the X and Y axis values are defined in the dialog box, they appear on the chart. The chart in this figure shows the price along the Y axis and quantity along the X axis.

    Figure 4.47 Defining the Demand Data Series

  14. Click the OK button at the bottom of the Edit Series dialog box.
  15. Click the Add button on the left side of the Select Data Source dialog box.
  16. Type the series name Supply. This should appear in the Series name input box.
  17. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series X values input box on the Edit Series dialog box.
  18. Highlight the range C3:C12 on the Supply & Demand worksheet. This range appears in the Series X values input box after it is highlighted.
  19. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series Y values input box on the Edit Series dialog box.
  20. Highlight the range A3:A12 on the Supply & Demand worksheet.
  21. Click the OK button at the bottom of the Edit Series dialog box.
  22. Click the OK button at the bottom of the Select Data Source dialog box.

Why?

For Scatter Charts, Start with a Blank Chart

When creating a scatter chart, it is best to start with a blank chart and add each data series individually. This is because Excel will not always guess correctly which values belong on the X and Y axes since both contain numbers. For other chart types, such as column or line charts, the X axis contains nonnumeric data so it’s easy for Excel to configure the chart you need.

Figure 4.48 “Scatter Chart Showing One Price” shows the appearance of the scatter chart before any formatting enhancements are applied. Notice only two plot points are located on the chart. This is because the price change value in cell C14 is still zero. Therefore, the data are not reflecting any change in price, quantity demanded, or quantity supplied. The chart shows that at the current price of $1.50, suppliers are willing to provide fewer units compared with the number of units consumers are willing to buy.

Figure 4.48 Scatter Chart Showing One Price

The following steps explain the formatting enhancements we will apply to the scatter chart shown in Figure 4.48 “Scatter Chart Showing One Price”:

  1. Add a title to the chart by clicking the Chart Title button in the Layout tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. Use the Above Chart option from the drop-down list.
  2. Select Subtle Effect – Orange, Accent 6 from the preset style list in the Shape Styles group of commands on the Format tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Change the font style of the chart title to Arial and the font size to 14 points.
  4. Change the wording of the chart title as follows: Supply and Demand for Breakfast Cereal.
  5. Add a title to the Y axis. Use the Rotated Title option from the Primary Vertical Axis Title drop-down list after clicking the Axis Titles button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
  6. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to format the Y axis title. However, change the font size to 12 points.
  7. Change the wording of the Y axis title as follows: Price per Unit.
  8. Add a title to the X axis.
  9. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to format the X axis title. However, change the font size to 12 points.
  10. Change the wording of the X axis title as follows: Quantity in Units.
  11. Make the following format changes to the X and Y axis values: font style Arial, font size 11 points, and bold.
  12. Change the color of the chart area to Aqua, Accent 5, Lighter 40% (see Figure 4.49 “Formatting Enhancements Added to the Scatter Chart”).

    Figure 4.49 Formatting Enhancements Added to the Scatter Chart

  13. Apply a bevel effect to the plot area. Use the Circle format option from the Bevel drop-down list of options.
  14. Change the font style of the legend to Arial and bold the font.
  15. Change the value in cell C14 to 2. Then change it to 4 and then to 8. Change the value one more time to 14. As you change the values in cell C14, you will see the lines change on the chart.

Figure 4.50 “Scatter Chart with Price Change at 2%” shows the completed scatter chart when the Price Change is set to 2%, and Figure 4.51 “Scatter Chart with Price Change at 14%” shows the same chart when the Price Change is set to 14%. The point at which the demand and supply lines intersect on Figure 4.51 “Scatter Chart with Price Change at 14%” is known as the market equilibrium point. The market equilibriumA state in which the quantity demanded equals the quantity supplied at a specific price. is where the quantity demanded equals the quantity supplied at a specific price. The price where quantity demanded equals quantity supplied is referred to as the equilibrium priceThe price where quantity demanded equals quantity supplied..

Figure 4.50 Scatter Chart with Price Change at 2%

Figure 4.51 Scatter Chart with Price Change at 14%

Skill Refresher: Creating a Scatter Plot Chart

  1. Click a blank cell that is not adjacent to any data on the worksheet.
  2. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Scatter button in the Charts group of commands.
  4. Select a format option from the drop-down list.
  5. Move the blank chart off any cell locations containing data that will be used to create the chart.
  6. Click the Select Data button in the Design tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon.
  7. Click the Add button on the Select Data Source dialog box.
  8. Type a name for the data series in the Series name input box in the Edit Series dialog box.
  9. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series X values input box.
  10. Highlight the range of cells on your worksheet that contain values to be plotted on the X axis.
  11. Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance to the Series Y values input box.
  12. Highlight the range of cells on your worksheet that contain values to be plotted on the Y axis.
  13. Click the OK button in the Edit Series dialog box.
  14. Repeat steps 7 through 13 for each data series you want to add to the chart.
  15. Click the OK button at the bottom of the Select Data Source dialog box.

Changing the Scale of the X and Y Axes

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.15 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Changing the Scale of the X and Y Axes

For all the charts demonstrated in this chapter, Excel has automatically established the scale for the Y axis. For scatter charts, Excel has also established the scale for the X axis. The axis scaleThe minimum and maximum value that appears on the X or Y axis of a chart. is the minimum and maximum value that appears on an axis. For example, in Figure 4.51 “Scatter Chart with Price Change at 14%”, the Y axis scale is set to a minimum value of zero and a maximum value of 6.00. Although this is a very convenient feature of Excel, you may want to change the scale in some instances. If you change the value in cell C14 on the Supply & Demand worksheet, the lines jump or shift on the plot area of the chart. This is because Excel keeps rearranging the scale of both the X and Y axes. When studying the shape of lines, it is best to set the scale so it does not change. The following steps explain how to accomplish this:

  1. Change the value in cell C14 on the Supply & Demand worksheet to zero.
  2. Click anywhere on the Y axis of the chart.
  3. Click the Format Selection button in the Layout tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. This opens the Format Axis dialog box.
  4. Click the Fixed option next to the Minimum setting under the Axis Options in the Format Axis dialog box. This ensures that the minimum value for the Y axis will always be zero.
  5. Click the Fixed option next to the Maximum setting under the Axis Options in the Format Axis dialog box.
  6. Click in the input box next to the Maximum setting. Remove the 1.6 and enter the number 5.0. We will not be studying the behavior of supply and demand beyond a $5.00 price point, so there is no need to extend the Y axis beyond this point.
  7. Click the Fixed option next to the Major Unit setting under the Axis Options in the Format Axis dialog box.
  8. Click in the input box next to the Major Unit setting and change the value from 0.2 to 0.5 (see Figure 4.52 “Setting the Y Axis Scale”). This allows us to measure the plot points in $0.50 intervals along the Y axis. When the axis extends to $5.00, $0.20 intervals may place too many values along the Y axis, making it difficult to read.
  9. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Axis dialog box.

    Figure 4.52 Setting the Y Axis Scale

  10. Click anywhere along the X axis of the chart.
  11. Click the Format Selection button in the Layout tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. This opens the Format Axis dialog box for the X axis.
  12. Click the Fixed option next to the Minimum setting under the Axis Options in the Format Axis dialog box. This ensures that the minimum value for the X axis will always be zero.
  13. Click the Fixed option next to the Maximum setting under the Axis Options in the Format Axis dialog box.
  14. Click in the input box next to the Maximum setting. Remove the 500.0 and enter the number 450.0. The number of units supplied or demanded will not exceed 450 based on the price points in our study. There is no need to extend the X axis to 500.
  15. Click the Fixed option next to the Major Unit setting under the Axis Options in the Format Axis dialog box.
  16. Click in the input box next to the Major Unit setting and change the value from 100.0 to 50.0. This allows us to measure the plot points in 50-unit intervals along the X axis.
  17. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Axis dialog box.
  18. Change the value in cell C14 to 2. Then change it to 4 and then to 8. Change the value one more time to 14. As you change the values in cell C14, the lines change but they no longer jump or shift since the scale of both axes is fixed.

Figure 4.53 “Final Appearance of the Scatter Chart” shows the final appearance of the scatter chart after the scale is set for both the X and Y axes. Notice that market equilibrium is achieved at a price of approximately $2.50.

Figure 4.53 Final Appearance of the Scatter Chart

Adding a Trendline and Equation

Follow-along file: Continue with Excel Objective 4.00. (Use file Excel Objective 4.16 if starting here.)

Lesson Video: Trendline and Equation

A trendline can be applied to a chart to estimate or predict where plot points may occur at various points along the X and Y axes. Excel enables you to add a trendline to a chart and also provides the equation you can use to plot additional points. The following steps explain how to accomplish this:

  1. Set the value in cell C14 on the Supply & Demand worksheet to 14.
  2. Click anywhere in the chart area of the scatter chart to activate it.
  3. Click the Trendline button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon. Select the Linear Trendline option from the drop-down list.
  4. Select the Demand option from the Add Trendline dialog box and click the OK button. This adds a new line to the plot area of the chart as well as the legend.

    Figure 4.54 “Adding a Linear Trendline” shows the scatter chart after adding a linear trendline. Notice that the line goes through only two points on the demand line. This indicates that this trendline may not be a good fit for the line that has been created on the chart.

    Figure 4.54 Adding a Linear Trendline

    Finding the right shape for a trendline may require trying a few different options. As shown in Figure 4.54 “Adding a Linear Trendline”, the linear trendline is not a good fit for the shape of the demand line. The remaining steps will demonstrate how to remove a trendline and access more trendline options:

  5. Click the Trendline button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon. Select the None option from the drop-down list. This removes the trendline from the chart.
  6. Click the Trendline button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon again. This time, select More Trendline Options from the drop-down list.
  7. Select the Demand option from the Add Trendline dialog box and click OK. This opens the Format Trendline dialog box.
  8. Select the Power option from the Format Trendline dialog box.
  9. Click the “Display Equation on chart” option at the bottom of the Format Trendline dialog box (see Figure 4.55 “The Format Trendline Dialog Box”).
  10. Click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Trendline dialog box.

Figure 4.55 The Format Trendline Dialog Box

Figure 4.56 “Scatter Chart with a Power Trendline” shows the scatter chart with the Power trendline added for the demand series. Notice that the line fits perfectly over the demand series in the plot area. In fact, it may be difficult to see the line in the figure. This indicates that the trendline is an excellent fit for the demand line. As a result, we can be confident in using this line to predict other demand values along the X and Y axes. You can also see that the equation for this trendline has been added to the plot area of the chart. We can use the equation to calculate the price for each quantity value substituted for X. For example, if the number 150 is substituted for X in the equation, the result is a price of $2.59. Based on the values used to create the chart, this result appears to be accurate.

Figure 4.56 Scatter Chart with a Power Trendline

Skill Refresher: Adding a Trendline

  1. Click anywhere on the chart area.
  2. Click the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
  3. Click the Trendline button.
  4. Select one of the preset trendline options from the drop-down list or select More Trendline Options to open the Add Trendline dialog box.
  5. Select a data series in the Add Trendline dialog box and click the OK button.
  6. Select the “Display Equation on chart” option from the Format Trendline dialog box to add the trendline equation to the chart.
  7. Click the Close button at the bottom of the dialog box.

Key Takeaways

  • When creating a scatter chart, it is best to start with a blank chart and add each data series individually. The highlight and click method is less reliable since numeric values are assigned to both the X and Y axes. As a result, Excel often guesses incorrectly which values are assigned to the X and Y axes.
  • Finding the best fit for a trendline is often a matter of trial and error. You may have to try a few different trendlines to determine which form is the best fit for your data series.
  • You must open the Format Trendline dialog box to add the line equation to the plot area of the chart.

Exercises

  1. Which of the following is the best chart type to use if you need to create a line chart where both the X and Y axes contain numeric values?

    1. line chart
    2. scatter chart
    3. either a line chart or a scatter chart
    4. area chart
  2. Which of the following methods allows you to set the scale of the Y axis?

    1. Activate the Y axis and click the Scale button in the Page Layout tab of the Ribbon.
    2. Activate the Y axis and click the Format Selection button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
    3. Activate the Y axis and click the Axes button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon; select the Primary Vertical Axis option and then select More Primary Vertical Axis Options.
    4. Both B and C are correct.

4.4 Using Charts with Microsoft® Word® and Microsoft® PowerPoint®

Learning Objectives

  1. Learn how to paste an image of an Excel chart into a Word document.
  2. Learn how to paste a link to an Excel chart into a PowerPoint slide.

Charts that are created in Excel are commonly used in Microsoft Word documents or for presentations that use Microsoft PowerPoint slides. Excel provides options for pasting an image of a chart into either a Word document or a PowerPoint slide. You can also establish a link to your Excel charts so that if you change the data in your Excel file, it is automatically reflected in your Word or PowerPoint files. We will demonstrate both methods in this section.

Pasting a Chart Image into Word

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 4.17

Lesson Video: Pasting a Chart Image into Word

Excel charts can be valuable tools for explaining quantitative data in a written report. Reports that address business plans, public policies, budgets, and so on all involve quantitative data. For this example, we will assume that the Change in Health Care Spend Source stacked column chart (see Figure 4.44 “Completed Stacked Column Chart with Annotations”) is being used in a written policy report. The following steps demonstrate how to paste an image, or picture, of this chart into a Word document:

  1. Click below the figure heading in the Word document that reads: Figure 6: Health Care Spending in the U.S. The image of the stacked column chart will be placed below this heading.
  2. Open the Excel Objective 4.16 follow-along file.
  3. Activate the Change in Health Care Spend Source chart in the Health Spending Chart worksheet.
  4. Click the Copy button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  5. Go back to the Excel Objective 4.17 Word document by clicking the file in the taskbar.
  6. Click the drop-down arrow below the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Click the Picture option from the drop-down list, which is the last option on the far right (see Figure 4.57 “Paste Picture Option for Word”).
  7. Click anywhere on the picture of the chart to activate it.
  8. Click the Format tab under the Picture Tools section of the Ribbon (see Figure 4.58 “Changing the Size of a Picture in Word”).

    Figure 4.57 Paste Picture Option for Word

  9. Click the down arrow on the Shape Width button in the Size group of commands (see Figure 4.58 “Changing the Size of a Picture in Word”). Continue to click the down arrow until the width of the picture is 5.5. As you reduce the width of the picture, the height is automatically reduced as well.

Figure 4.58 Changing the Size of a Picture in Word

Figure 4.59 “Final Appearance of Pasting a Chart Image into Word” shows the final appearance of the Change in Health Care Spend Source chart pasted into a Word document. It is best to use either the Shape Width or Shape Height buttons to reduce the size of the chart. Using either button automatically reduces the height and width of the chart in proper proportion. If you choose to use the sizing handles to resize the chart, holding the SHIFT key while clicking and dragging on a corner sizing handle will also keep the chart in proper proportion.

Figure 4.59 Final Appearance of Pasting a Chart Image into Word

Skill Refresher: Pasting a Chart Image into Word

  1. Activate an Excel chart and click the Copy button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  2. Click on the location in the Word document where the Excel chart will be pasted.
  3. Click the down arrow of the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  4. Click the Picture option from the drop-down list.
  5. Click the Format tab in the Picture Tools section of the Ribbon.
  6. Resize the picture by clicking the up or down arrow on the Shape Width or Shape Height buttons.

Pasting a Linked Chart Image into PowerPoint

Follow-along file: Excel Objective 4.18

Lesson Video: Pasting a Linked Chart Image into PowerPoint

Microsoft PowerPoint is perhaps the most commonly used tool for delivering live presentations. The charts used in a live presentation are critical for efficiently delivering your ideas to an audience. Similar to written documents, a wide range of presentations may require the explanation of quantitative data. This demonstration includes a PowerPoint slide that could be used in a presentation for setting prices for a hypothetical breakfast cereal company. We will paste the scatter chart showing the supply and demand for breakfast cereal into this PowerPoint slide. However, instead of pasting an image, as demonstrated in the Word document, we will establish a linkA dynamic connection between two files, worksheets, or cell locations. Any change in the source file will be reflected in the file, worksheet, or cell that contains the link. to the Excel file. As a result, if we change the chart in the Excel file, the change will be reflected in the PowerPoint file. The following steps explain how to accomplish this:

  1. Open the Excel Objective 4.16 follow-along file.
  2. Activate the scatter chart in the Supply & Demand worksheet.
  3. Click the Copy button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  4. Go back to the Excel Objective 4.18 PowerPoint file by clicking the file in the taskbar.
  5. Click the down arrow below the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon in the PowerPoint file.
  6. Select the Keep Source Formatting & Link Data option from the drop-down list (see Figure 4.60 “Creating a Link to an Excel Chart in PowerPoint”). This pastes an image of the Excel chart into the PowerPoint slide. In addition, a link is created so that any changes made to the chart appear on the PowerPoint slide.

    Figure 4.60 Creating a Link to an Excel Chart in PowerPoint

  7. Click anywhere in the plot area of the scatter chart pasted into the PowerPoint slide. You will see the same Excel Chart Tools tabs added to the Ribbon (see Figure 4.61 “Modifying an Excel Chart Pasted into a PowerPoint Slide”).

    Figure 4.61 Modifying an Excel Chart Pasted into a PowerPoint Slide

  8. Click the down arrow next to the Shape Fill button in the Format tab of the Ribbon. Select the white color block from the palette (see Figure 4.61 “Modifying an Excel Chart Pasted into a PowerPoint Slide”).
  9. Go back to the Excel Objective 4.16 file by clicking it in the taskbar.
  10. In the Supply & Demand worksheet, change the value in cell C14 to 6.
  11. Go back to the Excel Objective 4.18 PowerPoint file by clicking it in the taskbar.
  12. Click the Design tab in the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. Click the Refresh Data button (see Figure 4.62 “Refreshing a Linked Excel Chart Pasted into a PowerPoint Slide”). The change made in the Excel workbook is now reflected on the PowerPoint slide.

Integrity Check

Refreshing Linked Charts in PowerPoint and Word

When creating a link to a chart in Word or PowerPoint, you must refresh the data if you make any changes in the Excel workbook. This is especially true if you make changes in the Excel file prior to opening the Word or PowerPoint file that contains a link to a chart. To refresh the chart, make sure it is activated, then click the Refresh Data button in the Design tab of the Ribbon. Forgetting this step can result in old or erroneous data being displayed on the chart.

Figure 4.62 “Refreshing a Linked Excel Chart Pasted into a PowerPoint Slide” shows the appearance of the scatter chart in the PowerPoint slide after the color of the plot area was changed back to white. Figure 4.63 “Final Chart Linked to a PowerPoint Slide” shows the appearance of the scatter plot after the change was made in the Supply & Demand worksheet in the Excel file. The change that was made in the Excel file will appear in the PowerPoint file after clicking the Refresh Data button.

Figure 4.62 Refreshing a Linked Excel Chart Pasted into a PowerPoint Slide

Figure 4.63 Final Chart Linked to a PowerPoint Slide

Integrity Check

Severed Link?

When creating a link to an Excel chart in Word or PowerPoint, you must keep the Excel workbook in its original location on your computer or network. If you move or delete the Excel workbook, you will get an error message when you try to update the link in your Word or PowerPoint file. You will also get an error if the Excel workbook is saved on a network drive that your computer cannot access. These errors occur because the link to the Excel workbook has been severed. Therefore, if you know in advance that you will be using a USB drive to pull up your documents or presentation, move the Excel workbook to your USB drive before you establish the link in your Word or PowerPoint file.

Skill Refresher: Pasting a Linked Chart Image into PowerPoint

  1. Activate an Excel chart and click the Copy button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  2. Click in the PowerPoint slide where the Excel chart will be pasted.
  3. Click the down arrow of the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  4. Click the Keep Source Formatting & Link Data option from the drop-down list.
  5. Click the Refresh Data button in the Design tab of the Ribbon to ensure any changes in the Excel file are reflected in the chart.

Key Takeaways

  • When pasting an image of an Excel chart into a Word document or PowerPoint file, use the Picture option from the Paste drop-down list of options.
  • When creating a link to a chart in Word or PowerPoint, you must refresh the data if you make any changes in the Excel workbook.

Exercises

  1. When pasting an image of an Excel chart into a Word document, which of the following commands would you use?

    1. Click the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
    2. Click the down arrow below the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon, and select the Picture option from the drop-down list.
    3. Click the down arrow below the Paste button in the Home tab of the Ribbon, and select the Embed Workbook option from the drop-down list.
    4. Click the Object button in the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  2. Which of the following is true with respect to creating a linked chart image in a PowerPoint slide?

    1. The image will always reflect any changes that are made in the Excel workbook.
    2. You will not be able to run PowerPoint in slide show mode unless the Excel workbook is open.
    3. You must activate the image and click the Refresh Data button in the Design tab of the Ribbon to ensure any changes made in the Excel workbook are reflected in the image pasted into the PowerPoint slide.
    4. You must have the Excel workbook open in order for the image to be refreshed in the PowerPoint slide.

4.5 Chapter Assignments and Tests

To assess your understanding of the material covered in the chapter, please complete the following assignments.

Careers in Practice (Skills Review)

Fashion Industry Size Analysis (Comprehensive Review Part A)

Starter File: Chapter 4 CiP Exercise 1

Difficulty: Level 1 Easy

If you are contemplating a career in the fashion industry, you will likely be working with an apparel size analysis report. Understanding the most commonly purchased sizes is critical for any company in the fashion industry. For example, in the apparel manufacturing industry, you have to know how many units to manufacture in each size for a particular garment. In addition, you have to know the exact garment specifications for the sizes small, medium, large, and so on. If you are pursuing a career on the retail side of the fashion industry, your job may be a little more complicated. You have to know how many units of each size of a particular garment to ship to each store. There is nothing more devastating to a fashion company’s sales than luring customers into a store with a great-looking garment and not having their sizes available. The charts presented in this chapter can be valuable tools in analyzing size information for garments. This exercise uses the concept of the frequency distribution and frequency comparison to analyze demand by garment size for the knit tops department of an apparel manufacturing company. The information displayed on these charts can be used to establish the production plan for manufacturing the garments for this department. Begin this exercise by opening the file named Chapter 4 CiP Exercise 1.

  1. Highlight the range A4:A8 on the Size Analysis worksheet.
  2. Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and highlight the range C4:C8.
  3. Click the Column button in the Insert tab of the Ribbon. Select the 2-D Clustered Column format option from the drop-down list.
  4. Move the column chart to a new chart sheet by clicking the Move Chart button in the Design tab of the Ribbon. The sheet tab label should read Tops Size Chart.
  5. Remove the legend by clicking it once and pressing the DELETE key on your keyboard.
  6. Click the Chart Title button in the Layout tab of the Chart Tools section of the Ribbon. Select the Above Chart option from the drop-down list.
  7. Format the chart title by selecting Subtle Effect – Red, Accent 2 from the preset shape style formats in the Format tab of the Ribbon. Change the font style of the chart title to Arial and change the font size to 24 points.
  8. Click in the chart title and delete text. Type Knit Tops Unit Sales by Size.
  9. Click any of the bars in the plot area of the chart. Click the down arrow on the Shape Fill button in the Format tab of the Ribbon. Select the Tan, Background 2, Darker 25% color from the drop-down palette.
  10. Click the Data Labels button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon. Select the Inside End option from the drop-down list.
  11. Click any data label on the bars of the chart one time. Use the formatting commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon to change the font style to Arial, change the font size to 14 points, and bold the font.
  12. Use the formatting commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon to format the X and Y axes. Click anywhere on the axis to activate it. Then change the font style to Arial, change the font size to 14 points, and bold the font.
  13. Click anywhere on the plot area of the chart to activate it. Click and drag down the top center sizing handle approximately one inch. There should be about one inch of space between the bottom of the chart title and the top of the plot area.
  14. Click the Text Box button in the Insert tab of the Ribbon. Starting from the far upper left side of the chart area, approximately one-half inch below the top, click and drag a box that is approximately two and a half inches wide and one-half inch high.
  15. Format the text box using the commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Change the font style to Arial, change the font size to 12 points, and select the bold and italics commands.
  16. Type the following in the text box: Based on 2010 Unit Sales.
  17. Click cell G4 on the Size Analysis worksheet.
  18. Click the Column button in the Insert tab of the Ribbon and select the 3-D Clustered Column format from the drop-down list.
  19. Move the chart so the upper left corner is in the center of cell G2.
  20. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column G, the right side is locked to the right side of Column N, the top is locked to the top of Row 2, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 18.
  21. Click the Select Data button in the Design tab of the Ribbon.
  22. Click the Add button on the Select Data Source dialog box.
  23. Type Knit Tops in the Series name input box. Then press the TAB key on your keyboard, highlight the range C4:C8, and click the OK button on the Edit Series dialog box.
  24. Click the Add button again on the Select Data Source dialog box.
  25. Type the word Company in the Series name input box. Then press the TAB key on your keyboard, highlight the range E4:E8, and click the OK button on the Edit Series dialog box.
  26. Click the Edit button on the right side of the Select Data Source dialog box.
  27. Highlight the range A4:A8 and click the OK button on the Axis Labels dialog box. Then click the OK button on the Select Data Source dialog box.
  28. Add a chart title above the plot area of the chart. The title should state the following: Size Comparison 2010 Unit Sales. Select the Underline command in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  29. Add a title to the Y axis. Select the Rotated Title format from the drop-down list under the Primary Vertical Axis Title option in the Axis Titles button on the Layout tab of the Ribbon. The title should state: Percent of Total Unit Sales. Change the font size of the title to 12 points and select the Underline command in the Home tab of the Ribbon.
  30. Click anywhere on the Y axis to activate it. Then click the Format Selection button in the Layout tab of the Ribbon.
  31. Click the Number option on the left side of the Format Axis dialog box. Click in the Decimal Places input box and change the value to zero. Then click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Axis dialog box.
  32. Use the formatting commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon to format the X and Y axes. Click anywhere on the axis to activate it. Then change the font size to 12 points and bold the font.
  33. Click and drag the legend so the top border of the legend aligns with the top line of the chart plot area. Use the formatting commands in the Home tab of the Ribbon to increase the font size of the legend to 12 points and select the bold and italics commands.
  34. Click anywhere on the plot area to activate it. Then click the down arrow on the Shape Fill button in the Format tab of the Ribbon. Select the Tan, Background 2, Darker 10% option from the color palette.
  35. Click any of the bars representing the Knit Tops data series. Then click the down arrow on the Shape Fill button in the Format tab of the Ribbon. Select the Olive Green, Accent 3, Lighter 40% option from the color palette.
  36. Save the workbook by adding your name in front of the current workbook name (i.e., “your name Chapter 4 CiP Exercise 1”).
  37. Close the workbook and Excel.

Figure 4.64 Completed 2-D Column Chart CiP Exercise 1

Figure 4.65 Completed 3-D Column Chart CiP Exercise 1

Careers in Practice (Skills Review)

Fashion Retail Markdown Analysis (Comprehensive Review Part B)

Starter File: Chapter 4 CiP Exercise 1 (Continued from Comprehensive Review Part A)

Difficulty: Level 2 Moderate

The following exercise continues the fashion industry theme that was presented in part A of this exercise. In this exercise, we focus on the retail side of the fashion industry. Markdowns are a critical component for operating a successful fashion retail business. When an item is marked down, the price is reduced by a certain amount with the expectation that it will increase the number of units sold. This is also known as putting an item on sale. You have probably seen, and perhaps taken advantage of, these sales during a visit to your local mall. A surplus of inventory can present considerable losses for a fashion retailer. Therefore, the timing and the amount of discount taken on an item is critical in managing the inventory for these companies. The increase in the number of units sold will depend on the size of the discount offered on a particular item. The scatter chart demonstrated in this chapter is a valuable tool in analyzing the rate at which unit sales increase when discounts are offered on an item. Begin this exercise by opening the file named Chapter 4 CiP Exercise 1 or continue with this file if you completed Comprehensive Review Part A.

  1. Click cell E2 on the Markdown Analysis worksheet.
  2. Click the Scatter button on the Insert tab of the Ribbon. Select the Scatter with Smooth Lines and Markers format option.
  3. Move the chart so the upper left corner is in the center of cell E2.
  4. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column E, the right side is locked to the right side of Column M, the top is locked to the top of Row 2, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 18.
  5. Click the Select Data button in the Design tab of the Ribbon. Then click the Add button on the Select Data Source dialog box.
  6. Complete the inputs for the Edit Series dialog box as follows:

    • Series Name: Markdowns and Unit Sales
    • Series X Values: A3:A17
    • Series Y Values: C3:C17
  7. Click the OK button on the Edit Series and Select Data Source dialog boxes.
  8. Remove the legend from the chart.
  9. Click anywhere on the Y axis to activate it. Click the Format Selection button in the Format tab of the Ribbon.
  10. Change the scale of the Y axis so the minimum value is set to 100 units. Then click the Close button at the bottom of the Format Axis dialog box.
  11. Change the scale of the X axis so the maximum value is set to 70%.
  12. Format the X and Y axes to an Arial font style, bold, and font size of 12 points.
  13. Add an X axis title that reads Discount Applied to Original Price. Format the title with the Subtle Effect – Blue, Accent 1 preset shape style. Change the font style to Arial, bold, italics, and font size of 12 points.
  14. Add a Y axis title that reads Weekly Unit Sales. Use the Rotated Title alignment. Format the title with the Subtle Effect – Blue, Accent 1 preset shape style. Change the font style to Arial, bold, italics, and font size of 12 points.
  15. Format the chart title with the Subtle Effect – Blue, Accent 1 preset shape style. Change the font style to Arial and change the font size to 16 points.
  16. Change the color of the chart area to Tan, Background 2, Darker 25%. Notice that when a discount is offered up to 20% off the original price, there is very little change in the number of units sold. This is typical in the fashion industry. If customers are not willing to pay full price for a particular style or color, it usually takes a substantial discount to convince them to buy.
  17. Save the workbook.
  18. Close the workbook and Excel.

Figure 4.66 Completed Scatter Chart CiP Exercise 1

Careers in Practice (Skills Review)

Personal Spending and Savings Plan

Starter File: Chapter 4 CiP Exercise 2

Difficulty: Level 2 Moderate

Excel can be a valuable tool for constructing a personal budget. As mentioned in Chapter 2 “Mathematical Computations”, developing a personal budget is an important exercise for establishing a path to financial security. One of the benefits of developing and maintaining a personal budget is that it allows you to maintain a healthy level of savings. Money that you save can be used to buy personal items. However, it can also be used to sustain your everyday expenses in the event you lose a job or source of income. Without a reasonable level of savings, you may be forced to borrow money, which could come at very high interest expenses in the form of credit cards. Once you accumulate large debt balances at high interest rates, it can take years to pay off that debt, and the interest expense that you pay reduces savings for more important purposes such as college or retirement. What most people do not realize is that even what appears to be the most trivial overage in spending can rapidly eliminate any savings and quickly turn into debt. The purpose of this exercise is to use the charts in this chapter to evaluate a personal expense plan and to analyze the relationship that spending and net income have on your ability to save money. Begin this exercise by opening the file named Chapter 4 CiP Exercise 2.

  1. Create a pie chart using the data in the Expense Plan worksheet. The chart should show the percent of total for the categories in the range A3:A10 based on the Annual Spend values in the range D3:D10. Use the Exploded Pie in 3-D format.
  2. Move the pie chart to a separate chart sheet. The tab name for the chart sheet should read Expense Chart.
  3. Remove the legend from the chart.
  4. Edit the title of the chart to read Personal Expenses. Format the chart title with an Arial font style, bold, italics, and font size of 20 points.
  5. Add data labels to each section of the pie chart. Show only the category name and the percentage. Format the percentage to show one decimal place.
  6. Format the data labels with an Arial font style, bold, and font size of 14 points. Notice that the mortgage and tax categories make up over 50% of total expenses.
  7. Enter a formula into cell D4 on the Savings worksheet. Your formula should add to the savings balance in cell D2 the result of subtracting the spending value in cell C4 from the net income value in cell B4.
  8. Enter a formula into cell D5 on the Savings worksheet. Your formula should add to the output in cell D4 the result of subtracting the spending value in cell C5 from the net income value in cell B5. Copy this formula and paste it into the range D6:D15 using the Paste Formulas command.
  9. Create a line chart using the data in the Savings worksheet. The chart should show the months in the range A4:A15 along the X axis. The Y axis should show the dollar amounts in the range B4:D15. There should be three data series displayed on the chart: Net Income, Spending, and Savings. Use the Line with Markers format option.
  10. Move the chart so the upper left corner is in the center of cell F3.
  11. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column F, the right side is locked to the right side of Column O, the top is locked to the top of Row 3, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 18.
  12. Add a chart title above the plot area that reads Savings Analysis. Format the title with the Subtle Effect – Red, Accent 2 preset shape style. Then change the font style to Arial, bold, and italics.
  13. Add a title to the Y axis that reads After Tax Dollars. Use the Rotated Title alignment option. Format the title with the Subtle Effect – Red, Accent 2 preset shape style. Then, change the font style to Arial and change the font size to 12 points. Move the title if needed so it is on the far left of the chart area and centered along the Y axis.
  14. Format the X and Y axes by changing the font style to Arial, making the font bold, and changing the font size to 12 points.
  15. Change the scale of the Y axis so the minimum value is set to −500.
  16. Move the legend up so it is aligned with the $4,500 line of the plot area. Expand the width of the legend so it extends to the far right side of the chart area. Then format the legend by changing the font style to Arial and making the font bold.
  17. Change the color of the chart area to White, Background 1, Darker 15%, which is a shade of gray.
  18. Add an annotation that begins approximately one inch above the Dec label on the X axis. The annotation should extend approximately one and one-quarter inches wide and approximately one-quarter inch in height. The annotation should read Debt Incurred. Format the annotation by changing the font style to Arial, bold, italics, and font size of 12 points.
  19. Save the workbook by adding your name in front of the current workbook name (i.e., “your name Chapter 4 CiP Exercise 2”).
  20. Close the workbook and Excel.

Figure 4.67 Completed Pie Chart CiP Exercise 2

Figure 4.68 Completed Line Chart CiP Exercise 2

Integrity Check

Starter File: Chapter 4 IC Exercise 3

Difficulty: Level 3 Difficult

The purpose of this exercise is to analyze a worksheet to determine if there are any integrity flaws. Read the following scenario, then open the Excel workbook related to this exercise. You will find a worksheet in the workbook named AnswerSheet. This worksheet is to be used for any written responses required for this exercise.

Scenario

You are working as the director of investment research for a small wealth management firm. Your firm helps people make investment decisions and establish plans for key life events such as saving for college, retirement, and so on. An intern who is working for the firm is evaluating the profit trends for two companies: Big Company and Goode Company. He sends you an Excel workbook and explains the following with respect to his analysis:

  • I put a chart together to compare the earnings for the two companies. There is really nothing to look at. Big Company’s profits are so much larger than those for the Goode Company. Based on this chart, I don’t see how we would advise our clients to invest in the Goode Company. We should probably stick with the Big Company.
  • Just so you know, the profit numbers on the chart are in thousands. Otherwise, it is a pretty straightforward column chart. I put the profits the companies earned for each quarter on the Y axis and the quarters are shown on the X axis.

Assignment

  1. How many points of data is the analyst using on the chart? Does it make sense to use a column chart for this analysis? If not, what would be a better choice? Place your answer in the AnswerSheet worksheet.
  2. Look at the profit values for the two companies. Does it make sense to compare these values? If not, explain why and what alternatives you could pursue. Place your answer in the AnswerSheet worksheet.
  3. The analyst mentioned that the profit numbers are in terms of thousands. Would this be apparent by looking at the chart? If not, why? Place your answer in the AnswerSheet worksheet.
  4. Looking at the X axis of the column chart, you will see that the quarters keep repeating 1 through 4 for each year in Column A. Can anything be done to show the year that each set of four quarters represents? Place your answer in the AnswerSheet worksheet.
  5. Move the chart created by the analyst to a separate chart sheet and label the sheet tab Analyst’s Chart. Make any necessary modifications to the Profit Analysis worksheet to create a chart that presents an appropriate comparison between the Big Company and the Goode Company. Create a new chart comparing the profits of the Big Company and the Goode Company. Pay careful attention to formatting details.
  6. Do you agree with the analyst’s conclusion that the firm should advise clients to invest in the Big Company over the Goode Company? Place your answer in the AnswerSheet worksheet.

Applying Excel Skills

Hotel Occupancy and Cleaning Expenses

Starter File: Chapter 4 AES Assignment 1

Difficulty: Level 3 Difficult

The purpose of this exercise is to analyze the activity and cost data for a hotel using a scatter chart. The data provided in the Hotel Costs worksheet can be used to establish a trendline on a scatter chart. The equation for the trendline can then be used to determine what the hotel may incur with regard to cleaning costs at different levels of occupancy. This is an alternative to the High Low method presented in Chapter 2 “Mathematical Computations”. Your assignment is to create the scatter chart and construct a formula that can be used for planning cleaning costs at different levels of occupancy based on the following requirements:

  1. Columns B and C in the Hotel Costs worksheet contain occupancy and cleaning cost data for 12 months. Create a scatter chart that shows just the plot points (Scatter with only Markers) for the occupancy and cleaning costs for each month on this worksheet. The chart should be embedded in the Hotel Costs worksheet and should include the appropriate formatting techniques covered in this chapter.
  2. Adjust the scale of the X and Y axes so the minimum value is 2000.
  3. Add a linear trendline to the chart and show the equation.
  4. Use the trendline equation to enter a formula in cell C19 that calculates the estimated cleaning costs based on the occupancy level that is typed into cell C18.

Quality Control Analysis

Starter File: Chapter 4 AES Assignment 2

Difficulty: Level 3 Difficult

The purpose of this exercise is to analyze how cost changes in the operations of a quality control department impact the overall cost of quality for a manufacturing company. The Quality Control worksheet contains two years of cost data for four components of a quality control department: prevention, inspection, internal failure, and external failure. You will see that total quality costs decreased from year 1 to year 2. Create a chart that you believe is most appropriate to present the change in costs from one year to the next. The requirements are as follows:

  1. The chart should show which components are increasing or decreasing from year 1 to year 2. In addition, the dollar value for each component should appear on the chart for each year.
  2. The total quality control costs for each year should be specified on the chart.
  3. The chart should appear in a separate chart sheet.
  4. You should include appropriate formatting techniques covered in this chapter.

Chapter Skills Test

Starter File: Chapter 4 Skills Test

Difficulty: Level 2 Moderate

Answer the following questions by executing the skills on the starter file required for this test. Answer each question in the order in which it appears. If you do not know the answer, skip to the next question. Open the starter file listed above before you begin this test.

  1. Create a pie chart using the data in the Market Share worksheet. The pie chart should show the percent of total for only the year 2000. Use the Exploded Pie in 3-D format.
  2. Move the chart so the upper left corner is in the center of cell E2.
  3. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column E, the right side is locked to the right side of Column M, the top is locked to the top of Row 2, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 17.
  4. Remove the legend.
  5. Change the chart title to the following: Market Share for the Year 2000.
  6. Add the Category Name and Percentage data labels to the outside end of each section of the pie chart.
  7. Bold the data labels and change the font style to Arial.
  8. Create a 100% stacked column chart using the data in the Market Share worksheet. The stacked column chart should show the percentages 0% to 100% along the Y axis. The X axis should show stacks for the year 2000 and 2010. There should only be two stacks, or columns, in the plot area showing the percent of total for each company.
  9. Move the 100% stacked column chart to a separate chart sheet. The tab name for the chart sheet should read Market Share Chart.
  10. Remove the legend on the stacked column chart and add a data table with legend keys below the X axis.
  11. Add a title above the chart that reads 10-Year Change in Market Share.
  12. Format the chart title using the Subtle Effect – Red, Accent 2 preset shape style. Change the font style to Arial and the font size to 20 points.
  13. Add a Y axis title that reads Market Share. Use the Rotated Title alignment.
  14. Format the Y axis title using the Subtle Effect – Red, Accent 2 preset shape style. Change the font style to Arial and the font size to 16 points.
  15. Format the X and Y axes by changing the font style to Arial, making the font bold, and changing the font size to 14 points.
  16. Change the fill color of the chart area to Tan, Background 2, Darker 10%.
  17. Add series lines that connect each section of the two stacks in the plot area.
  18. Create a column chart showing just the Company Sales in the Sales Data worksheet. The chart should show the Company Sales in the range B3:B13 along the Y axis. The years in the range A3:A13 should appear on the X axis. Use the basic 2-D Clustered Column format. The series name should be Gross Sales.
  19. Move the column chart to a separate chart sheet. The tab name for the chart sheet should read Company Sales Chart.
  20. Remove the legend on the column chart. Then format the X and Y axes by changing the font style to Arial, making the font bold, and changing the font size to 16 points.
  21. Reduce the height of the plot area by approximately one inch. There should be about one inch of space between the bottom of the chart title and the top of the plot area.
  22. Add an annotation above the Y axis that reads Sales in Millions. Format the annotation with an Arial font style, bold font, italics font, and font size of 14 points.
  23. Change the color of the bars in the plot area to dark red.
  24. Create a line chart comparing the change in sales for the company and overall industry in the Sales Data worksheet. Construct the chart as follows:

    • The Y axis should show the growth percentages for the company in the range C3:C13 and the growth percentages for the industry in the range E3:E13.
    • The series name for the company growth percentages should be Company.
    • The series name for the industry growth percentages should be Industry.
    • The years in the range A3:A13 should appear on the X axis.
    • Use the Line with Markers format.
  25. Move the chart so the upper left corner is in the center of cell G2.
  26. Resize the chart so the left side is locked to the left side of Column G, the right side is locked to the right side of Column P, the top is locked to the top of Row 2, and the bottom is locked to the bottom of Row 18.
  27. Adjust the scale of the Y axis so the maximum value is set to .20.
  28. Format the values on the Y axis so there are zero decimal places.
  29. Save the workbook by adding your name in front of the current workbook name (i.e., “your name Chapter 4 Skills Test”).
  30. Close the workbook and Excel.